ADC Network Card Release 31 User Manual
Issue 1  
February 2001  
Cellworx STN  
Release 3.1 GUI Users Manual  
1152700 Rev A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Issue 1  
February 2001  
N
Release 3.1 GUI Users Manual  
1152700 Rev A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
COPYRIGHT  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
All Rights Reserved  
Printed in the U.S.A.  
REVISION HISTORY  
ISSUE  
DATE  
REASON FOR CHANGE  
Issue 1 02/2001 Phase 3.1 release features added, (622 CRS)  
TRADEMARK INFORMATION  
ADC and ADC Telecommunications are registered trademarks of ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Cellworx is a trademark of ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY  
Contents herein are current as of the date of publication. ADC reserves the right to change the contents without prior  
notice. In no event shall ADC be liable for any damages resulting from loss of data, loss of use, or loss of profits  
and ADC further disclaims any and all liability for indirect, incidental, special, consequential or other similar  
damages. This disclaimer of liability applies to all products, publications and services during and after the  
warranty period.  
This publication may be verified at any time by contacting ADC’s Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891,  
extension 54878 (in U.S.A. or Canada) or 1-972-680-4878 (outside U.S.A. and Canada), or by writing to ADC  
Telecommunications, Inc., Attn: Technical Assistance Center, Mail Station #77, P.O. Box 1101, Minneapolis, MN  
55440-1101, U.S.A.  
ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
P.O. Box 1101, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55440-1101  
In U.S.A. and Canada: 1-800-366-3891  
Outside U.S.A. and Canada: (952) 938-8080  
Fax: (952) 946-3292  
Page ii  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Content  
Page  
PREFACE  
ABOUT THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................................ VII  
REVISION HISTORY LIST ............................................................................................................................ VII  
LIST OF CHANGES.................................................................................................................................... VII  
TRADEMARK INFORMATION........................................................................................................................ VII  
RELATED PUBLICATIONS............................................................................................................................ VII  
ADMONISHMENTS.................................................................................................................................... VII  
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................................................................................................. VIII  
FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT .....................................................................................................................IX  
DOC COMPLIANCE.....................................................................................................................................IX  
FDA COMPLIANCE .....................................................................................................................................IX  
SAFETY COMPLIANCE ................................................................................................................................IX  
NEBS COMPLIANCE ...................................................................................................................................IX  
ISO 9000 COMPLIANCE...............................................................................................................................IX  
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................X  
LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...................................................................................................... XII  
SECTION 1  
INTRODUCTION  
Content  
Page  
1. GENERAL........................................................................................................................................... 1-1  
2. USER INTERFACES............................................................................................................................... 1-2  
A.  
B.  
C.  
NMIC RS232 Interface........................................................................................................... 1-3  
NMIC EIM RJ45 Ethernet Interface............................................................................................ 1-3  
NMIC Serial Equipment Port ................................................................................................... 1-4  
3. CELLWORX STN SYSTEM SOFTWARE ........................................................................................................ 1-4  
A.  
NMIC Graphical User Interface (GUI)......................................................................................... 1-4  
GUI Screen Icon Definitions ....................................................................................... 1-5  
GUI Menu Structure and Utilization .............................................................................. 1-8  
X-Terminal Keyboard Functions..................................................................................1-11  
Manipulating the GUI Network Layout on an X-Terminal Screen ..........................................1-12  
4. REMOTE MANAGEMENT CAPABILITIES......................................................................................................1-12  
A.  
Real Time Alarm and trap Screens.....................................................................................................1-13  
Page iii  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
SECTION 2  
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE  
Content  
Page  
1. GENERAL........................................................................................................................................... 2-1  
2. USING A TOP DOCUMENT....................................................................................................................... 2-1  
ALPHABETICAL TASK INDEX LIST ................................................................................................................ 2-3  
INDEXED TASK LIST ...........................................................................................................................IXL-001  
TURN UP A NEW CELLWORX STN RING NETWORK .....................................................................................NTP-002  
ADD A CELLWORX STN NODE TO AN IN SERVICE RING NETWORK...................................................................NTP-003  
ADD A SECOND NETWORK ELEMENT TO AN IN SERVICE STAND-ALONE TERMINAL  
TO CREATE A RING NETWORK .....................................................................................................NTP-004  
TURN UP (PROVISION) CELLWORX STN EXPANSION SHELVES.......................................................................NTP-005  
PROVISION NODE PARAMETERS ...........................................................................................................NTP-006  
DISPLAYING STATUS AND ALARMS........................................................................................................NTP-007  
RETRIEVE PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS..................................................................................NTP-008  
ADDING SERVICES TO A CELLWORX STN NODE.........................................................................................NTP-009  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN NODE...........................................................................................................NTP-010  
CONDUCT ACCEPTANCE TESTS ON CELLWORX STN NODE............................................................................NTP-011  
PERFORM ROUTINE AND NON-ROUTINE MAINTENANCE...............................................................................NTP-012  
PROVISION ATM VP AND VC CONNECTIONS..............................................................................................NTP-013  
MONITORING THE NETWORK................................................................................................................NTP-014  
ADMINISTRATIVRE TASKS...................................................................................................................NTP-015  
CELLWORX UPGRADE PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................NTP-016  
POWER UP A CELLWORX STN NODE.......................................................................................................DLP-700  
CONNECT FIBERS TO OPTICAL CARDS ....................................................................................................DLP-701  
CONNECT VT1OO TO NMIC RS-232 PORT AND MODIFY NMIC IP ADDRESS ........................................................DLP-702  
LOGON TO REMOTE NODE CRAFT SESSION VIA TELNET FROM GUI ................................................................DLP-703  
CONNECT NMS OR X-TERMINAL TO THE NMIC EIM SNMP/GUI PORT ...............................................................DLP-704  
LAUNCH THE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) ......................................................................................DLP-705  
PERFORM DISCOVERY ON A NEW CELLWORX STN RING NETWORK ...............................................................DLP-706  
TIME AND DATE................................................................................................................................DLP-707  
CREATE A N ATM OR CES CONNECTION...................................................................................................DLP-708  
CONFIGURE OR DELETE A TRAFFIC CONTRACT..........................................................................................DLP-709  
VIEW CONNECTIONS ..........................................................................................................................DLP-710  
LOG OFF OF CELLWORX STN GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE..........................................................................DLP-711  
ADD EXPANSION NODES (STN-EPS)........................................................................................................DLP-712  
DISPLAY NETWORK ALARM SUMMARY...................................................................................................DLP-713  
CONFIGURE SERVICE PROVIDER PROFILE................................................................................................DLP-714  
VIEW RING RESOURCE USAGE..............................................................................................................DLP-715  
VIEW FIBER BANDWIDTH USAGE...........................................................................................................DLP-716  
CONFIGURE NE ALARM THRESHOLD ......................................................................................................DLP-717  
REFRESH TOPOLOGY .........................................................................................................................DLP-718  
FORCE NETWORK DISCOVERY ..............................................................................................................DLP-719  
SOFTWARE SELECTION.......................................................................................................................DLP-720  
(continued)  
Page iv  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
SECTION 2  
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, CONTINUED  
Find Your Job in the List Below  
Then Go To  
ABOUT NE.......................................................................................................................................DLP-721  
NMIC SYSTEM FILE REPLICATION..........................................................................................................DLP-722  
CHANGE CONFIGURATION/TEST ON AN EXISTING CONNECTION ....................................................................DLP-723  
NMIC PROTECTION............................................................................................................................DLP-724  
NMIC PROTECTION RESTORATION.........................................................................................................DLP-725  
SET / RETRIEVE OPTICAL PORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS .......................................................DLP-726  
SET / RETRIEVE T3 TMUX PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS...............................................................DLP-727  
SET / RETRIEVE T3 CRS PORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS .........................................................DLP-728  
SET / RETRIEVE T1/E1 MULTI 1 CRS PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS ................................................DLP-729  
RETRIEVE NETWORK DATA COLLECTION (NDC) STATISTICS..........................................................................DLP-730  
RING UPGRADE PROCEDURE................................................................................................................DLP-731  
SET / RETRIEVE FT1 FRS PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS ...............................................................DLP-732  
SET / RETRIEVE FE1 FRS PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS ...............................................................DLP-733  
SOFTWARE FALLBACK........................................................................................................................DLP-734  
HELP ...........................................................................................................................................DLP-735  
REVERT TO SAVED ICON LAYOUT ..........................................................................................................DLP-736  
ADD A RING NETWORK ELEMENT ..........................................................................................................DLP-737  
ADD A SECOND NETWORK ELEMENT ......................................................................................................DLP-738  
DELETE CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................................................DLP-739  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN SHELF..........................................................................................................DLP-740  
RETRIEVE LOGS FROM THE NMIC VIA FTP ...............................................................................................DLP-741  
RETRIEVE COMPRESSED LOGS FROM THE NMIC VIA FTP.............................................................................DLP-742  
REFLASH BOOT IMAGE .......................................................................................................................DLP-744  
SYSTEM DATABASE ACCESS ................................................................................................................DLP-745  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN EXPANSION SHELF (EPS)...................................................................................DLP-746  
SET E1 MULTI 1 CARD CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................DLP-747  
SET SC CARD CONFIGURATION (IP ADDRESS, CRAFT INTERFACE)..................................................................DLP-748  
SET SHELF TIMING RESOURCE .............................................................................................................DLP-749  
SET SHELF HOUSEKEEPING ALARM CONFIGURATION..................................................................................DLP-750  
SET 622 RING CARD CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................................DLP-751  
SET 155 SM/MM CRS CARD CONFIGURATION ...........................................................................................DLP-752  
SET T3 CRS CARD CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................DLP-753  
SET T3 TMUX MULTI 1 AND TMUX EXP CONFIGURATION..............................................................................DLP-754  
SET T1 MULTI 1 CARD CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................DLP-755  
SET 155 RING INTERFACE CARD CONFIGURATION......................................................................................DLP-758  
SET 2488 RING INTERFACE CARD CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................DLP-756  
RETRIEVE SC CARD STATUS.................................................................................................................DLP-757  
RETRIEVE 622 RIC STATUS..................................................................................................................DLP-759  
RETRIEVE 155 CRS STATUS .................................................................................................................DLP-760  
RETRIEVE T3 CRS CARD STATUS...........................................................................................................DLP-761  
RETRIEVE T3 TMUX MULTI 1 CARD STATUS .............................................................................................DLP-762  
Page v  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
SECTION 2  
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, CONTINUED  
Find Your Job in the List Below  
Then Go To  
RETRIEVE 155 RING INTERFACE CARD STATUS .........................................................................................DLP-763  
RETRIEVE T1 MULTI 1 CARD STATUS......................................................................................................DLP-764  
CONFIGURE CARD PROTECTION GROUPS ................................................................................................DLP-765  
PERFORM DIAGNOSTICS ON OPTICAL CARDS ...........................................................................................DLP-766  
SET SYSTEM IDENTIFIER ....................................................................................................................DLP-767  
SET CRAFT USER CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................DLP-768  
SET CRAFT MENU CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................DLP-769  
HARDWARE INVENTORY .....................................................................................................................DLP-770  
INITIATE A PROTECTION SWITCH...........................................................................................................DLP-771  
LOOPBACK TEST ...............................................................................................................................DLP-772  
CARD AND SHELF RESET.....................................................................................................................DLP-773  
VIEWING AND EDITING THE NMIC IP ADDRESS..........................................................................................DLP-774  
ADD OR EDIT AN SNMP TRAP HOST ON THE NMIC......................................................................................DLP-775  
ALARM CUT-OFF (ACO) ......................................................................................................................DLP-776  
REMOVE AND/OR REPLACE CELLWORX CARDS .........................................................................................DLP-777  
ENDING A GUI SESSION FOLLOWING AN ABNORMAL SESSION ENDING............................................................DLP-778  
RETRIEVE 2488 RING INTERFACE CARD STATUS........................................................................................DLP-779  
PHASE 2.0 TO 3.0 SOFTWARE UPGRADE PROCEDURE.................................................................................DLP-780  
REMOVING A NMIC CARD FROM THE SHELF.............................................................................................DLP-781  
FTP DATABASE FILES OFF OF NMIC .......................................................................................................DLP-782  
ADD/DELETE GUI USERS OR CHANGE GUI USER LEVEL SECURITY ..................................................................DLP-783  
SET FE1 FRS CARD CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................DLP-784  
SET FT1 FRS CARD CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................DLP-785  
CREATE A FRAME RELAY CONNECTION ...................................................................................................DLP-786  
CREATE AN ATM MULTICAST CONNECTION ..............................................................................................DLP-787  
RETRIEVE FT1 FRS CARD STATUS .........................................................................................................DLP-788  
RETRIEVE FE1 FRS CARD STATUS .........................................................................................................DLP-789  
CREATING AN ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST CONNECTION. .........................................................................DLP-790  
ADD A LEAF ENDPOINT TO AN IN-SERVICE CONNECTION..............................................................................DLP-791  
SET T3 CES CARD CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................DLP-792  
RETRIEVE T3 CES CARD STATUS. ..........................................................................................................DLP-793  
SET / RETRIEVE T3 CES PORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS. ........................................................DLP-794  
PHASE 3.0 TO 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE PROCEDURE.................................................................................DLP-795  
RETRIEVE 622 CRS STATUS .................................................................................................................DLP-796  
SET 622 SM CRS CARD CONFIGURATION.................................................................................................DLP-797  
SOFTWARE FALLBACK FROM RELEASE 3.1 TO RELEASE 3.0 .........................................................................DLP-798  
TROUBLE ANALYSIS PROCEDURE..........................................................................................................TAP-100  
Page vi  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
SECTION 3  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
Content  
Page  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
WARRANTY/SOFTWARE................................................................................................................... 3-1  
REPAIR/EXCHANGE POLICY............................................................................................................... 3-1  
REPAIR CHARGES .......................................................................................................................... 3-2  
REPLACEMENT/SPARE PRODUCTS...................................................................................................... 3-2  
RETURNED MATERIAL..................................................................................................................... 3-2  
SYSTEM INTEGRATION SERVICES....................................................................................................... 3-3  
CUSTOMER SUPPORT SERVICES........................................................................................................ 3-3  
Page vii  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
ABOUT THIS MANUAL  
This manual provides the system administrator with information necessary to turn up and test the  
Cellworx Service Transport Node (STN), and/or services, as well as configure connections and monitor  
the network using the CellworxVision Graphical User interface (GUI). Information provided within this  
document deals primarily with the Phase 3.1 design features of the Cellworx STN system.  
Trademark Information  
The following trademarks are documented in this manual:  
ADC and ADC Telecommunications are registered trademarks of ADC Telecommunications Inc.  
Cellworx is a registered trademark of ADC Telecommunications Inc.  
Open View is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard.  
SRTS – Synchronous Residual Time Stamp is a patent of Bell Communications Research, Nov 9, 1993  
Related Publications  
Listed below are all of the related manuals and their publication numbers. Copies of these publications can  
be ordered by contacting the ADC Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891 extension 63434 (in  
U.S.A. or Canada) or 612-946-3434 (outside U.S.A. and Canada).  
Title/Description  
Part Number  
Application and Engineering Guide 3.1  
1152699  
Contains an introduction to the ADC Cellworx STN system, hardware and software  
descriptions, applications, and engineering information required for system deployment.  
Craft User’s Manual 3.1  
1152703  
1152712  
1112344  
Contains information required for provisioning, operation, and administration of the  
Cellworx STN system through the craft access. Information includes detecting and isolating  
alarms, and turn up of features over the entire network.  
System Description Manual 3.1  
Combines information from the Users Manual, Installation Manual, and Applications  
Engineering Manual to provide introductory information and a general overview of the  
Cellworx STN system.  
Cellworx CLEI Code Guide  
Lists all CLEI codes used to order Cellworx equipment.  
Page viii  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
Admonishments  
Important safety admonishments are used throughout this manual to warn of possible hazards  
to persons or equipment. An admonishment identifies a possible hazard and then explains what  
may happen if the hazard is not avoided. The admonishments — in the form of Dangers,  
Warnings, and Cautions — must be followed at all times. These warnings are flagged by use of  
the triangular alert icon (seen below), and are listed in descending order of severity of injury or  
damage and likelihood of occurrence.  
Danger: Danger is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will cause severe personal  
injury, death, or substantial property damage if the hazard is not avoided.  
Warning: Warning is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that can cause severe personal  
injury, death, or substantial property damage if the hazard is not avoided.  
Caution: Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor  
personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided.  
General Safety Precautions  
Danger: Do not look into the ends of optical fibers. Exposure to invisible LASER radiation may  
cause serious retinal damage or even blindness. Verify the optical source is disabled through  
the use of an optical power meter before handling optical fibers.  
Caution: Use caution when routing wires and cables. Avoid severe bending and routing over  
sharp edges. Use grommet material when possible to avoid wear on cable insulation.  
Caution: Allow sufficient fiber length to permit routing without severe bends. Fibers may be  
permanently damaged, or signal degradation may be experienced if fibers are bent or curved to  
a radius of less than 1.5 inches (3.81 cm).  
Caution: Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Before handling any modules  
connect your wrist to an equipment ground using an approved anti-static wrist strap. Ensure  
that all uninstalled modules are stored in anti-static packing material. When working with  
modules, always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti-static mat.  
Caution: Using excessive force when seating cards and modules into the backplane may result  
in physical or severe electrical damage to the backplane pins or module connectors, and if  
power is applied, may result in serious electrical damage to both the modules or the backplane  
Page ix  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT  
Class A  
The Cellworx STN System complies with the requirements for class A digital device per Part  
15 of the FCC Rules.  
Warning: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A  
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a  
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential  
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct  
the interference at his own expense.  
DOC Compliance  
This equipment does not exceed Class A limits for radio emission for digital apparatus, set out  
in the radio interference regulation of the authorization methods of Industry Canada.  
Operation in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to TV and radio reception  
requiring the owner or operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the  
interference.  
FDA Compliance  
This product uses a Class 1 LASER according to FDA Rules. This product conforms to all  
applicable standards of 21 CFR 1040.  
Safety Compliance  
UL listed for use in the U.S. and Canada.  
IEC 950 (1991) Second Edition with Amdts. No. 1 (1992), 2 (1993), 3 (1995), and 4 (1996)  
EN60950 (1992) with Amdts. No. 1 (1993), 2 (1993), 3 (1995, 4 (1997), and No.11 (1997); and  
with National Differences as specified in the CB Test Report 99RT07840-121698.  
The Cellworx STN system complies with EN 55022:1995, IEC 801-2:1991, IEC 801-3:1984  
and draft IEC 801-3-1990, and IEC 801-4:1988.  
The Cellworx STN system complies to all the applicable EC directives of the European Union  
and is CE marked.  
NEBS Compliance  
The Cellworx STN system is fully NEBS compliant.  
Page x  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
ISO9000 Compliance  
ADC Telecommunications Inc. is ISO 9001 certified.  
STANDARDS  
The following listing is a bibliography of applicable documents:  
ANSI/IEEE Std 802.1D,1993 Edition.  
ANSI T1.403-1989, Carrier to Customer Installation: T1 Metallic Interface, February 22, 1989  
ATM UNI specification 3.1, ATM Forum  
Bellcore GR-253-CORE, Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems:  
Common Generic Criteria, Issue 2, 12/95  
Bellcore GR-1110-CORE,  
Bellcore GR-1113-CORE,  
Bellcore GR-1117-CORE,  
Bellcore GR-1244-CORE,  
Bellcore GR-1248-CORE,  
Bellcore GR-1400-CORE,  
Bellcore GR-20-CORE,  
Broadband Switching System Generic Requirements,  
Issue 1, 9/94, Revision 3, 4/96  
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) and ATM Adaptation  
Layer (AAL) Protocols, Bellcore.  
Generic Requirements for Exchange PVC CRS Customer  
Network Management Service, Bellcore.  
Clocks for the Synchronized Network: Common Generic  
Criteria, Bellcore.  
“Generic Requirements for Operations of ATM Network  
Elements (NEs),” Issue 3, 8/96  
SONET Dual-fed Unidirectional Path Switched Ring (UPSR)  
Equipment Generic Criteria, Bellcore.  
Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber and Optical Fiber Cable,  
Bellcore.  
Bellcore GR-253-CORE,  
Bellcore GR-2837-CORE,  
SONET Transport Systems: Common Criteria, Bellcore.  
“ATM Virtual Path Functionality in SONET Rings—Generic  
Criteria,” Issue 2, 12/95  
Bellcore GR-2842-CORE,  
“ATM Service Access Multiplexer (SAM) Generic  
Requirements,” Issue 1, 11/94  
Bellcore GR-2848-CORE,  
Bellcore GR-436-CORE,  
Bellcore TR-TSY-000496,  
Broadband Multi-service UNI Generic Requirements, Bellcore.  
Digital Network Synchronization Plan, Bellcore.  
Issue 2, September 1989, Supplement 1, September 1991  
Page xi  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
The ATM Forum  
ATM User-Network Interface (UNI), Specification, Version 3.1  
ITU  
I.350  
ITU  
I.371  
ITU  
I.610  
Bellcore  
ITU  
ITU  
ITU  
ITU  
TA-1230  
M.3010  
M.3020  
M.3100  
M.3180  
NFOEC,  
Volume 2 1995, pg 445. “A Comparative Analysis of 2 Fiber and  
4 Fiber Bi Directional Line Switched Rings.”  
NFOEC,  
Volume 3 1995, pg 885. “SONET Operations Networking; The  
Key to the Future.”  
RFC-1406,  
Definitions for Managed Objects for the T1 and E1 Interface  
Types, IETF.  
RFC-1407,  
Definitions for Managed Objects for the T3 and E3 Interface  
Types, IETF.  
TA-NWT-000487,  
TA-TSV-1408,  
TA-TSV-1409,  
TR-NWT-000063,  
TR-NWT-000078,  
TR-NWT-000468,  
Generic Requirements for Electronic Equipment Cabinets,  
Bellcore.  
Generic Requirements for Exchange PVC Cell Relay Service,  
Bellcore.  
Generic Requirements for Exchange Access PVC Cell Relay  
Service, Bellcore.  
Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Generic  
Equipment Requirements, Bellcore.  
Generic Physical Design Requirements for Telecommunications  
Products and Equipment, Bellcore.  
Reliability Assurance Practices for Optoelectronic Devices in  
Central Office Applications, Bellcore.  
TR-NWT-000496,  
TR-NWT-000499,  
SONET ADM Equipment Generic Criteria, Bellcore.  
Transport Systems Generic Requirements (TSGR): Common  
Requirements, Bellcore.  
TR-NWT-000815,  
TR-NWT-000930,  
TA-NWT-000983,  
TR-NWT-001112,  
OTGR Section 2.3: Network Element and Network System  
Security, Bellcore.  
Generic Requirements for Hybrid Microelectronics Used in  
Telecommunications Equipment, Bellcore.  
Reliability Assurance Practices for Optoelectronic Devices in  
Loop Applications, Bellcore.  
Broadband-ISDN User to Network and Network Node Interface  
Physical Layer Generic Criteria, Bellcore.  
Page xii  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
TR-TSV-000772,  
TR-TSV-001369,  
TR-TSV-001370,  
Generic System Requirements in Support of Switched Multi-  
Megabit Data Service, Bellcore.  
Generic Requirements for Frame Relay PVC Exchange Service,  
Bellcore.  
Generic Requirements for Exchange Access Frame Relay PVC  
Service, Bellcore.  
TR-TSY-000454,  
Supplier Documentation for Network Elements, Bellcore.  
List of Acronyms and Abbreviations  
The acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual are detailed in the following list:  
155 CRS  
155 RIC  
622 RIC  
2488 RIC  
Dual port Optical Carrier card providing Cell Relay Service in a  
concatenated payload at a data rate of 155Mbps  
Optical Carrier Ring Interface Card providing cell relay service in a  
concatenated payload at a data rate of 155Mbps  
Optical Carrier Ring Interface Card providing cell relay service in a  
concatenated payload at a data rate of 622Mbps  
Optical Carrier Ring Interface Card providing cell relay service in a  
concatenated payload at a data rate of 2488Mbps  
Available Bit Rate  
ABR  
ADM  
AIC  
Add / Drop Multiplexer  
Access Interface Card  
AIS  
Alarm Indication Signal  
APS  
Automatic Protection Switching  
Asynchronous Transfer Mode  
Broadband Inter-Exchange Carrier Interface  
Bits Per Second  
ATM  
B-ICI  
BPS  
CAC  
CBR  
CDV  
CDVT  
CES  
Connection Admission Control  
Constant Bit Rate  
Cell Delay Variation  
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance  
Circuit Emulation Service  
CIR  
Committed Information Rate  
CO  
Central Office  
CPE  
CRS  
Customer Premise Equipment  
Cell Relay Service  
CTD  
DCC  
E1 TMUX Multi 1  
EIM  
Cell Transfer Delay  
Data Communications Channel  
A 16 E1 port card that converts digital signals into ATM streams  
Electrical Interface Module  
EPS  
Expansion Shelf  
ESF  
Extended Superframe  
FRS  
Frame Relay Service  
FTP  
File Transfer Protocol  
GNE  
GUI  
Gateway Network Element  
Graphical User Interface  
IP  
Internet Protocol  
Page xiii  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
LAN  
LEC  
Local Area Network  
Local Exchange Carrier  
LTE  
Line Terminating Equipment  
millisecond  
Network Data Collection  
msec  
NDC  
NE  
Network Element  
NIC  
Network Interface Card  
NMIC  
NMS  
NNI  
Network Management Interface Card  
Network Management System  
Network to Network Interface  
Network Parameter Control  
NPC  
OAM&P  
OS  
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning  
Operations System  
PCR  
Peak Cell Rate  
PEIM  
PTE  
Protection EIM  
Path Terminating Equipment  
PVC  
Permanent Virtual Circuit  
QoS  
Quality of Service  
RIC  
Ring Interface Card  
SAM  
SC  
Service Access Multiplexer  
Shelf Controller card  
SCR  
Sustained Cell Rate  
SDH  
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy  
Shelf ExPansion Interface Card  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
Synchronous Optical NETwork  
Synchronous Payload Envelope  
Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (patent 5260978 Bell Comm. Research)  
Synchronous Transport Mode  
Service Transport Node  
SEPIC  
SNMP  
SONET  
SPE  
SRTS  
STM  
STN  
STS  
STS-3c  
SVC  
Synchronous Transport Signal  
Concatenated STS-3 signal (one payload)  
Switched Virtual Circuit  
T1  
Digital Signal Level 1  
T1 TMUX Multi 1  
T3  
A 16 DS1 port card that converts digital signals into ATM streams  
Digital Signal Level 3  
T3 CES  
Three port Digital Subscriber line card providing Circuit Emulation  
Service at a data rate of 45Mbps  
Three port Digital Subscriber line card providing Cell Relay Service at a  
data rate of 45Mbps  
T3 CRS  
T3 TMUX Multi 1  
TC  
A single DS3 port line card providing individual DS1 channel multiplexing  
Transmission Convergence  
TCA  
TDM  
TEIM  
TFTP  
TID  
Threshold Crossing Alert  
Time Division Multiplexer  
Terminating Electrical Interface Module  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol  
Target Identifier  
TMN  
Telecommunication Management Network  
Page xiv  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Preface  
UBR  
UNI  
UPC  
UPSR  
UVPSR  
VC  
Unspecified Bit Rate  
User Network Interface  
Usage Parameter Control  
Unidirectional Path Switch Ring  
Unidirectional Virtual Path Switch Ring  
Virtual Channel  
VCC  
VP  
Virtual Channel Connection  
Virtual Path  
VPC  
VT  
Virtual Path Connection  
Virtual Tributary  
W/P  
Working/Protect  
Page xv  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 1 Introduction  
SECTION 1  
INTRODUCTION  
CONTENT..........................................................................................................................PAGE  
1. GENERAL ...........................................................................................................................1  
2.USER INTERFACES.................................................................................................................2  
A.NMIC RS232 Interface........................................................................................................3  
B.NMIC EIM RJ45 Ethernet Interface.........................................................................................3  
C.NMIC Serial Equipment Port ................................................................................................4  
3.CELLWORX STN SYSTEM SOFTWARE..........................................................................................4  
A.NMIC Graphical User Interface (GUI)......................................................................................4  
GUI Screen Icon Definitions......................................................................................5  
GUI Menu Structure and Utilization.............................................................................8  
X-Terminal Keyboard Functions............................................................................... 12  
Manipulating the GUI Network Layout on an X-Terminal Screen........................................ 12  
4. REMOTE MANAGEMENT CAPABILITIES ..................................................................................... 13  
A.Real Time Alarm and trap Screens ...................................................................................... 14  
1. GENERAL  
This section provides information on the Cellworx Service Transport Node’s (STN)  
Graphical User interface (GUI) and alarm monitoring capabilities. Information in  
this document relates to the Release 3.1 design features of the Cellworx STN  
system. Future revisions of this document will cover added features and  
enhancements to the system and/or software.  
The Cellworx STN system has been designed to accelerate the migration of  
networks to support broadband services. It is an Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM)  
utilizing Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) technologies to support access and  
delivery of emerging and legacy services. Through the use of simple transport  
provisioning, the Cellworx STN enables broadband services on an ATM backbone  
to coexist within the TDM infrastructure. A single platform is used to both deploy  
new services to thousands of customers, and provide significant bandwidth savings  
in existing networks. At the same time, it provides the utility and survivability that  
service providers have come to expect from true Telecom-oriented SONET  
products.  
The Cellworx STN shelf is shown in Figure 1-1. It is available in a 19-inch or a 23-  
inch rack mount shelf that has specific card slot assignments for the Ring Interface  
Cards (RICs), Network Management Interface Cards (NMICs), and Shelf  
Controller cards (SCs). The intent of specific slot locations is to maximize bus  
performance and the number of working and protect pairs. The Cellworx STN can  
be used as a collocated or remote Expansion node utilizing 622, 155 or T3 CRS  
cards as links to a ring node to provide subscriber fan out or remote access  
capabilities to a ring. Certain card slots are keyed to prevent the installation of  
wrong card types into those slots. The remainder of the slots can accept any Access  
Interface Card (AIC) provided the proper Electrical Interface Module (EIM) is  
installed at the rear of the shelf for that AIC service type.  
Page 1-1  
© 2000 ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 1 Introduction  
UPPER HEAT BAFFLE/  
FIBER MANAGEMENT TRAY  
SHELF  
ALARM  
INDICATOR  
ESD GROUND JACK  
DOOR  
LATCH  
DOOR  
HINGES  
LOWER AIR INTAKE/  
CABLE ROUTING TRAY  
10479-C  
Figure 1-1. Cellworx STN Shelf  
2. USER INTERFACES  
The Network Management Interface Controller (NMIC) shown in Figure 1-2  
provides a common ring and element management system platform where all  
aspects of network management are performed. The NMIC houses the operating  
system and application software for each node and card to provide Fault,  
Configuration, Performance, and Security management functions based on TMN  
principles at the Element Management Layer.  
Page 1-2  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • September 2000 • Section 1 Introduction  
A. NMIC RS232 Interface  
The NMIC provides an asynchronous RS-232 port for character based access  
provided through a DB9 connector located under the front hinged faceplate. This  
port is used to load the operating system information and IP addresses at initial  
network turn up.  
JA7  
IC  
M
N
P5  
P1  
A
GND  
B
E11  
GND  
U2  
J6  
RJ45 ETHERNET  
CONNECTION  
Status  
Active  
J2  
Craft  
Acce  
ss  
Enab  
le  
9 PIN D-SUB EXTERNAL  
EQUIPMENT PORT  
GM  
S
Cra  
ft  
Rese  
t
RS232 PORT  
1173  
10490-A  
J1  
Figure 1-2. NMIC Craft Port Identification  
Figure 1-3. NMIC EIM Port Identifications  
B. NMIC EIM RJ45 Ethernet Interface  
An external Network Management System (NMS) and/or X-Terminal connection is  
provided through an RJ45 10 Base-T Ethernet connection on either NMIC  
Electrical Interface Module (NMIC EIM) in slot 2 or 4 at the rear of the shelf.  
Refer to Figure 1-3. This connection is available only in the Gateway Network  
Element (GNE) located at a Central Office or controlled environment (0-50° C)  
location. It provides access to the GUI software screens for all management  
Page 1-3  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 1 Introduction  
functions, or SNMP access for Sets, Gets, Traps etc. Up to five GUI sessions may  
be launched at a time. An X-Terminal may remain active while the GUI is launched  
on another terminal. A user establishes a Telnet session to the NMIC to launch the  
GUI. The NMIC can maintain the Telnet session after the GUI is exited, or  
maintain the GUI functionality after the user terminates the Telnet session, but  
once both the Telnet session is terminated and the GUI is exited, the Telnet session  
must be re-established.  
NMICs support 1:1 protection and provide independent Ethernet connections. Each  
NMIC has a unique IP address and a shared IP address, requiring the administrator  
to provision each of them on the X-Terminal. If the administrator cannot connect  
using the shared IP address (NMICs are unobtainable or a no response message is  
generated from a remote Telnet session connection attempt), the administrator can  
reattempt the Telnet session utilizing either the working or the protection NMIC IP  
addresses.  
C. NMIC Serial Equipment Port  
A serial port is provided on the NMIC EIM that can be used for modem access or  
other types of serial equipment. This port will provide the same system access as  
the Ethernet port. It has jumpers that enable the user to strap the port for DTE or  
DCE depending on the serial device connected to it.  
3. CELLWORX STN SYSTEM SOFTWARE  
A. NMIC Graphical User Interface (GUI)  
The Cellworx NMIC GUI interface provides a simple, consistent means of  
interaction through menu, mouse, and keyboard driven software configuration  
options. It is an executable program residing on the NMIC that a user gains access  
to through an X-Terminal window from the shell command prompt. The GUI  
retrieves data for the user initiated events via SNMP to the Application Core or by  
accessing the information stored on its hard disk.  
Once connected to the NMIC and logged on to the network, a full network view  
encompassing each node in the network is displayed on the screen. An example is  
shown in Figure 1-4. An arrangement of icons representing Cellworx STN nodes  
reflect the network configuration (if configured) and are color-coded indicating the  
current alarm state of each node. Table 1-1 describes the color codes of the icons.  
The NE containing the NMICs is referred to as the Gateway Network Element  
(GNE) and can be determined at a glance from the yellow text underneath it. All  
other nodes will have white text.  
The fiber connections shown between the nodes will appear green if there are no  
fiber fragment failures. They will turn orange in the event of a fiber fragment  
failure indicating a major alarm condition on the link between nodes.  
Page 1-4  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • September 2000 • Section 1 Introduction  
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
GNE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 21:35 GMT Time: 21:35  
10924-D  
Figure 1-4. Network Manager Main Screen  
Table 1-1. GUI Cellworx STN Node Icon Color Codes  
COLOR  
Green  
Yellow  
Orange  
Red  
INDICATION  
No existing alarms, normal operation.  
Minor alarms exist at this site.  
Major alarms exist at this site.  
Critical alarms exist at this site.  
Cannot communicate with the site.  
Blue  
GUI Screen Icon Definitions  
Larger icons are used to represent the Cellworx STN shelves that have Secondary  
nodes (expansion shelves called STN-EPS) connected to them. These icons are  
referred to as Primary nodes and will look the same whether there are 2 or 10 STN-  
EPS nodes connected to them. Refer to Figure 1-5. The Secondary nodes may be  
collocated or reside at remote sites. When a user selects a node, it is highlighted by  
a white square that surrounds it. By double clicking on one of these nodes with the  
left mouse button, a new window is displayed reflecting the interconnecting  
relationship between the Primary and Secondary nodes. It is at this point that the  
user can determine the number of nodes involved. Refer to Figure 1-6. The Primary  
node now appears as a normal size ICON and the ring network interconnections are  
not displayed. To return to the ring network view, the operator clicks on the Cancel  
button at the bottom of the window.  
Page 1-5  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 1 Introduction  
ICON FOR NE-2 INDICATES  
THE PRESENCE OF STN-EPS  
SHELVES  
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
GNE-1  
STN  
STN  
STN  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 21:37 GMT Time: 21:37  
10926-D  
Figure 1-5. Example of Primary Node with Secondary Expansions  
X
Cellworx Vision:Physical Layouts for NE-2  
EPS-2  
NE-2  
EPS-1  
Cancel  
10960-B  
Figure 1-6. Primary Node Physical Layout to Secondary Nodes  
An Auto Discovery feature allows the NMIC to search for and display all nodes  
connected in the network during initial system turn-up. Main menu headings are  
displayed at the top of the screen (File, Configuration, Fault, Performance) and  
when selected will allow the user to perform all higher level functions such as  
system administration, establish end to end VP/VC connections, request  
performance reports, or display network alarm summaries.  
Page 1-6  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • September 2000 • Section 1 Introduction  
To access any node in the network, the administrator selects the direct selection  
arrow tool located on the left tool bar, and then double clicks on the NE ICON to  
open a shelf level GUI session. To start a craft session with the node, the user  
selects the node with a single click, right click to open the pop-up menu, and select  
Craft Interface. The administrator is required to enter a valid user name and  
password assigned for the node to gain access to the craft menus. The shelf level  
GUI is shown in Figure 1-7 below.  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
S
C
N
M
I
2
4
8
8
2
4
8
8
S
C
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
M
u
l
E
1
M
u
l
C
T
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
g
R
i
n
g
E
X
P
t
i
t
i
t
i
1
1
1
EQUIPPED CARD  
REPRESENTATIONS WITH  
ALARM INDICATIONS.  
CLICK ON BOXES AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS, CONFIGURATION OR  
CHASSIS VIEW.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18  
Status:  
Power Status: normal  
Identifier:  
Start Time:  
Vendor:  
Alarm Status: minor  
2
Version:  
Current Time: 10:12:09 09/01/1999  
Up Time: 1d 19:41:22:00  
1.2.0.35  
CHASSIS STATUS  
19:30:47 8/31/1999  
ADC-TSG  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN STATUSES OR  
SELECTIONS.  
Configuration:  
Cellworx2  
5th Street  
Name:  
Memory Utilization Threshold:  
Suppress Zero Stats  
CHASSIS  
CONFIGURATION  
Location:  
Apply  
Topology View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO GUI MAIN  
VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CHASSIS LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CHASSIS LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
GUI MAIN VIEW.  
13454-C  
Figure 1-7. Cellworx Shelf Level GUI Screen  
The user can now provision parameters on individual cards in the shelf. To bring up  
a card level GUI display, double click on the card displayed in the shelf level view  
or put the mouse pointer over the card and hit a right click to open a menu window  
for the card and select Open. The Card level view will appear similar to the  
example shown in Figure 1-8 below. Some functions available in this view are  
described in the figure.  
Page 1-7  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 1 Introduction  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - 622 Ring Interface Card  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Card: 622 Ring  
Slot Number: 17  
Port Number:  
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
622  
Ring  
Unlocked  
Ring Selection :  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL-TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
System  
Locked  
Unlocked  
Recieved  
ADC  
Do not use for synchronization  
Enable signal degrade  
Status  
Active  
Timing  
5
Signal Degrade BER Threshold: 10E-  
Medium Type:  
622 MBPS PORT LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Port  
1
SONET  
SDH  
Loopback towards:  
None  
Terminal  
Facility  
Line Coding:  
Line Type:  
sonetMediumNRZ  
sonetLongSingleMode  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13443-B  
Figure 1-8. Cellworx Vision Card Level View (622 Ring Interface Card example)  
GUI Menu Structure and Utilization  
There are three possible methods for performing configuration tasks using the GUI;  
1) utilizing the pull down menu trees, 2) mouse controlled popup menus, 3)  
keyboard operations. Refer to Figure 1-9 for examples.  
• Using the mouse, click the right button over the work area to display the  
popup menu and select desired task using the left mouse button. This may  
bring up another pop up menu, depending on the task.  
• Using the mouse, select a topic on the menu bar above the work area using the  
left mouse button. Select a task shown on the pull down menu using the left  
mouse button. This may bring up a pop up menu, depending on the task.  
• Using the keyboard, select “Alt” plus the underlined letter of a topic shown on  
the menu bar above the work area. This opens the pull down menu from the  
menu bar. Using the arrow keys on the keyboard, step up or down to the  
desired task and hit enter, or return, or right arrow. Other pop up menus may  
be generated depending on the task.  
Page 1-8  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • September 2000 • Section 1 Introduction  
SELECTING THE TOPIC USING THE LEFT MOUSE BUTTON,  
OR ALT PLUS THE UNDERLINED LETTER, OPENS THE PULL  
DOWN MENU LIST. SELECT OPTION USING LEFT MOUSE  
BUTTON OR DOWN ARROW FOLLOWED BY A RIGHT ARROW.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance Accounting Security  
Time and Date  
Help  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
CLICK THE RIGHT MOUSE  
OVER THE FIBER TO  
OPEN POP UP WINDOW.  
Software  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
NMIC Platform  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Fiber Bandwidth Usage...  
About...  
Craft Interface...  
NE-2  
Create Connection...  
SELECTING A NODE WITH LEFT  
MOUSE BUTTON AND THEN  
HITTING RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON  
OPENS THE NE POP UP MENU.  
View Connection...  
Configure Alarm Threshold...  
Configure Software...  
Reflash Boot Image  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 23:30 GMT Time: 23:30  
10921-F  
Figure 1-9. Cellworx STN GUI Display (sample)  
The pull down menus and pop-up window menu structures for the main GUI screen  
are shown in the menu tree in Figure 1-10. The pull down menus for the Shelf level  
GUI is shown in Figure 1-11.  
Page 1-9  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 1 Introduction  
GUI MAIN SCREEN  
FILE  
FAULT  
ALARMS  
CONFIGURATION  
PERFORMANCE  
MONITORING  
HELP  
TIME AND DATE  
ABSOLUTE  
RELATIVE  
SAVE ICON LAYOUT  
EXIT  
CONTACT  
ABOUT  
CONFIGURE NE ALARM THRESHOLD  
NMIC PROTECTION  
NMIC PROTECTION RESTORATION  
CONNECTION  
CREATE  
VIEW  
NE POP-UP WINDOW  
CONFIGURE TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
CONFIGURE SERVICE PROVIDER PROFILE  
VIEW RING RESOURCE USAGE  
ABOUT  
CRAFT INTERFACE  
VIEW FIBER BANDWIDTH USAGE  
CREATE CONNECTION  
VIEW CONNECTIONS  
TOPOLOGY  
ADD RING NETWORK ELEMENT  
CONFIGURE ALARM THRESHOLDS  
CONFIGURE SOFTWARE  
ADD EXPANSION SHELF NETWORK ELEMENT  
REMOVE RING NETWORK ELEMENT  
REFLASH BOOT IMAGE  
REMOVE EXPANSION SHELF NETWORK ELEMENT  
REFRESH  
FORCE NETWORK DISCOVERY  
REVERT TO SAVED ICON LAYOUT  
RING AUDIT  
PRIMARY NODE POP-UP WINDOW  
CREATE A CONNECTION  
VIEW CONNECTIONS  
RING UPGRADE  
TURN-UP RING  
CONFIGURE ALARM THRESHOLDS  
REFRESH NE  
SOFTWARE  
CONFIGURE NE  
FIBER LINK POP-UP WINDOW  
FIBER BANDWIDTH USAGE  
NMIC PLATFORM  
ADMINISTRATION  
FILE REPLICATION  
10922-F  
Figure 1-10. Cellworx Vision Pull Down Menus and Pop-up Window Trees  
SHELF LEVEL GUI MENU  
FILE  
SAVE  
EXIT  
FAULT  
CONFIGURATION  
SECURITY  
CONFIGURE HOUSEKEEPING ALARMS  
EXECUTE ALARM CUT-OFF  
HARDWARE INVENTORY  
PROTECTION GROUPS  
TIMING RESOURCE  
RESET SLOTS  
CRAFT USER CONGIURATION  
CRAFT MENU CONGIURATION  
13571-A  
Figure 1-11. Cellworx Shelf Level GUI Pull Down Menu Structure  
Just outside the workspace the tool bar displays icons placed horizontally and  
vertically. These Icons provide shortcuts to common tasks for the advanced user.  
The functions of these icons are described in Figure 1-12.  
Page 1-10  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • September 2000 • Section 1 Introduction  
PERFORMANCE  
MANAGEMENT  
VIEW ALL SUBNETWORK  
DATA  
CONNECTIONS...  
ALARM  
HISTORY  
DATA  
EXIT  
REFRESH  
TOPOLOGY  
CELLWORX VISION  
HELP SCREEN  
SAVE NE ICON LAYOUT  
SELECT MODE TOOL  
DRAG AND DROP TO  
CREATE A CONNECTION  
10940-B  
Figure 1-12. GUI Tool Bar Icon Definitions  
While performing tasks, a user may encounter message windows, confirmation  
windows, and informational windows. Each window can be distinguished by the  
icon to the left as shown in Figure 1-13.  
INFORMATIONAL WINDOW INDICATING A TASK HAS BEEN COMPLETED,  
OR INSTRUCTING THE USER TO ENTER INFORMATION. GENERALLY  
REQUIRES THE USER TO SELECT "OK".  
i
i
HOURGLASS INDICATES A TASK IS IN PROGRESS AFTER CHANGES  
TO THE SYSTEM HAVE BEEN SENT BY THE USER.  
ERROR MESSAGE INDICATES THAT THE TASK COULD NOT BE COMPLETED  
DUE TO LACK OF INFORMATION, HARDWARE, COMMUNICATION, ETC.  
QUESTION ICON INDICATES THAT THE USER MUST THINK AND MAKE  
A SELECTION BEFORE CONTINUING.  
?
WARNING MESSAGE INDICATING A POTENTIAL PROBLEM, GENERALLY  
REQUIRES THE USER TO SELECT "OK".  
!
!
10939-C  
Figure 1-13. Cellworx Vision Window Icon Definitions  
Page 1-11  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 1 Introduction  
X-Terminal Keyboard Functions  
All of the functions that can be performed through pop up menus using the mouse  
can also be performed via the menu bar at the top of the screen. The menu bar  
provides pull down menus under these options: File, Configuration, Fault, and  
Performance.  
The keyboard is used to select the menu bar items, navigate and select sub menu  
items, bring up the configuration or query screens, and when necessary, to enter  
alphanumeric information into the system. Keyboard operations for the GUI also  
make use of the arrow keys, enter or return key, tab key, space bar, and control key.  
The user must hit the Alt key along with the underlined letter of the menu item  
desired (ex. Alt + F selects the File menu tree).  
By entering the tab key, the operator moves the highlighted or underlined selection  
to the next menu item (ex. File to Configuration.) Hitting the enter or return key  
opens the menu item. The operator may now use the arrow keys to step down or up  
to the desired item selection. The right arrow will bring up a sub menu if one exists,  
indicated by the arrow pointing to the right beside the text in the menu list.  
Manipulating the GUI Network Layout on an X-Terminal Screen  
The user may redraw the layout of the network that is displayed by the GUI. This  
may be performed to set a group of nodes that are co-located apart from others, to  
place the nodes in a city or state map layout, or just to make use of more room on  
the screen itself. By selecting a node using the select mode tool and a single click  
and hold of the left mouse button, the operator can drag it to any area of the screen  
and then release the mouse button. The node is now planted in its new location on  
the screen and all of the connections stay intact (the operator cannot change the  
physical location or inter-connections between the nodes by moving an icon into  
another area of the software screen).  
Once the user has redrawn the GUI screen layout, the new screen configuration  
should be saved. This can be done through the menu bar under File: Save Icon  
Layout, or by single clicking on the floppy disk icon on the tool bar above the work  
area.  
Page 1-12  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • September 2000 • Section 1 Introduction  
4. REMOTE MANAGEMENT CAPABILITIES  
The X-Terminal used for operations and maintenance of the Cellworx STN  
network can be linked through existing customer Ethernet networks using TCP/IP  
over any transport layer (e.g. Frame Relay, ATM, Private Line, etc.) Refer to  
Figure 1-14 for an example.  
NETWORK SURVEILLANCE CENTER  
ROUTER  
EXISTING DEDICATED  
NETWORK FOR  
X TERMINAL  
MANAGEMENT TRAFFIC  
TCP/IP  
10 BASE T  
ETHERNET  
ROUTER  
GNE  
B
S
S
CELLWORX  
OC12C RING  
FR  
10504-B  
LOCAL CRAFT USER  
CENTRAL OFFICE  
Figure 1-14. Remote X-Terminal Operations  
The network operator can use any workstation with a standard X-Windows  
platform or a PC with X-Terminal emulation to remotely access the network,  
launch the GUI, and monitor or troubleshoot the Cellworx STN ring network. The  
operator can remotely connect to a node via Telnet session through the NMIC, and  
use craft menus to retrieve alarm and performance information. These functions are  
performed utilizing IP addresses set up for each node at turn up.  
Messaging between remote nodes and the GNE NMIC is performed by targeting  
the NE’s IP address. Many existing network components (BSS, ATM Switches,  
frame relay switches, and routers) can also be pulled up on the same X-Terminal  
for maintenance and troubleshooting capabilities.  
Page 1-13  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 1 Introduction  
A. Real-time Alarm and Trap Screens  
The Cellworx NMIC provides real time alarm monitoring capabilities to an  
External Management System (EMS) via SNMP traps through an Ethernet port on  
the NMIC EIM. This scheme supports remote retrieval of NMIC collected data for  
user manipulation and report creation via ftp using four simple file types. These  
files are comma, space, or tab delimited and cover the following categories of  
collected data: Alarm history, Accounting, PM data, and Network Data Collection.  
The NMIC serves as an ATM domain operations interface provided on a Cellworx  
STN shelf configured as a Gateway Network Element (GNE), generally located in  
the CO or manned site. The NMIC can process 1.6K TFTP (Trivial FTP)/FTP  
packets as well as 0.8Mbytes of data per second, serving as an FTP server for each  
of the NE Shelf Controllers (SCs). The alarm history from each of the NE SC traps  
is stored up to 24 hours for future queries. The NMIC sends an SNMP request to  
the destined NE based on legitimate SNMP requests received from the EMS, and  
discards all IP packets that are different from its IP address.  
The SNMP MIB for ring management is ATM Forum network view M4 based. The  
NE processes up to ten SNMP traps per second also.  
GR-1248, [213] is supported. The NMIC supports the user identification,  
authentication, system access control, resource access control, security log, and  
security administration requirements as stated in GR-1248 [213]. The administrator  
can configure the option of allowing the user to only perform SNMP get requests  
and receive SNMP traps.  
Page 1-14  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
SECTION 2  
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TOP  
Content  
Page  
1. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1  
2. USING A TOP DOCUMENT................................................................................................................................ 2-1  
ALPHABETICAL TASK INDEX LIST ......................................................................................................................... 2-3  
INSTALLATION TASK INDEX LIST.....................................................................................................................IXL-001  
1 GENERAL  
This section provides operation and maintenance procedures for the Cellworx Service Transport Node  
(STN) for the system administrator/operator.  
Operation and maintenance includes but is not limited to the following tasks:  
• Performing end to end signal tests to verify system operation.  
• Adding modules to an in-service chassis.  
• Configuring the modules for operation (S/W configuration and download).  
• Configuring the VP/VC traffic connections for operation.  
• Troubleshooting alarm conditions.  
• Using the GUI interface to check network and node statuses.  
• Performing card/traffic level switching for maintenance, troubleshooting, or testing  
purposes.  
2 USING A TOP DOCUMENT  
The procedures in this section are written in the Task Oriented Process (TOP) format. The TOP method of  
presenting information provides step by step instructions for the successful completion of the indicated  
task. To find the instructions for performing enclosure installation, module installation and initial turn up,  
and installation troubleshooting tasks, refer to Figure 2-1 for the flow chart of a TOPS document or  
proceed as follows:  
1. Find the task to be performed in the Indexed Task List (IXL-001), or the Alphabetical  
Task Index List.  
2. Locate the specified director level, detail level, or trouble clearing procedure. All  
procedures are in numerical order, regardless of type. The TOP procedures in this  
manual are of the following four types:  
a) Non-Trouble Clearing Procedure (NTP) − A director level procedure that lists  
normal work items to be performed that are not trouble clearing procedures.  
b) Trouble Analysis Procedure (TAP) − A director level procedure that provides step  
by step instructions to locate and fix problems.  
c) Detailed Level Procedure (DLP) − Detailed step by step instructions or procedures.  
Page 2-1  
© 2000 ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
d) Trouble Analysis Data (TAD) − A trouble clearing aid containing non-procedural  
data.  
3. Perform all the items in the director level procedure (NTP ‘or TAP) in the order listed  
unless sent to another director level procedure. When a director level procedure is  
finished, the task is completed. When more detailed information is required, the reader  
will be sent to a DLP. A DLP may also direct the reader to another DLP.  
Note: When a DLP is complete, return to the procedure that preceded the DLP.  
Note: When sent from one DLP to another DLP, in most instances it will not be necessary to go  
back to the first DLP after competing the second.  
4. In some procedures, it will be necessary to verify that certain responses have occurred. If the  
expected response is not observed, refer to the TAP. If additional data is required such as a  
schematic diagram, line drawing, tabulated data, maintenance philosophy, or trouble clearing  
strategy, the reader will be sent to a TAD.  
Find the task to be performed in either the Indexed Task List,  
or the Alphabetical Task List. These will refer to NTP, DLP,  
or TAP procedures.  
TAP?  
NTP?  
Locate the NTP, DLP, or TAP referred to in the Task Lists.  
DLP?  
REFERS TO  
REFERS  
ANOTHER  
DLP?  
TO DLP  
Perform detailed  
steps listed in a DLP  
until completed.  
Return to NTP if  
applicable.  
Perform each task  
listed in order in  
an NTP until  
Perform detailed  
steps listed in a DLP  
until completed,  
then return to previous  
procedure.  
completed.  
REFERS TO  
ANOTHER  
NTP?  
DONE?  
DONE?  
REFERS  
TO TAP?  
REFERS  
TO TAP?  
Trouble Analysis Procedure,  
located at the back of the section,  
referenced to by DLPs when  
expected responses are not  
observed. Perform each step in  
order to locate and fix troubles,  
then return to DLP if applicable.  
RETURN  
TO DLP  
REFERS  
TO TAP?  
REFERS  
TO TAP?  
Perform each task  
listed in order in  
an NTP until  
completed. In most  
cases, will not  
return to previous  
NTP.  
REFERS TO  
ANOTHER  
DLP?  
REFERS  
TO DLP  
Perform detailed  
steps listed in  
a DLP until completed.  
Return to NTP if  
applicable.  
Perform detailed  
steps listed in a DLP  
until completed,  
then return to previous  
procedure.  
DONE?  
DONE?  
Task Completed  
10556-C  
Figure 2-1. TOPS Document Flow Chart  
Page 2-2  
© 2000 ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
Page 1 of 3  
ALPHABETICAL TASK INDEX LIST  
Find Your Job in the List Below  
Then Go To  
ABOUT NE  
............................................................................DLP-721  
ADD A CELLWORX STN NODE TO AN IN-SERVICE RING NETWORK .........................................NTP-003  
ADD A SECOND NETWORK ELEMENT TO AN IN SERVICE STAND-ALONE TERMINAL NODE  
TO CREATE A RING NETWORK .......................................................NTP-004  
ADD/DELETE A LEAF ENDPOINT TO/FROM AN EXISTING MULTICAST CONNECTION .............................DLP-791  
ADD/DELETE GUI USERS OR CHANGE GUI USER LEVEL SECURITY .........................................DLP-783  
ADD EXPANSION SHELF (STN-EPS) ..............................................................DLP-712  
ADD A RING NETWORK ELEMENT ...............................................................DLP-737  
ADD A SECOND NETWORK ELEMENT .............................................................DLP-738  
ADD OR CHANGE AN SNMP TRAP HOST ON THE NMIC .................................................DLP-775  
ADDING SERVICES TO A CELLWORX STN NODE......................................................NTP-009  
ADMINISTRATIVE TASKS .....................................................................NTP-015  
ALARM CUT-OFF ..........................................................................DLP-776  
CARD RESET ............................................................................DLP-773  
CHANGE CONFIGURATION/TEST AN EXISTING CONNECTION .............................................DLP-723  
CONDUCT ACCEPTANCE TESTS ON CELLWORX STN NODE ..............................................NTP-011  
CONFIGURE CARD PROTECTION GROUPS..........................................................DLP-765  
CONFIGURE NE ALARM THRESHOLD .............................................................DLP-717  
CONFIGURE OR DELETE A TRAFFIC CONTRACT ......................................................DLP-709  
CONFIGURE SERVICE PROVIDER PROFILE .........................................................DLP-714  
CONNECT FIBERS TO OPTICAL CARDS ...........................................................DLP-701  
CONNECT NMS OR X-TERMINAL TO THE NMIC EIM SNMP/GUI PORT .......................................DLP-704  
CONNECT VT100 TO NMIC RS-232 PORT AND VERIFY NMIC IP ADDRESS ....................................DLP-702  
CREATE AN ATM OR CES CONNECTION ...........................................................DLP-708  
CREATE A FRAME RELAY CONNECTION ...........................................................DLP-786  
CREATE AN ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICASTING CONNECTION. ............................................DLP-790  
CREATE AN ATM MULTICAST CONNECTION.........................................................DLP-787  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN NODE ...............................................................NTP-010  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN NODE ...............................................................DLP-740  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN EXPANSION SHELF (EPS) ..................................................DLP-746  
DELETE CONNECTIONS ......................................................................DLP-739  
DISPLAY NETWORK ALARM SUMMARY ...........................................................DLP-713  
DISPLAYING STATUS AND ALARMS..............................................................NTP-007  
ENDING A GUI SESSION FOLLOWING AN ABNORMAL SESSION ENDING .....................................DLP-778  
FINDING AND CHANGING NMIC IP ADDRESS........................................................DLP-774  
FORCE NETWORK DISCOVERY .................................................................DLP-719  
FTP DATABASE FILES OFF OF NMIC..............................................................DLP-782  
HARDWARE INVENTORY .....................................................................DLP-770  
(continued)  
Page 2-3  
© 2000 ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
Page 2 of 3  
ALPHABETICAL TASK INDEX LIST, CONTINUED  
Find Your Job in the List Below, continued  
Then Go To  
HELP  
............................................................................DLP-735  
INITIATE A PROTECTION SWITCH ...............................................................DLP-771  
LAUNCH THE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) ....................................................DLP-705  
LOG OFF OF CELLWORX STN GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE .............................................DLP-711  
LOG ON TO REMOTE NODE CRAFT SESSION VIA TELNET FROM GUI ........................................DLP-703  
LOOPBACK TEST...........................................................................DLP-772  
MONITORING THE NETWORK ..................................................................NTP-014  
NMIC PROTECTION .........................................................................DLP-724  
NMIC PROTECTION RESTORATION ..............................................................DLP-725  
NMIC SYSTEM FILE REPLICATION ...............................................................DLP-722  
PERFORM DIAGNOSTICS ON OPTICAL CARDS .......................................................DLP-766  
PERFORM DISCOVERY ON A NEW CELLWORX STN RING NETWORK .......................................DLP-706  
PERFORM ROUTINE AND NON-ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ................................................NTP-012  
PHASE 3.0 TO 3.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE PROCEDURE .................................................DLP-795  
PROVISION ATM VP AND VC CONNECTIONS ........................................................NTP-013  
PROVISIONING NODE PARAMETERS .............................................................NTP-006  
REFLASH BOOT IMAGE ......................................................................DLP-744  
REFRESH TOPOLOGY .......................................................................DLP-718  
REMOVE AND/OR REPLACE CELLWORX CARDS......................................................DLP-777  
REMOVING A NMIC CARD FROM THE SHELF ........................................................DLP-781  
RETRIEVE 155 SM/MM CRS CARD STATUS .........................................................DLP-760  
RETRIEVE 622 SM CRS CARD STATUS ............................................................DLP-796  
RETRIEVE 155 RING INTERFACE CARD STATUS......................................................DLP-763  
RETRIEVE 622 RING INTERFACE CARD STATUS......................................................DLP-759  
RETRIEVE 2488 RING INTERFACE CARD STATUS .....................................................DLP-779  
RETRIEVE COMPRESSED LOGS FROM THE NMIC VIA FTP ...............................................DLP-742  
RETRIEVE FE1 FRS CARD STATUS...............................................................DLP-789  
RETRIEVE FT1 FRS CARD STATUS...............................................................DLP-788  
RETRIEVE LOGS FROM THE NMIC VIA FTP .........................................................DLP-741  
RETRIEVE NETWORK DATA COLLECTION (NDC) STATISTICS .............................................DLP-730  
RETRIEVE PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS VIA NMIC GUI ........................................NTP-008  
RETRIEVE SC CARD STATUS...................................................................DLP-757  
RETRIEVE T1 MULTI 1 CARD STATUS.............................................................DLP-764  
RETRIEVE T3 CES CARD STATUS. ...............................................................DLP-793  
RETRIEVE T3 CRS CARD STATUS ...............................................................DLP-761  
RETRIEVE T3 TMUX MULTI 1 CARD STATUS ........................................................DLP-762  
REVERT TO SAVED ICON LAYOUT ...............................................................DLP-736  
RING UPGRADE PROCEDURE ..................................................................DLP-731  
(continued)  
Page 2-4  
© 2000 ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
Page 3 of 3  
ALPHABETICAL TASK INDEX LIST, CONTINUED  
Find Your Job in the List Below, continued  
Then Go To  
SET 622 SM CRS CARD CONFIGURATION ..........................................................DLP-797  
SET 155 SM/MM CRS CARD CONFIGURATION .......................................................DLP-752  
SET 155 RING INTERFACE CARD CONFIGURATION....................................................DLP-758  
SET 622 RING INTERFACE CARD CONFIGURATION ...................................................DLP-751  
SET 2488 RING INTERFACE CARD CONFIGURATION ...................................................DLP-756  
SET CRAFT MENU CONFIGURATION..............................................................DLP-769  
SET CRAFT USER CONFIGURATION ..............................................................DLP-768  
SET E1 MULTI 1 CARD CONFIGURATION...........................................................DLP-747  
SET FE1 FRS CARD CONFIGURATION.............................................................DLP-784  
SET FT1 FRS CARD CONFIGURATION.............................................................DLP-785  
SET / RETRIEVE OPTICAL PORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS ...................................DLP-726  
SET / RETRIEVE T1/E1 MULTI 1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS ...................................DLP-729  
SET / RETRIEVE FT1 FRS PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS........................................DLP-732  
SET / RETRIEVE FE1 FRS PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS........................................DLP-733  
SET / RETRIEVE T3 CES PORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS. ....................................DLP-794  
SET / RETRIEVE T3 CRS PORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS ....................................DLP-728  
SET / RETRIEVE T3 TMUX PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS .......................................DLP-727  
SET SC CARD CONFIGURATION (IP ADDRESS, CRAFT INTERFACE) .........................................DLP-748  
SET SHELF HOUSEKEEPING ALARM CONFIGURATION..................................................DLP-750  
SET SHELF TIMING RESOURCE.................................................................DLP-749  
SET SYSTEM IDENTIFIER .....................................................................DLP-767  
SET T1 MULTI 1 CARD CONFIGURATION...........................................................DLP-755  
SET T3 CES CARD CONFIGURATION. .............................................................DLP-792  
SET T3 CRS CARD CONFIGURATION .............................................................DLP-753  
SET T3 TMUX MULTI 1 AND TMUX EXP CARD CONFIGURATION ...........................................DLP-754  
SOFTWARE FALLBACK FROM 3.1 TO 3.0 ..........................................................DLP-798  
SOFTWARE SELECTION .....................................................................DLP-720  
SYSTEM DATABASE ACCESS...................................................................DLP-745  
TIME AND DATE ...........................................................................DLP-707  
TROUBLE ANALYSIS PROCEDURE ...............................................................TAP-100  
TURN UP A NEW CELLWORX STN RING NETWORK ...................................................NTP-002  
TURN UP (PROVISION) CELLWORX STN EXPANSION SHELVES............................................NTP-005  
VIEW CONNECTIONS ........................................................................DLP-710  
VIEW FIBER BANDWIDTH USAGE ...............................................................DLP-716  
VIEW RING RESOURCE USAGE .................................................................DLP-715  
Page 2-5  
© 2000 ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
IXL-001  
Page 1 of 1  
INDEXED TASK LIST  
Find Your Job in the List Below  
Then Go To  
TURN UP A NEW CELLWORX STN RING NETWORK .......................................................................................NTP-002  
ADD A CELLWORX STN NODE TO AN IN-SERVICE RING NETWORK.............................................................NTP-003  
ADD A SECOND NETWORK ELEMENT TO AN IN-SERVICE STAND-ALONE TERMINAL  
TO CREATE A RING NETWORK ...................................................................................................................NTP-004  
TURN UP (PROVISION) CELLWORX STN EXPANSION SHELVES....................................................................NTP-005  
PROVISION NODE PARAMETERS ......................................................................................................................NTP-006  
DISPLAYING STATUS AND ALARMS .................................................................................................................NTP-007  
RETRIEVE PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS...................................................................................NTP-008  
ADDING SERVICES TO A CELLWORX STN NODE ............................................................................................NTP-009  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN NODE (RNE OR EPS)............................................................................................NTP-010  
CONDUCT ACCEPTANCE TESTS ON CELLWORX STN NODE.........................................................................NTP-011  
PERFORM ROUTINE OR NON-ROUTINE MAINTENANCE .................................................................................NTP-012  
CREATING CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................................................NTP-013  
MONITORING THE NETWORK.............................................................................................................................NTP-014  
ADMINISTRATIVE TASKS....................................................................................................................................NTP-015  
CELLWORX UPGRADE PROCEDURES ..............................................................................................................NTP-016  
Page 2-7  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-002  
Page 1 of 2  
TURN UP A NEW CELLWORX STN RING NETWORK  
Summary: This procedure covers initial ring network turn-up. Provisioning of the ring nodes  
and interfaces as well as adding STN-EPS shelves to the ring nodes is covered in other NTPs. All  
ring nodes should be powered on and fiber continuity established between them, completing the  
ring architecture (see Installation Guide) before attempting to perform this procedure. Ring  
network turn up is originated at the GNE (Gateway Network Element) containing the NMIC  
cards. The NMIC card(s) in the GNE contain the proper Operating System and software from the  
factory, which must be initialized and loaded from the hard drive. Once the GNE is initialized,  
and the other ring nodes are discovered, the NMIC cards can download the required software  
loads to the shelf controllers in the remote ring nodes.  
Note: If adding a new node to an existing ring network, go to NTP-003.  
Note: If adding a node to an in-service stand alone terminal or Service Access  
Multiplexer (SAM) to form a ring, go to NTP-004.  
Note: If adding expansion shelves to existing nodes, go to NTP-005.  
1. Verify NMICs are inserted.  
2. Verify all shelf controllers and AICs are installed and nodes are  
powered on. If not powered, perform power on procedures.  
DLP-700  
1152693  
3. Verify that the GNE node, ring nodes, expansion nodes, and/or  
SAM/DSLAM nodes are properly identified by the thumbwheel  
switch settings on the SC terminating EIM (TEIM) at the rear of  
the shelf in slot 18. Refer to the Phase 3.1 Cellworx Installation  
Manual listed in the preface of this document.  
Note: If the ID switches are reset then the SC must be hard reset using the Reset buttons  
under the front hinged panel.  
4. All RIC cards should have fibers connected with one ring in a  
clockwise direction, and the other in a counter-clockwise  
direction. If fibers are not installed, install per local practices  
and connect to optical cards.  
DLP-701  
5. Obtain the IP address of the NMIC. If the IP address is not set,  
connect a VT100 Terminal to the NMIC RS232 port and set the  
IP address for the GNE. Call the Customer Service number at  
the back of this manual if the address has already been set.  
DLP-702  
DLP-704  
6. Connect an Ethernet cable to the NMIC Ethernet port on the  
NMIC EIM (Electrical Interface Module) at the rear of the shelf.  
Note: The NMIC will boot and download slot 1 shelf controllers in each ring NE. The  
slot one SC in each node then downloads to each slot 18 SC.  
Page 2-8  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-002  
Page 2 of 2  
7. Launch the Cellworx Vision Graphical User Interface (GUI).  
8. After the GUI boots up, it will prompt the user to synchronize  
DLP-705  
the database. Choose the active NMIC’s database as the correct  
database to synchronize.  
9. Perform a discovery for a new Cellworx STN ring network.  
10. Set the Date and Time on the NMIC.  
DLP-706  
DLP-707  
DLP-767  
11. Set the System Identifier for each node.  
12. After all nodes are successfully discovered, configure them  
before adding any expansion shelves. Configuration may include  
timing configuration, locking ports to remove LOS alarms,  
configuring the max VC bits to greater than zero to allow VC  
connections for each port, etc.  
NTP-006  
DLP-718  
13. Refresh the GUI screen so the nodes will display the new names.  
14. Perform acceptance tests on the new nodes per local  
requirements.  
NTP-011  
NTP-005  
DLP-745  
15. Add expansion shelves to the ring nodes if equipped.  
16. Save the NMIC database.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-9  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-003  
Page 1 of 1  
ADD A CELLWORX STN NODE TO AN IN-SERVICE RING NETWORK  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to add a new Cellworx STN ring node to  
a ring network that has previously been configured and may currently be passing traffic. Due to  
the protection operation of the unidirectional path switched ring (UPSR) architecture, adding a  
new ring node to an in-service network can be accomplished without affecting traffic or  
performance. Before performing this procedure, the new shelves and hardware should be  
installed and powered on per the instructions provided in the Cellworx STN Installation Manual  
1152693. If adding a second node or multiple nodes to a standalone terminal to form a ring, you  
must first perform NTP-004. The procedure for adding a second network element to a stand-  
alone terminal or SAM is different from adding a new NE to an established ring network.  
1. Launch the Cellworx Vision GUI from the X-Terminal.  
DLP-705  
2. If an abnormal GUI session ending occurred from operator error,  
time out, or other unforeseen events, it might be necessary to  
free up the GUI and log back in.  
DLP-778  
3. Add the Cellworx STN shelves to the ring. The shelf ID  
switches should have been set during installation and recorded  
on the label provided inside the front door panel. Follow the  
detailed instructions carefully to ensure the traffic on the ring is  
not interrupted.  
DLP-737  
NTP-006  
DLP-718  
4. Configure the node parameters.  
5. Refresh the network topology (layout) on the GUI screen.  
6. Perform acceptance tests on the new nodes per local  
requirements.  
NTP-011  
NTP-005  
DLP-745  
7. Add expansion shelves to the new node(s) if equipped.  
8. Save NMIC database.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-10  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-004  
Page 1 of 1  
ADD A SECOND NETWORK ELEMENT TO AN IN-SERVICE STAND-ALONE  
TERMINAL TO CREATE A RING NETWORK  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to add a new Cellworx STN node to an  
in-service, Service Access Multiplexer (SAM) node or stand-alone terminal to create a two node  
ring. Only the second node in a network may be added using this procedure. If adding additional  
nodes (third, fourth, etc.) to a ring system, perform NTP-003.  
1. Verify the new node is powered on. If not, perform power on  
procedures at the location.  
DLP-700  
2. Verify the new node has the required RIC cards physically  
installed and fibers are connected. Refer to the Cellworx  
Installation manual listed in the preface of this document for  
card installation or use the fiber procedure to install fibers.  
DLP-701  
DLP-705  
3. Launch the Cellworx Vision GUI from the X-Terminal.  
4. If an abnormal GUI session ending occurred from operator error,  
time out, or other unforeseen events, it might be necessary to  
free up the GUI and log back in.  
DLP-778  
5. If adding a node to a SAM to form a ring, change the shelf type  
(from a 6 to a 1) to a ring node via the thumbwheel switch on  
the SC terminating EIM (TEIM). It can be located at the rear of  
the shelf in slot 18. Refer to the Phase 3.1 Cellworx Installation  
Manual listed in the preface of this document. Otherwise, go to  
step 7.  
1152693  
DLP-773  
6. Verify the RICs are installed in the SAM node and then perform  
a hard reset on the SCs so they will read the new shelf type. This  
will be traffic affecting.  
5. Add the Cellworx STN shelf to the standalone node. The shelf  
IDs of the new node should have been set during installation and  
recorded on the label provided on the inside of the front door  
panel.  
DLP-738  
NTP-006  
NTP-011  
NTP-005  
DLP-745  
6. Configure the node parameters.  
7. Perform acceptance tests on the new node.  
8. Add an expansion shelf to the new node if equipped.  
9. Save the NMIC database.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-11  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-005  
Page 1 of 2  
TURN UP (PROVISION) CELLWORX STN EXPANSION SHELVES  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to add a Cellworx STN expansion shelf  
(STN-EPS) to an in-service ring node or one that has just completed the initial discovery  
process.  
Note: Applications using the 19-inch chassis will show card slots 1 through 18 but only  
card slots 1 through 11 and 16 through 18 are programmable.  
Prerequisites to this procedure are:  
•
•
Ring node must be in-service and fibers correctly installed to the expansion shelf.  
Shelf ExPansion Interface Cards (SEPICs) cards must be installed and in-service in the  
ring node.  
•
•
Shelf ExPansion Interface Cards (SEPICs) must be installed in the expansion shelf.  
Expansion shelf must have shelf type set to 03 for expansion NE. This is accomplished  
by the thumbwheel switch on SC TEIM in slot 18 at the rear of the shelf and should have  
been set during shelf installation procedures. If shelf type is changed, SC card must be  
reset using the button under the front hinged faceplate. Refer to the Installation Manual  
1152693.  
1. Ensure there is not a Level 1 GUI user logged onto the system.  
If necessary, force the user session off using the following  
procedure:  
DLP-778  
DLP-705  
2. Launch the Cellworx Vision GUI from the X-Terminal.  
3. Double click on the icon representing the ring node that will  
have the expansion shelf (STN-EPS) added to it. This will open  
a shelf level GUI window for the node.  
4. Verify that the expansion shelf interfaces in the ring node are  
equipped and in-service. To do this, double click on each  
simulated interface card shown on the shelf level GUI display.  
Equipped, in-service cards should have a green status indication  
at the bottom of the faceplate on the display.  
5. If the expansion shelf interface cards are not installed, refer to  
the Cellworx STN Installation Manual for card installation  
procedures.  
1152693  
6. Verify the cards are configured as Shelf Expansion Interfaces  
for either of the following:  
155 SM/MM CRS cards  
622 SM CRS cards  
T3 CRS cards  
DLP-752  
DLP-797  
DLP-753  
Page 2-12  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-005  
Page 2 of 2  
Note: The shelf controller in slot 1 on the expansion shelf will begin to download. The  
shelf controller does not need to download completely before proceeding to the next  
step.  
7. If using a 1+1 protection configuration, create a bi-directional  
protection group at the ring NE for a working and protect pair  
hosting the expansion shelf, otherwise continue.  
DLP-765  
DLP-712  
8. Return to the GUI main screen by hitting Close on each window  
opened.  
9. Add the STN-EPS shelves to the system using the Cellworx  
Vision GUI.  
10. Change the system name and location to a unique value for the  
expansion shelf. At this point the user may also want to properly  
configure the various settings for the node. This may include  
timing configuration, locking ports to remove LOS alarms,  
configuring the max VC bits to greater than zero to allow VC  
connections for each port, etc.  
NTP-006  
DLP-765  
DLP-718  
NTP-011  
11. If using a 1+1 configuration, create a bi-directional protection  
group at the EPS for the working and protect shelf expansion  
interface cards linking to the ring NE, otherwise continue.  
12. Choose the update topology button on the GUI to refresh the  
screen. The NEs should display the new name of the expansion  
shelf.  
13. Repeat steps 3 through 12 for each STN-EPS shelf.  
14. Perform acceptance tests on the new nodes.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-13  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-006  
Page 1 of 5  
PROVISION NODE PARAMETERS  
Summary: This procedure outlines the steps required to assign operational and administrative  
parameters within each node such as Node ID, port addresses, card configurations, etc., using the  
shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI) available with Phase 3.1 software. This procedure is  
divided into the following headings:  
A. Shelf Parameters  
B. Card Configurations  
C. Card Performance Monitoring Parameters  
Pre-requisites to this procedure are:  
•
•
User must be logged into the system and have GUI launched  
Node to be provisioned must be Discovered and visible to the GUI  
Note: In a 19-inch shelf, slot 12 through 15 will always show up as “grayed out” and the  
last three slots will always be treated as slots 16, 17, and 18 even though there are  
physically only 14 slots available.  
A. SHELF PARAMETERS  
1. From the GUI main window, double click on the node to be  
provisioned using the left mouse button. This will launch a  
session with the node producing a chassis view similar to the  
one shown in Figure 006-1.  
Page 2-14  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-006  
Page 2 of 5  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
S
C
N
M
I
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
1
5
5
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
M
u
l
E
1
M
u
l
C
T
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
g
R
i
n
g
S
M
E
X
P
t
i
t
i
t
i
C
R
S
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18  
Status:  
Power Status: normal  
Alarm Status: minor  
2
Identifier:  
Start Time:  
Vendor:  
Version:  
Current Time: 10:12:09 09/01/1999  
Up Time: 1d 19:41:22:00  
1.2.0.35  
19:30:47 8/31/1999  
ADC-TSG  
Configuration:  
Cellworx2  
5th Street  
Name:  
Memory Utilization Threshold:  
Suppress Zero Stats  
Location:  
Apply  
Topology View  
Refresh  
Close  
13455-B  
Figure 006-1. Shelf Level GUI Display  
2. If not already set, enter the NE system identifier by typing a  
node Name under the Configuration section of the window. A  
name may consist of up to 20 alphanumeric characters.  
3. Enter the address of the node in the Location field. After  
entering information, send to database by clicking on the Apply  
button at the bottom of the window.  
4. Set the SC card configurations (Serial port/ IP address.)  
5. Select a timing resource for the NE via the shelf level GUI.  
6. Set the shelf housekeeping alarm configuration.  
DLP-748  
DLP-749  
DLP-750  
Page 2-15  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-006  
Page 3 of 5  
B. CARD CONFIGURATIONS  
7. Card configuration screens may be accessed from the shelf level  
GUI Chassis View window by double clicking on the card  
desired. Select a card and refer to the following card level GUI  
procedures to set the configuration options for that specific card  
type:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set the E1 Multi 1 card configuration options.  
Set the 622 RIC card configuration options.  
Set the 155 SM/MM CRS (OC3) card configuration options.  
Set the 622 SM CRS (OC12) card configuration options.  
Set the T3 CRS card configuration options.  
Set the T3 TMUX MULTI 1 configuration options.  
Set the T1/E1 MULTI 1 card configuration options.  
Set the 2488 RIC card configuration options.  
Set the 155 RIC configuration options.  
DLP-747  
DLP-751  
DLP-752  
DLP-797  
DLP-753  
DLP-754  
DLP-755  
DLP-756  
DLP-758  
DLP-784  
DLP-785  
DLP-792  
Set the FE1 FRS card configuration options.  
Set the FT1 FRS card configuration options.  
Set the T3 CES card configuration options.  
8. Configure card protection groups, if applicable, for each access  
interface card type.  
DLP-765  
9. Verify that the required cards show that they are equipped and  
in-service by observing the shelf level GUI screen. Any cards  
not provisioned for service will show up as “grayed out”. If any  
required cards are grayed out, return to the correct procedure  
outlined in Step 7 of this NTP, otherwise “Close” the chassis  
view and continue with step 10.  
Note: In a 19-inch shelf, slot 12 through 15 will always show up as “grayed out” and the  
last three slots will always be treated as slots 16, 17, and 18 even though there are  
physically only 14 slots available.  
10. Set the alarm level threshold for the shelf.  
DLP-717  
11. Repeat this procedure for each shelf in the ring.  
Page 2-16  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-006  
Page 4 of 5  
C. PERFORMANCE MONITORING PARAMETERS  
1. From the GUI main screen, select the Performance pull down  
menu and then Monitoring using the left mouse button or by  
hitting Alt+P and Alt+M. See Figure 006-1. User may also use  
the graph icon shown on the tool bar above the workspace.  
PERFORMANCE PULL  
DOWN MENU  
PERFORMANCE REPORT  
GRAPH ICON SHORTCUT  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
MONITORING...  
GNE-1  
11744-C  
Figure 006-1. Cellworx Vision Performance Pull Down Menu  
2. The Cellworx Vision Performance Monitoring - Selection  
window appears as shown in Figure 006-2. In the upper left  
selection box, select a network element, card type, port, layer,  
and interval, followed by Apply at the bottom of the window.  
SELECT AN NE FOR PM  
RETRIEVAL AND THE SLOT  
AND CARD TYPES IN THE  
SHELF WILL BE DISPLAYED  
IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT A SLOT AND CARD  
TYPE, INDIVIDUAL OR  
MULTIPLE,TO DISPLAY THE  
PORTS IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PORT(S) DESIRED  
TO DISPLAY THE LAYERS  
AVAILABLE IN THE NEXT  
WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PM LAYER(S)  
TO BE RETRIEVED.  
SELECT THE CURENT  
COUNT OR A HISTORICAL  
TIME PERIOD FOR ONE  
SLOT/PORT. USER CANNOT  
SELECT CURRENT AND A  
HISTORICAL AT THE SAME  
TIME.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring - Statistics  
Resource: NE-1  
Slot / Card Type  
Port  
Layer  
Interval  
current  
Sonet  
DS1/E1  
DS3  
PLCP  
ATM / TC  
AAL1  
Slot 17 / 622 Ring  
Slot 16 / 622 Ring  
Slot 5 / T3 TMUX Multi 1  
Slot 6 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 7 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 8 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 9 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 10 / T3 CRS  
Slot 16 / Port 1  
Slot 16 / Port 2  
Slot 17 / Port 1  
Slot 17 / Port 2  
Slot 5 / Port 1  
- Channel 1  
- Channel 2  
- Channel 3  
- Channel 4  
- Channel 5  
NE-1 Cellworx1  
NE-2 Cellworx2  
NE-3 Cellworx3  
00:00-00:15  
00:15-00:30  
00:30-00:45  
00:45-01:00  
01:00-01:15  
01:15-01:30  
01:30-01:45  
01:45-02:00  
0200 - 02:15  
Slot 11 / T3 CRS  
Slot 12 / T1 Multi 1  
Close  
Apply  
11743-D  
CLOSES PM STATISTICS  
WINDOW.  
SELECT TO RETRIEVE PM  
DATA FOR SELECTED  
PARAMETERS.  
Figure 006-2. Cellworx Vision Performance Monitoring - Selection Window  
Page 2-17  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-006  
Page 5 of 5  
3. Refer to the following procedures to set the PM thresholds for  
each card type:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set Optical Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Set T3 TMUX Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Set T3 CRS Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Set T1/E1 Multi 1 Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Set FT1 FRS Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Set FE1 FRS Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Set T3 CES Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
DLP-726  
DLP-727  
DLP-728  
DLP-729  
DLP-732  
DLP-733  
DLP-792  
Page 2-18  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-007  
Page 1 of 3  
DISPLAYING STATUS AND ALARMS  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to retrieve network alarms or shelf level  
alarms to isolate problems within the network. If alarms are present on the system, the Chassis  
View screen can help isolate which slots are affected. A shelf status display can help the systems  
administrator get a visual overview of which cards, alarms, protection groups, and cell busses are  
active, equipped, or Out of Service (OOS). The user can also go to individual card screens to  
obtain status information on individual card failures. These screens will give more detail on a per  
card basis.  
DISPLAYING ALARMS  
1. Launch the Cellworx Vision GUI from the X-Terminal.  
DLP-705  
DLP-778  
DLP-713  
2. If an abnormal GUI session ending occurred from operator error,  
time out, or other unforeseen events, it might be necessary to  
free up the GUI and log back in.  
3. Display the network alarm summary via the Cellworx Vision  
GUI. Determine the NE with the highest level of alarm and  
continue.  
4. Double click on the icon representing the node with the highest  
level of alarm. If it is configured as a primary node having  
expansion shelves (EPSs) configured off of it, a screen  
resembling the one shown in Figure 007-1 will appear.  
X
Cellworx Vision:Physical Layouts for NE-2  
EPS-1  
EPS-2  
NE-2  
Cancel  
10960-B  
Figure 007-1. GUI Primary Node Selection View (example)  
Page 2-19  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-007  
Page 2 of 3  
5. Again, double click on the node with the highest level of alarm  
(red, then yellow) whether a Primary (NE-2) or Expansion node  
(EPS-1 or EPS-2 in this example).  
6. The screen shown in Figure 007-2 appears showing the Chassis  
View and all cards associated with it.  
Note: Applications using the 19-inch chassis will show card slots 1 through 18 but only  
card slots 1 through 11 and 16 through 18 are programmable.  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
S
C
N
M
I
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
1
5
5
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
M
u
l
E
1
M
u
l
C
T
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
g
R
i
n
g
S
M
E
X
P
t
i
t
i
t
i
C
R
S
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18  
Status:  
Power Status: normal  
Alarm Status: minor  
2
Identifier:  
Start Time:  
Vendor:  
Version:  
Current Time: 10:12:09 09/01/1999  
Up Time: 1d 19:41:22:00  
1.2.0.35  
19:30:47 8/31/1999  
ADC-TSG  
Configuration:  
Cellworx2  
5th Street  
Name:  
Memory Utilization Threshold:  
Suppress Zero Stats  
Location:  
Apply  
Topology View  
Refresh  
Close  
13455-B  
Figure 007-2. Shelf Level GUI Screen (example)  
Page 2-20  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-007  
Page 3 of 3  
7. The status of the shelf is displayed under the Status heading  
below the shelf. Use the slider bars to view the information  
provided if needed. The power status and alarm status are  
displayed for the shelf and should reflect the Icon alarm  
condition shown on the main GUI screen that brought you here.  
8. Above this section in the card display are individual status  
indicators on each card. The indicators are at the bottom of each  
card and should be green for a normal condition, red for a  
critical/major alarm condition, or yellow for a minor alarm  
condition.  
9. To retrieve the status of any card, double click on it using the  
left mouse button and a card level GUI screen will appear. Start  
with the card in the highest alarm severity (Critical). Refer to the  
following procedures for each card type selected.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Retrieve the SC card status.  
DLP-757  
DLP-759  
DLP-760  
DLP-796  
DLP-761  
DLP-762  
DLP-763  
DLP-764  
DLP-779  
DLP-788  
DLP-789  
DLP-793  
Retrieve the 622 RIC card status.  
Retrieve the 155 CRS card status.  
Retrieve the 622 CRS card status.  
Retrieve the T3 CRS card status.  
Retrieve the T3 TMUX MULTI 1 status.  
Retrieve the 155 RIC card status.  
Retrieve the T1/E1 MULTI 1 card status.  
Retrieve the 2488 RIC card status.  
Retrieve the FT1 FRS card status.  
Retrieve the FE1 FRS card status.  
Retrieve the T3 CES card status.  
10. Close the chassis view and return to the GUI main screen by  
selecting the Close button at the bottom of the window.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-21  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-008  
Page 1 of 2  
RETRIEVE PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully retrieve the performance  
monitoring statistics via the NMIC Graphical User Interface (GUI) for any interface installed  
within the Cellworx STN network. Performance information retrieved is on a per node and per  
port basis.  
1. From the GUI main screen, select the Performance pull down  
menu and then Monitoring using the left mouse button or by  
hitting Alt+P and Alt+M. See Figure 008-1. User may also use  
the graph icon shown on the tool bar above the workspace.  
PERFORMANCE PULL  
DOWN MENU  
PERFORMANCE REPORT  
GRAPH ICON SHORTCUT  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
MONITORING...  
GNE-1  
11744-C  
Figure 008-1. Cellworx Vision Performance Pull Down Menu  
2. The Cellworx Vision Performance Monitoring - Selection  
window appears as shown in Figure 008-2. In the upper left  
selection box, select a network element for PM statistics  
retrieval.  
Page 2-22  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-008  
Page 2 of 2  
SELECT AN NE FOR PM  
RETRIEVAL AND THE SLOT  
AND CARD TYPES IN THE  
SHELF WILL BE DISPLAYED  
IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT A SLOT AND CARD  
TYPE, INDIVIDUAL OR  
MULTIPLE,TO DISPLAY THE  
PORTS IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PORT(S) DESIRED  
TO DISPLAY THE LAYERS  
AVAILABLE IN THE NEXT  
WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PM LAYER(S)  
TO BE RETRIEVED.  
SELECT THE CURENT  
COUNT OR A HISTORICAL  
TIME PERIOD FOR ONE  
SLOT/PORT. USER CANNOT  
SELECT CURRENT AND A  
HISTORICAL AT THE SAME  
TIME.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring - Statistics  
Resource: NE-1  
Slot / Card Type  
Port  
Layer  
Interval  
current  
Sonet  
DS1/E1  
DS3  
PLCP  
ATM / TC  
AAL1  
Slot 17 / 622 Ring  
Slot 16 / 622 Ring  
Slot 5 / T3 TMUX Multi 1  
Slot 6 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 7 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 8 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 9 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 10 / T3 CRS  
Slot 16 / Port 1  
Slot 16 / Port 2  
Slot 17 / Port 1  
Slot 17 / Port 2  
Slot 5 / Port 1  
- Channel 1  
- Channel 2  
- Channel 3  
- Channel 4  
- Channel 5  
NE-1 Cellworx1  
NE-2 Cellworx2  
NE-3 Cellworx3  
00:00-00:15  
00:15-00:30  
00:30-00:45  
00:45-01:00  
01:00-01:15  
01:15-01:30  
01:30-01:45  
01:45-02:00  
0200 - 02:15  
Slot 11 / T3 CRS  
Slot 12 / T1 Multi 1  
Close  
Apply  
11743-D  
CLOSES PM STATISTICS  
WINDOW.  
SELECT TO RETRIEVE PM  
DATA FOR SELECTED  
PARAMETERS.  
Figure 008-2. Cellworx Vision Performance Monitoring - Selection Window  
3. Go to one of the following procedures according to the layer  
selected:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Retrieve Optical Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Retrieve T3 TMUX Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Retrieve T3 CRS Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Retrieve T1/E1 Multi 1 Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Retrieve FT1 FRS Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Retrieve FE1 FRS Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
Retrieve T3 CES Port Performance Monitoring Statistics  
DLP-726  
DLP-727  
DLP-728  
DLP-729  
DLP-732  
DLP-733  
DLP-794  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-23  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-009  
Page 1 of 1  
ADDING SERVICES TO A CELLWORX STN NODE  
Summary: This procedure outlines the steps involved for assigning card, port, and user level  
parameters for individual interface cards and configuring protection operation for grouped  
interface cards within each node. The cards must be physically equipped within a shelf before the  
slots can be configured via the software.  
1. Verify the cards to be provisioned are physically equipped  
within the shelf by double clicking on the node to open a shelf  
level GUI display. Each card should have a green status  
indicator.  
Note: Applications using the 19-inch chassis will show card slots 1 through 18 but only  
card slots 1 through 11 and 16 through 18 are programmable.  
2. Refer to the Cellworx STN Installation manual for card  
installation procedures if cards are not currently equipped,  
otherwise continue.  
1152693  
DLP-777  
3. To remove or install cards currently in the chassis, refer to:  
4. Set the configuration options for the following cards when  
equipped:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set the E1 Multi 1 Card configuration.  
Set the 622 RIC card configuration  
DLP-747  
DLP-751  
DLP-752  
DLP-797  
DLP-753  
DLP-754  
DLP-755  
DLP-756  
DLP-758  
DLP-784  
DLP-785  
DLP-792  
Set the 155 CRS card configuration  
Set the 622 CRS card configuration  
Set the T3 CRS card ATM configuration  
Set the T3 TMUX Multi 1 card configuration.  
Set the T1 Multi 1 Card configuration.  
Set the 2488 RIC card configuration options.  
Set the 155 RIC configuration options.  
Set the FE1 FRS Card configuration.  
Set the FT1 FRS Card configuration.  
Set the T3 CES Card configuration  
5. Configure card protection groups if applicable for each group of  
interface cards.  
DLP-765  
6. Close the card configuration window to return to the shelf  
display. Verify that the required cards are in-service by the  
green status indicator.  
7. Perform acceptance tests on the new access cards when  
applicable.  
NTP-011  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-24  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-010  
Page 1 of 1  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN NODE  
Summary: This procedure outlines the steps involved to remove a Cellworx STN ring node from  
an in-service ring network, or an expansion shelf from an in-service condition. This procedure  
enables the network administer to change the network configuration when required. It may be  
necessary to remove a ring NE via software if the network is being uninstalled, or the equipment  
at a site is being moved to a new location, etc. Before removing a node from the network, all  
VP/VC connections to that node must be deleted.  
DELETE A RING NODE FROM AN IN-SERVICE RING SYSTEM  
1. Launch the Cellworx Vision Graphical User Interface (GUI).  
DLP-705  
DLP-739  
2. Delete any VP/VC connections that are terminated at the node  
being removed from service.  
3. Delete the node via the GUI using one of the following  
procedures according to the type of node being removed:  
• Delete a Cellworx STN node.  
• Delete a Cellworx STN EPS shelf.  
DLP-740  
DLP-746  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-25  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-011  
Page 1 of 1  
CONDUCT ACCEPTANCE TESTS ON A CELLWORX STN NODE  
Summary: This procedure lists the test that can be performed on a newly installed Cellworx  
STN node whether installed as a ring node or terminal node.  
SONET Diagnostics  
DLP-766  
DLP-771  
DLP-772  
DLP-773  
DLP-776  
Initiate a Protection Switch  
Perform Loopback Tests  
Initiate a Card Reset  
Execute an Alarm Cut Off (ACO)  
Page 2-26  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-012  
Page 1 of 1  
PERFORM ROUTINE OR NON-ROUTINE MAINTENANCE  
Summary: This procedure lists procedures that can be followed to perform maintenance tasks on  
a Cellworx STN ring network that may or may not be considered routine. Non-routine  
maintenance may include installing new software versions on the NMIC, downloading new  
software to interface cards, forcing cards off-line for maintenance procedures, and  
troubleshooting alarms. Routine maintenance may include executing an Alarm Cut-Off (ACO),  
retrieving performance monitoring reports, retrieving inventory lists, or retrieving alarm reports.  
Graphical User Interface Procedures  
1. Force Network Discovery  
DLP-719  
DLP-705  
DLP-722  
DLP-724  
DLP-766  
DLP-741  
DLP-742  
DLP-720  
DLP-715  
DLP-716  
2. Launch the Cellworx Vision GUI from the X-Terminal  
3. NMIC System File Replication  
4. NMIC Protection  
5. Perform Diagnostics on the optical cards  
6. Retrieve Logs from the NMIC via FTP  
7. Retrieve Compressed Logs from NMIC via FTP  
8. Select different software versions for a particular card  
9. View Ring Resource Usage  
10. View Fiber Bandwidth Usage  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-27  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-013  
Page 1 of 1  
CREATING CONNECTIONS  
Summary: This procedure outlines the steps required to create ATM Virtual Path Connections  
(VPC) and Virtual Channel Connections (VCC) through the Cellworx STN network. A VCC is  
an individual channel between two communicating systems. The VPC allows multicasting of  
several VCCs to ease routing between switches where multiple VCCs share a common path. The  
VPCs are a common requirement of WAN installations. The administrator should have acquired  
a work order defining the bandwidth requirements, service type, and Quality of Service (QoS)  
for each connection before proceeding.  
1. Creating traffic contracts.  
DLP-709  
2. Create an ATM VP or VC connection through the Cellworx  
STN system.  
DLP-708  
DLP-787  
DLP-790  
DLP-791  
3. Create an ATM VP Multicast Connection.  
4. Create an ATM Bundled VC Multicast Connection.  
5. Add a Leaf Endpoint to an In-Service Connection.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-28  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-014  
Page 1 of 2  
MONITORING THE NETWORK  
Summary: This procedure provides information that enables the Network Administrator to  
successfully monitor a Cellworx STN network via the Cellworx Vision Graphical User Interface  
(GUI). The information provided directs the user to pertinent sections and procedures within the  
User’s manual. Brief functions and features of the software are provided as well as layout and  
monitoring suggestions, and troubleshooting directives.  
1. NETWORK LAYOUT VIEW  
1.1 The Cellworx Vision GUI allows the user to reposition NE icons  
on the screen for custom tailored displays of individual  
networks. Once NE icons are repositioned on the screen, the  
Save Icon Layout procedure should be performed to retain the  
new positions of the NEs, otherwise, the icons will return to the  
last saved positions on the screen the next time the GUI is  
launched.  
DLP-736  
2. ICON ALARM INDICATIONS  
2.1 The NE icons displayed on the Cellworx Vision GUI provide at  
a glance alarm indications through color changes. If a node is  
operating within tolerances and thresholds set by the user (or  
default), the icon will appear green (normal operation). If a node  
has crossed a minor threshold or generated a minor alarm  
condition, the icon color changes to yellow. Similarly, a major  
alarm changes the icon to orange and a critical alarm changes  
the icon to red. If an icon appears blue in color, this indicates  
that the NMIC has lost communication with the node and the  
fiber connection between them may also change in color  
indicating a problem.  
3. DIRECTIVES  
A. Alarms  
3.1 After determining a node is in alarm and the severity of the  
alarms, the user should retrieve an alarm report via the NMIC  
using NTP-007. This procedure describes the steps required to  
retrieve reports from the Cellworx Vision GUI, and establishing  
a craft session at a node, starting with the highest level of alarm  
(Critical, Major, then Minor), using the craft interface to retrieve  
NE level alarm reports. For quick reference, a list of all alarm  
types is provided in the Trouble Analysis Procedure at the end  
of this section.  
Page 2-29  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-014  
Page 2 of 2  
B. Adding Services  
3.2 Slots within a shelf may have cards equipped but not in-service,  
or un-provisioned ports available on a card that is already in-  
service. This allows the administrator to assign bandwidth,  
ports, or connections on the network to customers as needs  
demand. When adding additional services, ports, etc., refer to:  
NTP-009  
3.3 When establishing new ATM VP/VC connections to in-service  
cards and ports, refer to:  
NTP-013  
NTP-016  
3.4 When upgrading software releases or ring interfaces, refer to:  
4. HELP LINE  
4.1 For assistance in retrieving reports, troubleshooting alarms,  
warranty information, etc., the ADC Help Line is provided  
through the Cellworx Vision GUI software. To access this  
information, refer to:  
DLP-735  
Page 2-30  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-015  
Page 1 of 2  
ADMINISTRATIVE TASKS  
Summary: The following procedures are outlined to identify tasks that a system administrator  
would need to perform for user accounts, log files, and data collection on the Cellworx STN  
system.  
1. Launch the Cellworx Vision GUI from the X-Terminal.  
2. View Connections  
DLP-705  
DLP-710  
DLP-714  
DLP-715  
DLP-716  
DLP-721  
DLP-722  
DLP-725  
DLP-744  
3. Configure Service Provider Profile.  
4. View Ring Resource Usage  
5. View Fiber Bandwidth Usage  
6. Retrieve NE information.  
7. NMIC System File Replication  
8. NMIC Protection Restoration  
9. Reflash Boot Image  
10. Save the Current System Database, Reboot the Database Using a  
Saved Copy, or Reboot the Database Using a Default Database.  
DLP-745  
DLP-768  
DLP-769  
DLP-770  
DLP-774  
DLP-775  
DLP-711  
DLP-777  
DLP-778  
DLP-781  
DLP-782  
11. Set Craft User Configuration  
12. Set Craft Menu Configuration  
13. Hardware Inventory  
14. Finding and Changing NMIC IP Address  
15. Add or Change an SNMP Trap Host on the NMIC  
16. Log off of Cellworx STN GUI.  
17. Remove and/or Replace Cellworx cards  
18. Ending a GUI Session Following an Abnormal Session Ending.  
20. Removing the NMIC from the Shelf  
21. FTP Database Files off of NMIC  
Page 2-31  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-015  
Page 2 of 2  
22. Add/Delete GUI Users or Change GUI User Level Security  
23. Change Configuration/Test on an Existing Connection  
24. Retrieve Network Data Collection (NDC) Statistics  
DLP-783  
DLP-723  
DLP-730  
Page 2-32  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 •Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-016  
Page 1 of 2  
CELLWORX UGRADE PROCEDURES  
Summary: The following procedures deal with Cellworx STN system upgrades. A ring upgrade  
takes a ring from a lower bandwidth level (OC3c or OC12c) to a higher bandwidth level (OC12c  
or OC48c). The following levels of ring upgrade are allowed:  
•
•
OC3c ring to an OC12c or OC48c ring  
OC12c ring to an OC48c ring  
A ring upgrade is only supported if the user has purchased the standard feature package on 3.0  
release software. The ring upgrade may be performed with the 2.0 to 3.0 major software upgrade  
or at any time after a Cellworx 3.0 ring has been successfully installed. The ring upgrade  
procedure may only be performed by the first privileged user to start the Cellworx GUI.  
SOFTWARE UPGRADE  
1. Launch the Cellworx Vision GUI from the X-Terminal.  
DLP-705  
DLP-713  
2. Check the system for any existing alarms beforehand to ensure  
no new problems are introduced after the upgrade. Refer to the  
Display Network Alarm Summary procedure.  
3. Retrieve the Shelf Controller Card (SCC) card status for each  
SC in the system. An SCC must be present in slot 1 of every  
shelf. The SCC in slot 1 does not have to be active but if only  
one SCC is present in any shelf, it must be in slot 1.  
DLP-757  
DLP-711  
DLP-795  
4. Log off of Cellworx STN GUI.  
5. Perform the Phase 3.0 to 3.1 Software Upgrade Procedure  
6. Display the network alarm summary to determine if any new  
alarms exist on the system.  
DLP-713  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-33  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADCP-70-220 • Issue 1 • November 2000 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
NTP-016  
Page 2 of 2  
RING UPGRADE  
When changing an existing ring network to a higher bandwidth (OC3c to OC12c/OC48c, OC12c  
to OC48c), the following procedures should be followed.  
1. Launch the Cellworx Vision GUI from the X-Terminal.  
DLP-705  
2. If desired, the user may record the ring bandwidth usage before  
and after the interface upgrade to view the drop in resource  
usage. Refer to the View Ring Resource Usage procedure.  
DLP-715  
3. Check the system for any existing alarms before the upgrade to  
ensure no new problems are introduced following the upgrade.  
Refer to the Display Network Alarm Summary procedure.  
DLP-713  
DLP-731  
4. Perform the Ring Upgrade Procedure  
5. Check the configuration on the new optical interface cards and  
make any changes as needed using the following procedures:  
•
•
Set the 2488 RIC card configuration options.  
Set the 622 RIC card configuration  
DLP-756  
DLP-751  
6. Display the network alarm summary to determine if any new  
alarms exist on the system.  
DLP-713  
7. Check the status of the new interface cards using the following  
procedures to ensure they are operating properly:  
•
•
Retrieve the 622 RIC card status.  
Retrieve the 2488 RIC card status.  
DLP-759  
DLP-779  
8. If desired, perform diagnostics on the new optical cards.  
DLP-766  
Page 2-34  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-700  
Page 1 of 1  
POWER UP A CELLWORX STN NODE  
Summary: This procedure provides instructions for verifying the source −48 Vdc power supply.  
1. Turn on the power source that will supply power to the system.  
2. Use a multi-tester to measure the DC voltage at the source. When testing, place the positive  
probe on the −48 V terminal and the negative probe on the COM or RTN terminal.  
3. The measured voltage must be between −42.5 Vdc and −56.5 Vdc at the specified point.  
Was voltage within range specified? Note the polarity.  
If No, proceed to step 4.  
If Yes, continue with step 5.  
4. The problem is in the power supply wiring or in the −48 Vdc power supply. Isolate the  
problem using local troubleshooting practices and correct as required before installing  
power to the system. Repeat procedure after correcting problem.  
5. Install fuses or engage the circuit breakers that supply power to the shelf. The front access  
cards should illuminate. This can be verified by observing the shelf alarm indicator on the  
front door panel. This will only light up if the SC cards are installed and an alarm is  
present. Refer to Figure 700-1.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
UPPER HEAT BAFFLE/  
FIBER MANAGEMENT TRAY  
SHELF  
ALARM  
INDICATOR  
ESD GROUND JACK  
DOOR  
LATCH  
DOOR  
HINGES  
LOWER AIR INTAKE/  
CABLE ROUTING TRAY  
10479-C  
Figure 700-1. Cellworx STN Component Identification  
Page 2-45  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 1 of 10  
CONNECT FIBERS TO OPTICAL CARDS  
Summary: This procedure describes the processes required to properly connect the inbound and  
outbound fiber optic cables to the correct ports on the optical cards. The optical connector  
configurations may vary from SC, ST, or FC fiber connectors, dependent upon the type of  
equipment ordered. Optical cards include the 2488, 622, and 155 RICs and the 155 SM/MM CRS  
cards. Note that on the 155 SM/MM CRS cards, there are two ports that may be utilized. If  
ordered, fiber connector adapters may be changed out on the RIC and 155 SM/MM CRS cards.  
The 155 MM card does not have a modular adapter.  
Danger: Do not look into the ends of optical fibers. Exposure to invisible LASER  
radiation may cause serious retinal damage or even blindness. Verify the optical source  
is disabled through the use of an optical power meter before handling optical fibers.  
Caution: Use caution when routing wires and cables. Avoid severe bending and routing  
over sharp edges. Use grommet material when possible to avoid wear on cable  
insulation.  
Caution: Allow sufficient fiber length to permit routing without severe bends. Fibers  
may be permanently damaged, or signal degradation may be experienced if fibers are  
bent or curved to a radius of less than 1.5 inches (3.81 cm).  
Caution: Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Before handling any  
modules connect your wrist to an equipment ground using an approved anti-static wrist  
strap. Ensure that all uninstalled modules are stored in anti-static packing material.  
When working with modules, always place the module on an electrically grounded  
approved anti-static mat.  
Caution: Using excessive force when seating cards and modules into the backplane may  
result in physical damage to the backplane pins or module connectors, and if power is  
applied, may result in serious electrical damage to both the modules or the backplane.  
A. Fiber Routing  
1. Check site plans to determine the fiber connection required. The RIC cards and 155 CRS  
SM/MM optical cards have modular adapters that can be changed to meet customer  
applications for either FC, SC, or ST type connectors. These adapters must be ordered  
separately if changes are required. The 155 CRS MM cards will be equipped per customer  
requirements from the factory as should the RIC and 155 CRS SM cards. Refer to Figure  
701-1 to identify fiber connector types.  
2. Tag and identify the optical fibers from the source (fiber distribution panel, etc.) before  
routing them to the Cellworx STN shelf (ex. 155/622, Clockwise/Counterclockwise, Slot  
no., In/Out, rack no., etc.)  
Page 2-46  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 2 of 10  
3. Route the fiber cables to the Cellworx STN rack and to either upper side of the fiber  
management tray. For management purposes, it is recommended that the receive fibers are  
routed across one direction and the transmit fibers across the other direction. Refer to the  
example shown in Figure 701-2.  
4. Using the fiber routing flanges, dress the fibers to the respective card slots per work order.  
Keep in mind the direction of traffic flow for the fibers. The slots designated for RIC  
interfaces or 155 CRS expansion shelf interfaces are slots 16 and 17. Slot 16 TX port will  
connect to the next node slot 16 RX port, continuing around the ring until all slot 16 cards  
are connected. Slot 17 TX port will connect to the next node slot 17 RX port until all slot  
17 cards are fibered together around the ring. Refer to Figure 701-3 for fibering convention.  
5. Leave enough slack in the fibers to enable them to dangle about six inches down the front  
of the shelf as shown in Figure 701-4. For 2488 RIC cards leave an additional four inches.  
Dress excess fiber per local practices. Lay the fibers on the fiber management tray so they  
will not interfere with card installation.  
6. Route the remaining fibers to the respective 155 CRS equipped slots per work order. Keep  
in mind the slot numbers, matching them with the tagged fibers.  
7. Dress the fiber cables in along the rack using panduct or similar routing devices per  
customer applications.  
SC  
10518-A  
ST  
FC  
Figure 701-1. Optical Connector Identification  
Page 2-47  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 3 of 10  
FIBERS DESTINED FOR SLOT 13  
DROP THROUGH THE UPPER  
ROUTING FLANGES AT SLOT 12.  
FIBERS FROM SLOT 13 ARE ROUTED  
THROUGH THE UPPER ROUTING  
FLANGES AT SLOT 14.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
TRANSMIT FIBERS IN ONE DIRECTION  
RECEIVE FIBERS FROM ONE DIRECTION.  
10716-C  
Figure 701-2. Routing Fiber Across the Fiber Management Panel  
NODE 1  
SLOT 17  
TX  
RX  
TX  
SLOT 16  
RX  
TX  
SLOT 17  
RX  
RX  
SLOT 17  
TX  
RX  
SLOT 16  
TX  
TX  
SLOT 16  
RX  
NODE 2  
NODE 4  
SLOT 16  
TX  
RX  
SLOT 17  
RX  
TX  
12385-A  
NODE 3  
Figure 701-3. 622 RIC Fibering Convention  
Page 2-48  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 4 of 10  
FIBER  
ROUTING  
FLANGES  
10721-B  
Figure 701-4. Fiber Routing  
B.  
Fiber Connection  
Note: DO NOT LOOK INTO THE ENDS OF ANY FIBER OPTIC CABLES.  
8. If the cards are fully seated into the Cellworx STN backplane, disengage them by pulling  
back the ejector ears on the upper and lower ends of the card faceplate. See Figure 701-5.  
Back the card partially out just enough to expose the fiber connections as shown in Figure  
701-6. Be careful not to pull the card out too far allowing it to dislodge from the shelf and  
fall to the floor.  
9. Clean the fiber connectors per the instructions provided in section C of this proceedure.  
10. Connect the fibers to the optical connectors using Figure 701-6 as reference for RIC cards,  
and Figure 701-7 for 155 SM/MM CRS cards, noting the inbound and outbound directions  
of the fibers.  
11. Once the fibers are connected, route them up through the fiber clip equipped at the top of  
the faceplate as shown in Figure 701-6 or 701-7. The fiber clip is identified in Figure 701-8.  
12. Seat the card into the backplane by sliding it into the card cage until the ejector ears catch  
the shelf trough. Fully seat the card by pressing the ejector ears towards the faceplate until  
they lock into place. Do not force the cards into the backplane. If excessive resistance is  
felt, remove the card and check for obstructions and proper alignment in card guides.  
Once card is seated, give a firm push to insure good contact with the backplane.  
Page 2-49  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 5 of 10  
13. If power is applied and the database already exists on the NMIC, the optical card will boot.  
Once completed booting, the Port LED should turn green indicating it is receiving a good  
input signal. If the LED remains red, it indicates a Loss of Signal is present. In this case, go  
back to step 3 and recheck the input and output connections of the fibers. If they are  
correct, check the far end source. Determine and fix the problem before continuing.  
14. If an optical power meter indicates a signal is present on the fiber, and it meets the input  
signal specification of the card, clean the module fiber connector to ensure there is no  
debris on the fiber itself. If the card still fails to acknowledge the input signal, it may be  
defective. Verify the inbound fiber signal using another optical card. Refer to the Apps and  
Engineering Phase 3.1 manual listed in the preface of this document for specifications.  
C. Cleaning and Mating Instructions for Fiber Optic Connectors and Adapters  
Note: Cleanliness will affect the performance of an optical fiber system. Perform the following  
procedures prior to installation. Clean all connectors, adapters, and attenuators before making  
any connections. Check local practices for approved cleaning methods and materials. The  
following cleaning materials are recommended and may form part of your cleaning kit:  
• Lint-free laboratory wipes  
• Isopropyl alcohol in pressurized dispenser  
100  
SIX INCH  
DR  
U
K
I
L
Y
S
O
A
L
P
O
H
P
O
M
B
R
A
H
L
L
F
CO  
SO  
L
F
F
L
F
O
H
L
L
L
OP YLC  
L
H
P AI  
OPPR OPY  
AIS  
C OOL  
B
L
K
A
U
• Lint-free adapter cleaning tips  
• Clean, dry, oil-free compressed air  
• Fiber cleaning reel  
M
P
OL  
A
C
ISOPROPYL  
CLETOPS  
P
R
O
SINGLE TIPPED  
APPLICATIONORS  
L
U
K
B
L
U
M
M
L
K
B
A
A
H
W
S
F
O
FA  
B
F
L
H
W
H
O
S
L
F
O
B
O
O
S
F
B
F
L
S
WB  
K
H
L
S
B
F
A
U
B
W
H
H
H
M
M
B
K
H
KDLF;L  
A
B
U
H
100  
SIX INCH  
10847-A  
• Fiber scope  
Warning: Handle, use, and dispose of chemicals in accordance with manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
Note: When using canned compressed air, clear the nozzle with a short air blast before  
blowing any parts clean. Do not shake the compressed air can. Keep the can level while  
using to prevent liquid in the can from entering the air stream.  
Note: the use of these cleaning products does not guarantee a clean connector. A fiber  
scope should be used to ensure that the connector tip is lint free.  
CLEANING  
Connectors/Terminators  
Note: If using a fiber cleaning reel, follow the instructions generally included on the  
swiper box to advance the reel, twist the fiber end, and swipe across the track.  
Otherwise, use the following procedure.  
15. Fold a clean, new wipe into a 2" by 2" square pad.  
Page 2-50  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 6 of 10  
1
16. Moisten, but do not saturate, the pad with alcohol making a spot approximately /2" in  
diameter.  
Note: Alcohol should only be used when connector is really dirty. A fiber cleaning reel  
is always best. Use a cleaning reel even after alcohol to remove residue. Do not  
consume isopropyl alcohol at anytime.  
17. Press the ferrule end face into a wet spot on the wipe. Using force, twist the ferrule so that a  
hard wiping action takes place. Repeat twice, using a clean alcohol-moistened area each  
time.  
18. Press the ferrule end face into a dry spot on the wipe. Using force, twist the ferrule so that a  
hard wiping action takes place.  
19. Discard the used pad.  
Attenuators  
20. For an exposed ferrule (in-line type), see connector cleaning procedure; blow the other end  
dry with clean compressed air.  
21. Clean bulkhead attenuators only by blowing with clean compressed air.  
Adapters  
22. Moisten one end of a lint free adapter cleaning tips with alcohol.  
23. Remove excess alcohol from the adapter cleaning tips with a clean wipe.  
24. Insert the moistened adapter cleaning tips into either end of the adapter and scrub in and out  
so that the inside surface of the adapter is wiped by the pipe cleaner. Repeat this step for the  
opposite end.  
25. Insert the dry end of the adapter cleaning tips into either end of the adapter to remove any  
residual alcohol. For oversized adapters (biconic), stir the adapter cleaning tips for better  
surface contact. Repeat this step for the opposite end.  
26. Blow the adapter dry with clean compressed air.  
MATING  
FC  
27. Insert the ferrule tip into the adapter.  
Page 2-51  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 7 of 10  
28. For D4 and FC types, align the key with the slot in the adapter.  
29. Push the connector into the adapter until the coupling nut reaches the adapter housing.  
30. Screw the coupling nut clockwise onto the adapter to complete the connection.  
ST®  
31. Align the ferrule hub key with the slot in the adapter.  
32. Insert the connector into the adapter until the coupling nut reaches the adapter housing.  
33. Align the bayonet slots on the coupling nut with the pins on the outside of the adapter.  
34. Push the coupling nut onto the adapter while rotating the coupler nut clockwise to lock the  
bayonet and secure the connection.  
SC  
35. For the SC, align the housing key with the slot in the adapter.  
36. Push the connector into the adapter until a click is heard/felt indicating the latching system  
is engaged. When fully engaged, the white stripes on the sides of the SC housing should be  
hidden inside the adapter.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-52  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 8 of 10  
622 RING SLOT 16 AND 17  
622  
Ring  
622  
Ring  
l
a
ic  
rit  
C
in  
M
j/  
a
M
T
M
R
O
C
A
A
e
ctiv  
ft  
es  
ra  
cc  
C
A
s
O
C
A
IA  
C
M
C
P
Status  
Active  
Status  
Active  
APS  
APS  
Timing  
Timing  
Craft  
Access  
Port  
1
Port  
1
Shelf  
Craft  
Reset  
16  
17  
18  
10544-B  
Figure 701-5. Disengaging the Optical Module  
Page 2-53  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 9 of 10  
RX (INPUT)  
TX (OUTPUT)  
SC  
622  
Ring  
l
a
ic  
ritical  
Cr  
in  
j/M  
a
Maj/Min  
T
M
RMT  
O
CO  
A
e
ctiv  
Activ  
ra  
aft  
es  
cc  
Access  
Cr  
s
O
CO  
A
IA  
C
M
C
PCMCIA  
Status  
Active  
Source  
Sync  
s
Statu  
e
Activ  
APS  
Timing  
Craft  
Access  
Port  
1
Shelf  
Craft  
Reset  
13  
14  
17  
10521-B  
Figure 701-6. Fiber Connections on a Cellworx 622 RIC Card  
Page 2-54  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-701  
Page 10 of 10  
PORT 1  
RX / TX  
PORT 2  
RX / TX  
155 SM  
CRS  
R
T
R
T
X
X
X
X
s
Statu  
e
Activ  
APS  
Timing  
Port  
1
2
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
10522-B  
Figure 701-7. Fiber Connectors on an 155 SM/MM CRS Card  
FIBER CLIP ON FACEPLATE  
622  
Ring  
10566-B  
Figure 701-8. Faceplate Fiber Clip on Optical Card (622 shown)  
Page 2-55  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-702  
Page 1 of 5  
CONNECT VT1OO TERMINAL TO NMIC RS232 PORT  
AND MODIFY NMIC IP ADDRESS  
Summary: This procedure describes making the connection from a VT100 terminal (or PC with  
VT emulating software) to the NMIC RS232 port, and setting the IP address. The craft connector  
wiring convention is also covered in this DLP. The NMIC craft port is only used during initial  
setup of the NMIC to initialize the environment and enable Graphical User Interface (GUI) or  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) capabilities from a Network Management  
System (NMS). The IP is the target address for NMS access to the system information. The IP  
address should be assigned by the Network Engineer and programmed into the Cellworx STN by  
the user.  
The NMICs are a PowerPC workstation running Linux software and are shipped with a  
temporary physical IP address of 155.226.39.28 which may be used to initially communicate  
with the NMIC. The USER however must modify the IP address before using the Cellworx  
system. A brief overview of the IP Address implementation in Cellworx, the process of changing  
the IP address, and the process of displaying the Cellworx Graphical User Interface is described  
in this procedure. If the NMIC status LED is blinking red, the network information has not yet  
been configured.  
If the IP addresses are not listed in the installation work order or project book, consult with your  
company’s corporate Networking Administration for policies and acquisition of suitable IP  
addresses. Companies can create their own IP networks without any relationship to the public IP  
network. This may be desirable since the STN would be set on a private IP network and not on  
the public IP network. If these IP addresses are never intended to communicate with the outside  
world, the assignment of an IP address is arbitrary. For sanity reasons, pick an address using the  
following blocks that are specified as "internal network".  
•
•
•
10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255  
172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255  
192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255, (except 192.168.88.0 and 192.168.90.0 which are  
internal to the ring system. Refer to the /etc/hosts file for listings)  
Note: This procedure assumes the NMIC is installed in the correct slots within the GNE  
shelf and has power applied.  
Caution: Modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling any  
modules connect your wrist to an equipment ground using an approved anti-static wrist  
strap. Ensure that all un-installed modules are stored in anti-static packing material.  
When working with modules, always place the module on an electrically grounded  
approved anti-static mat.  
1. Obtain access to a VT100 terminal, or a PC with VT emulation software, at GNE location.  
Verify the connector pin out per the NMIC Craft port pin out information shown in Figure  
702-1.  
Page 2-56  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-702  
Page 2 of 5  
2. Open the lower hinged faceplate of the working NMIC card in slots 2-3, as shown in Figure  
702-2, and locate the DB9 craft connector.  
3. Plug the craft cable into the NMIC card craft port and hit return to get the login prompt.  
1. MODIFYING THE NMIC IP ADDRESS  
4. The NMIC must have its IP address configured to a valid IP address compatible with the  
local network. This will enable the Graphical User Interface (GUI) to be displayed either  
on a networked PC operating as an X-server or on a workstation. A single NMIC requires  
the use of a unique IP address and an additional IP address shared by both NMICs, referred  
to as the Active IP address. A pair of NMICs (working and protect) require the use of 3 IP  
addresses. The Active IP address must be configured the same on both NMICs to allow it to  
float between the two depending on which one is active. The active NMIC will respond to  
both its own IP address and the Active IP address. The stand-by NMIC will only respond to  
its own IP address. By using this floating Active IP address the user can communicate with  
the Cellworx system using a single IP address regardless of which NMIC is active. Refer to  
Table 702-1 for details on the required IP addresses on a single NMIC, and Table 702-2 for  
a working /protect NMIC. If a NMIC is replaced, the replacement must match the setup of  
the one being replaced.  
Table 702-1. NMIC IP Address Requirements  
SINGLE NMIC  
IP ADDRESS A  
IP ADDRESS B  
ACTIVE IP ADDRESS  
NMIC (NMIC A)  
X
X
Table 702-2. NMIC IP Address Requirements  
WORKING/PROTECT NMIC  
NMIC A  
IP ADDRESS A  
IP ADDRESS B  
ACTIVE IP ADDRESS  
X
X
X
NMIC B  
X
2. CHANGING THE IP ADDRESS OF A NMIC:  
5. To change either the NMIC IP address or the Active IP address for that NMIC, login to it  
either via telnet or though the RS-232 front panel console port. Upon initial shipment the  
user should perform login via the “root” userid. There is no password.  
6. The user will see a [root@nmicx (x = 2 or 4)] prompt. The status LED on the NMIC should  
turn amber before continuing. This may take two to three minutes. Execute a “killall –9  
psm” command on the NMIC to stop the NMIC Cellworx processes. If the NMIC has  
already reached a “double green” LED condition, execute a “killall psm nmic” command.  
Page 2-57  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-702  
Page 3 of 5  
7. The last two text lines must be removed from the /etc/hosts file. This step has already been  
performed before NMIC shipment. If this is the first time the IP address is being changed,  
skip this entire step and proceed to step 8. If the IP address has been changed previously,  
continue with the following steps.  
a. On the NMIC, type “cd /etc” to go to the etc directory.  
b. Make a copy of the hosts file for backup by typing “cp hosts hosts.backup”.  
c. Type in “export TERM=vt100”.  
d. Using the vi editor on the NMIC edit the hosts file. To activate the vi editor  
with this file type “vi hosts”.  
e. In the editor, go to the bottom of the file by holding down the shift key and  
typing g (shift+g).  
f. The last two text lines of this file must be deleted. The keyword to look for is  
“EactiveNMIC” in the last line. The two lines will look similar to the  
following:  
155.226.39.28 WS03928  
155.226.39.27 EactiveNmic  
g. To delete these last two lines, and type “2dd”.  
h. Save the file by typing “:x” in the editor followed by an enter.  
8. Type “cd /sbin” to go to the sbin directory.  
Note: : The user should make a backup of the /etc/hosts if not already done.  
9. Type “./cw_netcfg” to execute the cw_netcfg script. This script will prompt the user to  
enter various IP addresses and IP masks to be changed as defined in Table 702-3.  
Note: DO NOT USE THE BACKSPACE KEY TO EDIT ON THE COMMAND LINE  
WHEN ENTERING INFORMATION. Doing so may insert non-printable characters in  
the IP addresses being entered resulting in a bad configuration. Use the Ctrl+C exit out  
and restart to correct mistakes.  
Page 2-58  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-702  
Page 4 of 5  
Table 702-3. NMIC IP Addresses and IP Masks Definitions  
DEFINITION  
Command Line  
IP ADDRESS  
HOSTNAME  
ACTIVE IP  
NETMASK  
The IP Address for the NMIC. Must be unique for each NMIC.  
The name used for the IP address.  
The Active IP address. Must be the same for a working/protect NMIC pair.  
Subnet mask in use. Typically this is 255.255.255.0 for a class C address.  
BROADCAST ADDRESS  
NETWORK IP ADDRESS  
GATEWAY IP  
The IP address for broadcasts on a subnet. Typically this is X.X.X.255  
where X.X.X is the first three numbers for the valid NMIC IP address.  
The base address for the subnet. Typically this is X.X.X.0 where X.X.X is  
the first three numbers of the valid NMIC IP address.  
IP address of the gateway for the subnet.  
10. Enter all information, do not leave anything blank. The gateway may be left blank  
depending on configuration. There are no default settings. At the end of the script the user  
will be prompted to change the root password. If the password does not need to be changed  
just enter the current one; otherwise enter a new root password.  
Note: If you make a mistake, you may type CTRL-C and restart at step 9.  
11. Reboot the NMIC by typing “shutdown –r now” on the NMIC terminal command line. The  
NMIC will reboot and the new IP addresses will take effect.  
3. BRINGING UP THE CELLWORX GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE.  
Note: A user can display the Cellworx Graphical User Interface on either a PC or a  
workstation. To display the Cellworx Graphical User Interface on a PC, the user must  
have an X window emulation package, such as Exceed, installed and activated.  
12. Set up the personal computer sub-network to match the NMIC sub-network IP address  
structure and then reboot the computer.  
13. Verify the IP address set on the NMIC using a “ping” command to both NMIC IP addresses  
by typing: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx = 255 or less) to ensure both EIMs are operational.  
The pings should display on the screen. If the ping delays returning a response and times  
out, check Ethernet connection cabling and also verify the correct NMIC IP address was  
entered.  
14. Establish a Telnet session to the active NMIC using the customer defined IP address set in  
DLP-702 (or set up a connection name on X-Terminal for that NMIC and select it.)  
15. Logon to the NMIC.  
Page 2-59  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-702  
Page 5 of 5  
16. The user needs to configure the NMIC to launch the display to the proper machine. To do  
this enter “export DISPLAY=X.X.X.X:0.0” on the NMIC command line. Here X.X.X.X is  
the valid IP address of the PC or workstation that is to receive the display.  
17. Type “CellworxVision” at the NMIC prompt to launch the GUI. The display should appear  
on the designated PC or workstation. If the NMIC gives a message indicating it is unable to  
launch the display make sure the workstation in use is configured to accept displays from  
other machines. This is done by typing “xhost +” on the command line of the workstation  
(not the NMIC).  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
PIN #  
FUNCTION  
STANDARD USAGE  
2
3
5
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
REFERENCE  
TRANSMIT DATA  
RECEIVE DATA  
LOGIC GROUND  
10564-B  
Figure 702-1. NMIC Craft Port Pin Out Information  
SLOT IDENTIFICATION  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18  
Shelf  
Controller  
NMIC  
NMIC  
Ch. DS1  
FRS  
Ch. DS1  
FRS  
Ch. DS1  
FRS  
Ch. DS1  
FRS  
DS3  
CRS  
DS3  
CRS  
DS3  
CRS  
DS3  
CRS  
OC3c CRS OC3c CRS OC12c  
OC12c  
Ring  
Shelf  
Controller  
WORKING NMIC IN  
SLOTS 2-3  
SM/ST  
SM/ST  
Ring  
Critical  
Critical  
Maj/Min  
Remote  
Maj/Min  
Remote  
ACO  
Active  
ACO  
Active  
Craft  
Access  
Craft  
Access  
ACO  
ACO  
PCMCIA  
PCMCIA  
Status  
Active  
Status  
Active  
Source  
Sync  
Status  
Active  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Status  
Active  
Source  
Sync  
NMIC CRAFT PORT  
Craft  
Access  
Enable  
Timing  
Timing  
Timing  
Timing  
Timing  
Timing  
Timing  
Timing  
Craft  
EML  
Craft  
Craft  
Craft  
Access  
Access  
Port  
1
Port  
1
Access  
Port  
1
Port  
1
Port  
1
Port  
1
Port  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Port  
1
Port  
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Reset  
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
2
Shelf  
Craft  
EML  
Craft  
Shelf  
Craft  
Reset  
Reset  
Reset  
:
:
:
:
CWX  
CWX  
CWX  
CWX  
:
:
:
Enter Comand;  
Command Not Valid;  
Enter Command;  
:
10722-A  
Figure 702-2. NMIC Craft Port Connection  
Page 2-60  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-703  
Page 1 of 2  
LOGON TO REMOTE NODE CRAFT SESSION  
VIA TELNET FROM GUI  
Summary: This procedure instructs the operator in the steps required to logon to an NE through  
the craft session from the NMIC Cellworx Vision GUI. Once logged onto the NE craft screen,  
the operator can provision all cards, ports, and alarms for that shelf. The provisioning  
information is set on the shelf controllers and backed up onto the NMIC immediately following  
the change. Prerequisites to this procedure requires that the operator must first have launched the  
GUI that controls the node targeted for craft interface session, and the node must have been  
discovered and is visible to the NMIC.  
1. To establish a craft session to a node from the GUI, select the Direct Selection tool (arrow)  
on the left tool bar using the left mouse button. Next select the targeted NE and then hit the  
right mouse button. A pop-up menu appears. See Figure 703-1. Select Craft Interface.  
2. The targeted node responds with a logon screen prompting the operator for a user name and  
password. See Figure 703-2. If this is the first time the node had been logged onto, the  
default name and password should be “cellworx” and “cellworx#1”. If this is an existing  
network, the defaults should have been deleted and unique name and password entered. If  
you are not sure of the new user name and password for this node, check with your network  
administrator.  
3. The Cellworx main menu should now be displayed resembling the example shown in  
Figure 703-3.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
i
About...  
GNE-1Craft Interface...  
Create Connection...  
View Connection...  
Configure Alarm Threshold...  
Configure Software...  
Reflash Boot Image  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 23:30 GMT Time: 23:30  
10942-F  
Figure 703-1. GUI Remote Craft Logon Pop-up Window  
Page 2-61  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-703  
Page 2 of 2  
X
: User Defined  
ID  
Location : User Defined  
User: cellworx  
Time: 14:45  
Welcome to ADC-BBG: Cellworx Shelf Interface Version 0.0.1  
(C) Copyright 1998-99 ADC Telecommunications, INC.  
Username: cellworx  
Password:  
********  
Press CONTROL-R to Refresh  
10644-C  
Figure 703-2. Remote Craft Logon Screen  
X
: User Defined  
ID  
Location : User Defined  
User: cellworx  
Time: 14:45  
Welcome to ADC-BBG: Cellworx Shelf Interface Version SCC.1.2.0.xx  
(C) Copyright 1998-99 ADC Telecommunications, INC.  
CELLWORX MAIN MENU  
1. System Configuration  
2. Alarms  
3. Card and Interface Configuration  
4. Display Status  
5. Performance Monitoring  
6. System Maintenance  
7. System Administration  
8. Login To Remote Network Element  
Active SCC Slot: 1  
Press CONTROL-A For Assistance  
10607-F  
Figure 703-3. Cellworx STN Node Craft Screen Main Menu  
Page 2-62  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-704  
Page 1 of 2  
CONNECT NMS OR X-TERMINAL ETHERNET CABLE TO THE NMIC EIM SNMP PORT  
Summary: This procedure provides instructions for connecting an external Network  
Management System (NMS) or X-Terminal to the NMIC EIM 10 Base-T Ethernet port on the  
NMIC EIM at the rear of the shelf. The cable from customer monitoring equipment (X-Term,  
etc.) must be equipped with an RJ45X LAN connector. The function of the 10 Base-T Ethernet  
port is to provide the System Administrator with capabilities of monitoring system and network  
alarms, provisioning virtual paths/connections, and performing maintenance and provisioning  
functions. The connection will allow access to either NMIC using a shared IP address, or an  
individual NMIC using a NMIC specific IP address.  
Caution: Modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling any  
modules connect your wrist to an equipment ground using an approved anti-static wrist  
strap. Ensure that all un-installed modules are stored in anti-static packing material.  
When working with modules, always place the module on an electrically grounded  
approved anti-static mat.  
1. If not already equipped and verified, equip the customer LAN cable with an RJ45X male  
connector and verify the connector wiring per Figure 704-1.  
2. Route the LAN cable to the lower right side of the Cellworx STN shelf (facing the rear), to  
terminate at the working NMIC EIM in slot 2. Refer to Figure 704-2. If the NMIC EIM is  
not installed, you must first perform the installation procedure for this module. Refer to the  
Installation Manual listed in the Related Publications section in the preface of this  
document, and then return to this procedure.  
3. Dress in the cable leaving enough slack to reach the RJ45X jack on the EIM. Cable ties  
may be used to attach the cables to the tie bar along the bottom of the air intake baffle.  
Verify that enough strain relief and maintenance loop are provided.  
4. Seat the RJ45X connector into the NMIC EIM RJ45X LAN jack. Verify the latch catches  
by gently tugging once or twice on the cable.  
5. The NMS end of the cable should then be connected to the X-terminal per local practices.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
PIN  
FUNCTION  
TRANSMIT +  
TRANSMIT  
RECEIVE +  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
RECEIVE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
RJ45 JACK  
10529-A  
Figure 704-1. NMIC EIM RJ45 Jack Pin Out  
Page 2-63  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-704  
Page 2 of 2  
S
S
WORKING NMIC EIM  
IN SLOT 2.  
B
E
S
R
M
D
D
A
F
L
B
E
S
H
L
S
B
E
S
P
1
P
M
Y
T
F
E
L
1
1
E
B
H
S
S
L
A
UD  
NO  
A
UD  
UD  
NC  
CO  
M
V
IS  
VIS NC  
N
O
RJ45 PORT FOR  
SNMP/GUI  
V
IS  
C
OM  
A
UD  
NO  
NC  
A
UD  
A
UD COM  
T CO  
M
F AlLARM  
URN  
V
IS  
N
O
VIS NC  
J6  
V
U  
U  
IS  
C
D
D
OM  
N
O
N
C
UD COM  
U
2
I
IS  
IS  
IS COM  
NO  
NC  
O
N
O
P IN  
ETURN  
KP IN  
URN  
1
2
3
O NC  
C
OM  
N
O
T
T NC  
C
OM  
J
6
AlLARM  
U  
RN  
P  
IN  
RN  
IN  
1
2
3
U  
HIN  
RN  
N  
N  
H
R
RN  
HS  
N  
4
4
J
2
-48 VDC  
Return  
A
}
5
6
T
KP  
R
HS  
RE  
I
R
I
R
IN  
R
P
R
J2  
TU  
KP  
TU  
-48 VDC  
Return  
HS  
RE  
B
}
AC  
RE  
O
TU  
Sig Gnd  
BIT  
S
Frm  
G
nd  
BITS PR
BIT  
S
S
E
IP  
BITS SENG  
DS  
1
1
T
X1  
P  
G
DS  
DS  
T
T
X1  
X2  
1
DS  
1
T
X2  
N  
G
10569-B  
J
1
Figure 704-2. NMIC EIM LAN Port Connection  
Page 2-64  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-705  
Page 1 of 2  
LAUNCH THE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI)  
Summary: This procedure describes the processes involved to successfully logon to the system  
and launch the Graphical User Interface (GUI).  
1. Verify the IP address set on the NMIC using a “ping” command to both NMIC IP addresses  
by typing: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx = 255 or less) to ensure both EIMs are operational.  
The pings should display on the screen. If the ping delays returning a response and times  
out, check Ethernet connection cabling and also verify the correct NMIC IP address was  
entered.  
2. Establish a Telnet session to the active NMIC using the customer defined IP address set in  
DLP-703 (or set up a connection name on X-Terminal for the particular NMIC and select  
it.)  
3. Export the display to the X-Terminal IP address using this command:  
export DISPLAY=<hostname>:0.0  
Note: Hostname is the IP address of the workstation. To determine the IP address of the  
host, see your system administrator.  
5. A log on screen appears prompting the user to enter a login name and password. If this is  
the first time the system has been turned up, the name should be “root”. The password is  
user defined and should be the same as the one selected in DLP-703.  
6. The Graphical User interface (GUI) can be launched once the connection is established by  
entering “CellworxVision”. It may take a few moments for the GUI to come up. When it  
does, it will request a list of NEs and fiber fragments and will display them (if they have  
been discovered previously) as a network view as shown in the example in Figure 705-1. A  
window appears on the GUI that indicates the tasks that the GUI is performing in the  
background. This window is not needed by the user and may be closed by selecting the  
Close button.  
7. If performing initial turn up of a new ring network, the NE and Fiber Fragment requests  
will both return empty since a discovery has not previously been requested on the new  
NMIC. The system is now ready for initial turn-up. Return to NTP.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-65  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-705  
Page 2 of 2  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
GNE-1  
X
Cellworx Vision : Ready  
Initializing trap receiver...  
Building topology m,ain window...  
Constructing the network ring...  
Retrieving topology information...  
** This may take some time**  
- Determining NE IDs and type  
- Scanning fiber 1  
NE-2  
-Scanning fiber fragments  
- Scanning fiber 2  
-Scanning fiber fragments  
- Determining STN-EPS mapping  
No network elements found in database.  
Activating connection between PSM and GUI...  
Ready.  
Exit GUI  
Close  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 23:30 GMT Time: 23:30  
11723-D  
Figure 705-1. NMIC GUI Network Display (example)  
Page 2-66  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 1 of 11  
PERFORM DISCOVERY ON A NEW CELLWORX STN RING NETWORK  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully turn-up and discover a  
new Cellworx STN ring network. Discover is the term used to initiate a search by the GUI to find  
all ring nodes that are connected and powered up in the network. This procedure assumes the  
user has gained access to and launched the Graphical User interface (GUI), and the list of NEs  
and fiber fragments has been returned empty (no NE Icons displayed on the screen).  
Prerequisites to system Turn-up are as follows:  
•
•
•
The X-Terminal must be functional and have launched the Cellworx STN GUI.  
All nodes in the network must have fibers connected, and be powered on.  
All nodes in the network must have the working SC EIM shelf address set for individual  
identification (Refer to the Installation Manual listed in the preface of this document.)  
Note: User navigates through the GUI menus using the mouse, or by using the Alt plus  
the underlined letters in the menus and then the arrow keys to scroll up, down, or across.  
Refer to the Graphical User Interface Operation in Section 2 of this document.  
1. When the GUI is launched for the first time, a pop-up message informs the user to “Turn-  
up Ring”. Refer to Figure 706-1. Select OK. The only user options available on the GUI  
screen prior to initial turn-up are the pull down menus File − Exit, or Configuration −  
Topology − Turn-Up Ring. The Help − Contact and About menus are selectable at all  
times and will display the information shown in Figures 706-2 and 706-3 respectively.  
Another window always appears on the GUI screen showing the tasks the software is  
performing in the background. This window may be closed by selecting the close button.  
2. Click the left mouse button on the Configuration pull down menu to open it.  
3. Next, click the left mouse button on Topology on the pull down menu.  
4. Next, click the left mouse button on the Turn-Up Ring option. User may also elect to use  
the alt key options Alt+C, Alt+T, and Alt+T. Refer to Figure 706-4.  
5. The Select Network Elements window appears as shown in Figure 706-5. Select the  
identifiers (01 through 50) of the ring nodes only (not expansion shelves) in a sequential  
order as they are physically connected around the ring. The sequence entered will be  
displayed in the Order of Connectivity area of the window. If an id is entered in the wrong  
sequence, the user must hit Clear and enter the entire sequence again.  
6. Once the sequence is entered correctly, hit Next. A confirmation window appears with a list  
of the shelf ids entered, reflecting the physical connection in the network. Refer to Figure  
706-6. The last NE address entered will indicate that it is connected to the first NE entered  
to form a ring network.  
Page 2-67  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 2 of 11  
7. Verify that the NE id sequence is correct and hit Next. If sequence is wrong hit Previous  
and return to step 5.  
8. The Current Status window appears as shown in Figure 706-7. If the NEs have previously  
booted, the status shows “NE booted, Select software image”. See Figure 706-8. If so  
double click on each NE using the left mouse button and go to step 10, otherwise, all NEs  
status should read “Waiting for NE to boot”. “Waiting for all NEs to boot” is displayed at  
the bottom of the window. Follow the instructions at the top of the window.  
9. When each NE completes the boot process, select each NE by double clicking on it using  
the left mouse button  
Note: It is necessary to open the Install Software window for each NE so the NMIC can  
verify the status of the RICs and the software selections to be loaded on them.  
10. The Install Software Load window for the selected NE appears displaying the cards  
equipped in each slot of the shelf, and the current running software versions. See Figure  
706-9. If the screen is opened immediately following boot up, it is possible that the SCs  
will not have had time to discover the cards in the shelf and the screen will appear empty  
(except for the SCs). Select a software image for the RIC cards by selecting and holding the  
right mouse button on the row of the card to be loaded. A pop-up window appears  
displaying any images for that card that are stored on the NMIC.  
11. Select a software version displayed in the pop-up window and release the mouse button.  
The version is now listed in the Selected Software Image column on the right.  
12. Repeat the software image selection for the remaining RIC card and any AIC cards that  
need to be configured. Once all new images have been chosen, select Apply. Selecting  
Apply before choosing software images brings up the instructional window shown in Figure  
706-10. Selecting the Clear Selected button will reset all selected software images leaving  
the last column blank. Refresh can be selected periodically to update all information in the  
window. Selecting Cancel will close the window and no software versions will be changed.  
13. Select Refresh periodically until the selected software image becomes the running software  
image. This may take up to twenty minutes per NE dependent upon card configuration in  
the shelf, number of NEs in the ring, distance between NEs, etc.  
14. Once the software images have been configured successfully, the confirmation pop-up  
window appears. Refer to Figure 706-11. This window appears immediately after Apply is  
selected but it does not indicate that the RICs have booted. Select OK and then Cancel the  
Install Software Load window.  
15. The Current Status window reappears and the NE status changes to “RICs have booted, NE  
eligible for discovery”. Repeat steps 10 through 16 for each NE configured, then continue  
to step 17.  
Page 2-68  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 3 of 11  
16. Once the last NE has gone through the Install Software Image window and all RICs have  
booted successfully, the message window shown in Figure 706-12 appears. This window  
informs the user that all RICs have booted and that the network is ready for discovery. The  
Initiate Discovery button on the Current Status window is now enabled.  
17. Select Initiate Discovery. The status for the NEs changes one at a time from “NE eligible  
for discovery” to “Discovering NE”. Once the discovery process is completed on an NE,  
the status changes to “NE discovered”. Refer to Figure 706-13 for an example of NE-1  
completing discovery, NE-2 in process of discovery, and NE-3 awaiting discovery.  
18. When the discovery is completed on all NEs, the system draws them in a ring configuration  
on the screen according to their connectivity. To redraw the layout of the Icons before  
saving the system drawn layout, select the arrow tool on the toolbar on the left side of the  
screen, click on and drag the NEs to the desired position on the screen, and release the left  
mouse button. See Figure 706-14.  
19. The Icons now stay positioned in the new locations and maintain the highlighted  
connection between them. This capability enables the user to group NEs that may be  
collocated or separate them according to their geographical locations. The user may also  
return the icons to their original positions on the screen by selecting the Configuration pull  
down menu, Topology, and Revert to Saved ICON Layout or Alt+C, Alt+T and Alt+V.  
Refer to Figure 706-15.  
20. To save the icon layout displayed on the screen, select File and Save Icon Layout (Alt+F  
and Alt+S), or use the diskette icon on the tool bar. See Figure 706-16.  
21. The confirmation window appears as shown in Figure 706-17. Select OK. The newly drawn  
Icon layout will remain this way each time the GUI is launched, until the layout is redrawn  
and saved again.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-69  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 4 of 11  
X
Cellworx Vision : Warning  
No network elements were discovered. Please choose the  
"Turn - up Ring" option under the Configuration - Subnetwork  
submenu.  
!
!
OK  
11761-A  
Figure 706-1. Cellworx Vision Turn-up Ring Warning Window  
X
X
Cellworx Vision Contact Information  
About Cellworx Vision  
N
InfoVision  
AWARD  
T
T
1999  
Operator: 1-800-366-3891  
Internet: www.adc.com  
CellworxSTN - A.C - 70.2.0  
c
Copyright  
1997 - 2000,  
ADC Telecommunications,  
All Right Reserved  
Telephone: Extension 3434 Customer Service Dept.  
CLEI : 0123456789  
Catalog Number : STN-01234567890  
Part Number : 0123456789  
Serial Number : 0123456789  
Manufacturing Date : 0123  
Telephone: Extension 4878 Technical Assistance Center  
Email: technical@adc.com  
OK  
OK  
10909-E  
10886-D  
Figure 706-2. Cellworx Vision Help Contact Window  
Figure 706-3. Cellworx Vision Help About Window  
Page 2-70  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 5 of 11  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance Accounting Security  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Add Ring Network Element  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
11012-E  
Figure 706-4. Cellworx Vision Turn-up Ring Pull Down Menus  
X
Cellworx Vision: Select Network Elements  
Please select the ring network elements in an order in which they are  
physically connected. Do not select expansion shelf network elements.  
01  
11  
21  
31  
41  
03  
13  
23  
33  
43  
04  
14  
24  
34  
44  
05  
15  
25  
35  
45  
06  
16  
26  
36  
46  
07  
17  
27  
37  
47  
08  
18  
28  
38  
48  
09  
19  
29  
39  
49  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
02  
12  
22  
32  
42  
Order of Connectivity:  
Clear  
Cancel  
Next >>  
10990-B  
Figure 706-5. Cellworx Vision Select Network Elements Window  
Page 2-71  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 6 of 11  
X
Cellworx Vision: Current Status  
Please verify that the order of network elements  
matches the order of physical connection:  
1 2 3 1  
<< Prev  
Next>>  
11013-B  
Figure 706-6. Cellworx Vision NE Order Verification  
X
Cellworx Vision: Current Status  
As each NE boots, configure the software load for that NE  
by double-clicking on the corresponding NE ID in the listbox.  
If the NE has not booted, double-clicking will attempt to  
force boot-up.  
Network elem ent ID: 1  
w aiting for NE to boot...  
Network elem ent ID: 2  
Network elem ent ID: 3  
w aiting for NE to boot...  
NE booted. Select softw are im age.  
Current status: Waiting for all NEs to boot...  
Cancel  
Initiate Discovery  
Refresh  
10910-C  
Figure 706-7. Cellworx Vision Current Status Window,  
Waiting for NE to Boot  
Page 2-72  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 7 of 11  
X
Cellworx Vision: Current Status  
As each NE boots, configure the software load for that NE  
by pressing and holding the right mouse button over the  
corresponding line in the listbox.  
NE booted. Select softw are im ages.  
RICs have booted. NE eligible for discovery.  
Waiting for NE to boot. . .  
Network elem ent ID: 1  
Network elem ent ID: 2  
Network elem ent ID: 3  
Current status: Waiting for all NEs to boot . . .  
Cancel  
Refresh  
Initiate Discovery  
10912-B  
Figure 706-8. Cellworx Vision Current Status Window, NE Boot Process  
Page 2-73  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 8 of 11  
X
Cellworx Vision: Select Network Elements  
Press the right mouse button to display the available software images for each card.  
Card Type  
Slot Number (s)  
Running Software Version  
scc.2.0.0.9  
Selected Software Version  
Shelf Controller  
1
155 SM CRS  
12  
oc3sm.2.0.0.10  
16  
17  
18  
622 Ring  
oc12ric.2.0.0.10  
scc.2.0.0.9  
oc12ric.0.4.0.0  
622 Ring  
Shelf Controller  
2.0  
Clear Selected  
Refresh  
Apply  
Cancel  
10901-C D  
Figure 706-9. Cellworx Vision Install Software Load  
X
Cellworx Vision Information  
The apply button configures the NE to initiate software  
download. If this is what you want to do, then please choose a  
software image(s) before selecting this option.  
OK  
10933-B  
Figure 706-10. Cellworx Vision Software Selection Instructional Window  
Page 2-74  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 9 of 11  
X
Cellworx Vision Information  
Sucessfully configured the NE to begin software download for  
the following slots: "16, 17"  
OK  
10934-C  
Figure 706-11. Cellworx Vision Successful Software Image Download Message  
X
Cellworx Vision  
Both Ring Interface Cards in each of the network  
elements have booted.You may now invoke  
discovery to build the ring in the database and  
create the graphical topology view.  
OK  
10935-B  
Figure 706-12. Cellworx Vision NE Eligible for Discovery  
Instructional Window  
X
Cellworx Vision: Current Status  
As each NE boots, configure the software load for that NE  
by pressing and holding the right mouse button over the  
corresponding line in the listbox.  
NE discovered.  
Network elem ent ID: 1  
Network elem ent ID: 2  
Network elem ent ID: 3  
Discovering NE.  
Rics have booted. NE eligible for discovery.  
Current status: Discovering network connectivity...  
Initiate Discovery  
Refresh  
Cancel  
10914-C  
Figure 706-13. Cellworx Vision NE Current Status Window  
Page 2-75  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 10 of 11  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
ICON DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL ALLOWS DIRECT  
SELECTION OF ANY ICON  
IN THE WORK AREA FOR  
DRAG AND PLACEMENT  
POSITIONING.  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
Cellworx NE  
Unknown  
Cellworx NE  
Unknown  
Cellworx NE  
Unknown  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 23:30 GMT Time: 23:30  
11720-D  
Figure 706-14. Cellworx Vision Redrawing ICON Layout  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Add Ring Network Element  
Topology  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
10972-E  
Figure 706-15. Cellworx Vision Redraw Icon Layout Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-76  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-706  
Page 11 of 11  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Ma  
SAVE ICON LAYOUT TOOL  
LOCATED UNDER PULL  
DOWN MENU ON TOOL  
BAR.  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Save Icon Layout ...  
Exit  
11755-B  
Figure 706-16. Save New Icon Coordinates  
X
Cellworx Vision: Question  
Save icon layout?  
NO  
?
YES  
10986-B  
Figure 706-17. Save Icon Layout Confirmation  
Page 2-77  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-707  
Page 1 of 3  
TIME AND DATE  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to set the system clock at the NMIC in  
the Gateway Network Element (GNE). The NMIC maintains the system clock for the entire  
network and supports requests from the system administrator to change the system clock. The  
NMIC synchronizes every NE’s time-of-day clock to the NMIC time-of-day clock.  
1. Using the left mouse button, select the Configuration pull down menu, and then select the  
first item Time and Date (or hit Alt+C, and Alt+D).  
2. Select either Absolute (Alt+A) or Relative (Alt+R) and go to the appropriate heading  
below. Refer to Figure 707-1.  
Note: Absolute allows the user to set the time and date to the absolute time specified.  
This is needed for turn-up or instances when the clock is more than an hour off. Relative  
allows the user to adjust the clock in seconds either forward or backwards, up to one  
hour, when smaller adjustments are needed.  
Absolute  
3. The NMIC Absolute Time Change window appears. See Figure 707-2.  
4. The currently provisioned date and time are displayed. To change any of these parameters,  
use the left mouse button to select the current month, day of the week, year, hour, minute,  
and second by clicking on the up or down arrows beside each data field.  
5. After all selections have been made, select Apply.  
6. Select Refresh to update the new date and time displayed in the window. The new time  
information is automatically downloaded to each NE.  
7. Select Close to return to the Cellworx Vision screen.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Relative  
8. The NMIC Relative Time Change window appears. See Figure 707-3.  
9. The local time and GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) are displayed. To adjust the current local  
time, enter the number in seconds from 1 to 3600 (1-hour) that the clock needs to be  
adjusted.  
10. Select either backward or forward to adjust the time appropriately.  
11. Select Apply to send the new data and adjust the clock.  
Page 2-78  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-707  
Page 2 of 3  
12. Select Refresh to update the current running local and GMT times displayed in the  
window. The new clock information is downloaded automatically to each NE.  
13. Select Close to return to the Cellworx Vision screen.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Absolute  
Relative  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10977-D  
Figure 707-1. Cellworx Vision Time and Date Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-79  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP- 707  
Page 3 of 3  
X
Cellworx Vision: NMIC Absolute Time Change  
Date:  
Feb 5, 1998  
14:28:56  
Local Time:  
GM Time:  
20:28:56  
Configure local time:  
US/Central  
Time Zone:  
14  
28  
56  
Month  
Day  
Hour  
Feb  
5
Minute  
Second  
Year  
1998  
Close  
Refresh  
Apply  
11005-C  
Figure 707-2. Cellworx Vision Absolute Time Change Window  
X
Cellworx Vision: NMIC Relative Time Change  
Local Time:  
GM Time:  
14:28:56  
20:28:56  
(1-3600)  
Enter the time in seconds:  
Direction of change:  
backward  
forward  
Close  
Refresh  
Apply  
11006- C  
Figure 707-3. Cellworx Vision Relative Time Change Window  
Page 2-80  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-708  
Page 1 of 7  
CREATE AN ATM OR CES CONNECTION  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to provision a UBR, CBR or VBR  
connection through the Cellworx STN network. Creating a connection entails selecting the  
originating and terminating NEs, cards, ports, specifying whether the connections are VP, VC,  
CES, UNI, NNI, or a combination of and assigning identifiers and traffic contract types. For  
Frame Relay connections refer to DLP-786, for ATM Multicast connections, refer to DLP-787,  
and for ATM Bundled VC Multicast connections, refer to DLP-790. Traffic contracts will be  
discussed in this procedure but performed elsewhere. Prerequisites of establishing a connection  
are:  
•
•
A discovery must have been performed on the system.  
The connection endpoints hardware (cards/ports) must be provisioned and in service  
(unlocked) per NTP-006.  
Note: User may navigate through the GUI menus using the mouse or by using the Alt  
key plus the underlined letters in the menus simultaneously, and then the arrow keys to  
scroll up, down, or across. Refer to the Graphical User Interface Operation in Section 2  
of this document.  
1. There are three ways to initiate the process of establishing a connection.  
a. Using the left mouse button, select the Configuration pull-down menu, click on  
Connection, and then Create (or press Alt+C, Alt+N, Alt+C.) Refer to Figure 708-1.  
b. Using the Select tool (arrow) on the left toolbar, select the NE where the connection is  
originating by a click and hold on the right mouse button. A pop-up window appears as  
shown in Figure 708-1. Continue holding down the right mouse button and move the  
cursor to select Create Connection. Release the mouse button.  
c. Using the left mouse button, select the connection tool on the toolbar to the left of the  
workspace. Click and hold the left mouse button down on the NE where the connection  
is originating and drag to the destination NE. A line is drawn between the two NEs as the  
crosshair pointer progresses. Refer to Figure 708-2.  
2. The Cellworx Vision Connection Configuration window appears displaying all NEs  
discovered in the network in both the top section and the bottom section of the window.  
Refer to Figure 708-3. Ensure the originating and destination NEs are highlighted, if not,  
select them using the left mouse button.  
3. Enter an identification for the connection in the Connection Name text box using any  
alphanumeric and special characters. This ID should be unique in character so the user can  
discern between it and other connections for management purposes. The IDs assigned here  
will be displayed when viewing connections. System will allow duplicate connection names  
but will also assign a unique ID to the connection if the user does not enter one.  
Page 2-81  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-708  
Page 2 of 7  
4. Following the example shown in Figure 708-3, specify the connection type by left mouse  
clicking on the Connection Type pull down menu and selecting the type desired. The  
window displays the interfaces related to the Connection Type as follows:  
• ATM VP−ATM VP  
• ATM VC−ATM VC  
• CES-ATM VC  
• CES-CES  
• FR-ATM VC  
• FR-FR  
• ATM VP MULTICAST  
• ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
5. Using the left mouse button, select the desired NE, Slot/Card Type, and Interface type for  
the originating and destination endpoints. Click on Next>> using the left mouse button  
unless the connection is a CES-CES where the user should select the Apply button which  
will produce an informational screen stating that the connection was created successfully. If  
provisioning CES-ATM connections, continue, otherwise go to step 7.  
6. When the CES-ATM VC is selected, the Connection Configuration screen shown in Figure  
708-4 appears after selecting Next>> from step 5. The network element identifications for  
both end points are displayed  
7. The screen shown in Figure 708-5 appears after selecting the Next>> button from step 5.  
The two sections below the Connection Name text box of the next window represent the  
two connection points.  
8. If the connection is to be configured as a segment endpoint, select the Segment Endpoint  
box using the left mouse button for both the originating and destination ends. This option  
will enable OAM cell loopback from this point to the originating end for performance  
monitoring capabilities.  
9. Just below the Segment Endpoint boxes under the heading VPI / NE / Rate (Kbps), select  
the VPI number to be assigned for each NE if establishing a VP connection.  
10. To the right the Service Provider Profile is displayed. Fill in the text boxes for each of the  
following parameters:  
•
•
Remote Interface Identifier - a fifteen-digit decimal number identifying the far end  
interface (UNI or B-ICI).  
Remote Connection Identifier - a four-digit VPI or five digit VCI decimal number  
identifying the VCI and/or VPI at the remote interface.  
Page 2-82  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-708  
Page 3 of 7  
•
•
Study Indication - select using the left mouse button. This indicates the usage  
information is to be generated for study purposes.  
Remote Interface Type - select UNI or B-ICI using the left mouse button. This  
selection describes the type of remote interface.  
11. When all of these parameters are filled in for both the originating and the destination NE,  
select Next , except for CES ATM VC connections in which the user selects the Apply  
button to complete the connection.  
12. The next window appears for ATM connections and prompts the user for more information.  
Refer to Figure 708-6. The Connection Name and Type are displayed at the top of the  
window. The Traffic Contract Type needs to be selected dependent upon the type of  
connection selected in the previous windows. For ATM-VP connections, classes selectable  
are CBR (Constant Bit Rate), UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate), UBR.1, RT-VBR 1, 2, or3 (Real  
Time Variable Bit Rate). Or NRT-VBR 1, 2, or 3 (Non-Real Time Variable Bit Rate). For  
ATM-VC connections, NRT-VBR 1, 2, or 3 , or UBR , UBR.1, or CBR are selectable.  
Note: The Cellworx STN system can support any ATM Forum UNI 3.1 based traffic  
contracts. UNI 3.1 uses QoS Classes 0 through 4 to specify the service requirements and  
these can be mapped to Cellworx STN Classes I, II, and Unspecified. The Cellworx STN  
also supports ATMF UNI 4.0 based traffic contracts. UNI 4.0 uses parameterized QoS,  
which can be mapped to STN classes I, II, or Unspecified based on the QoS parameter  
values. There are five traffic contract types (i.e. conformance definitions) for different  
service categories. Table 708-1 shows the relationship between the traffic contract types  
and the QoS class assigned to it in the Cellworx STN.  
Table 708-1. Traffic Policing Attributes for Various Service Categories  
TRAFFIC  
CONTRACT  
TYPES  
PCR  
SCR  
MBS  
TAGGING  
OPTION  
ACTIVE  
QoS  
CBR.1  
VBR.1  
VBR.2  
VBR.3  
UBR  
0 + 1  
Not specified Not specified Not applicable Class I  
0 + 1  
0 + 1  
0 + 1  
0 + 1  
0 + 1  
Not applicable Class II  
0
0
0
0
NO  
Class II  
Class II  
YES  
Not specified Not specified Not specified Not applicable Unspecified  
0+1 Not specified Not applicable Not applicable Unspecified  
UBR.1  
13.  
Next select the Ingress Traffic Contract using the left mouse button. If a traffic contract  
is not available for the connection, double click on NEW to create a traffic contract and go  
to DLP-709. The traffic contract specifies the parameters that determine if the connection is  
actually a CBR, RT or NRT-VBR.1, VBR.2, or VBR.3, UBR, or UBR.1 connection.  
14. Once traffic contract is created, it will appear in the Ingress Traffic Contract window.  
Select the new traffic contract via a single click using the left mouse button.  
Page 2-83  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-708  
Page 4 of 7  
15. Select Apply using the left mouse button to configure the connection. If the traffic contract  
was not selected, a message window will appear asking the user to select a Traffic Contract  
first. If the connection could not be established due to other conditions, a trouble message  
will appear giving more specific error messages.  
16. The system responds with “Configuration Successful”.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management Syste
CREATE CONNECTION  
MENU TREE ACCESS  
USING MOUSE SELECTION  
OR "ALT+C, ALT+N, AND  
ALT+C".  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
NE DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
CREATE A CONNECTION  
TOOL  
NMIC Platform  
NE POP UP WINDOW  
ACCESSED USING THE  
NE DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL. SELECT TOOL  
WITH LEFT MOUSE CLICK,  
POSITION ON AN NE, AND  
CLICK THE RIGHT MOUSE  
BUTTON.  
About...  
Craft Interface...  
Create Connection...  
View Connection...  
Configure Alarm Threshold...  
Configure Software...  
Reflash Boot Image...  
GNE-1  
11718-D  
Figure 708-1. Cellworx Vision GUI Configuration Pull Down Menu  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
CREATE A CONNECTION TOOL  
GNE-1  
DRAWING A CONNECTION  
BETWEEN TWO NEs USING  
THE CREATE A CONNECTION  
TOOL. CLICK AND HOLD LEFT  
BUTTON ON MOUSE OVER  
FIRST NE AND DRAG TO  
DESTINATION NE.  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 21:35 GMT Time: 21:35  
10905-E  
Figure 708-2. Cellworx Vision Click and Drag Connection Creation  
Page 2-84  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-708  
Page 5 of 7  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
Connection Name:  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
ASSIGN A CONNECTION NAME  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
Connection Type: ATM VC - ATM VC  
Please select an endpoint 1 network element.  
Endpoint 1  
SELECT A CONNECTION  
TYPE:VC,VP, FR, OR CES  
Unlocked  
SELECT AN NE FROM  
AVAILABLE LIST FOR  
ORIGINATING CONNECTION  
POINT.  
Network Element: NE-1  
Slot / Card Type:  
Network Interface / Interface Type:  
Slot 11_Port 1 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 11_Port 2 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 12_Port 1 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 12_Port 2 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 13_Port 1 T3 TMUX  
9 T3 CRS  
SELECT THE NETWORK  
INTERFACE CARD AND  
PORT FROM AVAILABLE  
LIST FOR THE ORIGINATING  
CONNECTION ENDPOINT.  
NE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
11 155 SM CRS  
12 155 SM CRS  
13 T3 TMUX  
16 155 SM CRS  
Slot 16_Port 1 Oc3MM / UNI  
Slot 16_Port 2 Oc3MM / UNI  
Slot 9_Port 1 DS3 / UNI  
Slot 9_Port 2 DS3 / UNI  
Slot 9_Port 3 DS3 / UNI  
USE SLIDER BARS TO VIEW  
MORE INTERFACES.  
Endpoint 2  
SELECT AN NE FROM  
AVAILABLE LIST FOR  
DESTINATION CONNECTION  
POINT.  
Slot / Card Type:  
Network Interface / Interface Type:  
Network Element: NE-2  
Slot 10_Port 1 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 10_Port 2 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 11_Port 1 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 11_Port 2 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 12_Port 1 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 12_Port 2 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 13_Port 1 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 13_Port 2 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 3_Port 1 DS3 / UNI  
Slot 3_Port 2 DS3 / UNI  
Slot 3_Port 3 DS3 / UNI  
NE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
3 T3 CRS  
4 T3 CRS  
SELECT THE NETWORK  
INTERFACE CARD AND  
PORT FROM AVAILABLE  
LIST FOR THE DESTINATION  
CONNECTION ENDPOINT.  
5 155 SM CRS  
6 155 SM CRS  
7 T3 TMUX  
10 155 SM CRS  
11 155 SM CRS  
12 155 SM CRS  
13 155 SM CRS  
THE SLOT / CARD TYPE ARE  
THEN DISPLAYED FOR  
SELECTION HERE.  
Close  
Next >>  
10907-C  
Figure 708-3. Cellworx Vision ATM Virtual Connection Configuration Window  
Page 2-85  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-708  
Page 6 of 7  
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
SELECT A CONNECTION  
X
Connection Name: Cellworx1<-->Cellworx1  
Administrative State:  
NAME OR VIEW DISPLAYED  
NAME.  
Locked  
Node Id:  
1
Unlocked  
Location:  
5th Street  
Network Element: Cellworx1  
DS1: Slot8_Port2 DS!CESUNI  
DISPLAYS CES PORT  
DISPLAYS ATM PORT  
Network Element: Cellworx1  
NNI: Slot6_Port1 OC3MM  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
SETS AS SEGMENT  
ENDPOINT  
Egress NDC  
FAR END LEC  
INTERFACE ID.  
ENABLES NETWORK DATA  
COLLECTION FOR INBOUND  
OR OUTBOUND TRAFFIC.  
VCI / NE / Rate (Kbps)  
Service Provider Profile  
Page  
1
Remote Interface Identifier:  
FAR END LEC  
VPORVC ID.  
VPI / NE / Rate (Kbps)  
Remote Connection Identifier:  
VCI:  
VPI:  
0
0
0
1
GENERATES USAGE  
INFORMATION FOR  
STUDY PURPOSES.  
Study Indication  
Close  
<<Previous  
Apply  
APPLYS CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CONNECTION  
CONFIGURATION SCREEN.  
CLOSES AND RETURNS TO  
PREVIOUS SCREEN.  
Figure 708-4. CES - ATM VP Connection Configuration Window  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
SELECT A CONNECTION NAME  
OR VIEW DIPLAYED NAME.  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
Connection Name:  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
Unlocked  
Connection Type: ATM VP - ATM VP  
VERIFY NE AND INTERFACES  
LISTED HERE.  
Network Element: NE-1  
UNI: S-13P-1:L-atm:1-1  
SPECIFY IF A CONNECTION  
IS A SEGMENT ENDPOINT.  
ENABLES NETWORK  
DATA COLLECTION  
FOR INBOUND OR  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
OUTBOUND TRAFFIC.  
VPI / NE / Rate (Kbps):  
Service Provider Profile  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FAR END LEC  
INTERFACE ID.  
Remote Interface Identifier:  
Remote Connection Identifier:  
SELECT THE VP DESIRED.  
USE THE SLIDER BAR TO  
VIEW MORE SELECTIONS.  
FAR END LEC  
VP OR VC ID.  
VCI:  
VPI:  
Study Indication  
Remote Interface Type:  
GENERATES USAGE  
INFORMATION FOR  
STUDY PURPOSES.  
FAR END LEC  
INTERFACE TYPE.  
UNI  
BICI  
FR UNI  
Network Element: NE-2  
UNI: S-8:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
Segment Endpoint  
VPI / NE / Rate (Kbps):  
Service Provider Profile  
Remote Interface Identifier:  
Remote Connection Identifier:  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAME AS ABOVE FOR  
DESTINATION NE.  
SAME AS ABOVE FOR  
DESTINATION NE.  
VCI:  
VPI:  
Study Indication  
Remote Interface Type:  
UNI  
BICI  
FR UNI  
Close  
Previous  
Next >>  
10904-Cd  
Figure 708-5. Cellworx Vision Connection Configuration Window  
Page 2-86  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-708  
Page 7 of 7  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
DISPLAYS NAME AND TYPE  
OF SELECTED CONNECTION.  
Connection Name:  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
Locked  
Unlocked  
Connection Type: ATM VP - ATM VP  
VERIFY INTERFACE AND VPI  
BEING CONFIGURED.  
NE-1  
UNI: ds1ces: S-3: P-3: L-atm: I-1 VPI: 1  
Service Class Type  
CBR  
SELECT A QOS CLASS.  
Ingress Traffic Contract:  
<NEW>  
SELECT A TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
FROM AVAILABLE LIST OR  
SELECT NEW TO CREATE A  
NEW TRAFFIC CONTRACT.  
VERIFY DESTINATION INTERFACE  
AND VPI BEING CONFIGURED.  
NE-1  
UNI: Slot8:Port1 OC3SM VPI: 5  
Service Class Type  
CBR  
SELECT A QOS CLASS.  
Ingress Traffic Contract:  
<NEW>  
SELECT A TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
FROM AVAILABLE LIST OR  
SELECT NEW TO CREATE A  
NEW TRAFFIC CONTRACT FOR  
DESTINATION NE. SAME TRAFFIC  
CONTRACT CAN BE USED FOR  
BOTH NEs.  
SELECT APPLY TO CONFIGURE  
THE NEW CONNECTION.  
Close  
<< Previous  
Apply  
Refresh  
14452-A  
Figure 708-6. Cellworx Vision ATM Virtual Path Connection Configuration  
Page 2-87  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-709  
Page 1 of 4  
CONFIGURE OR DELETE A TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps necessary to successfully navigate the Cellworx  
Vision Graphical User Interface and create or delete a traffic contract. A traffic contract defines  
the service class type (CBR, VBR, or UBR), data rate, and Quality of Service (QoS) and must be  
specified for each Virtual Channel Connection (VCC) or Virtual Path Connection (VPC)  
established. Multiple VCCs or VPCs may share a common traffic contract. Once a traffic  
contract has been created it cannot be changed. It must be deleted and recreated.  
Create a Traffic Contract  
1. Access the Traffic Contract Configuration using the left mouse button by selecting New  
from Create Connection DLP-708, or select Configuration, Connection, and Configure  
Traffic Contract, or by using the direct selection keys, Alt+C, Alt+N then Alt+T. Refer to  
Figure 709-1.  
2. The Traffic Contract Configuration window appears. Refer to Figure 709-2. Enter  
identification for the contract being created in the Traffic Contract Name text box.  
Note: Any existing contracts are displayed in the box just below the Traffic Contract  
Name box. These may be selected to configure a new contract using existing parameters.  
To do this, single click on one of the contracts and enter a new name in the box above,  
then select Apply at the bottom of the window.  
3. Select a Service Class Type from the available classes displayed. See Table 709-1.  
4. Select options for the traffic contract from available parameters per work order. Some of  
these parameters will not be selectable depending on the Service Class Type selected. Refer  
to Table 709-1 for selectable options for each Service Class Type.  
Table 709-1. User Selectable Service Class Types and Parameters  
SERVICE CLASS TYPE  
SELECTABLE PARAMETERS  
COMMENTS  
ATM CBR, QoS Class I  
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) Kbps  
Card type and contract dependent.  
Cell Loss Priority (CLP) = 0 + 1 QoS Class I defined, not selectable.  
ATM VBR, QoS Class II  
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) Kbps  
Card type and contract dependent, CLP always  
equals 0+1.  
Sustained cell rate (SCR)  
Cell Loss Priority (CLP)  
Card type and contract dependent.  
Determines if SCR connection is a VBR.1  
(CLP=0+1) or VBR.2 (CLP=0).  
Tagging  
Determines if SCR connection is a VBR.2 (No)  
or VBR.3 (Yes).  
Maximum Burst Size (MBS)  
Predetermined selectable values of 32, 50, 100,  
150, or 210. See note below.  
ATM UBR, QoS Class  
Unspecified  
None  
Select PCR for UBR.1, PCR must be blank for  
UBR.  
Page 2-88  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-709  
Page 2 of 4  
Note: Three traffic descriptors must be provided for the connections to set the cell  
transfer characteristics: Peak Cell Rate (PCR), Sustained Cell Rate (SCR), and  
Maximum Burst Size (MBS). The PCR is the highest available cell transfer rate for VBR  
connections, or the continuous cell transfer rate for CBR connections. SCR defines the  
sustained cell transfer rate for VBR connections that may fluctuate up to the PCR for a  
burst length of MBS cells. MBS is what defines the maximum number of cells in a  
single burst that can be transmitted above the SCR and up to the PCR in a VBR  
connection. SCR and MBS are not applicable to CBR connections. Valid values for MBS  
are 32, 50, 100, 150, and 210, and relate to the incoming packet size from the customer  
premises equipment.  
5. After selecting the parameters for the new traffic contract, select Apply using the left mouse  
button.  
6. A completion window appears stating the Traffic contract was created successfully. The  
contract name will be displayed in this window. Refer to Figure 709-3. Select OK.  
7. If the contract name is already in use, the message window shown in Figure 709-4 will  
appear.  
Delete a Traffic Contract  
8. To delete an existing traffic contract, access the Traffic Contract window per step 1. Select  
a contract by single clicking the left mouse button with the cursor on the desired contract.  
9. Select Delete at the bottom of the window.  
10. A confirmation message window appears as shown in Figure 709-5. Select OK.  
Note: Traffic contracts cannot be removed if they are in use.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10980-D  
Figure 709-1. Cellworx Vision Configure a Traffic Contract Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-89  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-709  
Page 3 of 4  
X
Cellworx Vision:Traffic Contract Configuration  
TYPE IN A NAME FOR  
TRAFFIC CONTRACT.  
Traffic Contract Name:  
********  
OR  
Existing Traffic Contract:  
SELECT FROM EXISTING  
TRAFFIC CONTRACTS  
DISPLAYED HERE.  
SELECT THE SERVICE  
CLASS TYPE OR VERIFY  
ENABLED OPTION.  
Traffic Contract Type  
ATM Constant Bit Rate (CBR), QoS Class I  
ATM Variable Bit Rate (VBR), QoS Class II  
ATM Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR), QoS Class Unspecified  
FR, QoS Class II  
Kbps  
Rate Unit  
SELECT KBPS OR CELLS  
ENTER THE PCR FOR ATM  
CBR QOS CLASS 1, AND  
ATM VBR QOS CLASS II.  
Peak Cell Rate (PCR):  
64  
Cell Loss Priority (CLP) = 0 +1  
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance  
0
Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) Kbps:  
SELECT OPTIONS TO  
DETERMINE SERVICE  
CLASS TYPE FOR VBR  
CONNECTIONS (VBR.1,  
VBR.2, OR VBR.3).  
CLP=0  
CLP= 0 + 1  
Tagging  
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) Cells:  
210  
Close  
Next >>  
Apply  
Delete  
11010-E  
Figure 709-2. Cellworx Vision Configure Traffic Contract Window  
X
Cellworx Vision  
Traffic Contract ********** created successfully.  
OK  
10937-A  
Figure 709-3. Cellworx Vision Traffic Contract Configuration Completed  
Page 2-90  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-709  
Page 4 of 4  
X
Cellworx Vision:  
Traffic Contract ********** already exists.  
OK  
10954-A  
Figure 709-4. Cellworx Vision Traffic Contract Already Exists Denial Message  
X
Cellworx Vision  
Delete selected traffic contract?  
?
Cancel  
OK  
10983-A  
Figure 709-5. Cellworx Vision traffic Contract Deletion Confirmation Message  
Page 2-91  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-710  
Page 1 of 6  
VIEW CONNECTIONS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps necessary to successfully navigate the Cellworx  
Vision Graphical User Interface to view the established connections. The connection information  
can be used for checking new connections, viewing existing connections, or to view possible  
connection problems on the ring. For multicast connections, refer to DLP-791.  
1. Access the Subnetwork Connection Filter window using one of the following methods:  
a. Using the left mouse button, select Configuration, Connection, and View.  
Refer to Figure 710-1.  
b. Using the direct selection keys, enter Alt+C, Alt+N then Alt+V. Refer to  
Figure 710-1.  
c. Using the right mouse button, position the cursor over the NE, click and hold  
the button, select View Connections, and release the button.  
d. Using the left mouse button, select the connection icon above the workspace.  
2. The Subnetwork Connection Filter window appears. Refer to Figure 710-2. Select a topic to  
filter information from using the folder tabs shown. These topics allow the user to retrieve  
only the information desired by Connection type, Network available, Traffic contract, or  
ATM traffic by port. The user may also specify all of these by using the All checkbox.  
Refer to Table 710-1 for descriptions of each filter type.  
3. Once the desired information is selected, select Apply using the left mouse button.  
4. The Subnetwork Connections window appears as shown in the example in Figure 710-3.  
The information can be displayed alphabetically by the connection name or by the NE  
name by using the Filter pull down menu. The status column indicates the most current  
information for the connection. The status may be listed as INCOMPLETE,  
FUNCTIONAL, or as an UNKNOWN STATE. This screen displays up to 100 entries per  
page by using the up and down slide button on the right side of the window. If more than  
100 entries are available for viewing, the user may use the Page slide button at the top right  
corner of the window to select additional pages.  
5. If a connection is displayed as INCOMPLETE, the user may select it and then select Retry  
to attempt to establish the connection.  
6. The user may delete a connection, or multiple connections, by selecting them using the left  
mouse button, and then selecting Delete. A confirmation message will appear as shown in  
Figure 710-4 which requires the user to select OK or Cancel. If a problem exists with the  
hardware between the NMIC and the endpoints shelf controllers, a denial message may  
appear detailing why the connection could not be deleted. Refer to DLP-713 and the trouble  
log for any error reports.  
Page 2-92  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-710  
Page 2 of 6  
7. To gain status information of a certain connection, the user double clicks on the connection  
using the left mouse button, or single clicks to highlight the connection followed by  
selecting Status at the bottom left of the window.  
8.  
The Subnetwork Connection Status window appears. Refer to Figure 710-5. The  
connection name is displayed at the top of the window. The administrative state may show  
as Locked or Unlocked. Locked indicates the connection is taken down at both ends, no  
traffic is allowed on the ring. Unlocked indicates the connection is operable in a normal  
state. The user may change options on the connection by selecting Configure. Access to the  
Configure screen can also be obtained from the previous Subnetwork Connection screen via  
the Configure selection button.  
9. The Subnetwork Connection Configuration screen appears. Refer to Figure 710-6. Again  
the connection name is displayed at the top of the window. The connection can be taken  
down by changing the Administrative State to Locked using the button at the top right  
corner of the window and then selecting Apply.  
10. The administrator can configure either or both ends of the connection as OAM cell segment  
endpoints by selecting the Segment Endpoint box displayed at each end of the connection.  
This functionality can be used for maintenance or troubleshooting purposes. Select Apply to  
send configuration changes to the database or close to abort any changes.  
11. Depending on what type of connection was selected, certain fields may be grayed out and  
not configurable. For options available for subnetwork connection configurations, refer to  
Table 710-2.  
12. The configuration change completed window appears. Select OK.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10963-D  
Figure 710-1. Cellworx Vision Connection Menu Tree  
Page 2-93  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-710  
Page 3 of 6  
X
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Connection Filter  
SELECT A TAB TO FILTER  
Network  
Traffic  
FR  
ATM  
CES  
Connection  
FOR A SPECIFIC ITEM.  
Connection Types:  
SELECT AN ITEM IN THE  
FOLDERS TO FILTER.  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES - ATM VC  
CES - CES  
FR - ATM VC  
FR - FR  
ATM VP MULTICAST  
ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Retrieve All Selected Type Connections  
SELECT THE APPLY BUTTON  
TO RETRIEVE CONNECTION  
INFO FOR FILTERED  
SELECTION.  
Close  
Reset  
Apply  
11000-F  
Figure 710-2. Subnetwork Connection Filter Window  
Table 710-1. Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connection Filter Descriptions  
FILTER TYPE  
Connection  
OPTIONS  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES -VC  
DESCRIPTION  
Selects all ATM VP connections.  
Selects all ATM VC connections.  
Selects all Circuit Emulation Service to ATM Virtual  
Channel connections.  
CES - CES  
Selects all Circuit Emulation Service connections  
(Phase II).  
FR-ATM VC  
FR-FR  
Frame Relay not supported for Release 3.1 software  
packages.  
ATM VP Multicast  
Selects all virtual path connections that have multiple  
endpoints associated with them.  
ATM Bundled VC  
Multicast  
Selects all virtual path connections that have multiple  
endpoints associated with them and bundled virtual  
circuits contained in the path.  
Network  
Administrator defined. Allows user to specify certain NEs when filtering  
connections.  
(continued)  
Page 2-94  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-710  
Page 4 of 6  
Table 710-1. Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connection Filter Descriptions, continued  
FILTER TYPE  
Traffic  
OPTIONS  
DESCRIPTION  
Administrator defined. Selects the traffic contract to be queried. These are  
user-defined names. Several connections may utilize the  
same traffic contract.  
ATM  
FR  
Administrator defined. Selects the UNI or NNI to be queried. These are user-  
defined names and apply to specific ports.  
Administrator defined. Selects the frame relay UNI to be queried. These are  
user-defined names and apply to specific ports.  
X
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connections  
Format View  
Connection Type: ATM VP - ATM VP  
1
Page  
Connection Name  
NE - NE  
Status  
***********1  
***********2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
Incomplete  
Functional  
***********3  
Unknown State  
Status...  
Configure...  
Delete  
Retry  
Close  
11003-B  
Figure 710-3. Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connections Screen  
Page 2-95  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-710  
Page 5 of 6  
X
Cellworx Vision  
Delete selected connection?  
?
Cancel  
OK  
10982-A  
Figure 710-4. Cellworx Vision Connection Deletion Confirmation Window  
X
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connection Status  
Connection Name :  
****************  
Connection Type : ATM VP - ATM VP  
Administrative State: Unlocked  
Network Element: NE-1  
UNI/NNI: Slot -13:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
VPI: 4  
Traffic Contract: ****  
Administrative State: Locked  
Network Element: NE-2  
UNI/NNI: Slot-8:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
VPI: 5  
Traffic Contract: ****  
Administrative State : Locked  
Close  
Configure...  
11001-C  
Figure 710-5. Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connection Status Window  
Page 2-96  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-710  
Page 6 of 6  
X
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connection Configuration  
Connection Name :  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
****************  
Connection Type : ATM VP - ATM VP  
Unlocked  
Network Element: NE-1  
UNI/NNI: Slot13_Port1 OC3MM  
VPI:  
1
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
No Test  
Test Type:  
1111111111111111  
Towards Acess Facility  
Loopback Location ID:  
Insert Loopback Cells:  
Test Status: None  
Test Status  
Abort test  
Network Element: NE-2  
UNI/NNI: Slot2_Port1 OC3MM  
VPI:  
4
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
Test Type:  
No Test  
1111111111111111  
Towards Acess Facility  
Loopback Location ID:  
Insert Loopback Cells:  
Test Status: None  
Test Status  
Abort test  
Apply  
Close  
10995-B  
Figure 710-6. Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connection Configuration Window  
Table 710-2. Sub-network Connection Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
OPTIONS  
DESCRIPTION  
Segment Endpoint  
Single selection box  
Sets this end of the connection as a segment endpoint  
for OAM cells.  
Ingress / Egress  
NDC  
On or Off  
Enables or disables the network data collection for  
selected circuit.  
Test Type  
End to End OAM  
Segment OAM  
Continuity Check Source  
Continuity Check Sync  
No Test  
No test is currently being administered.  
Loopback Location  
ID  
Customer assigned  
Used to loopback the incoming signal and transmit it  
back to the customer equipment. The code is limited to  
16 numeric characters.  
Insert Loopback  
Cells  
Towards Access Facility Defines the direction for the cells to be transmitted.  
Towards Ring Facility  
Test Status  
None  
Test is not currently active.  
Test is currently in progress.  
Active  
Page 2-97  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-711  
Page 1 of 1  
LOG OFF OF CELLWORX STN GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE  
Summary: This procedure outlines the steps required to log off of the Cellworx STN GUI.  
1. Select the File pull down menu at the top of the screen using the mouse or Alt+F on the  
keyboard. Refer to Figure 711-1.  
2. Select Exit using the mouse or the Alt+X keys. The user may also select the door icon  
next to the disk on the tool bar to exit.  
3. If the icons were rearranged (redrawn) during the logon session, a “Save icon before  
exiting?” window appears. Refer to Figure 711-2. Select Yes. The software updates the  
latest icon coordinates and exits the GUI session, otherwise, the Exit Cellworx  
confirmation window appears. Refer to Figure 711-3. Select Yes to exit.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Save Icon Layout ...  
Exit  
GNE-1  
10920-C  
Figure 711-1. Cellworx Vision File Pull Down Menu  
X
X
Cellworx Vision Question  
Cellworx Vision Question  
Save icon layout before exiting?  
Exit Cellworx?  
?
?
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
10985-C  
10984-C  
Figure 711-2. Save Icon Coordinates  
Figure 711-3. Exit Confirmation Menu  
Page 2-98  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-712  
Page 1 of 8  
ADD EXPANSION SHELVES (STN-EPS)  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully add Cellworx STN  
expansion nodes (STN-EPSs) into an existing the network. These nodes are referred to as  
secondary nodes and are connected to primary nodes to expand access capabilities. This  
procedure assumes the user has gained access to and launched the Graphical User interface  
(GUI), and the primary NEs and fiber fragments have been discovered. Prerequisites to system  
Turn-up are as follows:  
•
•
•
The user must have accessed the system and launched the Cellworx STN GUI.  
All nodes in the network must have fibers connected, and have been powered on.  
All nodes in the network must have the working SC EIM shelf address set for individual  
identification (Refer to the Installation Manual listed in the preface of this document.)  
•
The EPS node must have the shelf type set properly. Refer to the installation manual  
listed in the preface of this document.  
Note: User may use the mouse to navigate through the GUI menus or by using the Alt +  
the underlined letters in the menus and then the arrow keys to scroll up down or across.  
Refer to the Graphical User Interface Operation in Section 2 of this document.  
1. Using the left mouse button, select Configuration, Topology, and Add Expansion Shelf  
Network Element (or using the direct selection keys, Alt+C, Alt+T then Alt+E). Refer to  
Figure 712-1.  
2. The Add EPS NE Task Overview window appears. Refer to Figure 712-2. This window  
keeps the user informed of the progress of adding the STN-EPS shelf. During certain tasks  
(indicated in process by the pointing finger), a dialog window will appear requesting  
certain information. First, during task number one, the Add EPS NE-Enter Identifier  
window appears as shown in Figure 712-3. Using the left mouse button, click, hold, and  
drag the slide bar to select the ring node ID that the EPS is connected to. Then do the same  
on the Expansion node slide bar to select the EPS shelf ID number. Valid values are 1  
through 50 and should reflect the IDs set via the rotary switches on the protect SC EIM  
card at the rear of the shelf. Refer to the Installation Manual listed in the preface of this  
document for more information on setting shelf Ids. Select Next>> to continue with the  
next task. A check box on the task overview window indicates that the tasks are completed.  
3. A second dialog window titled Add EPS NE - Enter Slots/Ports, appears for task number  
two. Refer to Figure 712-4. Type in the slot and port numbers for the ring node that  
correspond to the card and port used to link the STN-EPS shelf. The Tab key may be used  
to move between the fields. Next enter the slot and port numbers for the STN-EPS shelf  
that correspond to the card and port used to link to the ring node. The EPS must use port 1  
of the SEPICs (Shelf ExPansion Interface Cards). Select Next>> to continue. If there are  
any problems, the error message shown in Figure 712-5 will appear. Click on Retry to  
reattempt the discovery or Abort to stop this process.  
Page 2-99  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-712  
Page 2 of 8  
4. A status window pops up stating that the NMIC is verifying the RNE slot is configured as a  
SEPI (Shelf Expansion Interface), and to please wait. If the slot is not configured as a SEPI,  
another pop up window appears prompting the user to select another slot. If this happens,  
verify slot configuration on the shelf and change if necessary, or select another slot,  
otherwise continue.  
5. The Add EPS NE - Connect to Ring window appears. Refer to Figure 712-6. Verify that the  
STN-EPS shelf has physically been connected to the ring node and select Next>>.  
6. The Add EPS NE - Wait for Boot-up window appears. Refer to Figure 712-7. The STN-  
EPS generally boots up within five minutes if it is properly connected to the ring node. At  
this time the user may abort the task by selecting Cancel. If the boot-up exceeds five  
minutes, the Add NE Boot Time Exceeded window appears. Refer to Figure 712-8. Follow  
the instructions and select either Quit or Retry. If Quit is selected, the Add NE - Reconnect  
Cables window appears. Refer to Figure 712-9. Follow the instructions to return the  
equipment to its original physical state and select OK.  
7. After the EPS boots successfully, there may be several popup windows that appear briefly  
asking the user to wait while processing. The system verifies the shelf and interface type  
during this process. The Configure Software – Network Elements window appears for task  
number 9, displaying the cards equipped in each slot of the shelf, and the current running  
software versions. Refer to Figure 712-10. Software installation is recommended but not  
necessary. Select Skip SW Installation and go to step 12. To install the software, continue.  
8. To install software for each card type in the shelf (except SC), select and hold the right  
mouse button on the row of the card. A pop-up window appears displaying any images that  
are stored on the NMIC for the card.  
9. Select a software version displayed in the pop-up window and release the mouse button.  
The version is now listed in the Selected Software Image column on the right.  
10. Repeat the software image selection for each card. Once all new images have been chosen,  
select Apply. Selecting Apply before choosing software images brings up the instructional  
window shown in Figure 712-11. Selecting the Clear Selected button will reset all selected  
software images leaving the second column from the right blank. Refresh can be selected  
periodically to update all information in the window. Selecting Skip will close the window  
and no software versions will be changed.  
11. Once the software images have been selected for download, a confirmation pop-up window  
appears. Refer to Figure 712-12. Select OK to continue adding an EPS NE. Once completed  
the Continue button becomes selectable. Select the Continue button.  
12. A message window appears stating that the EPS shelf has successfully been added to the  
network and to wait while the system updates its topology. Once completed, the GUI screen  
will change the NE icon to reflect a primary node with expansions. Refer to Figure 712-13.  
The number of secondary STN-EPS shelves that may be linked to a primary ring node is  
Page 2-100  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-712  
Page 3 of 8  
limited only by the number of ports in the RNE and the 50 node limit per network. Repeat  
this procedure for each STN-EPS shelf that needs to be added to the ring.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Add Ring Network Element  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
10965-E  
Figure 712-1. Cellworx Vision Add an Expansion Node Pull Down Menu  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add EPS NE - Task Overview  
1) Enter network element identifiers  
2) Enter slot and port numbers  
3) Verify RNE interface is a SEPI  
4) Physically connect EPS to ring NE  
5) Wait for EPS node to boot  
6) Verify NE shelf type  
7) Validating EPS card type  
8) Wait for database update  
9) Configure software load  
10) Verifying EPS interface is a SEPI  
11) Configure ATM mapping to PLCP  
12) EPS Added updating topology  
10891-E  
Figure 712-2. Cellworx Vision Adding an STN-EPS Task Overview Window  
Page 2-101  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-712  
Page 4 of 8  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add EPS NE - Enter NE Identifier  
Select the identifiers for the EPS and the RNE  
to which it will be connected.  
1
Ring node:  
1
Expansion node:  
Cancel  
Next >>  
10890-E  
Figure 712-3. Cellworx Vision Adding an STN-EPS ID Window  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add EPS NE - Enter Slots/Ports  
Enter the slot and port numbers of the  
SEPI interface cards for both the EPS  
and the RNE to which it will be connected.  
Ring Node  
Expansion Node  
12  
12  
Slot:  
Slot:  
1
1
Port:  
Port:  
Cancel  
Next >>  
10893-B  
Figure 712-4. Cellworx Vision Add EPS NE - Enter Slots/Ports  
Page 2-102  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-712  
Page 5 of 8  
X
Cellworx Vision: Error  
Validation failed. Unable to determine card type  
for slot 8 in the new EPS NE. It is possible that the  
shelf controller has not yet had enough time to discover  
the cards in the shelf.You may retry or cancel this  
procedure. Note that if you cancel, you will need to  
reboot the EPS shelf controller(s) before attempting  
to re-add this EPS.  
OK  
0026-055  
Figure 712-5. Add EPS NE Error Message  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add EPS NE - Connect to Ring  
Physically connect the expansion network  
element to the ring network element.  
Cancel  
Next >>  
10889-A  
Figure 712-6. Cellworx Vision Add EPS NE - Connect to Ring  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add EPS NE - Wait for Bootup  
Waiting for expansion node to boot...  
Normal boot time should not exceed 5 minutes.  
Elapsed time:  
9
Cancel  
10895-B  
Figure 712-7. Cellworx Vision Add EPS NE - Wait for Bootup  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add EPS NE - Boot Time Exceeded  
Normal boot time for the network element has  
been exceeded. This could be the result of a  
communication failure with the network element.  
Please check all cables and the network element's  
status via craft interface if necessary.  
Quit  
Retry  
10888-A  
Figure 712-8. Add NE Boot Time Exceeded Window  
Page 2-103  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-712  
Page 6 of 8  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add EPS NE - Reconnect Cables  
Cancelling at this time could leave the ring  
in an abnormal state since the physical layout  
has been modified. Please reconnect the  
network elements back to the physical state  
they were in prior to this procedure.  
OK  
10892-C  
Figure 712-9. Add EPS NE - Reconnect Cables Instructional Window  
X
Cellworx Vision: Configure Software - Network Elements  
Press the right mouse button to display the available software images for each card.  
Download Status  
Running Software Version  
Card Type  
Slot Number (s)  
1
Selected Software Version  
Shelf Controller  
scc.2.0.0.9  
OC-3c UNI MM/SC  
12  
18  
oc3mm.2.0.0.10  
scc.2.0.0.9  
Shelf Controller  
Apply  
Continue >>  
Config  
Clear Selected  
Refresh  
11716-E  
Figure 712-10. Add EPS NE - Configure Software Load  
Page 2-104  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-712  
Page 7 of 8  
X
Cellworx Vision Information  
The apply button configures the NE to initiate software  
download. If this is what you want to do, then please choose a  
software image(s) before selecting this option.  
OK  
10933-B  
Figure 712-11. Cellworx Vision Software Selection Instructional Window  
X
Cellworx Vision Information  
Sucessfully configured the NE to begin software download for  
the following slots: "16, 17"  
OK  
10934-C  
Figure 712-12. Cellworx Vision Successful Software Image Download Message  
Page 2-105  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-712  
Page 8 of 8  
ICON FOR NE-2 INDICATES  
THE PRESENCE OF STN-EPS  
SHELVES  
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
GNE-1  
STN  
STN  
STN  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 21:37 GMT Time: 21:37  
10926-D  
Figure 712-13. Cellworx STN Network with a Primary Node  
Linked to at Least One Secondary STN-EPS Shelf  
Page 2-106  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-713  
Page 1 of 5  
DISPLAY NETWORK ALARM SUMMARY  
Summary: This procedure provides the information necessary to successfully navigate through  
the Graphical User Interface (GUI) screens and retrieve a network alarm summary report. This  
procedure assumes the user has accessed and launched the GUI. For information on  
understanding the node alarm indications in the GUI display, refer to the TAP section of this  
document.  
1. Using the left mouse button, select the Fault pull down menu and then Alarms (or hit Alt  
+A and Alt+A). Refer to Figure 713-1. The user may also select the alarm icon above the  
workspace and below the Fault pull down menu option, to access this window.  
2. The Cellworx Vision Alarms window appears. Refer to Figure 713-2. Use the left mouse  
button to select the up or down arrow tools at the Interval (GMT) box near the top left of  
the screen, and select the 15 minute period alarm report to retrieve. The alarm reports can  
be retrieved for any completed fifteen minute period within the last 24 hours (valid  
values are 00:00 - 00:15 to 23:45 - 24:00). A Current selection is available to retrieve any  
alarms that have been generated since the current GUI session was initiated.  
3. After selecting an interval, use the mouse to open the pull down menu located in the  
down arrow tool next to the dialog box. Select the Domain you wish to retrieve alarms  
from. The valid options for Domain are described in Table 713-1.  
4. The user may now select Apply to generate the report. The alarms are displayed in  
chronological order under the Most Recent Unfiltered Traps section of the window.  
5. To specify certain alarm types to retrieve for the report, select Filter at the top left corner  
of the window and Configure. There is also an option to disable the filter (Filter Off).  
6. The Cellworx Vision Alarm Filter window appears. Refer to Figure 713-3.In the top  
section of the window labeled Network Elements/Ring, select the specific NEs available  
in the box one at a time and then select the >> button to add them to the Selected  
Network Elements/Ring box. The slider bars may be used to view NEs not currently  
visible in the box. All of the NEs may be selected at one time by selecting the ALL>>  
button. If certain NEs need to be removed from the selected Network Elements/Ring box,  
click on them and select the << button.  
7. The second section of the window lists the resources that are available for alarm retrieval.  
Refer to Table 713-2 for a complete listing of all resource types. Select the desired  
resources for the alarm report either one at a time each followed with the >> button, or all  
of them by selecting the ALL>> button.  
8. The third section of the window lists each severity available for alarm retrieval. Refer to  
Table 713-3 for a complete listing of all severity types. Select each desired severity for  
the alarm report either one at a time each followed with the >> button, or all of them by  
selecting the ALL>> button.  
Page 2-107  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-713  
Page 2 of 5  
10. The fourth section of the window lists generic troubles that are available for alarm retrieval.  
Select the desired generic troubles for the alarm report either one at a time, each followed  
with the >> button, or all of them by selecting the ALL>> button. For a complete listing of  
alarms, refer to Section 4, Troubleshooting Guidelines.  
11. Once the alarm filter has been customized to retrieve the alarms desired, select the Apply  
button to save the changes or select Close to abort any changes and close the screen.  
12. The selected alarms for the 15-minute time specified in the Interval (GMT) dialog box are  
displayed in chronological order under the Filtered Traps section of the window. Refer to  
Figure 713-2. For a list of GUI alarms and troubleshooting tips, refer to the TAP section of  
this document.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Alarms  
Configure NE Alarm Threshold...  
NMIC Protection  
NMIC Protection Restoration  
10916-D  
Figure 713-1. Cellworx Vision Fault Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-108  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-713  
Page 3 of 5  
X
Cellworx Vision Alarms  
Filter  
SELECT A HISTORICAL  
INTERVAL OR CURRENT DATA.  
SELECT A DOMAIN FROM LIST.  
THEN HIT APPLY TO RETRIEVE  
ALARM LIST.  
00:00 - 00:15  
Ring  
Interval (GMT):  
Domain  
Apply  
UP TO 1000 FILTERED TRAPS ARE  
DISPLAYED IN THIS BOX. SELECT  
PAGES 1 TO 10, EACH DISPLAYING  
UP TO 100 ALARMS.  
1
Filtered Traps  
Severity  
Page  
Date/Time  
Network Element/Ring  
Resource  
Generic Trouble  
Informational Oct 14 13:47:17  
Informational Oct 14 13:43:55  
Informational Oct 14 13:43:54  
Informational Oct 14 13:29:17  
NE7  
NE1  
NE1  
NE4  
Shelf Controller Slot 18  
OC12c Ring Slot 17 Port 1  
OC12c Ring Slot 16 Port 1  
Card Inserted  
Sync Message Change  
Sync Message Change  
OC3c CRS MM Slot 10 Port 1 Unavailable Seconds P
USE THE SLIDE BARS TO SCROLL  
THROUGH THE FILTERED  
ALARMS.  
Most Recent Unfiltered Traps  
Severity  
Date/Time  
Network Element/Ring  
Resource  
Generic Trouble  
THE LAST 10 UNFILTERED TRAPS  
ARE DISPLAYED HERE.  
Informational Oct 14 13:50:17  
Informational Oct 14 13:49:55  
Informational Oct 14 13:49:54  
Informational Oct 14 13:49:17  
NE4  
NE4  
NE4  
NE4  
OC3c CRS MM Slot 10 Port 1 Unavailable Seconds Pa
OC3c CRS MM Slot 10 Port 2 Unavailable Seconds Pa
OC3c CRS MM Slot 15 Port 1 Unavailable Seconds Pa
OC3c CRS MM Slot 15 Port 2 Unavailable Seconds Pa
A TOTAL COUNT OF EACH ALARM  
IS DISPLAYED BY SEVERITY.  
Critical:  
0
Major:  
Close  
0
Minor:  
0
International:  
0
Cleared:  
0
Clear Alarm Log  
10900-C  
Figure 713-2. Cellworx Vision Alarms Screen  
Table 713-1. Cellworx Vision Alarm Domain List  
DOMAIN  
DESCRIPTION  
Ring  
Contains 96 15-minute logs for any ring level  
alarms.  
NMIC  
NE #  
Contains 96 15-minute logs for any NMIC level  
alarms (i.e., database full, etc.)  
Contains 96 15-minute logs for any NE level alarms.  
All NEs discovered on the ring are listed and  
selectable under Domain.  
Page 2-109  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-713  
Page 4 of 5  
X
Cellworx Vision Alarm Filter  
Selected Network Elements/Ring:  
Network Elements/Ring:  
Ring System 1  
>>  
NE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
NMIC  
SELECTABLE NEs AND SYSTEMS  
ARE LISTED HERE. SELECT  
INDIVIDUALS OR ALL AND HIT THE  
>> KEY TO MOVE TO SELECTED  
BOX.  
<<  
SELECTED NEs ARE MOVED  
HERE FOR ALARM RETRIEVAL.  
All >>  
<< All  
>>  
Resource:  
Selected Resource:  
E1 Multi 1  
T1 Multi 1  
DS1 Channelized Fra  
Fiber Fragment  
T3 TMUX Multi 1  
TMUX EXP  
Timing Control Circuit  
Cellworx 1  
T3 CRS  
Housekeeping Alarm  
NE Isolated  
NMIC  
SELECTABLE RESOURCES ARE  
LISTED HERE. SELECT INDIVIDUALS  
OR ALL AND HIT THE >> KEY TO  
MOVE THEM TO THE SELECTED BOX.  
<<  
SELECTED RESOURCES ARE  
MOVED HERE FOR ALARM  
RETRIEVAL.  
All >>  
No information Availabl  
<< All  
>>  
Severity:  
Selected Severity:  
Critical  
Major  
informational  
Cleared  
Minor  
SELECTABLE SEVERITIES ARE  
<<  
SELECTED ALARM SEVERITIES  
ARE MOVED HERE FOR ALARM  
RETRIEVAL.  
LISTED HERE. SELECT INDIVIDUALS  
OR ALL AND HIT THE >> KEY TO  
MOVE THEM TO THE SELECTED BOX.  
All >>  
<< All  
>>  
Generic Trouble:  
Selected Generic Trouble:  
Active NMIC lost conne  
All  
Burst Errored Seconds  
C-bit Coding Violations  
C-bit Errored Seconds T  
C-bit Severely Errored S  
Alarm Indication Signal  
Alarm Indication Signal  
SELECTABLE GENERIC TROUBLES  
ARE L;ISTED HERE. SELECT  
TROUBLES OR ALL AND HIT THE  
>> KEY TO MOVE THEM TO THE  
SELECTED BOX.  
<<  
SELECTED GENERIC TROUBLES  
ARE MOVED HERE FOR ALARM  
RETRIEVAL.  
All >>  
<< All  
Apply  
Close  
10899-D  
Figure 713-3. Cellworx Vision Alarm Filter Window  
Table 713-2. Cellworx Vision Alarm Filter Resource List  
RESOURCE  
155 MM or SM CRS  
DESCRIPTION  
Selects alarms for an OC3 resource.  
Selects the alarms for a Ring Interface Card.  
Selects the alarms for selected card type.  
Selects alarms related to card protection.  
155 Ring, 622 Ring, 2488 Ring  
E1 Multi 1 or T1 Multi 1  
Protection Groups  
T3 CRS, T3 TMUX, TMUX EXP Selects alarms for the T3 cards.  
Shelf Controller  
Ring  
Selects alarms related to SC modules.  
Selects alarms related to the ring network.  
Selects alarms on a particular NE(s).  
Selects alarms for the Fiber Fragment.  
Selects alarms for the Housekeeping Alarm.  
Selects alarms for the NE Isolated.  
Selects alarms for the NMIC.  
<user defined NE Name>  
Fiber Fragment  
Housekeeping Alarm  
NE Isolated  
NMIC  
No Information Available  
Selects alarms that do not have enough  
information available to define.  
Timing Control Circuit  
Selects alarms related to the system timing.  
Page 2-110  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-713  
Page 5 of 5  
Table 713-3. Cellworx Vision Alarm Filter Severity List  
SEVERITY  
Critical  
DESCRIPTION  
Severe alarms that can or do affect service and need  
immediate attention.  
Major  
Minor  
Alarms that can affect service and should be addressed as  
soon as possible.  
Alarms that are not service affecting and may be addressed  
during maintenance periods.  
Cleared  
Alarms that have cleared and returned to a normal state.  
Informational  
Alerts to make the administrator aware of a potential  
problem.  
Note: Refer to Section 4 for a complete listing of alarm types.  
Page 2-111  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-714  
Page 1 of 3  
CONFIGURE SERVICE PROVIDER PROFILE  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to successfully configure a service provider  
profile for port level connections using the NMIC GUI. Service provider profiles provide  
identification for each connection for account management purposes. These service provider  
profiles differ from those set in the connection configuration screens which identify the endpoint  
providers. This procedure assumes the administrator has accessed and launched the NMIC GUI  
per DLP-705.  
1. Using the left mouse button, select Configuration, Connection, and Configure Service  
Provider Profile or use the Alt+C, Alt+N and Alt+S keys. Refer to Figure 714-1.  
2. The Service Provider Profile Configuration window appears. Refer to Figure 714-2.  
3. All NEs discovered will be displayed in the box under the Network Element heading. Using  
the left mouse button, select the network element desired for the profile  
3. Select the physical interface desired for the profile under the Interface heading. These are  
displayed by slot number, port number, and interface type.  
4. Recording Interface Identifier is then displayed in a read only field below the selections.  
Below that is the Carrier Identifier field. Single click on the Carrier Identifier field and  
enter a carrier identification for the selected interface using any numeric characters.  
5. Single click on the Transit Identifier field and enter a transit identification for the selected  
interface using any numeric characters.  
6. Select a service type from the options listed in the Service Type field. To view the options  
available, single click on the down arrow to the right of the field. A pull down list appears  
displaying any options configured. Refer to Figure 714-2.  
7. Select a call type from the options listed in the Call Type field. To view the options  
available, single click on the down arrow to the right of the field. Refer to Figure 714-3.  
8. Specify whether the remote interface is a UNI or B-ICI by a single point and click on either  
option under Remote Interface Type.  
9. Select Apply to send the new information to the database. The system responds with the  
window shown in Figure 714-4. Select “OK” to dismiss the window.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-112  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-714  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Create...  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10979-D  
Figure 714-1. Cellworx Vision Configure Service Provider Profile Menu  
X
Cellworx Vision: Service Provider Profile Configuration  
Interface:  
Network Element:  
ALL INTERFACES FOR  
SPECIFIED NE ARE LISTED  
HERE AFTER NE IS SELECTED.  
S-12:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-12:P-2:L-atm:l-1  
S-13:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-14:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-14:P-2:L-atm:l-1  
S-8:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-8:P-2:L-atm:l-1  
S-8:P-3:L-atm:l-1  
S-9:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-9:P-2:L-atm:l-1  
NE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
SELECT AN NE  
FROM THE LIST.  
Recording Interface Identifier:  
Carrier Identifier:  
TYPE IN A CARRIER ID NUMBER.  
TYPE IN A TRANSIT ID NUMBER.  
Transit Carrier Identifier:  
SELECT DOWN ARROW TO OPEN  
LIST OF SERVICE TYPES.  
Service Type:  
Call Type:  
PVC CRS  
PVC CRS  
PVC CES  
PVC FRS  
Remote Interface Typ
SMDS  
B
UNI  
Close  
Apply  
10993-E  
Figure 714-2. Cellworx Vision Service Provider Profile Configuration Window  
Page 2-113  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-714  
Page 3 of 3  
X
Cellworx Vision: Service Provider Profile Configuration  
Interface:  
Network Element:  
S-12:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-12:P-2:L-atm:l-1  
S-13:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-14:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-14:P-2:L-atm:l-1  
S-8:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-8:P-2:L-atm:l-1  
S-8:P-3:L-atm:l-1  
S-9:P-1:L-atm:l-1  
S-9:P-2:L-atm:l-1  
NE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Recording Interface Identifier:  
Carrier Identifier:  
Transit Identifier:  
Service Type:  
Call Type:  
PVC FRS  
801 LEC  
SELECT DOWN ARROW TO  
OPEN LIST OF CALL TYPES.  
608 Intra-network ATM PVC  
Remote Interface Typ
609 Intra-network ATM PVC  
UNI  
801 LEC  
802 LEC  
803 LEC  
804 LEC  
Ap
805 LEC  
10992-B  
Figure 714-3. Cellworx Vision Service Provider Call Type Pull Down Menu  
X
Cellworx Vision Information  
Service provider profile was created successfully.  
OK  
10931-C  
Figure 714-4. Cellworx Vision Service Provider Profile Created Confirmation  
Page 2-114  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-715  
Page 1 of 2  
VIEW RING RESOURCE USAGE  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to successfully utilize the NMIC GUI  
software to view the used bandwidth on a network. This procedure can be used to check for  
available bandwidth when assigning new connections. This procedure assumes the administrator  
has successfully accessed and launched the NMIC GUI software per NTP-015.  
1. Using the left mouse button, select Configuration, Connection, and View Ring Resource  
Usage, (or using the direct selection keys, Alt+C, Alt+N, then Alt+R). Refer to Figure  
715-1.  
2. The Cellworx Vision Ring Resource Usage window appears. Refer to Figure 715-2. The  
information displayed lists a total of all VPIs assigned on the ring, if they are allocated as  
user or management connections, and the amount of VPIs left that may be assigned to the  
ring. Also listed is the amount of bandwidth allocated to user or management  
connections.  
3. Select Close to return to the Cellworx Vision network display.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10964-D  
Figure 715-1. Cellworx Vision View Ring Resource Usage Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-115  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-715  
Page 2 of 2  
X
Cellworx Vision Ring Resource Usage  
Ring VPIs:  
Total VPIs:  
4096  
Allocated for user connections:  
Allocated for management connections:  
0
3
Allocated for maintenance connections:  
Available for user connections:  
4
4088  
Ring Bandwidth (Kbps)  
Allocated for user connections:  
Allocated for management connections:  
0
2995  
Close  
10988-B  
Figure 715-2. Cellworx Vision Ring Resource Usage Window  
Page 2-116  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-716  
Page 1 of 2  
VIEW FIBER BANDWIDTH USAGE  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to successfully utilize the NMIC GUI  
software to view the used bandwidth on a given fiber link between nodes. This procedure can be  
used to check for available bandwidth when assigning new connections. This procedure assumes  
the administrator has successfully accessed and launched the NMIC GUI software per NTP-015.  
1. To view the bandwidth used between all nodes in the network, use the left mouse button to  
select Configuration, Connection, and View Fiber Bandwidth Usage, (or using the direct  
selection keys, Alt+C, Alt+N, then Alt+F). Refer to Figure 716-1.  
2. The Cellworx Vision Fiber Bandwidth Usage window appears. Refer to Figure 716-2. The  
information displayed lists all NEs discovered on the ring, the NEs that they are connected  
to, and the amount of bandwidth (in Kbps) assigned between them on the ring.  
3. To view the bandwidth being utilized between two individual nodes within the network, use  
the right mouse button and point and click on the fiber link between the two nodes. Again,  
the pop-up window Fiber Bandwidth Usage appears. displaying the bandwidth usage on the  
fiber selected between the two nodes. The values provided in this window are measured in  
kilobits per second (Kbps).  
3. Select Close to return to the Cellworx Vision network display.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
GNE-1  
10962-F  
Figure 716-1. Cellworx Vision View Fiber Bandwidth Usage Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-117  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-716  
Page 2 of 2  
X
Cellworx Vision: Fiber Bandwidth Usage  
From Network Element  
To Network Element  
Used Fiber Bandwidth (Kbps)  
NE-1  
NE-1  
NE-2  
NE-2  
NE-3  
NE-3  
NE-2  
NE-3  
NE-1  
NE-3  
NE-1  
NE-2  
3000  
3000  
3000  
3000  
3000  
3000  
Refresh  
Close  
10919-D  
Figure 716-2. Cellworx Vision Network Fiber Bandwidth Usage  
Page 2-118  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-717  
Page 1 of 2  
CONFIGURE NE ALARM THRESHOLD  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps necessary to set the alarm reporting thresholds for  
each NE in the network. The alarm threshold setting determines the minimum alarm severity for  
a node to report to the GUI screen, for instance, if a node was set to Major, any minor conditions  
would not be reported via the GUI screen icon for that node.  
1. From the GUI main screen, select Fault to open the pull down menu, and select  
Configure NE Alarm Threshold either using the mouse or by entering Alt+A, and Alt+C.  
Refer to Figure 717-1. The user may also right click on an NE and select the Configure  
Threshold Alarm option.  
2. The Cellworx Alarm Threshold Configuration window appears. Refer to Figure 717-2.  
Select a node from the list provided under Domain.  
3. Select the lowest alarm severity to be emitted from the selected node from the list  
provided on the right. Refer to Table 717-1 for definitions of each severity.  
4. Select Apply to enable the new parameters. A confirmation window should appear  
similar to Figure 717-3. Dismiss the confirmation window by clicking OK and close the  
Alarm Threshold Configuration screen.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Alarms  
Configure NE Alarm Threshold...  
NMIC Protection  
NMIC Protection Restoration  
10916-D  
Figure 717-1. Cellworx Vision GUI Fault Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-119  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-717  
Page 2 of 2  
Table 717-1. Alarm Severity List  
DEFINITION  
ALARM SEVERITY  
None  
No alarms will report to the X-Terminal.  
Critical  
Only critical alarms will be reported to the X-  
Terminal.  
Major  
Minor  
All  
Major and critical alarms will be reported to the  
X-Terminal.  
All major, minor, and critical alarms are reported  
to the X-Terminal.  
All alarms and informational alerts will be  
reported to the X-Terminal.  
X
Cellworx Vision Threshold Configuration  
Domain:  
Lowest Severity Emmited:  
None  
Critical  
Major  
Minor  
All  
NE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Apply  
Close  
11004-B  
Figure 717-2. Alarm Threshold Configuration Window  
X
Cellworx Vision  
Successfully set the alarm threshold to Minor for NE-3.  
OK  
10932-A  
Figure 717-3. Alarm Threshold Configuration Change Confirmation  
Page 2-120  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-718  
Page 1 of 1  
REFRESH TOPOLOGY  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to refresh the display of the network  
nodes. This is done after any changes to the view of the network have been modified such as  
adding or deleting nodes, moving the positions of a node, changing connections between the  
nodes, or changing node names.  
1. Select the Configuration pull down menu, Topology, and Refresh using the left mouse  
button or by hitting Alt+C, Alt+T, and Alt+R. Refer to Figure 718-1.  
2. The system responds with a message window stating that it is updating the topology, and to  
please wait. Refer to Figure 718-2.  
3. A refresh may also be initiated using the icon shown in Figure 718-3.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Add Ring Network Element  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
10978-E  
Figure 718-1. Cellworx Vision Configuration Pull Down Menu  
Updating topology. Please wait...  
11015-A  
Figure 718-2. Cellworx Vision GUI Updating Topology  
REFRESH  
TOPOLOGY  
11916-B  
Figure 718-3. Refresh Topology Icon on NMIC GUI  
Page 2-121  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-719  
Page 1 of 2  
FORCE NETWORK DISCOVERY  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to perform a forced network discovery.  
The forced discovery function compares the NMIC database with the physical topology to ensure  
the physical equipment on the ring matches what the NMIC thinks is there.  
1. Select the Configuration pull down menu, Topology, and Force Network Discovery from  
the task bar by single clicking on it with the left mouse button or by hitting Alt+C, Alt+T,  
and Alt+F. Refer to Figure 719-1.  
2. The system responds with a message window stating that the GUI is forcing rediscovery on  
the network and to please wait as shown in Figure 719-2.  
3. If the system fails to force network discovery, and error message will appear as shown in  
Figure 719-3. The user should then verify the RIC cards are in a normal state (status LEDs  
are green) at each node and then return to step one of this procedure.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Add Ring Network Element  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
10961-E  
Figure 719-1. Cellworx Vision Configuration Pull Down Menu  
Forcing rediscovery on the network. Please wait...  
11014-A  
Figure 719-2. Cellworx Vision Rediscovery Message  
Page 2-122  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-719  
Page 2 of 2  
X
Cellworx Vision: Error  
Failed to refresh topology, physical connectivity  
and/or database mismatch.  
OK  
11913-B  
Figure 719-3. Failure to Force Network Discovery Message Window  
Page 2-123  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-720  
Page 1 of 4  
SOFTWARE SELECTION  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully select the operational  
software version for individual card types in any given node, and initiate an upgrade or fallback  
to a selected software version that is compatible with the current version of the NMIC. The user  
should be logged on to the system and have launched the Graphical User Interface (GUI) before  
performing this procedure per NTP-012.  
1. Select the NE that will have the software versions changed by clicking on it using the left  
mouse button. A ring should now encircle the NE icon. If the software screens are  
accessed without first selecting a node, the informational message in Figure 720-1 will  
appear.  
2. Select the Configuration pull down menu, and then Software using the left mouse button  
or by hitting Alt + C, and then Alt+W. Refer to Figure 720-2.  
3. The software window opens with Configure NE highlighted. Select it by single clicking  
on it using the left mouse button or by hitting Return.  
4. The Configure Software window for the selected NE appears and displays each card  
equipped in the shelf, along with the current running software versions. See Figure 720-3.  
To change a software version for each card type in the shelf (except SC), select and hold  
the right mouse button on the row of the card to be changed. A pop-up window appears  
displaying any images for that card that are stored on the NMIC.  
5. Select a software version displayed in the pop-up window and release the mouse button.  
The version is now listed in the Selected Software Image column on the right of the  
window.  
6. Repeat the software image selection for each card type to be changed. Once all new  
images have been chosen, select Apply. Selecting Apply before choosing software  
images, brings up the instructional window shown in Figure 720-4. Selecting the Clear  
Selected button will reset all selected software images leaving the last column blank.  
Refresh can be selected periodically to update all information in the window. Selecting  
Cancel will close the window and no software versions will be changed.  
7. Once the software images have been successfully applied, the confirmation pop-up window  
appears. Refer to Figure 720-5. Select OK and then Close the Configure Software window.  
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each NE to be changed.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-124  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-720  
Page 2 of 4  
X
Cellworx Vision Information  
Please select a network element first.  
OK  
10930-C  
Figure 720-1. Cellworx Vision Informational Message  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Software  
Configure NE...  
NMIC Platform  
10975-E  
Figure 720-2. Cellworx Vision Software Menu Tree  
Page 2-125  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-720  
Page 3 of 4  
X
Vision: Configure Software - Network Elements  
Press the right mouse button to display the available software images for each card.  
Download Status  
Running Software Version  
Card Type  
Slot Number (s)  
1
Selected Software Version  
Shelf Controller  
scc.0.4.2.0  
OC-3c UNI SM  
OC-3c UNI MM  
10  
12  
Loaded  
oc3sm.0.4.2.2  
oc3mm.0.4.2.2  
OC-12c Ring  
OC-12c Ring  
16  
17  
18  
oc12cric.0.4.0.0  
Loading  
oc12cric.0.4.0.0  
scc.0.4.2.0  
Not Loaded  
Shelf Controller  
Config  
Apply  
Clear Selected  
Refresh  
Cancel  
11717-C  
Figure 720-3. Selecting a New Software Version  
Cellworx Vision Information  
X
The apply button configures the NE to initiate software  
download. If this is what you want to do, then please choose a  
software image(s) before selecting this option.  
OK  
10933-B  
Figure 720-4. Cellworx Vision Instructional Message  
Page 2-126  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-720  
Page 4 of 4  
X
Cellworx Vision Information  
Sucessfully configured the NE to begin software download for  
the following slots: "16, 17"  
OK  
10934-C  
Figure 720-5. Software Upgrade Confirmation Message  
Page 2-127  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-721  
Page 1 of 2  
ABOUT NE  
Summary: This procedure details the information displayed for an NE when the user selects it,  
opens the pop-up menu, and chooses About.  
1. Click and hold the right mouse button over the NE to open the NE pop-up menu window.  
2. Select About located at the top of the pop-up window and release the mouse button.  
Refer to Figure 721-1.  
3. The Network Element About window appears displaying the NE name, number, software  
version, the assigned vendor, the node alarm and power status, the current time, and the  
total time the NE has been in service. Refer to Figure 721-2.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
i
About...  
GNE-1Craft Interface...  
Create Connection...  
View Connection...  
Configure Alarm Threshold...  
Configure Software...  
Reflash Boot Image  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 23:30 GMT Time: 23:30  
10942-F  
Figure 721-1. NE Selection and Pop-up Menu Window  
Page 2-128  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-721  
Page 2 of 2  
X
Cellworx Vision: Network Element About  
Name: NE-1  
Identifier: 1  
Location: 14th Street  
Version: 1.0  
Vendor: SW-NMS  
Alarm Status: Critical  
Power Status: Normal  
Current Time:Tue Aug 31 14:56:00 CDT 1999  
Up time: 22 days, 16 hours, 32 minutes, 23.45 seconds  
Close  
10887-D  
Figure 721-2. About NE Informational Screen  
Page 2-129  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-722  
Page 1 of 3  
NMIC SYSTEM FILE REPLICATION  
Summary: This procedure outlines the steps required for the user to replicate files from the  
active NMIC card to the standby. File replication allows an administrator to copy files that were  
changed. The administrator should be familiar with the Unix command structure and directories  
before attempting to alter system files. Some files are not automatically written to both NMICs  
and may need to be replicated. All configuration files accessed through the GUI are replicated on  
both NMICs automatically.  
1. From the GUI screen, select the Configuration pull down menu, NMIC Platform, and File  
Replication using the left mouse button or by hitting Alt+C, Alt+M, and Alt+F. Refer to  
Figure 722-1.  
2. The System File Replication window appears. Refer to Figure 722-2. At the Filter window,  
enter the directory that contains the files that need to be replicated.  
Note: Only files that have been modified through the Unix platform need to be  
replicated onto the standby NMIC.  
3. The directory structure is shown in the directory window. When a directory is selected, the  
files contained therein are displayed in the File(s) window below. These files may be  
selected using the left mouse button to highlight them, and then selecting the directional  
tool to move them to the File(s) to be Replicated window. Multiple files may be selected  
from the various directories and replicated once all selections have been made. Use the  
following criteria when replicating files in this location:  
1) /etc Directory – This directory contains many system configuration files  
requiring the discretion and careful handling to be used by a person who has  
unix system administration knowledge. For most of these files, it is best not to  
alter them.  
Note: NEVER replicate the file named ‘hosts’ in this directory.  
2) /cellworx Directory –  
a) The following directories under /cellworx can be replicated between the  
active and stand-by NMICs either by direct FTP or through the file replication  
provided by the GUI.  
Note: The stand-by NMIC does periodic automatic replication of the following  
directories.  
1. accounting  
2. alarmHistory  
3. performance  
b) Any software images under ‘swImage’ can be replicated (via FTP or GUI),  
provided that appropriate directories are created before an attempt of  
replication is made.  
Page 2-130  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-722  
Page 2 of 3  
c) The ‘config’ directory should be handled with discretion. All files under this  
directory distinguish active vs. standby NMICs except for the database files.  
Under steady state operating conditions, the database files on both NMICs  
will be identical. These files should not be modified when the NMICs are  
operationally “UP”.  
The database files under config directory are; NE.*, and NMIC. The *  
indicates the NE number or identifier. These files are normally handled by the  
application automatically.  
4. Once all files have been selected, select the OK button at the bottom of the window.  
Selected files are then copied onto the standby NMIC card.  
5. The informational message shown in Figure 722-3 appears stating the action being taken.  
Select OK.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
Administration  
File Replication  
10970-D  
Figure 722-1. Cellworx Vision NMIC Platform Menu Tree  
Page 2-131  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-722  
Page 3 of 3  
X
Cellworx Vision: System File Replication  
Filter :  
TYPE IN THE PATH OF FILE(S)  
TO BE REPLICATED HERE.  
/etc/rc.d/ x  
OR  
Directory:  
STEP THROUGH THE RIGHT  
./  
DIRECTORY TO FIND THE PATH  
../  
OF A SPECIFIC FILE TO BE  
init.d  
REPLICATED.  
rc0.d  
rc1.d  
rc2.d  
rc3.d  
rc4.d  
FILES CONTAINED WITHIN THE  
SELECTED DIRECTORIES ABOVE  
ARE DISPLAYED HERE. SELECT  
THE DESIRED FILES AND HIT  
THE >> BUTTON TO MOVE THEM  
File (s) :  
rc  
rc.local  
rc.sysinit  
File (s) Selected to be Replicated:  
/etc/adjtime  
/etc/exports  
/etc/rc.d/rc.sysinit  
TO THE SELECTED BOX.  
>>  
<<  
SELECT THE OK BUTTON TO  
BEGIN REPLICATION OF THE  
SELECTED FILES OR CANCEL  
TO ABORT THE PROCESS.  
OK  
Cancel  
11721-B  
Figure 722-2. Cellworx Vision system File Replication Window  
X
Cellworx Vision  
File replication request has been sent to peer  
NMIC  
OK  
11728-A  
Figure 722-3. Replication Request Confirmation  
Page 2-132  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-723  
Page 1 of 5  
CHANGE CONFIGURATION/TEST AN EXISTING CONNECTION  
Summary: This procedure defines the steps required to successfully change configuration  
options on an existing connection or initiate an OAM cell generation/loopback or a continuity  
check on the connection. Changing the configuration may entail locking/unlocking the  
administrative state, changing the name of the connection, changing to/from a segment endpoint,  
or enabling/disabling NDC data collection on a connection. The user must first have accessed the  
system and launched the graphical user interface before attempting this procedure.  
1. Access the Subnetwork Connection Filter window using one of the following methods:  
a. Using the left mouse button, select Configuration, Connection, and View.  
Refer to Figure 723-1.  
b. Using the direct selection keys, enter Alt+C, Alt+N then Alt+V.  
c. Using the right mouse button, position the cursor over the NE, click and hold  
the button, select View Connections, and release the button.  
d. Using the left mouse button, select the connection icon above the workspace.  
2. The Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connections window appears, similar to the example  
shown in Figure 723-2. Using the tabs, go to each page and select the Connection type,  
Network Element, Traffic Contract, and ATM or CES interface and then hit the Apply  
button at the bottom of the screen. The user may elect to select the connection type and the  
“Retrieve all selected type connections” button followed by the Apply button. This avoids  
having to select individual interfaces and nodes on the other pages.  
3. The Subnetwork Connections screen appears similar to the one shown in Figure 723-3.  
Select a connection to be modified or tested and then single click on the Configure button  
at the bottom of the window.  
3. The Subnetwork Connection Configuration window appears displaying both ends of the  
connection selected. Refer to Figure 723-4 for an example. The connection name is  
displayed at the top as well as the connection type. The connection name can be changed in  
this screen by typing the new name in the Connection Name box and selecting Apply. The  
upper half of the window represents one end of the connection while the bottom half  
represents the other end of the selected connection. The user may now lock the connection  
out or release a locked out connection by selecting the pad lock on the upper right corner of  
the window.  
CHANGING CONNECTION CONFIGURATIONS  
4. To make the connection a Segment Endpoint, click anywhere on the box or text that reads  
Segment Endpoint. Adversely you may remove the endpoint designator by clicking on the  
same. This is true for either end of the connection.  
Page 2-133  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-723  
Page 2 of 5  
TESTING CONNECTIONS  
5. To enable Network Data Collection (NDC) on the connection for either ingress or egress,  
click anywhere on the box or text next to it that reads Ingress NDC or Egress NDC.  
6. To test the connection selected and displayed on the Subnetwork Connection Configuration  
window, click on the box next to Test Type which should currently read “No Test” if no  
test has been previously initiated on it. The selection window appears displaying the  
following options:  
• No Test – No test is in progress or requested.  
• End-End OAM Loopback –  
• Segment End Loopback –  
• Continuity Check Source –  
• Continuity Check Sink –  
7. At the Loopback Location ID field, enter a unique ID identifying the location that the  
loopback cells are being generated from.  
8. At the Insert Loopback Cells field, either leave the selection on Towards Access Facility  
which will loop the incoming cells back out to the AIC cards in the system, or click on the  
textbox and drag downwards to select Towards Ring Facility to loop the cells incoming  
from the RIC cards back out to the Ring.  
9. The Test Status display indicates whether the connection is currently under test. Clicking  
on the Test Status button below it will refresh the status display and the Abort Test button  
will abort the test.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10963-D  
Figure 723-1. View Connection Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-134  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-723  
Page 3 of 5  
X
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Connection Filter  
SELECT A TAB TO FILTER  
FOR A SPECIFIC ITEM.  
Network  
Traffic  
FR  
ATM  
CES  
Connection  
Connection Types:  
SELECT AN ITEM IN THE  
FOLDERS TO FILTER.  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES - ATM VC  
CES - CES  
FR - ATM VC  
FR - FR  
ATM VP MULTICAST  
ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Retrieve All Selected Type Connections  
SELECT THE APPLY BUTTON  
TO RETRIEVE CONNECTION  
INFO FOR FILTERED  
Close  
SELECTION.  
Reset  
Apply  
11000-F  
Figure 723-2. Subnetwork Connection Filter Window  
X
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connections  
Format View  
Connection Type: ATM VP - ATM VP  
1
Page  
Connection Name  
NE - NE  
Status  
***********1  
***********2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
Incomplete  
Functional  
***********3  
Unknown State  
Status...  
Configure...  
Delete  
Retry  
Close  
11003-B  
Figure 723-3. Subnetwork Connection Display Window  
Page 2-135  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-723  
Page 4 of 5  
X
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connection Configuration  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
Connection Name :  
****************  
Connection Type : ATM VP - ATM VP  
Unlocked  
Network Element: Node1  
UNI/NNI: Slot10_Port10 DS1CESUNI  
VPI:  
0
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
No Test  
Test Type:  
1111111111111111  
Towards Acess Facility  
Loopback Location ID:  
Insert Loopback Cells:  
Test Status: None  
Test Status  
Abort test  
Network Element: Node2  
UNI/NNI: Slot12_Port15 DS1CESUNI  
VPI:  
0
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
Test Type:  
No Test  
1111111111111111  
Towards Acess Facility  
Loopback Location ID:  
Insert Loopback Cells:  
Test Status: None  
Test Status  
Abort test  
Apply  
Close  
Figure 723-4. Subnetwork Connection Configuration Window  
Page 2-136  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-723  
Page 5 of 5  
Table 723-1. Subnetwork Connection Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
OPTIONS  
DESCRIPTION  
Connection Name  
User Defined  
Displays the connection name selected for  
configuration. User may rename the connection  
by typing in a new name and hitting Apply.  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress / Egress NDC  
Test Type  
Single selection box  
On or Off  
Sets this end of the connection as a segment  
endpoint for OAM cells.  
Enables or disables the network data collection for  
selected circuit.  
End to End OAM  
Segment OAM  
Continuity Check Source  
Continuity Check Sync  
No Test  
No test is currently being administered.  
Loopback Location ID  
Customer assigned location identifier, used to  
loopback the incoming signal and transmit it back  
to the customer equipment, limited to 16 numeric  
characters.  
Insert Loopback Cells  
Test Status  
Towards Access Facility  
Towards Ring Facility  
None  
Test is not currently active.  
Test is currently in progress.  
Active  
Page 2-137  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-724  
Page 1 of 2  
NMIC PROTECTION  
Summary: This procedure describes the tasks that can be performed using the NMIC Protection  
option under the Fault pull down menu of the Cellworx Vision GUI. The NMIC protection  
option allows the user to perform a manual or forced switchover from the active NMIC to the  
standby NMIC, or to lock the NMICs out of protection to prevent any switching activity. The  
active NMIC refers to the operational status of the card and can be either the working or protect  
card in the shelf. The protection NMIC must be located in the GNE next to the working NMIC  
for Phase 3.1 systems.  
1. Select the Fault pull down menu and then NMIC Protection from the top of the GUI  
screen using the mouse or by hitting the Alt+A and then Alt+P. Refer to Figure 724-1.  
2. The NMIC Protection window appears indicating which slots the working NMIC and  
protect NMIC are in, and their operational status. Refer to Figure 724-2. The operational  
status of each NMIC must be Up in order to perform any protection switching.  
3. A Lockout is the highest priority in the switching hierarchy and disables the standby card,  
in any condition, from switching to active. The Automatic Protection Switch will be  
disabled when a lockout is active. If the Lockout of protection is active, it must first be  
released before performing a switch. To release the lockout of protection, ensure the  
Lockout Protection Switch option is selected and resend the request by selecting the Apply  
button. This will release the lockout.  
4. To perform a manual switch, select the Manual Switch button at the bottom left of the  
window and then the Apply button.  
5. A confirmation window appears informing the user that a switchover will result in a loss of  
session. Since the active card is the one that the GUI is launched from, and the user is going  
to change the status of the active card to standby, the user must establish a new session and  
launch the GUI on the newly activated card. Refer to Figure 724-3. Select OK to initiate the  
switchover or Cancel to abort the request.  
6. The manual switch does not leave a switch condition activated so it does not need to be  
released. To switch back to the original active card, just select the Manual Switch button  
again followed by the Apply button.  
7. To perform a forced switch, select the Force Switch button followed by the Apply button.  
Again, since the active card is the one that the GUI is launched from, and the user is going  
to change the status of the active card to standby, the user must establish a new session and  
launch the GUI on the newly activated card. Refer to Figure 724-3. Select OK to initiate the  
switchover or Cancel to abort the request.  
8. To release the forced switch, select the Force Switch button followed by the Apply button.  
This will release any previous request for a forced switch and allow a manual switch to the  
standby card.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-138  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-724  
Page 2 of 2  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Alarms  
Configure NE Alarm Threshold...  
NMIC Protection  
NMIC Protection Restoration  
10916-D  
Figure 724-1. Cellworx Vision Fault Pull Down Menu  
X
Cellworx Vision: NMIC Protection  
Working NMIC (slot 4) Operational State: Up  
Protect NMIC (slot 2) Operational State: Up  
Lockout Protection Switch  
Automatic Protection Switch  
Manual Switch  
Apply  
Force Switch  
Close  
11735-A  
Figure 724-2. Cellworx Vision NMIC Protection  
X
Cellworx Vision  
Switchover will result in session loss, please reconnect  
after switchover.  
?
Cancel  
OK  
11751-A  
Figure 724-3. NMIC Switchover Confirmation Window  
Page 2-139  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-725  
Page 1 of 3  
NMIC PROTECTION RESTORATION  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully restore NMIC protection  
to an operational status. The restoration process copies up to 50 files from a user selected NMIC  
to the other NMIC ensuring that both are synchronized with the same data. This procedure  
should be performed anytime the information on the NMICs are out of sync, indicated by a  
warning message that comes up on the GUI work space or by a flashing icon. When the NMICs  
are out of sync, the manual and forced protection switching functionality for the NMICs is  
disabled.  
1. When the NMICs are out of sync, the message shown in Figure 725-1 will appear stating  
that the NMIC protection restoration has been lost and the user will be forced to correct the  
NMIC unbalance before continuing with the tasks at hand. The user must select a NMIC  
with the most up to date information on it to restore the database from. The active NMIC is  
indicated by the (ACTIVE) status next to the NMIC slot number. Select the NMIC with the  
most reliable information on it (Slot2, or Slot4). No configuration changes will be allowed  
during the restoration period.  
2. The estimated time of restoration is displayed which can take up to 15 minutes depending  
on the size of the ring. Select the OK button to proceed.  
3. The window changes indicating that the restoration is in progress. A percentage of  
completion is also provided. Refer to Figure 725-2. Once completed, the protection NMIC  
operational status will be Up. Refer to DLP-724.  
4. If the protection restoration process fails for any reason, a flashing icon will appear in the  
upper left corner of the workspace. Refer to Figure 725-3. The user can invoke the  
restoration process at anytime after a failure when the flashing icon appears. To do so,  
select the Fault pull down menu and NMIC Protection Restoration using the mouse, or by  
hitting the Alt+A and Alt+R keys. Refer to Figure 725-4. The flashing icon will remain  
until the user corrects the problem.  
5. If the restoration is not needed and the user initiates this process, an information window  
will appear stating that protection restoration is not currently needed. Refer to Figure 725-5.  
Select the OK button to continue with other tasks, otherwise follow steps 1 through 3 to  
complete the manually initiated restoration process.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-140  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-725  
Page 2 of 3  
X
Cellworx Vision:  
NMIC protection restoration has been lost!  
Please indicate the slot in which the NMIC card with the most updated  
copy of databases is located.  
Slot2 (ACTIVE)  
Slot4  
Estimated time of restoration 15 minutes  
Press OK to initiate protection restoration.  
OK  
Figure 725-1. NMIC Protection Restoration Window  
X
Cellworx Vision : NMIC Protection Restoration  
NMIC protection restoration in progress...  
Estimated time:  
15 minutes  
Percentage complete:  
48%  
11734-B  
Figure 725-2. NMIC Protection Restoration In Progress Window  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
GNE-1  
11722-C  
Figure 725-3. NMIC Protection Restoration Lost Indicator  
Page 2-141  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-725  
Page 3 of 3  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Alarms  
Configure NE Alarm Threshold...  
NMIC Protection  
NMIC Protection Restoration  
0026-025  
Figure 725-4. Cellworx Vision Fault Pull Down Menu  
X
Cellworx Vision - Information  
Protection restoration is not needed.  
OK  
0026-024  
Figure 725-5. NMIC Protection Restoration Informational Message  
Page 2-142  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-726  
Page 1 of 4  
SET / RETRIEVE OPTICAL PORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully set or retrieve the  
performance monitoring statistics for specified optical interface ports within a Cellworx STN  
network. An optical port may reside on a 2488 RIC, 622 RIC, 155 RIC, or 155 SM/MM CRS  
card. This procedure assumes the user has already accessed the GUI and accessed the  
Performance Monitoring Statistics window per NTP-008.  
1. Select an NE from the list of NEs in the “Resource” section of the window. Refer to Figure  
726-1. This will bring up any available card slots in the NE in the next window.  
2. Select a slot/card type in the “Slot/Card Type” section of the window and all available ports  
will appear in the third window. Multiple slots may be selected.  
3. Select the slot(s)/port(s) desired in the “Port” section of the window to display the  
performance monitoring layers in the “Layer” section of the window. Multiple ports may  
also be selected.  
4. Select the layer or layers to be retrieved in the “Layer” section of the window. If a RIC or  
155 CRS card was selected, SONET will be available in the PM layer window. If SONET  
is not available, return to step 2 of this procedure and select the proper optical interface  
card. ATM Transmission Convergence (TC) will also be selectable.  
5. Select the time period for the report from the Interval selection window on the right. If  
multiple interfaces were selected, only a single time interval may be selected. If a single  
interface was selected, the user may specify several historical time periods to retrieve for  
the report. The current selection will retrieve any errors that are logged for the interface(s)  
specified. In no instance may the current interval and a history interval be selected at the  
same time.  
6. Select the Apply button once all selections have been specified for the performance report.  
The Performance Monitoring Data window appears displaying any error counts for each  
error type. Refer to Figure 726-2 for an example.  
7. If SONET Layer was selected for the report, the Section, Line, and Path errors are accessed  
separately using the tabs at the top of the window. Error types reported are listed in Table  
726-1 for both SONET and ATM/TC. Slider bars are used to view the errors beyond the  
viewing area, either up or down for additional slots and ports, or to the right and left for  
additional error types. The user may update the current counts using the Refresh button at  
the bottom of the screen. If retrieving history counts, Refresh is disabled. The user may also  
reset or clear selected error types by using the Reset Selected or Clear Selected buttons at  
the bottom of the window.  
8. Refer to TAP-100 at the end of this section for troubleshooting tips on any alarm counts.  
Page 2-143  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-726  
Page 2 of 4  
THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION  
9. Users may specify error counts required to trip a system alarm by clicking on the  
Configure Thresholds button at the bottom of the PM Data window. This will bring up a  
Performance Monitoring Configuration window similar to Figure 726-3.  
10. To configure the thresholds, place the cursor in the individual count boxes and type in the  
new threshold value. Do this for all the thresholds to be set in the Section, Line, and Path  
tabs. Refer to Table 726-1 for valid values. Once all counts are entered in each box, select  
the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to send the new data to the database. The  
Apply button includes each tab in the request.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
SELECT AN NE FOR PM  
RETRIEVAL AND THE SLOT  
AND CARD TYPES IN THE  
SHELF WILL BE DISPLAYED  
IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT A SLOT AND CARD  
TYPE, INDIVIDUAL OR  
MULTIPLE,TO DISPLAY THE  
PORTS IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PORT(S) DESIRED  
TO DISPLAY THE LAYERS  
AVAILABLE IN THE NEXT  
WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PM LAYER(S)  
TO BE RETRIEVED.  
SELECT THE CURENT  
COUNT OR A HISTORICAL  
TIME PERIOD FOR ONE  
SLOT/PORT. USER CANNOT  
SELECT CURRENT AND A  
HISTORICAL AT THE SAME  
TIME.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring - Statistics  
Resource: NE-1  
Slot / Card Type  
Port  
Layer  
Interval  
current  
Sonet  
DS1/E1  
DS3  
PLCP  
ATM / TC  
AAL1  
Slot 17 / 622 Ring  
Slot 16 / 622 Ring  
Slot 5 / T3 TMUX Multi 1  
Slot 6 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 7 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 8 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 9 / 155 SM CRS  
Slot 10 / T3 CRS  
Slot 16 / Port 1  
Slot 16 / Port 2  
Slot 17 / Port 1  
Slot 17 / Port 2  
Slot 5 / Port 1  
- Channel 1  
- Channel 2  
- Channel 3  
- Channel 4  
- Channel 5  
NE-1 Cellworx1  
NE-2 Cellworx2  
NE-3 Cellworx3  
00:00-00:15  
00:15-00:30  
00:30-00:45  
00:45-01:00  
01:00-01:15  
01:15-01:30  
01:30-01:45  
01:45-02:00  
0200 - 02:15  
Slot 11 / T3 CRS  
Slot 12 / T1 Multi 1  
Close  
Apply  
11743-D  
CLOSES PM STATISTICS  
WINDOW.  
SELECT TO RETRIEVE PM  
DATA FOR SELECTED  
PARAMETERS.  
Figure 726-1. Performance Monitoring – Selection Window  
Page 2-144  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-726  
Page 3 of 4  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Data NE 2  
Only non-zero selected intervals are displayed.  
X
SONET Path  
SONET Line  
SONET Section  
Card Type  
Slot-Port  
Interval  
Suspect Supp ESs  
SESs  
CVs  
UASs  
FE ESs FE SESs FE CVs  
155 MM CRS  
S12-P2  
00:00 - 00:15  
0
0
0
0
0
900  
0
0
0
Configure Thresholds  
Close  
Refresh  
Refresh All  
Reset Selected  
Clear Selected  
13556-B  
Figure 726-2. Performance Monitoring Data – SONET Port Window  
Cellworx Vision: PM Threshold Configuration SONET Path Layer  
X
Card Type  
Slot-Port  
ESs  
SESs  
CVs  
UASs  
FE ESs FE SESs FE CVs FE UAS  
S17-P1  
622 Ring  
60  
3
75  
10  
60  
3
0
0
Apply  
Close  
13552-B  
Figure 726-3. 622 Ring Card SONET Path PM Threshold Configuration Screen  
Table 726-1. SONET PM Values  
MONITOR  
TYPE  
MAX 15-MIN  
THRESHOLD  
COMMENTS  
SECTION  
CV  
16383  
900  
Code Violation, a count of Bit Interleaved Parity (BIP) errors detected at the Section  
layer using the B1 byte in the incoming SONET signal  
ES  
Errored Seconds, number of seconds in which at least one Section layer Bit  
Interleaved Parity (BIP), Loss Of Signal (LOS), or Severely Errored Frame (SEF)  
was detected  
SEFS  
SES  
900  
900  
Severely Errored Frame Seconds, a count of seconds that four consecutive incoming  
section frames are errored  
Severely Errored Seconds, a count of seconds in which a set number of Section BIP  
errors, LOS, or SEF were detected  
(continued)  
Page 2-145  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-726  
Page 4 of 4  
Table 726-1. SONET Layer PM Values, continued  
COMMENTS  
MONITOR TYPE  
LINE  
CV-L  
16383  
Line Code Violation, count of BIP errors detected at the Section layer using the B2  
byte in the incoming SONET signal  
CV-LFE  
16383  
Far-end Line Code Violation, a count of BIP errors detected at the far end LTE and  
reported back to the near end LTE using the Remote Error Indicator (REI) in the  
Line overhead  
ES-L  
900  
900  
900  
900  
900  
900  
Line Errored Seconds, number of seconds in which at least one Line layer BIP, or an  
AIS condition was detected  
ES-LFE  
SES-L  
Far-end Line Errored Seconds, count of the seconds in which at least one Line BIP  
was detected by the far end LTE or an RDI-L defect was present  
Line Severely Errored Seconds, a count of seconds in which a set number of Line  
layer BIP errors, or an AIS condition were detected  
SES-LFE  
UAS-L  
UAS-LFE  
Far-end Line Severely Errored Seconds, a count of seconds in which a set number of  
Line layer BIP errors, or AIS were detected by the far end LTE  
Line Unavailable Seconds, a count of seconds in which the Line was considered  
unavailable  
Far-end Line Unavailable Seconds, a count of seconds in which the Line was  
considered unavailable, reported by the far end LTE to the near end LTE using the  
RDI in the Line overhead  
PATH  
CV-P  
16383  
16383  
Code Violation, a count of BIP errors detected at the Path layer using the B3 byte of  
the incoming SONET signal  
CV-PFE  
Far-end Path Code Violation, a count of BIP errors detected at the far end LTE and  
reported back to the near end LTE using the Remote Error Indicator (REI) in the  
Path overhead  
ES-P  
900  
900  
900  
900  
Path Errored Seconds, number of seconds in which at least one Path layer BIP,  
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), or Loss Of Pointer (LOP) condition was detected  
ES-PFE  
SES-P  
Far-end Path Errored Seconds, count of the seconds in which at least one Path layer  
BIP was detected by the far end LTE or an RDI-P defect was present  
Path Severely Errored Seconds, a count of seconds in which a set number of Path  
BIP errors, AIS, or LOP were detected  
SES-PFE  
Far-end Path Severely Errored Seconds, a count of seconds in which a set number of  
Path layer BIP errors, AIS, or LOP were detected by the far end LTE and reported  
back to the near end LTE using the RDI-P bit in the Path overhead  
UAS-P  
900  
900  
Line Unavailable Seconds, a count of seconds in which the Line was considered  
unavailable  
UAS-PFE  
Far-end Path Unavailable Seconds, a count of seconds in which the Path was  
considered unavailable, reported by the far end LTE to the near end LTE using the  
RDI in the Path overhead  
Page 2-146  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-727  
Page 1 of 4  
SET / RETRIEVE T3 TMUX MULTI 1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully set or retrieve the  
performance monitoring statistics for specified T3 TMUX MULTI 1 interface ports within a  
Cellworx STN network. This procedure assumes the user has already accessed the GUI and  
accessed the Performance Monitoring-Statistics window per NTP-008.  
1. Select an NE from the list of NEs in the left selection window. Refer to Figure 727-1. This  
will bring up any available card slots in the NE in the next window.  
2. Select a slot/card type in the second window and all available ports will appear in the third  
window. Multiple slots may be selected.  
3. Select the slot(s)/port(s)/channels desired in the third window to display the performance  
monitoring layers in the fourth window. Multiple ports may also be selected.  
4. Select the layer or layers to be retrieved in the fourth window. If a T3 TMUX Multi 1  
slot/port and channel was selected, AAL1, ATM/TC, and DS1 will be available in the PM  
layer window for selection. If only the slot and port were selected the DS3 and DS1 layers  
will be available for selection.  
5. Select the time period for the report from the Interval selection window on the right. If  
multiple interfaces were selected, only a single time interval may be selected. If a single  
interface was selected, the user may specify several historical time periods to retrieve for  
the report. The current selection will retrieve any errors that are logged for the interface(s)  
specified. In no instance may the current interval and a history interval be selected at the  
same time.  
6. Select the Apply button once all selections have been specified for the performance report.  
The Performance Monitoring Data window appears displaying any error counts for each  
error type. Refer to Figure 727-2 for an example.  
7. Error types reported are listed in Table 726-1 for AAL1, ATM/TC, and DS1 errors. Slider  
bars are used to view the errors beyond the viewing area, either up or down for additional  
slots and ports, or to the right and left for additional error types. The user may update the  
current counts using the Refresh button at the bottom of the screen. If retrieving history  
counts, Refresh is disabled.  
8. Refer to TAP-100 at the end of this section for troubleshooting tips on any alarm counts.  
THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION  
9. Users may specify error counts required to trip a system alarm by clicking on the  
Configure Thresholds button at the bottom of the PM Data window. This will bring up a  
Performance Monitoring Configuration window similar to Figure 727-3.  
Page 2-147  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-727  
Page 2 of 4  
10. To configure the thresholds, place the cursor in the individual count boxes and type in the  
new threshold value. Refer to Table 730-1 for valid values. Once all counts are entered in  
each box, select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to send the new data to the  
database.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Selection Criteria  
X
Resource:  
Slot / Card Type  
Port  
Layer  
Interval  
NE 1: Cellworx1  
NE 2: Cellworx2  
NE 3: Cellworx3  
NE 4: CellworxEXP  
current  
AAL1  
ATM/TC  
DS1  
Slot 4 / T1 MULTI 1  
Slot 5 / T1 MULTI 1  
Slot 6 / T3 TMUX MUL  
Slot 7 / T3 CRS  
Slot 6 / Port 1  
00:00 - 00:15  
00:15 - 00:30  
00:30 - 00:45  
00:45 - 01:00  
01:00 - 01:15  
01:15 - 01:30  
01:30 - 01:45  
01:45 - 02:00  
02:00 - 02:15  
-- Slot 6 / Port 1 / Ch  
-- Slot 6 / Port 1 / Ch  
-- Slot 6 / Port 1 / Ch  
-- Slot 6 / Port 1 / Ch  
-- Slot 6 / Port 1 / Ch  
-- Slot 6 / Port 1 / Ch  
-- Slot 6 / Port 1 / Ch  
-- Slot 6 / Port 1 / Ch  
-- Slot 6 / Port 1 / Ch  
Slot 10 / T3 CRS  
Slot 12 / 155 MM CRS  
Slot 16 / 622 Ring  
Slot 17 / 622 Ring  
Close  
Apply  
13566-B  
Figure 727-1. Performance Monitoring Selection Criteria Screen (example)  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Data NE 2  
Only non-zero selected intervals are displayed.  
DS1  
X
Card Type  
T1 Multi 1  
Slot-Port  
S10-P1-C1  
Interval  
current  
ESs  
SESs  
SEFSs UASs  
CSSs  
PCVs  
LESs  
BESs  
DMs  
0
0
0
0
0
0
900  
0
0
Configure Thresholds  
Close  
Refresh  
Refresh All  
Reset Selected  
Clear Selected  
13555-C  
Figure 727-2. Performance Monitoring Data – T3 TMUX Multi 1 Port (example)  
Cellworx Vision: PM Threshold Configuration AAL 1 Layer  
Card Type  
X
Slot-Port  
ESs  
SEFSs  
UASs  
SESs  
CSSs  
PCVs  
T3 TMUX Multi 1  
0
S6-P1-C1  
0
0
0
Close  
Apply  
13568-B  
Figure 727-3. Performance Monitoring Configuration – T3 TMUX Multi 1 Port (example)  
Page 2-148  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-727  
Page 3 of 4  
Table 727-1. T3 TMUX Multi 1 Performance Monitoring Values  
MONTYPE  
MAX 15 MIN. THRESH  
COMMENTS  
CV-L  
16383  
Sets a count of Line Code Violations that the port can incur  
before the system declares a TCA.  
ES-L  
900  
Sets a count of Line Errored Seconds that the port can  
incur before the systems declares a TCA.  
CV-Pbit  
ES-Pbit  
UAS  
16383  
900  
Sets a count of Parity bit Code Violation that the port can  
incur before the systems declares a TCA.  
Sets a count of Parity bit Errored Seconds that the port can  
incur before the systems declares a TCA.  
900  
Sets a count of Unavailable Seconds that the port can incur  
before the systems declares a TCA.  
SEFS  
900  
Sets a count of Severely Errored Frame Seconds that the  
port can incur before the systems declares a TCA.  
CV-Cbit  
16383  
Sets a count of Cbit (Calculated parity bit of M-frame does  
not match received parity bits) Code Violation that the port  
can incur before the systems declares a TCA.  
ES-Cbit  
SES-Cbit  
SES-Pbit  
ES  
900  
900  
900  
900  
Sets a count of Cbit Errored Seconds that the port can incur  
before the systems declares a TCA.  
Sets a count of Cbit Severely Errored Seconds that the port  
can incur before the systems declares a TCA.  
Sets a count of Pbit Severely Errored Seconds that the port  
can incur before the systems declares a TCA.  
Sets a count of errored seconds that the port can incur  
before creating a TCA on the system. Error seconds  
determined as number of seconds FE>=1, SEF >=1, or any  
Cellworx Vision/AIS condition.  
SES  
900  
900  
Sets a count of line severely errored seconds that the port  
can incur before creating a TCA on the system. SES is  
determined as the number of seconds CV-L >=1547 or  
LOS (Loss of Signal) >=1.  
UAS  
Sets a count of unavailable seconds that the port can incur  
before creating a TCA on the system. UAS determined as  
the number of seconds that the path is unavailable.  
BES  
900  
900  
Sets a count of Burst Errored Seconds that the port can  
incur before creating a TCA on the system.  
SEFS  
Sets a count of severely errored frame seconds that the port  
can incur before creating a TCA on the system. SEFS  
determined when SEF >=1.  
DM  
15  
Sets a count of minutes that the port can incur a signal  
degradation before creating a TCA on the system.  
(continued)  
Page 2-149  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-727  
Page 4 of 4  
Table 727-1. T3 TMUX Multi 1 Performance Monitoring Values, continued  
MONITOR TYPE  
MAX 15 MIN.  
THRESH  
COMMENTS  
AAL1 LAYER  
Stuffing Cells  
9900  
Indicates a count of AIS cells inserted into the data stream for stuffing  
purposes in a 15-minute interval.  
Congestion Lost  
Cells  
7391440  
3695745  
Indicates a count of cells discarded in a 15-minute interval.  
AAL1 Sequence  
Errors  
A count of “Out of Sequence” transitions in a 15-minute interval.  
Lost Cells  
3695745  
900  
A count of cells lost in a 15-minute interval.  
Buffer Overflow  
Indicates a count of buffers that have overflowed in a 15-minute period.  
Buffer Underflow 900  
Indicates a count of buffers that have underflowed in a 15-minute  
period.  
ATM / TC LAYER  
Suspect  
Supp  
1
Suspect defines counts that are suspected to have errors but may have  
been reset to zero by a user during the reporting period.  
3695745  
Suppressed intervals flag indicates that there was no data to report for  
an interval (all counts are zero). This saves the user from having to  
look at a bunch of zeros and also reduces the size of the PM data files.  
Hdr Errs  
3695745  
3695745  
Sets a count of errors in the ATM header that the system can incur  
before notifying the system administrator.  
OAM Rcvd  
A count of Operation, Administration, and Maintenance cells received  
in a 15-minute period. These cells are used for testing purposes such as  
loopback request codes.  
In Cells  
3695745  
3695745  
3695745  
900  
A total count of all of the cells that have been received on an interface.  
This is for user information and not configurable.  
Out Cells  
HEC Viols  
OCDs  
A total count of all of the cells that have been transmitted out from an  
interface. This is for user information and is not configurable.  
Sets a count of Header Error Checksum violations that the system can  
incur before declaring an alert.  
Sets a count of Out of Cell Delineation anomalies that the system can  
incur before declaring an alert.  
Note: Max value should be the number of cells received in a 15-minute period (or for  
Congestion Lost Cells, multiply this by 2). Although 31 or 32 bits are allocated, only  
4106.38 cells/sec are received on a T1. In a 15-minute period (900 seconds) only  
3695744.68 cell are received. Therefore the max value for all AAL1 sequence errors for  
a 15-minute period should be 3695745 (22 bits), and for Congestion Lost cells 7391440  
(23 bits).  
Page 2-150  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-728  
Page 1 of 4  
SET / RETRIEVE T3 CRS PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully retrieve the performance  
monitoring statistics for specified T3 interface ports within a Cellworx STN network.  
Information retrieved is on a per node and per port basis. This procedure assumes the user has  
already accessed the GUI and initiated the Performance Monitoring-Selection window per NTP-  
008.  
1. Select an NE from the list of NEs in the “Resource” section of the window. Refer to Figure  
728-1. This will bring up any available card slots in the NE in the next window.  
2. Select a slot/card type in the “Slot/Card Type” section of the window and all available ports  
will appear in the third window. Multiple slots may be selected.  
3. Select the port(s) desired to display the performance monitoring layers in the “Port” section  
of the window. Multiple ports may be selected also.  
4. Select the layer or layers to be retrieved in the “Layer” section of the window. If a T3 CRS  
card was selected, ATM/TC (Transmission Convergence), DS3, and PLCP will be available  
in the PM layer window. If not, return to step 2 of this procedure and select the proper  
interface card.  
5. Select the time period for the report from the Interval selection window on the right. If  
multiple interfaces were selected, only a single time interval may be selected. If a single  
interface was selected, the user may specify several historical time periods to retrieve for  
the report. The “current” selection will retrieve any errors that are actively logged for the  
interface(s) specified. In no instance may the current interval and a history interval be  
selected at the same time.  
6. Select the Apply button once all selections have been specified for the performance report.  
The Performance Monitoring- T3 Port window appears. Refer to Figure 728-2 for an  
example.  
7. Error types reported are listed in Table 728-1. The slider bars are used to view the errors  
that are beyond the viewing area, either up or down for additional slots and ports, or to the  
right and left for additional error types. The user may update the counts using the Refresh  
button at the bottom of the screen. If retrieving history counts, the Refresh button is  
disabled. Refer to TAP-100 at the end of this section for troubleshooting guidelines.  
THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION  
8. Users may specify error counts required to trip a system alarm by clicking on the  
Configure Thresholds button at the bottom of the PM Data window. This will bring up a  
Performance Monitoring Threshold Configuration window similar to Figure 728-3.  
Page 2-151  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-728  
Page 2 of 4  
9. To configure the thresholds, place the cursor in the individual count boxes and type in the  
new threshold value. Refer to Table 730-1 for valid values. Once all counts are entered in  
each box, select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to send the new data to the  
database.  
10. Select the Close button to dismiss the open windows.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Selection Criteria  
X
Resource:  
Slot / Card Type  
Port  
Layer  
Interval  
NE 1: Cellworx1  
NE 2: Cellworx2  
NE 3: Cellworx3  
NE 4: CellworxEXP  
current  
Slot 4 / T1 MULTI 1  
Slot 5 / E1 MULTI 1  
Slot 6 / T3 TMUX MULTI  
Slot 7 / T3 CRS  
Slot 10 / Port 1  
Slot 10 / Port 2  
Slot 10 / Port 3  
ATM/TC  
DS3  
PLCP  
00:00 - 00:15  
00:15 - 00:30  
00:30 - 00:45  
00:45 - 01:00  
01:00 - 01:15  
01:15 - 01:30  
01:30 - 01:45  
01:45 - 02:00  
02:00 - 02:15  
Slot 10 / T3 CRS  
Slot 12 / 155 MM CRS  
Slot 16 / 622 Ring  
Slot 17 / 622 Ring  
Close  
Apply  
13562-B  
Figure 728-1.T3 CRS PM Selection Criteria Window  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Data NE 2  
X
Only non-zero selected intervals are displayed.  
DS3  
Card Type  
T3CRS  
Slot-Port  
S10-P1  
Interval  
current  
PESs PSESs SEFS UASs  
LCVs PCVs  
LESs  
CCVs  
CSESs  
0
0
0
197  
0
0
197  
0
0
Configure Thresholds  
Close  
Refresh  
Refresh All  
Reset Selected  
Clear Selected  
13558-B  
Figure 728-2. Performance Monitoring Data T3 Port Window  
Cellworx Vision: PM Threshold Configuration DS3 Layer  
X
Card Type  
T3 CRS  
Slot-Port  
S10-P1  
PESs  
PSESs  
SEFSs UASs  
LCVs  
PCVs  
LESs  
CCVs  
60  
3
75  
10  
60  
3
0
0
Close  
Apply  
13551-B  
Figure 728-3. Performance Monitoring T3 Port Configuration Window  
Page 2-152  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-728  
Page 3 of 4  
Table 728-1. T3 Performance Monitoring Values  
MONTYPE  
PES  
MAX 15-MINUTE  
THRESHOLD  
COMMENTS  
900  
Sets a count of Parity bit Errored Seconds that the port can incur before the  
system declares a TCA.  
PSES  
SEFS  
UAS  
900  
Sets a count of Pbit Severely Errored Seconds that the port can incur before  
the system declares a TCA.  
900  
Sets a count of Severely Errored Frame Seconds that the port can incur  
before the system declares a TCA.  
900  
Sets a count of Unavailable Seconds that the port can incur before the system  
declares a TCA.  
CV-L  
ES-L  
PCV  
16383  
900  
Sets a count of Line Code Violations that the port can incur before the  
system declares a TCA.  
Sets a count of Line Errored Seconds that the port can incur before the  
system declares a TCA.  
16383  
16383  
900  
Sets a count of Path Code Violations that the port can incur before the  
system declares a TCA.  
CCV  
Sets a count of Cbit Code Violation that the port can incur before the system  
declares a TCA.  
CES  
Sets a count of Cbit Errored Seconds that the port can incur before the  
system declares a TCA.  
CSES  
900  
Sets a count of Cbit Severely Errored Seconds that the port can incur before  
the system declares a TCA.  
PLCP  
SEFS  
UAS  
900  
900  
Sets a count of Severely Errored Frame Seconds that the port can incur  
before the system declares a TCA.  
Sets a count of Unavailable Seconds that the port can incur before the system  
declares a TCA.  
ATM / TC  
Suspect  
Supp  
1
Suspect defines counts that are suspected to have errors but may have been  
reset to zero by a user during the reporting period.  
3695745  
Suppressed intervals flag indicates that there was no data to report for an  
interval (all counts are zero). This saves the user from having to look at a  
excessive zeros and also reduces the size of the PM data files.  
Hdr Errs  
3695745  
Sets a count of errors in the ATM header that the system can incur before  
declaring an alert.  
OAM Rcvd 3695745  
A count of Operation, Administration, and Maintenance cells received in a  
15-minute period, used for testing purposes such as loopback request codes.  
(continued)  
Page 2-153  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-728  
Page 4 of 4  
Table 728-1. T3 Performance Monitoring Values  
COMMENTS  
MONTYPE  
MAX 15-MINUTE  
THRESHOLD  
ATM / TC, CONTINUED  
In Cells  
3695745  
3695745  
A total count of all of the cells that have been received on an interface. This  
is for user information and not configurable.  
Out Cells  
A total count of all of the cells that have been transmitted out from an  
interface. This is for user information and is not configurable.  
HEC Viols 3695745  
Sets a count of Header Error Checksum violations that the system can incur  
before declaring an alert.  
OCDs  
900  
Sets a count of Out of Cell Delineation anomalies that the system can incur  
before declaring an alert.  
Page 2-154  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-729  
Page 1 of 4  
SET / RETRIEVE T1/E1 MULTI 1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully retrieve the performance  
monitoring statistics for specified T1 Multi 1 interface ports within a Cellworx STN network.  
Information retrieved is on a per node and per port basis. This procedure assumes the user has  
already accessed the GUI and initiated the Performance Monitoring-Selection window per NTP-  
008.  
1. Select an NE from the list of NEs in the “Resource” section of the window. Refer to Figure  
729-1. This will bring up any available card slots in the NE in the next window.  
2. Select a slot/card type in the “Slot/Card Type” section of the window. All available ports  
will appear in the “Port” window. Multiple slots may be selected.  
3. Select the port(s) desired to display the performance monitoring layers in the “Port” section  
of the window. Multiple ports may be selected also.  
4. Select the layer or layers to be retrieved in the “Layer” section of the window. If a T1 Multi  
1 CRS card was selected, AAL 1, ATM/TC (Transmission Convergence), and DS1 will be  
available in the PM layer window. If not, return to step 2 of this procedure and select the  
proper interface card.  
5. Select the time period for the report from the Interval selection window on the right. If  
multiple interfaces were selected, only a single time interval may be selected. If a single  
interface was selected, the user may specify several historical time periods to retrieve for  
the report. The “current” selection will retrieve any errors that are actively logged for the  
interface(s) specified. In no instance may the current interval and a history interval be  
selected at the same time.  
6. Select the Apply button once all selections have been specified for the performance report.  
The Performance Monitoring- T1 Multi 1 Port window appears. Refer to Figure 729-2 for  
an example.  
7. Error types reported are listed in Table 729-1. The slider bars are used to view the errors  
that are beyond the viewing area, either up or down for additional slots and ports, or to the  
right and left for additional error types. The user may update the counts using the Refresh  
button at the bottom of the screen. If retrieving history counts, the Refresh button is  
disabled. Refer to TAP-100 at the end of this section for troubleshooting guidelines.  
THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION  
8. Users may specify error counts required to trip a system alarm by clicking on the  
Configure Thresholds button at the bottom of the PM Data window. This will bring up a  
Performance Monitoring Configuration window similar to Figure 729-3.  
Page 2-155  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-729  
Page 2 of 4  
9. To configure the thresholds, place the cursor in the individual count boxes and type in the  
new threshold value. Refer to Table 730-1 for valid values. Once all counts are entered in  
each box, select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to send the new data to the  
database.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Selection Criteria  
X
Resource:  
Slot / Card Type  
Port  
Layer  
Interval  
NE 1: Cellworx1  
NE 2: Cellworx2  
NE 3: Cellworx3  
NE 4: CellworxEXP  
current  
Slot 4 / Port 1  
Slot 4 / Port 2  
Slot 4 / Port 3  
Slot 4 / Port 4  
Slot 4 / Port 5  
Slot 4 / Port 6  
Slot 4 / Port 7  
Slot 4 / Port 8  
Slot 4 / Port 9  
Slot 4 / Port 10  
Slot 4 / T1 MULTI 1  
Slot 5 / E1 MULTI 1  
Slot 6 / T3 TMUX MULTI  
Slot 7 / T3 CRS  
AAL1  
ATM/TC  
DS1  
00:00 - 00:15  
00:15 - 00:30  
00:30 - 00:45  
00:45 - 01:00  
01:00 - 01:15  
01:15 - 01:30  
01:30 - 01:45  
01:45 - 02:00  
02:00 - 02:15  
Slot 10 / T3 CRS  
Slot 12 / 155 MM CRS  
Slot 16 / 622 Ring  
Slot 17 / 622 Ring  
Close  
Apply  
13564-B  
Figure 729-1.T1 Multi 1 CRS PM Selection Criteria Window  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Data NE 2  
Only non-zero selected intervals are displayed.  
DS1  
X
Card Type  
Resource  
Interval  
ESs  
SESs  
SEFSs UASs  
CSSs  
PCVs  
LESs  
BESs  
DMs  
T1 Multi 1 CRS  
S4-P1  
current  
0
0
0
0
0
900  
0
0
0
Configure Thresholds  
Close  
Refresh  
Refresh All  
Reset Selected  
Clear Selected  
13554-B  
Figure 729-2. Performance Monitoring Data T1 Multi 1 CRS Port Window  
Page 2-156  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-729  
Page 3 of 4  
Cellworx Vision: PM Threshold Configuration AAL1 Layer  
X
Card Type  
Slot-Port  
ESs  
SESs  
SEFSs UASs  
CSS  
T1 MULTI  
S4-P1  
0
0
0
0
0
Apply  
Close  
13563-B  
Figure 729-3. Performance Monitoring T1 Multi Port Configuration Window  
Table 729-1. T1 Multi 1 CRS Performance Monitoring Values  
MONTYPE MAX 15 MIN.  
THRESHOLD  
COMMENTS  
CV-L  
16383  
Sets a count of line code violations that the port can incur before creating a  
TCA on the system. Line code violation is a count of *BPVs and *ExZs.  
ES-L  
900  
Sets a count of line errored seconds that the port can incur before creating a  
TCA on the system. ES-L is determined as number of seconds that BPV and  
ExZ >=1 or LOS (loss of Signal) >=1.  
SES  
900  
Sets a count of line severely errored seconds that the port can incur before  
creating a TCA on the system. SES is determined as the number of seconds  
CV-L >=1547 or LOS (Loss of Signal) >=1.  
CV-P  
UAS  
16383  
900  
Sets a count of path code violations that the port can incur before creating a  
TCA on the system. CV-P determined from SF count of FE, or ESF count of  
CRC errors.  
Sets a count of unavailable seconds that the port can incur before creating a  
TCA on the system. UAS determined as the number of seconds that the path is  
unavailable.  
BES  
CSS  
900  
900  
Sets a count of Burst Errored Seconds that the port can incur before creating a  
TCA on the system.  
Sets a count of Controlled Slip Seconds that the port can incur before  
creating a TCA on the system. CSS is determined as a count of 1 second  
intervals where CS >=1.  
SEFS  
DM  
ES  
900  
2
Sets a count of severely errored frame seconds that the port can incur before  
creating a TCA on the system. SEFS determined when SEF >=1.  
Sets a count of minutes that the port can incur a signal degradation before  
creating a TCA on the system.  
900  
Sets a count of errored seconds that the port can incur before creating a TCA  
on the system. Error seconds determined as number of seconds FE>=1, SEF  
>=1, or any Cellworx Vision/AIS condition.  
(continued)  
Page 2-157  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-729  
Page 4 of 4  
Table 729-1. T1 Multi 1 CRS Performance Monitoring Values, continued  
MONTYPE  
MAX 15 MIN.  
THRESHOLD  
COMMENTS  
AAL 1 LAYER  
Stuffing Cells  
9900  
Indicates a count of AIS cells inserted into the data stream for stuffing  
purposes in a 15-minute interval.  
Congestion Lost 32 BITS  
Cells  
Indicates a count of cells discarded in a 15-minute interval.  
AAL1  
31 BITS  
A count of “Out of Sequence” transitions in a 15-minute interval.  
Sequence Errors  
Lost Cells  
31 BITS  
900  
A count of cells lost in a 15-minute interval.  
Buffer  
Indicates a count of buffers that have overflowed in a 15-minute period.  
Overflow  
Buffer  
900  
Indicates a count of buffers that have under flowed in a 15-minute period.  
Underflow  
ATM / TC  
Suspect  
Supp  
1
Suspect defines counts that are suspected to have errors but may have been  
reset to zero by a user during the reporting period.  
3695745  
Suppressed intervals flag indicates that there was no data to report for an  
interval (all counts are zero). This saves the user from having to look at a  
bunch of zeros and also reduces the size of the PM data files.  
Hdr Errs  
3695745  
3695745  
Sets a count of errors in the ATM header that the system can incur before  
notifying the system administrator.  
OAM Rcvd  
A count of Operation, Administration, and Maintenance cells received in a  
15-minute period, used for testing purposes such as loopback request  
codes.  
In Cells  
3695745  
3695745  
3695745  
900  
A total count of all of the cells that have been received on an interface.  
This is for user information and not configurable.  
Out Cells  
HEC Viols  
OCDs  
A total count of all of the cells that have been transmitted out from an  
interface. This is for user information and is not configurable.  
Sets a count of Header Error Checksum violations that the system can  
incur before notifying the system administrator.  
Sets a count of Out of Cell Delineation anomalies that the system can incur  
before notifying the system administrator.  
*BPV (Bi-Polar Violation) = Occurrence of pulses of same polarity as the previous pulse except  
as part of the B8ZS substitution code.  
*ExZ (Excessive Zero) = Occurrence of any zero string greater than “N” contiguous zeros,  
where “N” = 7 for B8ZS or 15 for AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion).  
Page 2-158  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-730  
Page 1 of 4  
RETRIEVE NETWORK DATA COLLECTION (NDC) STATISTICS  
Summary: This procedure defines the steps required to retrieve Network Data Collection (NDC)  
statistics from the NMIC. The NDC counts may be used to monitor individual connection traffic  
through the Cellworx system. The user should have accessed the NMIC and launched the GUI  
before attempting this procedure.  
1. To access the NDC counts, from the main GUI screen access the Subnetwork Connection  
Filter window using one of the following methods:  
a. Using the left mouse button, select Configuration, Connection, and View.  
Refer to Figure 730-1.  
b. Using the direct selection keys, enter Alt+C, Alt+N then Alt+V.  
c. Using the right mouse button, position the cursor over the NE, click and hold  
the button, select View Connections, and release the button.  
d. Using the left mouse button, select the connection icon above the workspace.  
2. The Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connections window appears, similar to the example  
shown in Figure 730-2. Using the tabs, go to each page and select the Connection type,  
Network Element, Traffic Contract, and ATM or CES interface and then hit the Apply  
button at the bottom of the screen. The user may elect to select the connection type and the  
“Retrieve all selected type connections” button followed by the Apply button. This avoids  
having to select individual interfaces and nodes on the other pages.  
3. The Subnetwork Connections screen appears similar to the one shown in Figure 730-3.  
Highlight the line with the connection that you wish to retrieve the NDC data for.  
4. Select the View button near the top of the window to open the drop down menu. Select  
either the NDC Current or NDC Historical option.  
5. After selecting the NDC Historical, the Select Interval window appears. Refer to Figure  
730-4. Select the 15-minute interval to retrieve the NDC data for. The first option of 00:00-  
00:15 will retrieve the data recorded from midnight to fifteen minutes past midnight and so  
on for a complete 24 hour period. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the screen.  
6. The system retrieves the data and displays it on the Network Data Collection Statistics  
window. Refer to Figure 730-5 for an example. The statistics available are defined in Table  
730-1.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-159  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-730  
Page 2 of 4  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10963-D  
Figure 730-1. View Connection Pull Down Menu  
X
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Connection Filter  
SELECT A TAB TO FILTER  
FOR A SPECIFIC ITEM.  
Network  
Traffic  
FR  
ATM  
CES  
Connection  
Connection Types:  
SELECT AN ITEM IN THE  
FOLDERS TO FILTER.  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES - ATM VC  
CES - CES  
FR - ATM VC  
FR - FR  
ATM VP MULTICAST  
ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Retrieve All Selected Type Connections  
SELECT THE APPLY BUTTON  
TO RETRIEVE CONNECTION  
INFO FOR FILTERED  
SELECTION.  
Close  
Reset  
Apply  
11000-F  
Figure 730-2. Subnetwork Connection Filter Window  
Page 2-160  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-730  
Page 3 of 4  
X
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connections  
Format  
View  
1
Page  
Connection TyVP  
NDC Current  
Connection Na
NE - NE  
Status  
NDC Historical  
***********1  
***********2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
Incomplete  
Functional  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
***********3  
Unknown State  
0026-026  
Figure 730-3. Subnetwork Connection Display Window  
X
Select Intervals  
Interval Selection:  
00:00 -- 00:15  
00:15 -- 00:30  
00:30 -- 00:45  
00:45 -- 01:00  
01:00 -- 01:15  
01:15 -- 01:30  
01:30 -- 01:45  
01:45 -- 02:00  
02:00 -- 02:15  
02:15 -- 02:30  
02:30 -- 02:45  
02:45 -- 03:00  
Apply  
Close  
0026-028  
Figure 730-4. Select Interval Window  
Cellworx Vision: Network Data Collection Statistics  
X
Card Type  
Suspect  
NE ID  
45  
Resource Cnct Type Interval VPI  
VCI  
Supp Disc  
Connection Namee  
Disc (CLP=0) Pas  
8
1
2
1
0
0
CRS-45<-->CRS-50  
T3 CRS  
T3 CRS  
S7 - P3  
S7 - P1  
S10 - P6  
S10 - P4  
CRS  
current  
current  
current  
current  
126  
0
0
0
1
12  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
45  
45  
45  
CRS  
CES  
CES  
247  
CRS-45<-->CRS-52  
CES-45<-->CES-50  
12  
3
4
T1 Multi 1  
T1 Multi 1  
1345  
CES-45<-->CES-52  
0
4
542  
Refresh  
Close  
0026-027  
Figure 730-5. Network Data Collection Statistics Window  
Page 2-161  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-730  
Page 4 of 4  
Table 730-1. NDC Data Statistics  
DEFINITION  
STATISTIC  
Connection Name  
NE ID  
User assigned.  
ID number assigned to the NE where the connection  
originates. ID is set via a thumbwheel switch on the SC  
EIM at the rear of the shelf.  
Card Type  
Resource  
Shows the type of card (i.e., T3 CRS, T1 Multi 1, etc.)  
Identifies the slot and port number of the card where  
the connection originates.  
Crct Type  
Interval  
Defines the type of circuit (i.e., CES, CRS)  
Shows time interval as the fifteen minute block selected  
by user (i.e., 01:15 – 01:30) or as current.  
VPI  
Shows the Virtual Path Identifier assigned to the  
connection by user.  
VCI  
Shows the Virtual Channel Identifier assigned to the  
connection by user.  
Suspect  
Shows a count of cells that are suspect of having errors  
or having been reset.  
Supp  
Shows a count of cells that have been suppressed  
Shows a count of cells that have been discarded.  
Disc  
DISC (CLP=0)  
Shows a count of cells with a Cell Loss Priority of 0  
that have been discarded due to congestion on the  
network.  
Passed  
Ingress  
Shows a count of cells that have passed.  
Shows a count of cells that have entered the port on this  
connection.  
Ingress (CLP=0)  
Egress  
Shows a count of cells with a Cell Loss Priority of 0  
that have entered the port on this connection.  
Shows a count of cells that have exited the port on this  
connection.  
Egress (CLP=0)  
Shows a count of cells with a Cell Loss Priority of 0  
that have exited the port on this connection.  
Page 2-162  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-731  
Page 1 of 9  
RING UPGRADE PROCEDURE  
Summary: This procedure will guide the user through a ring upgrade on the Cellworx STN  
system. It is assumed that the user has gained access to the Cellworx STN system and has  
launched the Graphical User Interface per NTP-016.  
During this procedure, the GUI will guide the user through steps necessary to upgrade the ring  
one direction at a time so it will not be service affecting. The user will be allowed to fallback to  
the original level at any point during the upgrade process before it completes. Once the fallback  
is initiated, the user will not be allowed to attempt the ring upgrade again until the fallback has  
successfully completed. The user may fallback only to the previous ring level, and may not  
convert a ring at any time to a lower ring level (i.e., OC48c to OC12c).  
1. The GUI main screen, select the Ring Upgrade option by single-clicking on Configuration,  
Topology, and then Ring Upgrade. The user may elect to use the shortcut key strokes of  
Alt+C, Alt+T, and Alt+U. Refer to Figure 731-1.  
2. The Task Overview window appears outlining each step of the upgrade process. Refer to  
Figure 731-2.  
3. An informational message appears instructing the user to shut down any active GUI users  
on the system Refer to Figure 731-3. All GUI users should be informed of the upgrade and  
log themselves off of the system during this process. Select the Next>> button.  
4. The Ring Audit window appears displaying the status of the network. Fiber continuity is  
mandatory before this upgrade can continue. Verify the ring continuity and rectify any  
problems before continuing. Continuity can be determined by the Status column on the  
bottom right of the window. Each line should indicate an “OK” status. Refer to the example  
shown in Figure 731-4. Select the Next>> button at the bottom of the window to continue.  
5. The Ring Upgrade Configuration window appears and allows the user to select the ring  
software. Refer to Figure 731-5. If upgrading from an OC3c ring, the user must also select  
the next ring configuration (OC12c or OC48c). Currently, the Cellworx STN 2.0 ring  
software selection will have only one selection of 2.0.0.12. Verify the selection and left  
click on the Next >> button.  
Page 2-163  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-731  
Page 2 of 9  
6. An informational warning message appears informing the user NOT to reset the RICs in  
slot 17 until the RICs in slot 16 have rebooted. Refer to Figure 731-6. This will allow the  
system to switch traffic over to the new ring on slot 16 cards when removing the slot 17  
cards for upgrade. The user should refrain from any activity or intervention on the slot 17  
cards or SCCs until ALL slot 16 cards have rebooted. This will limit any traffic loss. Select  
the Next>> button to continue.  
7. A window appears displaying the RIC status in slot 16. Refer to Figure 731-7. Also another  
window appears instructing the user to install the new RIC cards into slot 16 of each shelf.  
Refer to Figure 731-8. Replace the optical cards one at a time with the new optical cards  
paying attention to the inbound and outbound fibers. The user may select the OK button  
either before replacing the old cards or after installing the new RIC cards.  
8. The RIC status window reappears instructing the user to wait until the new RIC cards in  
slot 16 have booted. Refer to Figure 731-9. The user should select the Refresh button  
periodically to check the status of the booting RICs. Once the RICs have booted (show the  
current running software), the user may select the Next>> button which is grayed out until  
the boot process is completed.  
9. Again the Ring Audit screen appears this time displaying the upgraded slot 16 with the new  
RICs and the slot 17 old RICs. Refer to Figure 731-10. Confirm that both rings are  
operating and the status columns show OK. Left click on the Next >> button.  
10. The system responds with an informational message asking the user to confirm that the slot  
16 ring system works properly. Refer to Figure 731-11. The user may select the Suspend  
button while rectifying any system problems or select the Next >> button to continue with  
the upgrade. When the user selects the Suspend button, a confirmation window appears as  
shown in Figure 731-14. Select Halt to stop the upgrade momentarily, Revert to fallback to  
the previous ring type (155c or 622c), or Continue to return to the last step completed and  
finish the ring upgrade. If reverting back to the previous ring type, the system software will  
guide the user through each step in reverse to minimize traffic loss. If continuing, select the  
Next>> button and go to the next step.  
11. Another message window appears similar to Figure 731-6 this time instructing the user not  
to reset the cards in slot 16 until the cards in slot 17 have rebooted. Select the Next >>  
button to continue.  
12. A window appears displaying the RIC statuses in slot 17. Refer to Figure 731-12 Also  
another window appears similar to Figure 731-8, instructing the user to install the new RIC  
cards into slot 17 of each shelf. Replace the optical cards one at a time with the new optical  
cards paying attention to the inbound and outbound fibers. The user may select the OK  
button either before replacing the old RIC cards or after installing the new RIC cards.  
13. Again the Ring Audit screen appears this time displaying the upgraded slot 17 with the  
2488 RICs. Refer to Figure 731-13. Confirm that both rings are operating and the status  
columns show OK. Left click on the Next >> button.  
Page 2-164  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-731  
Page 3 of 9  
14. The system responds with an informational message similar to Figure 731-11, asking the  
user to confirm that the slot 17 ring system works properly. The user may select the  
Suspend button while rectifying any system problems or select the Next >> button to  
continue with the upgrade. When the user selects the Suspend button, a confirmation  
window appears as shown in Figure 731-14. Select Halt to stop the upgrade momentarily,  
Revert to fallback to the previous ring type (155c or 622c), or Continue to return to the last  
step completed and finish the ring upgrade. If reverting back to the previous ring type, the  
system software will guide the user through each step in reverse to minimize traffic loss. If  
continuing, select the Next>> button and go to the next step.  
15. The final warning message comes up informing the user that upon completion of the next  
step, the user cannot perform a fallback procedure. Refer to Figure 731-15 and left click on  
the Complete button.  
18. The system finishes it software configuration and a ring upgrade completion message  
appears as shown in Figure 731-16. Select the OK button.  
19. By double clicking on any node from the GUI main screen, the chassis level view will  
appear and display the 2488 cards in slots 16 and 17. They should be green, indicating there  
is no problem. Refer to the TAP section of this document for any alarm conditions that may  
appear.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance Accounting Security  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Add Ring Network Element  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit...  
Ring Upgrade...  
Turn Up Ring...  
0026-029  
Figure 731-1. Ring Upgrade Pull-Down Menu  
Page 2-165  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-731  
Page 4 of 9  
X
Cellworx Vision: Ring Upgrade - Task Overview  
1) Shutdown all other GUIs  
2) Verify no ring errors  
3) Configure ring upgrade  
4) No reset of RICs in slot 17  
5) Install new RICs in slot 16  
6) Verify no ring errors  
7) Test ring 16  
X
Ring Upgrade - Shutdown GUIs  
Please shutdown all other Cellworx Vision GUIs.  
Cancel  
Next>>  
8) No reset of RICs in slot 16  
9) Install new RICs in slot 17  
10) Verify no ring erors  
11) Test ring 17  
0026-031  
12) Complete ring upgrade  
0026-030  
Figure 731-2. Ring Upgrade Task Overview Widow  
Figure 731-3. Shutdown Active GUI Sessions  
X
Cellworx Vision: Ring Audit  
Provisioned Ring:  
NE  
Upstream (16)  
NE 2 Slot 16  
NE 3 Slot 16  
NE 4 Slot 16  
NE 5 Slot 16  
NE 1 Slot 16  
Upstream (17)  
NE 1 Slot 17  
NE 5 Slot 17  
NE 4 Slot 17  
NE 3 Slot 17  
NE 2 Slot 17  
NE 1 - Broadway  
NE 2 - 17th Street  
NE 3 - Northwest St.  
NE 4 - Central Ave.  
NE 5 - Duncan Dr.  
Actual Ring:  
NE  
Card Type (16) Upstream (16) Card Type (17) Upstream (17) Statu  
NE 2 Slot 16  
NE 3 Slot 16  
NE 4 Slot 16  
NE 5 Slot 16  
NE 1 Slot 16  
ok  
ok  
ok  
ok  
ok  
NE 1  
NE 2  
NE 3  
NE 4  
NE 5  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
NE 1 Slot 17  
NE 5 Slot 17  
NE 4 Slot 17  
NE 3 Slot 17  
NE 2 Slot 17  
Verify Status column  
indicates "OK" for all  
links.  
Cancel  
Refresh  
Next >>  
0026-032  
Figure 731-4. Ring Audit Window (example)  
Page 2-166  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-731  
Page 5 of 9  
X
Ring Upgrade - Configuration  
Current Ring Level:  
OC12c  
OC48c  
Upgrade Ring Level:  
Upgrade Ring Software:  
2.0.0.12  
Cancel  
Next >>  
Refresh  
0026-033  
Figure 731-5. Ring Upgrade Configuration Window  
X
Ring Upgrade - Instruction  
Do not reset RICs in slot 17 until upgrade of slot 16 RICs completes.  
Do not reset SCCs until ring upgrade completes.  
Next>>  
0026-034  
Figure 731-6. Ring Upgrade Instructional Window  
X
Ring Upgrade - RIC Status  
Wait for the 2488 Ring RICs in slot 16 to boot.  
Network Element  
RIC Type (16)  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
Running SW (16)  
oc12ric.2.0.0.10  
oc12ric.2.0.0.10  
oc12ric.2.0.0.10  
oc12ric.2.0.0.10  
oc12ric.2.0.0.10  
NE 1 - Broadway  
NE 2 - 17th Street  
NE 3 - Northwest St.  
NE 4 - Central Ave.  
NE 5 - Duncan Dr.  
Suspend  
Refresh  
Next >>  
0026-035  
Figure 731-7. Ring Upgrade RIC Status Window  
Page 2-167  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-731  
Page 6 of 9  
X
Ring Upgrade - Instruction  
Please install the new 2488 Ring RICs in slot  
16.  
OK  
0026-036  
Figure 731-8. Ring Upgrade Instructions Window – Install New RICs (example)  
X
Ring Upgrade - RIC Status  
Wait for the 2488 Ring RICs in slot 16 to boot.  
Network Element  
RIC Type (16)  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
Running SW (16)  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
NE 1 - Broadway  
NE 2 - 17th Street  
NE 3 - Northwest St.  
NE 4 - Central Ave.  
NE 5 - Duncan Dr.  
Suspend  
Refresh  
Next >>  
0026-037  
Figure 731-9. RIC Status Window – Waiting for the 2488 RICs to Boot  
Page 2-168  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-731  
Page 7 of 9  
X
Cellworx Vision: Ring Audit  
Provisioned Ring:  
NE  
Upstream (16)  
Upstream (17)  
NE 1 Slot 17  
NE 5 Slot 17  
NE 4 Slot 17  
NE 3 Slot 17  
NE 2 Slot 17  
NE 2 Slot 16  
NE 3 Slot 16  
NE 4 Slot 16  
NE 5 Slot 16  
NE 1 Slot 16  
NE 1 - Broadway  
NE 2 - 17th Street  
NE 3 - Northwest St.  
NE 4 - Central Ave.  
NE 5 - Duncan Dr.  
Actual Ring:  
NE  
Card Type (16) Upstream (16) Card Type (17) Upstream (17) Statu  
NE 2 Slot 16  
NE 3 Slot 16  
NE 4 Slot 16  
NE 5 Slot 16  
NE 1 Slot 16  
ok  
ok  
ok  
ok  
ok  
NE 1  
NE 2  
NE 3  
NE 4  
NE 5  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
NE 1 Slot 17  
NE 5 Slot 17  
NE 4 Slot 17  
NE 3 Slot 17  
NE 2 Slot 17  
Cancel  
Refresh  
Next >>  
OC48 CARDS NOW  
OC12 CARDS STILL  
STATUS SHOWS OK.  
SHOWN IN SLOTS 16.  
PRESENT IN SLOTS 17.  
0026-038  
Figure 731-10. Ring Audit Window – 2488 RIC and 622 RIC Rings  
X
Ring Upgrade - Instruction  
Please verify that Ring 16 works.  
Suspend  
Next>>  
0026-039  
Figure 731-11. Ring Upgrade Confirmation Message  
Page 2-169  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-731  
Page 8 of 9  
X
Ring Upgrade - RIC Status  
Wait for the 2488 Ring RICs in slot 16 to boot.  
Network Element  
RIC Type (17)  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
Running SW (17)  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
oc48ric.2.0.0.10  
NE 1 - Broadway  
NE 2 - 17th Street  
NE 3 - Northwest St.  
NE 4 - Central Ave.  
NE 5 - Duncan Dr.  
Suspend  
Refresh  
Next >>  
0026-040  
Figure 731-12. Ring Upgrade - RIC Status Window for 2488 RICs in Slot 17  
X
Cellworx Vision: Ring Audit  
Provisioned Ring:  
NE  
Upstream (16)  
NE 2 Slot 16  
NE 3 Slot 16  
NE 4 Slot 16  
NE 5 Slot 16  
NE 1 Slot 16  
Upstream (17)  
NE 1 Slot 17  
NE 5 Slot 17  
NE 4 Slot 17  
NE 3 Slot 17  
NE 2 Slot 17  
NE 1 - Broadway  
NE 2 - 17th Street  
NE 3 - Northwest St.  
NE 4 - Central Ave.  
NE 5 - Duncan Dr.  
Actual Ring:  
NE  
Card Type (16) Upstream (16) Card Type (17) Upstream (17) Statu  
NE 2 Slot 16  
NE 3 Slot 16  
NE 4 Slot 16  
NE 5 Slot 16  
NE 1 Slot 16  
ok  
ok  
ok  
ok  
ok  
NE 1  
NE 2  
NE 3  
NE 4  
NE 5  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
2488 Ring  
NE 1 Slot 17  
NE 5 Slot 17  
NE 4 Slot 17  
NE 3 Slot 17  
NE 2 Slot 17  
Cancel  
Refresh  
Next >>  
OC48 CARDS NOW  
OC48 CARDS NOW  
STATUS SHOWS OK.  
SHOWN IN SLOTS 16.  
SHOWN IN SLOTS 17.  
0026-041  
Figure 731-13. Ring Audit of 2488 Rings  
Page 2-170  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-731  
Page 9 of 9  
X
Ring Upgrade - Suspend Confirmation  
Halt will suspend the upgrade process.  
Revert wil begin the ring fallback process.  
Continue will return to the last step of the ring upgrade process.  
Continue  
Halt  
Revert  
0026-042  
Figure 731-14. Ring Upgrade – Confirmation Message  
X
Ring Upgrade - Complete  
Ring fallback wil not be allowed upon completion of this step.  
Complete the RingUpgrade procedure?  
Suspend  
Complete  
0026-043  
Figure 731-15. Ring Upgrade Fallback Warning Message  
X
Ring Upgrade - Complete  
Ring Upgrade Successfully completed.  
OK  
0026-044  
Figure 731-16. Ring Upgrade Completion Message  
Page 2-171  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-732  
Page 1 of 3  
SET / RETRIEVE FT1 FRS PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully retrieve the performance  
monitoring statistics for specified FT1 FRS interface ports within a Cellworx STN network.  
Information retrieved is on a per node and per port basis. This procedure assumes the user has  
already accessed the GUI and initiated the Performance Monitoring-Selection window per NTP-  
008.  
1. Select a NE from the list of NEs in the “Resource” section of the window. Refer to Figure  
732-1. This will bring up any available card slots in the NE in the next window.  
2. Select a slot/card type in the “Slot/Card Type” section of the window. All available ports  
will appear in the “Port” window. Multiple slots may be selected.  
3. Select the port(s) desired to display the performance monitoring layers in the “Port” section  
of the window. Multiple ports may be selected.  
4. Select the layer to retrieve in the “Layer” section of the window. If a FT1 or FE1 FRS card  
was selected, DS1 will be available in the PM layer window. If not, return to step 2 of this  
procedure and select the proper interface card.  
5. Select the time period for the report from the Interval selection window on the right. If  
multiple interfaces were selected, only a single time interval may be selected. If a single  
interface was selected, the user may specify several historical time periods to retrieve for  
the report. The “current” selection will retrieve any errors that are actively logged for the  
interface(s) specified. In no instance may the current interval and a history interval be  
selected at the same time.  
6. Select the Apply button once all selections have been specified for the performance report.  
The Performance Monitoring window appears. Refer to Figure 732-2 for an example.  
7. Error types reported are listed in Table 732-1. The slider bars are used to view the errors  
that are beyond the viewing area, either up or down for additional slots and ports, or to the  
right and left for additional error types. The user may update the counts using the Refresh  
button at the bottom of the screen. If retrieving history counts, the Refresh button is  
disabled. Refer to TAP-100 at the end of this section for troubleshooting guidelines.  
THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION  
8. Users may specify error counts required to trip a system alarm by clicking on the  
Configure Thresholds button at the bottom of the PM Data window. This will bring up a  
Performance Monitoring Configuration window similar to Figure 732-3.  
Page 2-172  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-732  
Page 2 of 3  
9. To configure the thresholds, place the cursor in the individual count boxes and type in the  
new threshold value. Refer to Table 732-1 for valid values. Once all counts are entered in  
each box, select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to send the new data to the  
database.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
SELECT AN NE FOR PM  
RETRIEVAL AND THE SLOT  
AND CARD TYPES IN THE  
SHELF WILL BE DISPLAYED  
IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT A SLOT AND CARD  
TYPE, INDIVIDUAL OR  
MULTIPLE,TO DISPLAY THE  
PORTS IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PORT(S) DESIRED  
TO DISPLAY THE LAYERS  
AVAILABLE IN THE NEXT  
WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PM LAYER(S)  
TO BE RETRIEVED.  
SELECT THE CURENT  
COUNT OR A HISTORICAL  
TIME PERIOD FOR ONE  
SLOT/PORT. USER CANNOT  
SELECT CURRENT AND A  
HISTORICAL AT THE SAME  
TIME.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring - Statistics  
Resource: NE-1  
Slot / Card Type  
Port  
Layer  
Interval  
current  
DS1/E1  
Slot 17 / 622 Ring  
Slot 16 / 622 Ring  
Slot 10 / Port 1  
Slot 10 / Port 2  
Slot 10 / Port 3  
Slot 10 / Port 4  
Slot 11 / Port 1  
Slot 11 / Port 2  
Slot 11 / Port 3  
Slot 11 / Port 4  
NE-1 Cellworx1  
NE-2 Cellworx2  
NE-3 Cellworx3  
00:00-00:15  
00:15-00:30  
00:30-00:45  
00:45-01:00  
01:00-01:15  
01:15-01:30  
01:30-01:45  
01:45-02:00  
0200 - 02:15  
Slot 5 / T3 TMUX Multi 1  
Slot 6 / 155-UNI SM/ST  
Slot 7 / 155-UNI SM/ST  
Slot 8 / 155-UNI SM/ST  
Slot 9 / 155-UNI SM/ST  
Slot 10 / FT1 FRS  
Slot 11 / FT1 FRS  
Slot 12 / T1 Multi 1 CRS  
Close  
Apply  
0026-057  
CLOSES PM STATISTICS  
WINDOW.  
SELECT TO RETRIEVE PM  
DATA FOR SELECTED  
PARAMETERS.  
Figure 732-1.FT1 FRS PM Selection Criteria Window  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Data NE 2  
X
DS1/E1  
Card Type  
FT1 FRS  
FT1 FRS  
Slot-Port  
S4-P1  
Interval Suspect ESs  
SESs  
SEFSs  
CSSs  
PCVs  
LESs  
BESs  
DMs  
current  
False  
False  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
S4-P2  
current  
Refresh  
Configure Thresholds  
Close  
Refresh All  
Reset Selected  
Clear Selected  
0026-56  
Figure 732-2. Performance Monitoring Data FT1 FRS Port Window  
Page 2-173  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-732  
Page 3 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: PM Threshold Configuration DS1 Layer  
X
Resource  
Card Type  
ESs  
SESs  
SEFSs  
UASs  
CSSs  
PCVs  
LESs  
BESs  
FT1 FRS  
FT1 FRS  
10-1  
10-2  
60  
60  
3
3
75  
75  
10  
10  
60  
60  
3
3
Close  
Apply  
0026-058  
Figure 732-3. Threshold Configuration Screen  
Page 2-174  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-733  
Page 1 of 2  
SET / RETRIEVE FE1 FRS PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully retrieve the performance  
monitoring statistics for specified FE1 FRS interface ports within a Cellworx STN network.  
Information retrieved is on a per node and per port basis. This procedure assumes the user has  
already accessed the GUI and initiated the Performance Monitoring-Selection window per NTP-  
008.  
1. Select an NE from the list of NEs in the “Resource” section of the window. Refer to Figure  
733-1. This will bring up any available card slots in the NE in the next window.  
2. Select a slot/card type in the “Slot/Card Type” section of the window. All available ports  
will appear in the “Port” window. Multiple slots may be selected.  
3. Select the port(s) desired to display the performance monitoring layers in the “Port” section  
of the window. Multiple ports may be selected also.  
4. Select the layer to be retrieved in the “Layer” section of the window. If a FE1 FRS card was  
selected, DS1 will be available in the PM layer window. If not, return to step 2 of this  
procedure and select the proper interface card.  
5. Select the time period for the report from the Interval selection window on the right. If  
multiple interfaces were selected, only a single time interval may be selected. If a single  
interface was selected, the user may specify several historical time periods to retrieve for  
the report. The “current” selection will retrieve any errors that are actively logged for the  
interface(s) specified. In no instance may the current interval and a history interval be  
selected at the same time.  
6. Select the Apply button once all selections have been specified for the performance report.  
The Performance Monitoring- FE1 FRS Port window appears. Refer to Figure 733-2 for an  
example.  
7. Error types reported are listed in Table 733-1. The slider bars are used to view the errors  
that are beyond the viewing area, either up or down for additional slots and ports, or to the  
right and left for additional error types. The user may update the counts using the Refresh  
button at the bottom of the screen. If retrieving history counts, the Refresh button is  
disabled. Refer to TAP-100 at the end of this section for troubleshooting guidelines.  
THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION  
8. Users may specify error counts required to trip a system alarm by clicking on the  
Configure Thresholds button at the bottom of the PM Data window. This will bring up a  
Performance Monitoring Configuration window similar to Figure 733-3.  
Page 2-175  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-733  
Page 2 of 2  
9. To configure the thresholds, place the cursor in the individual count boxes and type in the  
new threshold value. Refer to Table 730-1 for valid values. Once all counts are entered in  
each box, select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to send the new data to the  
database.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
SELECT AN NE FOR PM  
RETRIEVAL AND THE SLOT  
AND CARD TYPES IN THE  
SHELF WILL BE DISPLAYED  
IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT A SLOT AND CARD  
TYPE, INDIVIDUAL OR  
MULTIPLE,TO DISPLAY THE  
PORTS IN THE NEXT WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PORT(S) DESIRED  
TO DISPLAY THE LAYERS  
AVAILABLE IN THE NEXT  
WINDOW.  
SELECT THE PM LAYER(S)  
TO BE RETRIEVED.  
SELECT THE CURENT  
COUNT OR A HISTORICAL  
TIME PERIOD FOR ONE  
SLOT/PORT. USER CANNOT  
SELECT CURRENT AND A  
HISTORICAL AT THE SAME  
TIME.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring - Statistics  
Resource: NE-1  
Slot / Card Type  
Port  
Layer  
Interval  
current  
DS1/E1  
Slot 17 / 622 Ring  
Slot 16 / 622 Ring  
Slot 10 / Port 1  
Slot 10 / Port 2  
Slot 10 / Port 3  
Slot 10 / Port 4  
Slot 11 / Port 1  
Slot 11 / Port 2  
Slot 11 / Port 3  
Slot 11 / Port 4  
NE-1 Cellworx1  
NE-2 Cellworx2  
NE-3 Cellworx3  
00:00-00:15  
00:15-00:30  
00:30-00:45  
00:45-01:00  
01:00-01:15  
01:15-01:30  
01:30-01:45  
01:45-02:00  
0200 - 02:15  
Slot 5 / T3 TMUX Multi 1  
Slot 6 / 155-UNI SM/ST  
Slot 7 / 155-UNI SM/ST  
Slot 8 / 155-UNI SM/ST  
Slot 9 / 155-UNI SM/ST  
Slot 10 / FE1 FRS  
Slot 11 / FE1 FRS  
Slot 12 / T1 Multi 1 CRS  
Close  
Apply  
0026-060  
CLOSES PM STATISTICS  
WINDOW.  
SELECT TO RETRIEVE PM  
DATA FOR SELECTED  
PARAMETERS.  
Figure 733-1.FE1 FRS PM Selection Criteria Window  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Data NE 2  
X
DS1/E1  
Card Type  
FE1 FRS  
FE1 FRS  
Slot-Port  
S4-P1  
Interval Suspect ESs  
SESs  
SEFSs  
CSSs  
PCVs  
LESs  
BESs  
DMs  
current  
False  
False  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
S4-P2  
current  
Refresh  
Configure Thresholds  
Close  
Refresh All  
Reset Selected  
Clear Selected  
0026-61  
Figure 7332. Performance Monitoring Data FE FRS Port Window  
Page 2-176  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-733  
Page 3 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: PM Threshold Configuration DS1 Layer  
X
Resource  
Card Type  
ESs  
SESs  
SEFSs  
UASs  
CSSs  
PCVs  
LESs  
BESs  
FE1 FRS  
FE1 FRS  
10-1  
10-2  
60  
60  
3
3
75  
75  
10  
10  
60  
60  
3
3
Close  
Apply  
0026-059  
Figure 733-3. Threshold Configuration Screen  
Page 2-177  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-735  
Page 1 of 2  
HELP  
Summary: This procedure details the information displayed when the user selects the Help pull  
down menu and chooses either the Contact or About option.  
1. From the Cellworx Vision GUI main menu, select Help from the list of pull down menus  
positioning the pointer on it and clicking the left mouse button once.  
Contact  
2. Select the Contact option from the list under Help.  
3. The Contact window appears displaying the contact numbers for General Information,  
Sales Information and Literature, and Technical Support. Refer to Figure 735-1. Also  
provided is ADC Telecommunications Internet address.  
About  
4. Select the About option from the list under Help.  
5. The About Cellworx window appears displaying the current software version and copyright  
information for the Cellworx Vision GUI software. Refer to Figure 735-2.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
X
Cellworx Vision Contact Information  
Operator: 1-800-366-3891  
Internet: www.adc.com  
Telephone: Extension 3434 Customer Service Dept.  
Telephone: Extension 4878 Technical Assistance Center  
Email: technical@adc.com  
OK  
10909-E  
Figure 735-1. Cellworx Vision Contact Window  
Page 2-178  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-735  
Page 2 of 2  
X
About Cellworx Vision  
N
C
N
O
N
InfoVision  
O
AWARD  
T
T
1999  
CellworxSTN - A.C - 70.2.0  
c
Copyright  
1997 - 2000,  
ADC Telecommunications,  
All Right Reserved  
CLEI : 0123456789  
Catalog Number : STN-01234567890  
Part Number : 0123456789  
Serial Number : 0123456789  
Manufacturing Date : 0123  
OK  
10886-D  
Figure 735-2. Cellworx Vision About Window  
Page 2-179  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-736  
Page 1 of 4  
REVERT TO SAVED ICON LAYOUT  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully redraw the layout of the  
NE icons on the GUI work area, returning them to their last saved position. This functionality  
enables the user to group NEs that may be collocated, separate them according to their  
geographical locations, or isolate nodes from the groups for easier identification and access, etc.  
When a system discovery is completed on all NEs, or when the icon coordinates do not match  
the database, a warning message appears recommending that the user re-save the icon layout. See  
Figure 736-1. At this point the user should organize the display and save the new layout.  
Otherwise, the user may redraw the ring at any time.  
1. To change the layout of the Icons, select the arrow tool on the toolbar on the left side of the  
screen. Refer to Figure 736-2.  
2. Click on and drag the NEs to the desired positions on the screen, and release the mouse  
button. When an icon is selected using a single click with the arrow tool, it becomes  
encircled with a white ring even when not being moved. Refer to Figure 736-2. The Icons  
stay positioned in the new locations and maintain the connections between them.  
Note: The user may not change physical interconnections between the NEs simply by  
moving the icons around on the GUI screen.  
3. To return the GUI screen to the last saved layout, select the Configuration pull down  
menu, Topology and Revert to Saved Icon Layout (Alt+C, Alt+T, and Alt+V.) Refer to  
Figure 736-3.  
4. To save the current icon layout, select File and Save Icon Layout (Alt+F, Alt+S.) See  
Figure 736-4. The user may also save the layout using the disk icon on the tool bar just  
above the work area.  
5. A confirmation window appears as shown in Figure 736-5. Select OK. The newly drawn  
Icon layout will remain this way each time the GUI is launched, until the layout is redrawn  
and saved again.  
Note: A message will prompt the user to save the new icon layout if at least one of the  
icons has been moved and the user attempts to log off of the GUI by selecting the File  
pull down menu, and Exit (Alt+F and Alt+X). Refer to Figure 736-6.  
Note: If the GUI is closed without saving the new icon layout, the screen will default to  
the previous layout upon re-initialization of the GUI.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-180  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-736  
Page 2 of 4  
X
Cellworx Vision:  
The file storing the icon coordinates contains invalid data. It is  
recommended that you resave the icon layout.  
OK  
10929-B  
Figure 736-1. Cellworx Vision Save Icon Coordinates Warning Message  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
ICON DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL ALLOWS DIRECT  
SELECTION OF ANY ICON  
IN THE WORK AREA FOR  
DRAG AND PLACEMENT  
POSITIONING.  
Help  
Cellworx NE  
Unknown  
Cellworx NE  
Unknown  
Cellworx NE  
Unknown  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 23:30 GMT Time: 23:30  
11720-D  
Figure 736-2. Redraw Icon Layout Screen  
Page 2-181  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-736  
Page 3 of 4  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Add Ring Network Element  
Topology  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
10972-E  
Figure 736-3. Cellworx Vision Direct Selection Icon and  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout Pull Down Menu Structure  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Ma  
SAVE ICON LAYOUT TOOL  
LOCATED UNDER PULL  
DOWN MENU ON TOOL  
BAR.  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Save Icon Layout ...  
Exit  
11755-B  
Figure 736-4. Save NE Icon Layout Pull Down Menu or Diskette Icon Tool  
Page 2-182  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-736  
Page 4 of 4  
X
Cellworx Vision: Question  
Save icon layout?  
NO  
?
YES  
10986-B  
Figure 736-5. Cellworx Vision Save Icon Layout Verification Window  
X
Cellworx Vision Question  
Save icon layout before exiting?  
?
Yes  
No  
10985-C  
Figure 736-6. Cellworx Vision Save Icon Layout Verification Window  
Page 2-183  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-737  
Page 1 of 8  
ADD A RING NETWORK ELEMENT  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to add a new Cellworx STN ring node to  
an existing in service ring network. During this procedure the technician will be required to  
disconnect fibers in the existing system and reconnect them to the new node. The Graphical User  
Interface (GUI) will step the technician through this process without causing traffic loss in the  
network. The instructions provided by the GUI should be followed precisely to minimize service  
impact on the upgrade. If adding a second node to a stand-alone terminal, refer to NTP-004 for  
the proper procedure.  
1. From the GUI screen, use the left mouse button to select the Configuration pull down  
menu located above the workspace, and then Topology and Add Ring Network Element.  
This can also be accomplished by entering Alt+C, Alt+T, and Alt+A. Refer to Figure 737-1.  
2. The Cellworx Vision: Add Ring NE - Task Overview window appears as shown in Figure  
737-2. The tasks to be performed are listed in order from 1 to 17 with a pointer indicating  
the current task. If the network currently has only two NEs, continue to step 3. If the  
network already has three or more NEs, the first task is to select the two NEs in which the  
new one will be positioned between. Refer to Figure 737-3. After making the selection  
select the Next button at the bottom of the window.  
3. Task number 2 instructs the user to enter the NE identifier of the new node, and the window  
shown in Figure 737-4 appears. Using the left mouse button, click and hold on the slide bar  
button and move it to the right until the desired ID appears above the bar. In this example  
shown, the 2 is selected.  
4. If an ID is entered that already exists, the message window shown in Figure 737-5 will  
appear. Select OK and choose another ID number. Be sure the number selected is the same  
as the number set on the node during installation via the rotary switches on the protect SC  
EIM card.  
5. After making the ID selection, choose the Next button. The pointer on the Task Overview  
window moves to step 3, instructing the user to disconnect the transmit fiber from the left  
RIC (card in slot 16) on a specified NE. Refer to Figure 737-6 for an example. Follow the  
instructions provided in the window for the NE specified and hit Next.  
6. A similar window appears instructing the user to disconnect the receive fiber on the left  
RIC (slot 16) in the other specified NE. Follow the instructions provided in the window for  
the NE specified and hit Next.  
7. Step 5 of the Task Overview instructs the user to connect the new NE to the left RICs.  
Refer to the window shown in Figure 737-7. This connection will establish the ring  
connection in one direction utilizing the new NE. Connect left RICs per instructions for the  
NE specified and select Next.  
Page 2-184  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-737  
Page 2 of 8  
8. The system now attempts to boot the new NE, as indicated in step 6 of the Task Overview  
and the window shown in Figure 737-8. The new node should boot momentarily (dependent  
on the connection speed over FTP, may take a minute or more.) If the boot-up process  
exceeds five minutes, the user is shown another window, which prompts the user to retry or  
abort. Refer to Figure 737-9. Follow the instructions and select either Quit or Retry. If Quit  
is selected, the Add NE - Reconnect Cables window appears. Refer to Figure 737-10.  
Follow the instruction to return the equipment to its original physical state and select Quit,  
otherwise select Retry.  
9. Next the Cellworx Vision software configuration window appears for the new NE and the  
Task Overview pointer moves to step 8. Refer to Figure 737-11. At this point the SC  
card(s) should show a running software image but the RICs will be blank. Follow the  
instructions at the top of the window to select a software image for the RICs and then hit  
Apply.  
10. The Download Status column changes to Loading for both of the RIC cards. This process  
will take up to four minutes. During this process the user may select the Refresh button  
periodically to update the display.  
Note: If the screen is refreshed during the RIC software download, the Download Status  
column will change to None. This is OK. The RICs will continue to boot. Once  
completed with the boot process, the user must select Refresh again to update the  
Running Software Version column.  
11. Upon completion of the software download to both RICs, and the user selecting Refresh,  
both RICs will have a running software version displayed and the Skip button at the bottom  
of the screen is changed to a Continue button.  
12. Select the Continue button. The system now attempts to verify connectivity, backs up the  
NMIC database, and discovers the new NE, indicated by the pointer on step 9 to 11 of the  
Task Overview window, and the discovering network message window appears as shown in  
Figure 737-12. If a problem is encountered during discovery, the message window shown  
in Figure 737-13 will appear instructing the user to check fiber connections. The user may  
then retry the discovery or abort the entire process. A discovery verifies the physical  
connectivity between the nodes and should take less than ten seconds.  
13. The next two windows (steps 12 and 13 of the Task Overview) direct the user to disconnect  
the other set of fibers between the RICs in the right slots (slot 17) of NE1 and NE2, similar  
to the window shown in Figure 737-6. Follow the instructions and select Next once  
completed.  
14. Step 14 of the Task Overview instructs the user to connect the new NE (3 in this example)  
to the right RICs (slots 17 of each node), similar to the window shown in Figure 737-7.  
This connection will complete the ring connection for the outer direction through the new  
NE. Connect the right RICs per the instructions for the NE specified and select Next.  
Page 2-185  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-737  
Page 3 of 8  
15. The system now attempts to verify the new NE is connected correctly over both ring  
directions, indicated by the pointer on step 15 of the Task Overview window. The  
“Discovering Network” message window appears as shown in Figure 737-12. Discovery  
verifies the physical connectivity between the nodes and should take less than ten seconds.  
16. The system now restores all traffic across both ring directions through the new NE.  
Subsequently, the “Add NE” task is complete and the topology is updated as per step 17 of  
the Task Overview window. The system responds with a message window indicating that it  
is updating the network topology and to please wait. Refer to Figure 737-14.  
18. The user will be prompted to save the new icon layout. Refer to Figure 737-15. To do this,  
select the disk icon on the tool bar above the work area or select the File pull down menu  
and Save Icon Layout or by entering Alt+F followed by an Alt+S on the keyboard. Refer to  
Figure 737-16.  
19. The user may now provision the new node per NTP-006.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Add Ring Network Element  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
10966-E  
Figure 737-1. Cellworx Vision Configuration Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-186  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-737  
Page 4 of 8  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add Ring NE - Task Overview  
1) Select physical location for new node  
2) Enter new network element identifiers  
3) Physically remove transmit fiber from left RIC  
4) Physically remove receive fiber from left RIC  
5) Connect new network element to left RICs  
6) Wait for new network element to boot  
7) Verifying NE shelf type  
8) Select software images  
9) Verifying NE connectivity over slot 16  
10) Backing up NMIC database  
11) Initiating 1st pass discovery  
12) Physically remove transmit fiber from right RIC  
13) Physically remove receive fiber from right RIC  
14) Connect new network element to right RICs  
15) Initiating 2nd pass discovery  
16) Verifying physical connectivity  
17) NE added -- updating topology  
11713-D  
Figure 737-2. Cellworx Vision Add Ring NE Task Overview  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add Ring NE- Select Location  
Please select the two network elements  
between which the new network element  
will be connected in the ring.  
Network elem ent 1 / Network Elem ent 3  
Network elem ent 3 / Network Elem ent 2  
Network elem ent 2 / Network Elem ent 1  
Current status: Waiting for all NEs to boot . . .  
Cancel  
Next>>  
11714-A  
Figure 737-3. Cellworx Vision Add Ring NE Select Location Window  
Page 2-187  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-737  
Page 5 of 8  
Cellworx Vision: Add Ring NE- Enter Identifier  
Please select the new network element's identifier.  
2
Cancel  
Next>>  
11712-A  
Figure 737-4. Cellworx Vision Add Ring NE Enter ID Window  
X
Cellworx Vision : Information  
The identifier you chose is already used by an existing  
network element. Please choose a unique identifier  
OK  
11727-A  
Figure 737-5. Cellworx Vision Add NE ID Informational Window  
X
Cellworx Vision : Add Ring NE - Disconnect Fiber  
Physically disconnect the transmit fiber from the  
left Ring interface Card on network element  
Network Element 1  
Cancel  
Next>>  
11726-B  
Figure 737-6. Cellworx Vision Add Ring NE Disconnect Fibers  
Page 2-188  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-737  
Page 6 of 8  
X
Cellworx Vision : Add Ring NE - Connect Fiber  
Connect the physical fiber to the transmit port of  
the left Ring Interface Card on network element  
West Node (id 1)  
and the receive port of the left Ring Interface Card  
on the new network element.  
Connect the physical fiber to the receive port of the  
left Ring Interface Card on network element  
East Node (id 2)  
and the transmit port of the left Ring Interface Card  
on the new network element.  
Cancel  
Next>>  
11725-BC  
Figure 737-7. Cellworx Vision Add Ring NE Connect New NE Fibers  
X
Cellworx Vision : Add Ring NE - Wait for Boot-up  
Waiting for new network element to boot...  
Normal boot time should not exceed five minutes  
Elapsed time: 9  
Cancel  
11759-C  
Figure 737-8. Cellworx Vision Wait For NE to Boot  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add NE - Boot Time Exceeded  
Normal boot time for the network element has  
been exceeded.This could be the result of a  
communication failure with the network element.  
Please check all cables and the network element's  
status via craft interface if necessary.  
Quit  
Retry  
0026-046  
Figure 737-9. Add NE Boot Time Exceeded Window  
Page 2-189  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-737  
Page 7 of 8  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add RNE - Reconnect Cables  
Cancelling at this time could leave the ring  
in an abnormal state since the physical layout  
has been modified. Please reconnect the  
network elements back to the physical state  
they were in prior to this procedure.  
Retry  
Quit  
14573-A  
Figure 737-10. Add EPS NE - Reconnect Cables Instructional Window  
X
Vision: Configure Software - Network Elements  
Press the right mouse button to display the available software images for each card.  
Both RICs must have running software before you may continue.  
Press the "Refresh" button in termittently to update the table after seletcing the software  
for the RICs. After he RICs are running, a "Continue>>" button is displayed. Press the button  
to proceed to discovery.  
Download Status  
None  
Running Software Version  
Card Type  
Slot Number (s)  
1
Selected Software Version  
Shelf Controller  
scc.2.0.0.9  
155SM CRS  
155 MM CRS  
10  
12  
Loaded  
None  
oc3sm.2.0.0.10  
oc3mm.2.0.0.10  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
16  
17  
18  
oc12cric.2.0.0.10  
Loading  
oc12cric.2.0.0.10  
scc.2.0.0.9  
Not Loaded  
Shelf Controller  
None  
Config  
Skip  
Apply  
Clear Selected  
Refresh  
Cancel  
14546-B  
Figure 737-11. Cellworx Vision Configure Software Window  
Page 2-190  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-737  
Page 8 of 8  
Discovering Network. Please wait...  
11758-A  
Figure 737-12. Cellworx Vision Discovering NE Window  
Cellworx Vision: Retry?  
A physical connectivity problem has been detected after the  
addition of this new network element.You need to check the  
fiber connections to and from this NE.You may then retry  
discovery or abort the operation.  
Retry  
Abort  
11724-A  
Figure 737-13. Cellworx Vision Boot Failure Informational Window  
Updating topology. Please wait...  
11015-A  
Figure 737-14. Cellworx Vision Updating Topology Message Window  
X
Cellworx Vision: Current Status  
The file storing the icon coordinates contains invalid data. It is  
recommended that you resave the icon layout.  
OK  
10929-A  
Figure 737-15. Cellworx Vision Save Icon Layout Window  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Ma  
SAVE ICON LAYOUT TOOL  
LOCATED UNDER PULL  
DOWN MENU ON TOOL  
BAR.  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Save Icon Layout ...  
Exit  
11755-B  
Figure 737-16. Cellworx Vision Save Icon Layout Options  
Page 2-191  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-738  
Page 1 of 7  
ADD A SECOND NETWORK ELEMENT  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to add a second Cellworx STN node to  
any existing in service stand-alone NE. The instructions provided by the Cellworx Vision  
Graphical User Interface (GUI) should be followed precisely to minimize service impact on the  
upgrade. It is assumed the user has already launched the GUI from the stand-alone node and the  
required optics have been installed per NTP-004. Verify the correct shelf type setting has been  
set per the Phase 3.1 Installation manual listed in the preface of this document.  
1. From the GUI screen, use the left mouse button to select the Configuration pull down  
menu located above the workspace, and then Topology and Add Ring Network Element.  
This can also be accomplished by entering Alt+C, Alt+N, and Alt+A. Refer to Figure 738-1.  
2. The Cellworx Vision: Add Second Ring NE - Task Overview window appears as shown in  
Figure 738-2. The tasks that will be performed are listed in order from 1 to 8 with a pointer  
indicating the current task. The first task is to enter the NE identifier as another window  
appears as shown in Figure 738-3. Using the left mouse button, select the slider bar button  
and move it to the right until the desired ID appears above the bar. In this example a 2 is  
shown.  
3. If an ID is entered that already exists, the message window shown in Figure 738-4 will  
appear. Select OK and choose another number. Be sure the number selected is the same as  
the number set on the node via the rotary switches on the protect SC TEIM card.  
4. After making the ID selection, choose the Next button. The pointer on the Task Overview  
window moves to step 2, Connect left RICs (cards in slot 16), and another window appears  
as shown in Figure 738-5.  
5. Follow the instructions for connecting the fibers between the RICs in the left slots of the  
two nodes, and then select Next.  
6. Another window similar to Figure 738-5 appears directing the user to connect the other set  
of fibers between the RICs in the right slots of the two nodes (step 3 of the Task Overview).  
Follow the instructions and select Next once completed.  
7. The Task Overview window now indicates that the system is waiting for the new network  
element to boot (step 4 of the Task Overview) and an informational window appears as  
shown in Figure 738-6. The NE should boot within sixty seconds. If the boot-up process  
exceeds sixty seconds, another window prompts the user to retry or quit. Refer to Figure  
738-7. Follow the instructions and select either Quit or Retry. If Quit is selected, the Add  
NE - Reconnect Cables window appears. Refer to Figure 738-8. Follow the instruction to  
return the equipment to its original physical state and select Quit, otherwise continue.  
Page 2-192  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-738  
Page 2 of 7  
8. Next the Cellworx Vision software configuration window appears for the new NE, and the  
Task Overview pointer moves to step 5. Refer to Figure 738-9. At this point the SC card(s)  
should show a running software image but the RICs will be blank. Follow the instructions  
at the top of the window to select a software image for the RICs and then hit Apply.  
9. The Download Status column changes to Loading for both of the RIC cards. This process  
will take up to four minutes. During this process the user may select the Refresh button to  
update the display.  
Note: If the screen is refreshed during the RIC software download, the Download Status  
column will change to None. This is OK. The RICs will continue to boot. Once  
completed with the boot process, the user must select Refresh again to update the  
Running Software Version column.  
10. Upon completion of the software download to both RICs, and the user selecting Refresh,  
both RICs will have a running software version displayed and the Skip button at the bottom  
of the screen is changed to a Continue button.  
11. Select the Continue button. The system now attempts to discover the new NEs, indicated  
by the pointer on step 9 of the Task Overview window, and the “Discovering Network”  
message window as shown in Figure 738-10. If a problem is encountered during discovery,  
the message window shown in Figure 737-11 will appear instructing the user to check fiber  
connections. The user may then retry the discovery or abort the entire process. See Section  
4 of this manual for troubleshooting tips if problems are encountered with the boot up  
process. A discovery verifies the physical connectivity between the nodes and should take  
less than ten seconds.  
12. The system responds with a message window indicating that it is updating the network  
topology and to please wait. Refer to Figure 738-12.  
13. The user will be prompted to save the new icon layout. Refer to Figure 738-13. To do this,  
select the disk icon on the tool bar above the work area or select the File pull down menu  
and Save Icon Layout or by entering Alt+F followed by an Alt+S on the keyboard. Refer to  
Figure 738-14.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-193  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-738  
Page 3 of 7  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Add Ring Network Element  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
10966-E  
Figure 738-1. Cellworx Vision Configuration Pull Down Menu  
Cellworx Vision: Add Second Ring NE - Task Overview  
1) Enter network element identifiers  
2) Connect left RICs.  
3) Connect right RICs.  
4) Wait for new network element to boot.  
5) Select software images.  
6) Wait for discovery.  
7) Create test connection <optional>  
8) Task complete  
11710-A  
Figure 738-2. Cellworx Vision Add Second Ring Task Overview Window  
Cellworx Vision: Add Ring NE- Enter Identifier  
Please select the new network element's identifier.  
2
Cancel  
Next>>  
11712-A  
Figure 738-3. Cellworx Vision Add Ring NE Enter ID Window  
Page 2-194  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-738  
Page 4 of 7  
X
Cellworx Vision : Information  
The identifier you chose is already used by an existing  
network element. Please choose a unique identifier  
OK  
11727-A  
Figure 738-4. Cellworx Vision Add NE ID Informational Window  
X
Cellworx Vision : Add Ring NE - Connect Fiber  
Connect the physical fiber to the transmit port of  
the left Ring Interface Card on network element  
14th Street (id 1)  
and the receive port of the left Ring Interface Card  
on the new network element.  
Connect the physical fiber to the receive port of the  
left Ring Interface Card on network element  
Broadway (id 2)  
and the transmit port of the left Ring Interface Card  
on the new network element.  
Cancel  
Next>>  
11912-B  
Figure 738-5. Cellworx Vision Add Ring NE Connect Fiber  
X
Cellworx Vision : Add Ring NE - Wait for Boot-up  
Waiting for new network element to boot...  
Normal boot time should not exceed five minutes  
Elapsed time: 9  
Cancel  
11759-C  
Figure 738-6. Cellworx Vision Wait For NE to Boot  
Page 2-195  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-738  
Page 5 of 7  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add EPS NE - Boot Time Exceeded  
Normal boot time for the network element has  
been exceeded. This could be the result of a  
communication failure with the network element.  
Please check all cables and the network element's  
status via craft interface if necessary.  
Quit  
Retry  
10888-A  
Figure 738-7. Add NE Boot Time Exceeded Window  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add EPS NE - Reconnect Cables  
Cancelling at this time could leave the ring  
in an abnormal state since the physical layout  
has been modified. Please reconnect the  
network elements back to the physical state  
they were in prior to this procedure.  
OK  
10892-C  
Figure 738-8. Add EPS NE - Reconnect Cables Instructional Window  
Page 2-196  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-738  
Page 6 of 7  
X
Vision: Configure Software - Network Elements  
Press the right mouse button to display the available software images for each card.  
Download Status  
None  
Running Software Version  
Card Type  
Slot Number (s)  
1
Selected Software Version  
Shelf Controller  
scc.2.0.0.9  
155SM CRS  
155 MM CRS  
10  
12  
Loaded  
None  
oc3sm.2.0.0.10  
oc3mm.2.0.0.10  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
16  
17  
18  
oc12cric.2.0.0.10  
Loading  
oc12cric.2.0.0.10  
scc.2.0.0.9  
Not Loaded  
Shelf Controller  
None  
Config  
Apply  
Clear Selected  
Refresh  
Cancel  
11717-D  
Figure 738-9. Cellworx Vision Configure Software Window  
Discovering Network. Please wait...  
11758-A  
Figure 738-10. Cellworx Vision Discovering NE Window  
Cellworx Vision: Retry?  
A physical connectivity problem has been detected after the  
addition of this new network element.You need to check the  
fiber connections to and from this NE.You may then retry  
discovery or abort the operation.  
Retry  
Abort  
11724-A  
Figure 738-11. Cellworx Vision Boot Failure Informational Window  
Page 2-197  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-738  
Page 7 of 7  
Updating topology. Please wait...  
11015-A  
Figure 738-12. Cellworx Vision Updating Topology Message Window  
X
Cellworx Vision:  
The file storing the icon coordinates contains invalid data. It is  
recommended that you resave the icon layout.  
OK  
10929-B  
Figure 738-13. Cellworx Vision Save Icon Layout Window  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Ma  
SAVE ICON LAYOUT TOOL  
LOCATED UNDER PULL  
DOWN MENU ON TOOL  
BAR.  
File Configuration Fault Performance Accounting  
Save Icon Layout ...  
Exit  
11755-A  
Figure 738-14. Cellworx Vision Save Icon Layout Options  
Page 2-198  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-739  
Page 1 of 4  
DELETE CONNECTIONS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps necessary to successfully navigate the Cellworx  
Vision Graphical User Interface to view the established connections at a node and delete them.  
1. Access the Subnetwork Connection Filter window using the left mouse button to select  
Configuration, Connection, and View (or using the direct selection keys, Alt+C, Alt+N,  
then Alt+V). Refer to Figure 739-1.  
2. The Subnetwork Connection Filter window appears. Refer to Figure 739-2. If not already  
displayed, select the Connection tab and click on ATM VP-ATM VP, ATM-VC-ATM VC,  
CES-ATM VC , CES-CES, FR-ATM VC, FR-FR, ATM VP Multicast, or ATM Bundled  
VC Multicast using the left mouse button.  
3. Select the Network tab, which displays all NEs in the network, and select the NE that has  
the connection being deleted. Click on the >> button using the left mouse button which will  
move the highlighted NE to the selected box. Refer to Figure 739-3.  
4. Select the Traffic tab, which displays all available traffic contracts that can be specified for  
the connection retrieval. Click on the All>> button using the left mouse button to choose all  
traffic contracts.  
5. Select the ATM tab which displays all ATM ports in the network and click on the All>>  
button.  
Note: The user may optionally select the “Retrieve All” button instead.  
6. Once all information is selected for the NE, select Apply using the left mouse button.  
7. The Subnetwork Connections window appears as shown in the example in Figure 739-4.  
The status column indicates the most current information for the connection. The status  
may be listed as Incomplete, Functional, or an Unknown State. Up to 100 entries may be  
viewed per page by using the up and down slide button on the right side of the window. If  
more than 100 entries are available for viewing, the user may use the Page slide button at  
the top right corner of the window to select additional pages. Select the traffic connections  
one at a time or multiple connections using the Ctrl or Shift key plus using clicking the left  
mouse button on the desired connections, followed by the Delete button at the bottom  
center of the window. When selected, the line or lines the connection(s) is displayed on will  
become highlighted.  
8. After selecting Delete, a confirmation message appears as shown in Figure 739-5. which  
requires the user to select OK or Cancel. If a problem exists with the hardware between the  
NMIC and the endpoints shelf controllers, a denial message will appear stating the reason  
the connection could not be deleted. Refer to the TAP section of this document for any  
error reports.  
Page 2-199  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-739  
Page 2 of 4  
Note: Existing traffic contracts may be used for other connections and cannot be deleted  
until all connections using the contract have been deleted.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10963-D  
Figure 739-1. Cellworx Vision Connection Menu Tree  
X
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Connection Filter  
SELECT A TAB TO FILTER  
FOR A SPECIFIC ITEM.  
Network  
Traffic  
FR  
ATM  
CES  
Connection  
Connection Types:  
SELECT AN ITEM IN THE  
FOLDERS TO FILTER.  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES - ATM VC  
CES - CES  
FR - ATM VC  
FR - FR  
ATM VP MULTICAST  
ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Retrieve All Selected Type Connections  
SELECT THE APPLY BUTTON  
TO RETRIEVE CONNECTION  
INFO FOR FILTERED  
SELECTION.  
Close  
Reset  
Apply  
11000-F  
Figure 739-2. Subnetwork Connection Filter Window  
Page 2-200  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-739  
Page 3 of 4  
X
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Connection Filter  
Network  
Traffic  
ATM  
FR  
Selected Network Elements:  
NE-2  
Connection  
Network Elements:  
NE-1  
NE-3  
>>  
<<  
All >>  
<< All  
Close  
Reset  
Apply  
10999-C  
Figure 739-3. Subnetwork Connection Filter Window – Network  
Page 2-201  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-739  
Page 4 of 4  
X
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connections  
View  
Format  
Connection Type: ATM VP - ATM VP  
1
Page  
Connection Name  
NE - NE  
Status  
***********1  
***********2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
NE-1<--> NE-2  
Incomplete  
Functional  
***********3  
Unknown State  
Status...  
Configure...  
Close  
Retry  
Delete  
Clear Selected  
11003-B  
Figure 739-4 Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connections Screen  
X
Cellworx Vision  
Delete selected connection?  
?
Cancel  
OK  
10982-A  
Figure 739-5 Cellworx Vision Connection Deletion Confirmation Window  
Page 2-202  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-740  
Page 1 of 5  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN NODE  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps necessary to successfully delete a Cellworx STN  
node from the system database. Pre-requisites of this procedure are:  
• The user should have gained access to the Cellworx STN system and have  
launched the GUI.  
• All connections to the NE that is being removed from the system database  
should have all connections deleted.  
1. Select the node to be deleted using the left mouse button. A white ring surrounds the node.  
2. Access the Remove Ring NE Task Overview window using the left mouse button to select  
Configuration, Topology, and Remove Ring Network Element (or using the direct  
selection keys, Alt+C, Alt+T, then Alt+M). Refer to Figure 740-1.  
3. The task overview window appears as the system checks for existing connections. Refer to  
Figure 740-2. Step 2 of the task overview brings up a window instructing the user to  
disconnect the transmit fiber from the left RIC of the next NE in the network (ID will be  
displayed). Refer to Figure 740-3. The left RICs are installed in slot 16. Follow the  
instructions for disconnecting the fiber and select the Next >> button.  
4. Step 3 of the task overview instructs the user to disconnect the receive fiber from the left  
RIC (slot 16) of the previous NE in the network. This isolates the NE being removed from  
the inner fiber route of the network and leaves the traffic flowing through the NE in the  
outer direction. Follow the instructions to remove the fiber and select the Next >> button.  
5. Step 4 of the task overview instructs the user to reconnect the transmit fiber of the next NE  
to the receive fiber of the previous NE in the network thus restoring the ring inner fiber  
connections. Refer to Figure 740-4. Follow the instructions and select the Next >> button.  
6. The system forces all traffic on the ring to the inner fiber direction so the previous steps  
may be repeated on the outer ring fibers between the NE being removed and the previous  
and next NEs in the network. The system prompts the user to remove the fibers from the  
right RICs in slot 17 of the NEs with windows similar to Figures 740-3, and reconnect them  
to each other similar to the window in Figure 740-4 (tasks 5 to 7). Follow the instructions  
for each window and select the Next >> button on each window to continue.  
7. The system restores the ring traffic over both fibers and begins discovering the physical  
ring connectivity (step 8). Once the software verifies all physical fiber connections, the task  
is completed.  
8. When the NE removal is completed, the system draws the new ring configuration on the  
screen according to its connectivity. To redraw the icon layout before saving the default  
system layout, select the arrow tool on the toolbar on the left side of the screen, click on  
and drag the NEs to the desired position on the screen, and release the mouse button. See  
Figure 740-5. This does not change the physical connectivity between the nodes.  
Page 2-203  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-740  
Page 2 of 5  
9. The Icons now stay positioned in the new locations and maintain the highlighted  
connection between them. This capability enables the user to group NEs that may be  
collocated, or separate them according to their geographical locations. The user may also  
return the icons to their original positions on the screen by selecting the Configuration pull  
down menu, Topology, and Revert to Saved Icon Layout or Alt+C, Alt+T, and Alt+V.  
Refer to Figure 740-6.  
10. To save the new icon layout displayed on the screen, select File and Save Icon Layout  
(Alt+F and Alt+S), or use the diskette icon on the tool bar. See Figure 740-7.  
11. The confirmation window appears as shown in Figure 740-8. Select OK. The newly drawn  
icon layout will remain this way each time the GUI is launched, until the layout is redrawn  
and saved again.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Add Ring Network Element  
Topology  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
10974-E  
Figure 740-1. Cellworx Vision Remove Ring NE Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-204  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-740  
Page 3 of 5  
X
Cellworx Vision: Remove Ring NE - Task Overview  
1) Checking for exisiting connections  
2) Physically remove transmit fiber from left RIC  
3) Physically remove receive fiber from left RIC  
4) Connect network elements left RICs  
5) Physically remove transmit fiber from right RIC  
6) Physically remove receive fiber from right RIC  
7) Connect new network element to right RICs  
8) Discovering network configuration  
9) NE removed updating topology  
11752-C  
Figure 740-2. Cellworx Vision Remove Ring NE Task Overview  
X
Cellworx Vision: Remove Ring NE - Disconnect Fiber  
Physically disconnect the transmit fiber from the  
left Ring Interface Card on network element  
Network Element 1 (id 1)  
Cancel  
Next>>  
11920-B  
Figure 740-3. Cellworx Vision Remove Ring NE Fiber Instructional Window  
X
Cellworx Vision : Remove Ring NE - Connect Fiber  
Connect the physical fiber to the transmit port of  
the left Ring Interface Card on network element  
Network Element 1 (id 1)  
and the receive port of the left Ring Interface Card  
on the new network element.  
Network Element 3 (id 3)  
Cancel  
Next>>  
11753-B  
Figure 740-4. Cellworx Vision Connect Ring NE Fibers Instructional Window  
Page 2-205  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-740  
Page 4 of 5  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
ICON DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL ALLOWS DIRECT  
SELECTION OF ANY ICON  
IN THE WORK AREA FOR  
DRAG AND PLACEMENT  
POSITIONING.  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
Cellworx NE  
Unknown  
Cellworx NE  
Unknown  
Cellworx NE  
Unknown  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 23:30 GMT Time: 23:30  
11720-D  
Figure 740-5. Cellworx Vision Redrawing ICON Layout  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Add Ring Network Element  
Topology  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
10972-E  
Figure 740-6. Cellworx Vision Revert to Saved Icon Layout Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-206  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-740  
Page 5 of 5  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Ma  
SAVE ICON LAYOUT TOOL  
LOCATED UNDER PULL  
DOWN MENU ON TOOL  
BAR.  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Save Icon Layout ...  
Exit  
11755-B  
Figure 740-7. Save New Icon Coordinates  
X
Cellworx Vision: Question  
Save icon layout?  
NO  
?
YES  
10986-B  
Figure 740-8. Save Icon Layout Confirmation  
Page 2-207  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-741  
Page 1 of 2  
RETRIEVE LOGS FROM THE NMIC VIA FTP  
Summary: This procedure outlines the steps involved for retrieval of the log files stored on the  
NMIC for performance, accounting, and alarm history. Log files are automatically updated every  
fifteen minutes to the NMIC hard drive and are stored for a 24-hour period. The files can be  
retrieved via FTP to a remote management workstation and stored indefinitely on user medium  
(i.e. hard disk, floppy disk, tape backup, etc.). This procedure is based on a standard UNIX FTP  
program. For other FTP programs, substitute the standard commands with your particular system  
“command gets”.  
It is assumed that the user will be performing backup of some of this data regularly, generally  
every 24 hours. This procedure also assumes the user has gained access to the NMIC via FTP  
and has logged on.  
Note: Direct access to the files may be entered in one Unix string but for this  
procedure we will select one file structure at a time to familiarize the user with the Unix  
file locations. For direct access and FTP of the files, go to step 5.  
1. First, establish an FTP session with the NMIC using the correct IP address for the desired  
network. A login prompt should appear requiring the user to enter the correct user name  
and password.  
2. To access the files scheduled for back up, change to the cellworx directory on the NMIC  
using the following command:  
• cd /cellworx  
3. Listed under the cellworx directory are files titled “performance”, “alarmHistory”, and  
“accounting”. Select the log type that you wish to access by entering the following  
command substituting file name with accounting, alarmHistory, or performance:  
• cd /cellworx/<file name>  
4. The file contents can be displayed by typing “ls” for list or “dir” for directory. The content  
of the files are as follows:  
• Performance – captures all performance monitoring data from each NE in the  
network every fifteen minutes. Performance data includes error counts and  
cells discarded for any interface in the node.  
• Alarm History – captures all alarm history data for each NE in the network.  
Alarm history includes any alarm conditions (performance, physical failures,  
housekeeping, etc.), that have been incurred or cleared during each fifteen-  
minute log period for each NE in the network.  
• Accounting – captures all accounting data for each NE in the network. The  
largest part of this is NDC (Network Data Collection), which includes ingress  
cells passed, egress cells passed, etc.  
Page 2-208  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-741  
Page 2 of 2  
5. Under the log types, the user may select an NE targeted for backup from the list provided  
by typing “ls”. The Unix string should now appear similar to this:  
• cd /cellworx/performance/nex  
(x = the number the user has assigned to the NE).  
6. Under the NE log file for any of the selected log types, is a list of every fifteen-minute log  
recorded by the NMIC for the last 24 hours. A list of logfiles can be displayed by entering  
“ls” (list). Select the logfile for the time period desired for ftp by entering for example;  
• prompt (this disables the system from prompting the user for confirmation  
of every file encountered)  
• mget /cellworx/performance/ne2/XXXXXX  
(x = the specific file name for the NE).  
7. The user can ftp the files selectively or by using wildcard strings to retrieve the all files. For  
example to ftp all the performance logs for NE 3 the user would type;  
• mget /cellworx/performance/ne3/*  
8. To get the accounting data for all the NEs, user would type;  
• mget /cellworx/accounting/*/*  
9. Refer to Figure 741-1 for file structures.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
performance/  
cellworx/  
ne selection or wildcard (*/*)  
logfiles for an ne  
or wildcard (/*)  
alarmHistory/  
ne selection or wildcard (*)  
logfiles for an ne or  
wildcard (/*)  
accounting/  
ne selection or wildcard (*)  
logfiles for an ne or  
wildcard (/*)  
Figure 741-1. NMIC Logfiles, UNIX Menu Structure  
Page 2-209  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-742  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE COMPRESSED LOGS FROM THE NMIC VIA FTP  
Summary: This procedure outlines the steps involved to compress and then retrieve the log files  
stored on the NMIC for performance, accounting, and alarm history. Log files are automatically  
updated every fifteen minutes to the NMIC hard drive and are stored for a 24-hour period. The  
files can be retrieved via FTP to a remote management workstation and stored indefinitely on  
user medium (i.e. hard disk, floppy disk, tape backup, etc.). This procedure is based on a  
standard UNIX FTP program. For other FTP programs, substitute the standard commands with  
your particular system “command gets”. The retrieved files will be in a compressed format.  
GZIP or WINZIP will unarchive these files.  
It is assumed that the user will be performing backup of some of this data regularly, generally  
every 24 hours. This procedure also assumes the user has gained access to the NMIC via FTP  
and has logged on.  
Note: Direct access to the files may be entered in one Unix string but for this  
procedure we will select one file structure at a time to familiarize the user with the Unix  
file locations. For direct access and FTP of the files, go to step 5.  
1. First, establish a TELNET session with the NMIC using the correct IP address for the  
desired network, or establish a CRAFT session with the RS232 DB9 on the front of the  
NMIC. A login prompt should appear requiring the user to enter the correct user name and  
password e.g. userid=root with no password.  
2. To access the files scheduled for back up, change to the cellworx directory on the NMIC  
• cd /cellworx.  
3. Listed under the cellworx directory are files titled “performance”, “alarmHistory”, and  
“accounting”. The content of the files is as follows:  
• Performance – captures all performance monitoring data from each NE in the network  
every fifteen minutes. Performance data includes error counts and cells discarded for any  
interface in the node.  
• Alarm History – captures all alarm history data for each NE in the network. Alarm history  
includes any alarm conditions (performance, physical failures, housekeeping, etc.), that  
have been incurred or cleared during each fifteen-minute log period for each NE in the  
network.  
• Accounting – captures all accounting data for each NE in the network. The largest part of  
this is NDC (Network Data Collection), which includes ingress cells passed, egress cells  
passed, etc.  
.
Page 2-210  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-742  
Page 2 of 3  
4. Type the following command to create the first archive for the Performance data. Note you  
should be in the /cellworx directory. You can determine this by typing “pwd”. Also note  
there is a date in the middle of the file name (050500). Change this date to reflect the date  
the command is being run on.  
• tar –zcvf /tmp/perf_050500.tar.gz performance  
5. Type the following command to create the first archive for the Alarm History data. Note  
you should be in the /cellworx directory. You can determine this by typing “pwd”. Also  
note there is a date in the middle of the file name (050500). Change this date to reflect the  
date the command is being run on.  
• tar –zcvf /tmp/alarm_050500.tar.gz alarmHistory  
6. Type the following command to create the first archive for the Accounting data. Note you  
should be in the /cellworx directory. You can determine this by typing “pwd”. Also note  
there is a date in the middle of the file name. Change this date to reflect the date the  
command is being run on.  
• tar –zcvf /tmp/accounting_050500.tar.gz accounting  
7. If you choose you can type the following commands to see the files that were created in  
steps 4, 5, and 6.  
• ls –la /tmp/*.tar.gz  
8. At this point the files /tmp/perf_050500.tar.gz, /tmp/alarm_050500.tar.gz, and  
/tmp/accounting_050500.tar.gz have been created. Establish an FTP session with the  
NMIC using the correct IP address for the desired network.  
• ftp <NMIC IP address>  
9. A login prompt should appear requiring the user to enter the correct user name and  
password e.g. userid=cellworx, password=cellworx#1. The account cellworx is by default  
already on the NMIC but any user account except the root user account may be used.  
10. Enter the following commands:  
• ftp> bin (to set transfer to binary mode)  
• ftp> prompt (this disables the system from prompting the user for  
confirmation of every file encountered)  
• ftp> hash (turn on the hash marks for progress indication)  
Page 2-211  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-742  
Page 3 of 3  
11. Change directory to where the archives are kept.  
• ftp> cd /tmp  
13. Retrieve the archives using the multiple get command as follows:  
• ftp> mget *.tar.gz  
14. Delete the files on the NMIC once the FTP process is complete. Each file must be deleted  
individually so one command will be issued per file using the following commands:  
• ftp> delete perf_050500.tar.gz  
• ftp> delete alarm_050500.tar.gz  
• ftp> delete account_050500.tar.gz  
15. End your FTP session by typing the following command.  
• ftp> quit  
16. On your local host you should have the files: perf_050500.tar.gz, account_050500.tar.gz,  
and alarm_050500.tar.gz.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-212  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-743  
Page 1 of 1  
This page intentionally left blank.  
Page 2-213  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-744  
Page 1 of 2  
REFLASH BOOT IMAGE  
Summary: The following procedure instructs the user in how to properly “reflash” the boot  
image on cards after loading new feature sets. With each new release, new features and bugs are  
fixed in the non-volatile flash of a card. This flash must be upgraded, similar to upgrading the  
application code when going from P2.0 to P3.1. The customer will need to flash the image in the  
following scenarios:  
• Major software upgrade has been performed and there is a new bootrom  
• Receives a card from manufacturing and it does not contain the correct  
bootrom version for the software version they are running  
1. From the GUI main menu, select the NE in question using the right mouse button.  
2. The NE Pop-up window appears as shown in Figure 744-1. Select the Reflash Boot Image  
option using the left mouse button.  
3. The Reflash Boot Image selection window appears displaying each card in the chassis.  
Refer to Figure 744-2. Place the cursor on the line of the card to be changed or updated and  
using the right mouse button, click and hold the mouse button on that line.  
4. The available software reflash images will be displayed. While continuing to hold the  
mouse button down, drag the cursor to the desired image and release the mouse button. The  
selected reflash image is moved to the Selected column.  
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each card in the shelf.  
6. Select the Apply button to initiate the card(s) reflash. This process may take several  
minutes per card.  
7. Select the Refresh button to update the Download Status column. This Download Status  
column will show “Loading” until the image is loaded at which time it will display  
“Loaded”.  
8. After the correct boot image is completely loaded, select the Cancel button to close the  
window.  
9. Perform a card reset per DLP-773 on each card changed to ensure the latest flash code is  
running.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-214  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-744  
Page 2 of 2  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
i
About...  
GNE-1Craft Interface...  
Create Connection...  
View Connection...  
Configure Alarm Threshold...  
Configure Software...  
Reflash Boot Image  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 23:30 GMT Time: 23:30  
10942-F  
Figure 744-1. NE Pop-up Window  
X
Cellworx Vision: Reflash Network Element 1  
Press the right mouse button to display the available flash images.  
Selected Software Version  
Card Type  
SC  
Slot Number (s)  
Running Software Version  
2.0.0.3  
1
155 MM CRS  
12  
oc3sm.0.4.2.2  
16  
17  
18  
622 Ring  
622 Ring  
SC  
2.0.1.24  
2.0.0.3  
2.1.0.24  
Clear Selected  
Refresh  
Apply  
Cancel  
0026-045  
Figure 744-2. Reflash Boot Image Selection Screen  
Page 2-215  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-745  
Page 1 of 2  
SAVING THE SYSTEM DATABASE  
Summary: This procedure defines the steps involved with saving the current system database  
and should be used by those with UNIX/LINUX knowledge. While NMIC protection provides a  
great deal of security against loosing the system database in the event of a NMIC failure, it is  
still a good practice to save the current database after the system has been placed in a useful  
state. This will protect the user from the remote possibility of database corruption on both  
NMICs, and allows the user to fallback to a known system state rather than falling back to a  
default system state and requiring rediscovery of the ring.  
SAVING SYSTEM DATABASE  
Note: The NMIC database should be stored in two locations, locally on the NMIC in a  
directory, and remotely on another system storage device.  
1. The system database consists of the following files on the NMIC:  
• /cellworx/config/NE.* -where * is a wildcard representing the  
number of each NE in the system. This will also make a copy of the default  
template for creating NEs.  
• /cellworx/config/NMIC  
Example: If the system is a three node ring with one expansion shelf using NE1, NE2, NE3, and  
NE4, then the entire database would consist of the following five files;  
• /cellworx/config/NE.1  
• /cellworx/config/NE.2  
• /cellworx/config/NE.3  
• /cellworx/config/NE.4  
• /cellworx/config/NMIC  
BACKING UP A COPY OF THE NMIC DATABASE  
2. Telnet to the active NMIC using the floating IP address or the NMIC specific IP address for  
the currently active NMIC.  
3. Enter the following command to change to the directory where the database files are stored.  
• cd /cellworx/config  
Page 2-216  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-745  
Page 2 of 2  
4. The following command will copy the NMIC database files to the NMIC.backup file where  
they can be accessed at a later time.  
• cp NMIC NMIC.backup  
5. Create a directory named /cellworx/config/saved on the NMIC and copy the relevant  
database files into the saved directory for potential use later.  
6. Additionally, it is recommended that the database files should be FTP’ed off of the NMIC  
and onto another system in the event that there are problems with the NMIC hard drive.  
Page 2-217  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-746  
Page 1 of 3  
DELETE A CELLWORX STN EXPANSION SHELF (EPS)  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to delete a Cellworx STN shelf that is  
currently being utilized in a network as an expansion shelf (STN-EPS). The user should ensure  
all connections to the EPS NE are deleted before attempting this procedure.  
1. Select the NE to be deleted using the left mouse button. A white ring surrounds the NE.  
2. Access the Remove EPS NE Task Overview window using the left mouse button to select  
Configuration, Topology, and Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element (or using the  
direct selection keys, Alt+C, Alt+T, then Alt+X). Refer to Figure 746-1.  
3. The task overview window appears as shown in Figure 746-2 and the system requests  
verification that this task is to be initiated. Refer to Figure 746-3. Click on Yes in the  
confirmation window to continue or No to abort this procedure.  
4. Step 1 indicates that the system is checking for any existing connections terminating at the  
EPS. If any connections are found, the user must first delete them before continuing. Refer  
to DLP-739 to delete connections.  
5. Step 3 of the task overview instructs the user to reconfigure the EPS and RNE interfaces as  
non-SEPIs (Shelf Expansion Interfaces). Refer to Figure 746-2. Use the following  
procedures for changing the configuration on the appropriate SEPI(s):  
• T3 Card Configuration  
DLP-753  
DLP-752  
DLP-797  
• 155 CRS Card Configuration  
• 622 CRS Card Configuration  
6. Select the Next>> button to continue with the procedure after reconfiguring the SEPIs.  
7. Step 4 of the Task Overview indicates that the system is updating the database. This will  
only take a few seconds to complete. Once finished, the user is prompted to physically  
disconnect the expansion shelf from the RNE. Refer to Figure 746-4. Pull the cards out of  
the shelves and remove the fibers if necessary.  
Danger: Do not look into the ends of optical fibers. Exposure to invisible LASER  
radiation may cause serious retinal damage or even blindness. Verify the optical source is  
disabled through the use of an optical power meter before handling optical fibers.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-218  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-746  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Add Ring Network Element  
Add Expansion Shelf Network Element  
Software  
Remove Ring Network Element  
Remove Expansion Shelf Network Element  
NMIC Platform  
Refresh...  
Force Network Discovery ...  
Revert to Saved Icon Layout...  
Ring Audit  
Ring Upgrade  
Turn Up Ring...  
0026-047  
Figure 746-1. Remove EPS NE Pull-down Menu  
Cellworx Vision: Remove EPS NE - Task Overview  
1) Checking for existing connections  
2) User verification  
3) Reconfigure EPS/RNE interfaces as non-SEPI  
4) Wait while updating database  
5) Physically disconnect the EPS  
6) EPS removed updating topology  
11919-B  
Figure 746-2. Remove EPS NE Task Overview Window  
Cellworx Vision: Question  
Continuing will remove the EPS from the database if no  
connections are present. Do you want to continue?  
?
No  
Yes  
11914-B  
Figure 746-3. Remove EPS Confirmation Window  
Page 2-219  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-746  
Page 3 of 3  
X
Cellworx Vision - Information  
The EPS has successfully been removed from the  
database. Now physically disconnect the EPS from  
the RNE.  
OK  
0026-048  
Figure 746-4. Removed EPS Successfully Message Window  
Page 2-220  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-747  
Page 1 of 5  
SET E1 MULTI 1 CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the E1 Multi 1 card configurations  
utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI). User must have  
the GUI launched, and have accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to  
performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the E1 Multi 1 card displayed in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View”at the  
top of the window. The E1 Multi 1 card display appears as shown in Figure 747-1.  
2. Click and drag the small block upward to expand the Configuration section of the window  
so all or most options are visible. The Administrative State of the card and port should be  
“Unlocked” if in service. If “Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse  
button to enable the card and/or port for service.  
3. Select a Port on the simulated card by a single click using the left mouse button.  
4. Set the Port Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to Table 747-1 for a list of  
options the user may select for this card type.  
5. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the window to back up the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the E1 Multi 1 window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window display  
with all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close will  
close this window and return the user to the Chassis View window.  
6. If configuring the port for Cell Relay Service, continue with step 7. If configuring the port  
for Circuit Emulation Service, go to step 13.  
B. ATM INTERFACE CONFIGURATION (CRS MODE)  
7. Double click on one of the ports available (1 to 16). The ATM interface screen appears.  
Refer to the example shown in Figure 747-2.  
8. Set the ATM configuration options as needed. Table 747-2 shows a list of options the user  
may select.  
9. Select the Close button to return to the E1 card display.  
10. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each E1 Multi 1 port on the card.  
11. Select the Close button to return to the Chassis View window.  
12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 for each card in the shelf.  
Page 2-221  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-747  
Page 2 of 5  
C. CES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION  
13. Double click on one of the ports available (1 to 16). The CES interface screen appears.  
Refer to the example shown in Figure 747-2.  
14. Set the CES configuration options as needed using Table 747-3 as a reference.  
15. Select the Apply button and then the Close button to return to the E1 card display.  
16. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each E1 Multi 1 port on the card.  
17. Select the Close button to return to the Chassis View window.  
18. Repeat steps 1 through 17 for each card in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - E1 Circuit Emulation Service  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card: E1 MULTI 1  
Status:  
1
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
8
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
E1 MULTI  
1
Unlocked  
Ring Selection:  
Port Level  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
Recieved  
Local  
Locked  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Unlocked  
Service Type:  
ADC  
Circuit Emulation (CES)  
Cell relay (CRS)  
E1 PORT LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
SELECT PORT FIRST.  
Status  
Active  
APS  
120 Ohms  
Line Build Out (LBO):  
Line Coding:  
Line Type:  
HDB3  
Port  
E1 CRC-4 MF  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Facility Data Link (FDL):  
Loopback Config:  
None  
CLICK ON THE PORT TO  
CONFIGURE INDIVIDUAL  
E1 PORTS.  
None  
default  
Circuit Identifier:  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF  
CONTROLLER.  
VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
0026-049  
Figure 747-1. E1 Multi 1 Card Configuration Window  
Page 2-222  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-747  
Page 3 of 5  
Table 747-1. E1 Multi 1 Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Card and Port  
Administrative State  
Unlocked  
Unlocked  
Locked  
Enables or disables card or port for service,  
respectively.  
Ingress/Egress  
Congestion  
Threshold  
80  
0-100  
Percentage of ingress or egress buffer capacity that  
will cause a congestion threshold notification.  
Ring Selection  
Auto  
Auto  
Card will automatically select traffic from the ring  
direction with the best signal.  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 16 direction.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 17 direction.  
Transmit Timing  
Source  
Local  
Received  
Local  
Incoming clock pulse used for outgoing signal.  
Clock pulse supplied by the SC cards used for  
outgoing signal.  
Service Type  
CRS  
CES  
CRS  
Circuit Emulation Service.  
Cell Relay Service.  
Line Build Out  
120 Ohms  
75 Ohms  
Sets the signal strength according to the distance in  
feet that the Cellworx STN is from the E1  
interfacing equipment.  
120 Ohms  
Line Coding  
Line Type  
HDB3  
HDB3  
European Standard, non configurable.  
E1 CRC-4  
MF  
E1 CRC-4  
MF  
Sets the line type to reflect customer equipment.  
Must be set in groups of 8 ports (1-8 and 9-16).  
Loopback. Config  
None  
None  
Terminal  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Sends cells to the cellbus and back to the ring. No  
changes are made to the path layer data.  
Loops the incoming signal back to CPE, generates  
AIS to the cellbus.  
Facility Line  
Circuit Identifier  
Interface Name  
<blank>  
Up to 20  
User defined. Usually describes the traffic,  
alphanumeric customer, and/or channel number.  
characters.  
<default>  
All 1s  
Alphanumeric User defined, up to 20 alpha numeric characters  
Loopback Location  
Code  
Alphanumeric Used to loopback the incoming signal and transmit  
it back to the customer equipment, limited to 16  
numeric characters.  
Recording Interface  
ID  
All 0s  
Numeric  
Identifies the site card and port location for  
customer billing capabilities, (allows assignment of  
a customer ID for each port), limited to 15 numeric  
characters.  
Provisioned  
Endpoints  
0
User cannot  
configure.  
Displays how many VPC or VCC endpoints are  
configured by administrator on this card.  
Interface Type  
UNI  
PCR  
UNI  
NNI  
Specifies interface type as User to Network  
Interface or Network to Network Interface.  
CAC Formula  
PCR  
SCR  
Specifies Peak Cell Rate or Sustained Cell Rate for  
Connection Admission Control.  
(continued)  
Page 2-223  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-747  
Page 4 of 5  
Table 747-2. ATM Interface Configuration Options for CRS Mode  
DEFAULT OPTIONS DEFINITIONS  
Off On or Off  
SELECTION  
Policing  
User sets whether traffic will be policed for  
Quality Of Service (QOS).  
Cell Scrambling  
On  
On or Off  
100-1000  
User sets whether traffic will be scrambled.  
Over Subscription Rate  
100  
User sets percentage depending on traffic  
contract.  
Max Active VPI Bits  
Max Active VCI Bits  
Max number of VPCs  
Max number of VCCs  
0
0-8  
Sets the maximum number of bits allowed may  
be utilized from this port.  
10  
1
0 to 10  
0 to 256  
0 to 256  
Sets the maximum number of bits allowed may  
be utilized from this port.  
Sets the maximum number of VPCs that may  
be utilized from this port.  
0
Sets the maximum number of VCCs that may  
be utilized from this port.  
Table 747-3. E1 Multi 1 Configuration Options for CES Mode  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Interface Name  
ATM VPI  
<default>  
Alphanumeric User defined, up to 20 alpha numeric characters.  
<user  
defined>  
0-8  
This is a read only to show the available bits  
configured for this port during connection creation.  
ATM VCI  
<user  
defined>  
0-10  
This is a read only to show the available bits  
configured for this port during connection creation.  
Operational State  
Up  
Up/Down  
This is a read only to show the state of the port.  
Buffer Maximum  
Size  
6220  
5300 to 6220 Maximum size measured in microseconds and  
selectable in 10 microsecond increments.  
Cell Arrival Jitter  
Tolerance  
1040  
950 to 2650  
Maximum size measured in microseconds and  
selectable in 10 microsecond increments.  
CBR Clock Mode  
Adaptive  
Adaptive,  
Sets the Constant Bit Rate clock to either adapt to  
Synchronous, the incoming bit stream or look for a constant  
or SRTS synchronous bit stream.  
Page 2-224  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-747  
Page 5 of 5  
Cellworx Vision: ATM Interface  
Node Name: Cellworx1  
X
Slot Number:  
Card :  
8
Node Id:  
1
T1 MULTI 1  
1
Location:  
5th Street  
Port Number:  
Interface Name:  
Slot8_Port1 DS1CESUNI  
1111111111111111  
0000000000000000  
Loopback Location Code:  
Recording Interface ID:  
Provisioned Endpoints:  
Number of VPCs:  
Number of VCCs:  
0
0
Interface Type:  
CAC Formula:  
UNI  
NNI  
PCR Based  
SCR Based  
Policing  
Cell Scrambling  
Over Subscription Rate (%):  
VP/VC Allocation:  
100  
(100-10  
Max Active VPI Bits:  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Max Active VCI Bits:  
1
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(1-1)  
(0-256)  
Max Number of VPCs:  
Max Number of VCCs:  
Error Log:  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Card View  
13431-A  
Figure 747-2. E1 Multi 1 ATM Interface Options  
Cellworx Vision: CES Interface  
X
Node Name: Cellworx1  
Slot Number:  
6
Node Id:  
1
Card : E1 MULTI 1  
Location:  
5th Street  
Channel Number:  
1
Interface Name:  
ATM VPI:  
Slot8_Port1 DS1CESUNI  
1
32  
ATM VCI:  
Up  
Operational State:  
Buffer Maximum Size:  
Cell Arrival Jitter Tolerance:  
CBR Clock Mode  
6220  
1040  
microsecon  
microsecon  
Adaptive  
Synchronous  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Card View  
14547-A  
Figure 747-3. CES Interface Menu Options  
Page 2-225  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-748  
Page 1 of 3  
SET SC CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the SC card configurations utilizing  
the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI). User must have GUI  
launched and accessed the chassis level GUI display per NTP-017 prior to performing this  
procedure.  
1. Double click on the SC card located in slot 1 in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View”at the  
top of the window. Refer to Figure 748-1.  
2. The SC card level display appears as shown in Figure 748-2. The Operational State of the  
card should be “Up”, Availability shown as “Available”, and Protection state may be  
“Enabled” or “Not Protected.” Use the small blocks on the configuration window to stretch  
the view upward, enabling all parameters to be displayed.  
3. The SC card IP address enables remote Telnet sessions via 10Base-T connection on the slot  
18 EIM to the Shelf Controller. Set the IP address per work order or customer specifications  
using dots between the sequences for the number values as shown in the following example:  
ex., AAA.BBB.CCC.DDD  
Where the - AAA = 0-255  
BBB = 0-255  
CCC = 0-255  
DDD = 0-255  
Note: This IP address will always connect the user to the active SC.  
4. The craft port bit rate is not configurable and is shown here for display only. Step through  
the remaining options and configure per system requirements. Refer to Table 748-1 for a list  
of available parameters for each option.  
5. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the window to send new parameters to the database.  
6. Select the Close button at the bottom of the window to return to the Chassis View.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-226  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-748  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
S
C
N
M
I
2
4
8
8
2
4
8
8
S
C
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
M
u
l
E
1
M
u
l
C
T
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
g
R
i
n
g
E
X
P
t
i
t
i
t
i
1
1
1
EQUIPPED CARD  
REPRESENTATIONS WITH  
ALARM INDICATIONS.  
CLICK ON BOXES AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS, CONFIGURATION OR  
CHASSIS VIEW.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18  
Status:  
Power Status: normal  
Identifier:  
Start Time:  
Vendor:  
Alarm Status: minor  
2
Version:  
Current Time: 10:12:09 09/01/1999  
Up Time: 1d 19:41:22:00  
1.2.0.35  
CHASSIS STATUS  
19:30:47 8/31/1999  
ADC-TSG  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN STATUSES OR  
SELECTIONS.  
Configuration:  
Cellworx2  
5th Street  
Name:  
Memory Utilization Threshold:  
Suppress Zero Stats  
CHASSIS  
CONFIGURATION  
Location:  
Apply  
Topology View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO GUI MAIN  
VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CHASSIS LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CHASSIS LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
GUI MAIN VIEW.  
13454-C  
Figure 748-1. Shelf Level GUI Chassis View Window  
Page 2-227  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP 748  
Page 3 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - Shelf Controller  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Status:  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
1
Configuration:  
Card Level  
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Card: SC  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
1
1
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection State:  
Up  
Available  
Enabled  
Locked  
SC  
Synchronization State:  
Critical  
Maj/Min  
RMT  
ACO  
Active  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
IP Address:  
0.0.0.0  
Craft  
Access  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Network Mask:  
255.255.255.0  
0.0.0.0  
ACO  
Broadcast IP Address:  
Gateway IP Address:  
PCMCIA  
0.0.0.0  
ADC  
Bit Rate: 9600 bits per second  
Stop Bits:  
Status  
Active  
Source  
Sync  
PORT LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION  
OPTIONS.  
Data Bits: Parity:  
7
8
None  
One  
Two  
Even  
Odd  
None  
Craft  
Access  
Enable  
Inactivity Timeout:  
None  
Shelf  
Craft  
Reset  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
CHASSIS LEVEL VIEW.  
13434-C  
Figure 748-2. GUI SC Card Configuration Window  
Table 748-1. Cellworx Serial Port Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
Bit Rate  
PORT  
Craft  
DEFAULT  
9600  
OPTIONS  
No Options  
COMMENTS  
Baud rate not currently selectable  
Set per system requirements.  
Set per system requirements.  
Set per system requirements.  
Set per system requirements.  
Parity  
Both  
Both  
Both  
None  
8
None, Even, Odd  
8, 7  
Data bit  
Stop bit  
1
None, 1, 2  
Inactivity Time-out Both  
None  
None,  
3 minutes,  
5 minutes,  
10 minutes,  
15 minutes,  
30 minutes,  
1 hour,  
2 hour,  
6 hours,  
12 hours,  
1 day  
Page 2-228  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-749  
Page 1 of 3  
SET SHELF TIMING RESOURCE  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to select Primary and Secondary timing  
input and output sources for clocking purposes. This also includes setting the protection modes  
for timing selections.  
1. From the shelf level GUI Chassis View window, select the Configuration pull down menu  
using the mouse to click on it, or by entering “Alt+N” on the keyboard. Refer to Figure 749-  
1.  
2. Select the Timing Resources option using the down arrow keys to highlight it and hitting  
“Enter” or “Return”, or by entering an “Alt+T” on the keyboard.  
3. The Timing Resources shelf level GUI display appears as shown in Figure 749-2. Select the  
Timing Reference inputs, DS1 Output Sources, Encoding Rules, and Frame Format for  
both the Primary and Secondary circuits by clicking on the available selection using the left  
mouse button. Refer to Table 749-1 for a description of the selections available.  
4. Select the Timing Protection Mode as either Revertive or Non-Revertive using the left  
mouse button, and enter a revertive time in minutes using the up/down arrow next to the  
Revert Time block  
5. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the window to send the new configuration data to  
the database.  
6. Select the Close button at the bottom of the window to return to the shelf level GUI Chassis  
View screen.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
SELECT THE CONFIGURATION  
PULLDOWN MENU USING LEFT  
MOUSE BUTTON OR BY PRESSING  
THE ALT+N KEYS SIMULTANEOUSLY.  
Hardware Inventory  
Protection Groups  
S
C
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
E
1
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
Timing Resources  
Reset Slots  
C
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
M
u
l
M
u
l
R
i
n
R
i
n
E
X
t
i
t
t
13471-B  
Figure 749-1. Shelf Level GUI Configuration Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-229  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-749  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision:Timing Resource  
X
Node Name: Cellworx1  
Node Id:  
1
Status:  
Primary  
Enabled  
Current Timing Reference:  
Protection Status:  
Active Sync Status:  
ST3  
Alternate Sync Status: ST3  
Configuration:  
DS1 Output Source  
Secondary:  
Primary:  
Timing Reference:  
TX Sync Status:  
FDL Receive:  
Slot 16  
N/A  
DS1 Output Source:  
None  
N/A  
DS1 Transmit Mode:  
Disab AIS Threshold:  
Enabled  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
ESF  
BSF  
Frame Format:  
Encoding Rule:  
S
A
Protection:  
Protection Mode:  
Revert Time:  
0
Switch Command:  
None  
Revertive  
Enable  
Manual  
Non Revertive  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Chasis View  
CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
CHASSIS LEVEL VIEW.  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING  
CONTROLLER. CURRENT WINDOW.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
13482-C  
Figure 749-2. Shelf Level GUI Timing Resource Configuration Window  
Table 749-1. Timing Resource Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
(PRIMARY OR SECONDARY)  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Timing Reference  
Internal  
BITS Primary  
Hardwired in at SC EIM at CO.  
BITS Secondary Hardwired in at SC EIM at CO.  
Internal  
Slot XX  
Uses internal Stratum 3 source.  
Uses any optical interface, DS3 running in  
PLCP mode, or an E1 card (XX=slot#).  
DS1 Output Source  
TX Sync Status  
None  
N/A  
Slot XX  
Derives a T1 from a received optical signal  
of slot specified (XX=slot#).  
None  
PRS  
ST2  
No source selected for output.  
Primary Reference Source  
Stratum 2 level source  
ST3  
Stratum 3 level source  
SMC  
DUS  
SONET Minimum level Clock  
Reference should not be used for  
source.  
(continued)  
Page 2-230  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-749  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 749-1. Timing Resource Configuration Options, continued  
SELECTION  
(PRIMARY OR SECONDARY)  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
DS1 Transmit Mode  
AIS  
Threshold  
Generation  
AIS Threshold  
Generation  
Only available when Frame Format is  
set to ESF. Requires transmitting AIS  
over the derived DS1 signals if a clock  
reference has degraded below the  
threshold quality level.  
Message Pass  
Through  
FDL Receive  
Enabled  
N/A  
Enabled  
Disabled  
A peer-to-peer protocol across a T1  
line providing OA&M functions  
(performance monitoring, loop back  
etc.) implemented via the framing bits  
in the T1 frame.  
AIS Threshold  
PRS  
ST1  
ST2  
ST3  
SMC  
DUS  
Primary Reference Source  
Stratum 1 level source  
Stratum 2 level source  
Stratum 3 level source  
SONET Minimum level Clock  
Reference should not be used for  
source.  
Frame Format  
Encoding Rule  
ESF  
ESF  
SF  
Extended Superframe  
Superframe  
N/A  
Not Applicable when a DS1 Output is  
not selected.  
B8ZS  
B8ZS  
AMI  
N/A  
Bit 8 Zero Substitution  
Alternate Mark Inversion  
Not Applicable when DS1 Output not  
selected.  
PROTECTION  
Switch Command  
Protection Mode  
None  
None  
No switch command selected.  
Enable  
Enables a switch to take place when  
needed, used after a manual switch to  
release the manual condition..  
Manual  
Initiates a switch to stand-by clock  
source.  
Non  
Revertive  
Revertive  
Non Revertive  
Switches back to recovered primary  
source following a failure.  
Does not automatically revert back to  
primary source after a failure recovers.  
Revertive Time  
(if Revertive)  
0
0 to 1800 seconds Selectable up to 30 minutes.  
N/A Not Applicable if non-revertive.  
Page 2-231  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-750  
Page 1 of 2  
SET SHELF HOUSEKEEPING ALARM CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to configure the housekeeping alarm  
messages that will be displayed when an input is triggered via an external source.  
1. From the shelf level GUI Chassis View window, select the Fault pull down menu using the  
mouse to click on it, or by entering “Alt+A” on the keyboard. Refer to Figure 750-1.  
2. Select the Configure Housekeeping Alarms option using the down arrow keys to highlight  
it and hitting “Enter” or “Return”, or by entering an “Alt+A” on the keyboard.  
3. The Housekeeping Alarms shelf level GUI display appears as shown in Figure 750-2. The  
State column indicates the current state of that alarm input. A green square indicates no  
alarm is present, while the Red square indicates an alarm condition is active on that input.  
4. Enter in an alarm description for each of the eight alarm interfaces according to the type of  
equipment hardwired to the SC EIM card. Refer to the label located inside the front door  
panel if necessary. This label should have been filled out by the installer during installation.  
Refer to List of related Publications in the preface of this manual for installation procedures.  
5. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the window to send the new configuration data to  
the database.  
6. Select the Close button at the bottom of the window to return to the shelf level GUI Chassis  
View screen.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
SELECT THE FAULT PULLDOWN  
MENU USING LEFT MOUSE  
BUTTON OR BY PRESSING THE  
ALT+A KEYS SIMULTANEOUSLY.  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
Configure Housekeeping Alarms  
X
Execute Alarm Cut-Off  
S
C
N
M
I
3
M
U
X
1
M
u
l
3
3
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
1
M
u
l
1
M
u
l
T
C
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
R
i
n
E
X
t
i
t
t
i
i
13473-C  
Figure 750-1. Shelf Level GUI Fault Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-232  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-750  
Page 2 of 2  
Cellworx Vision: Housekeeping Alarms  
X
Node Name: Cellworx1  
Node Id:  
1
State  
Alarm String  
CURRENT ALARM  
INDICATIONS UPDATED  
ON REFRESH ONLY  
1:  
2:  
HSK - ALM-1  
HSK - ALM-2  
HSK - ALM-3  
HSK - ALM-4  
HSK - ALM-5  
HSK - ALM-6  
3:  
4:  
USER CONFIGURABLE  
ALARM MESSAGES.  
5:  
6:  
7: HSK - ALM-7  
8:  
HSK - ALM-8  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF TO REFLECT ANY  
CONTROLLER. CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13459Cb  
Figure 750-2. Housekeeping Alarm Input Configuration Window  
Page 2-233  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-751  
Page 1 of 3  
SET 622 RING INTERFACE CARD (RIC) CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the 622 Ring interface card  
configurations utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI).  
User must the have GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to  
performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the 622 RIC located in slot 16 or 17 in the shelf level GUI “Chassis  
View”at the top of the window.  
2. The 622 RIC display appears as shown in Figure 751-1. The Administrative State of the  
card and port should be “Unlocked” if in service and cannot be set using the GUI. If two  
RICs were set to “Locked”, the node could be isolated requiring a complete ring turn up.  
3. Set the rest of the configuration options for the card and port using Table 751-1 for  
descriptions of the options.  
4. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the window to send the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the 622 RIC window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window display  
and all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close will  
close this window.  
5. Repeat steps 1 through 5 the second 622 RIC card installed in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-234  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-751  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - 622 Ring Interface Card  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Card: 622 Ring  
Slot Number: 17  
Port Number:  
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
622  
Ring  
Unlocked  
Ring Selection :  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL-TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
System  
Locked  
Unlocked  
Recieved  
ADC  
Do not use for synchronization  
Enable signal degrade  
Status  
Active  
Timing  
5
Signal Degrade BER Threshold: 10E-  
Medium Type:  
622 MBPS PORT LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Port  
1
SONET  
SDH  
Loopback towards:  
None  
Terminal  
Facility  
Line Coding:  
Line Type:  
sonetMediumNRZ  
sonetLongSingleMode  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13443-B  
Figure 751-1. 622 RIC Shelf Level GUI Configuration Screen  
Table 751-1. 622 RIC Card Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
Unlock  
80  
OPTIONS  
N/A  
DEFINITION  
Admin State  
Not Configurable on RIC  
Percentage of buffer capacity that will cause a  
congestion threshold notification for Ingress and Egress.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
0-100  
Ring  
Auto  
N/A  
Not Configurable on RIC  
Selection  
Transmit  
Timing  
Source  
System  
System  
Uses Primary timing reference.  
Received  
Uses clock derived from incoming receive fiber (also  
known as Line-Timing).  
Do Not Use  
for Sync  
False  
Selected  
(true)  
If “True”, causes the RIC to output DUS (Do not Use for  
Sync) in the S1 byte of the SONET overhead.  
Not selected  
(false)  
Enable Signal Not Selected  
Degrade  
Selected  
Enables a protection switch of the traffic if the input  
signal strength drops below tolerable levels set by the  
user in the BER threshold selection.  
Not Selected  
(continued)  
Page 2-235  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-751  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 751-1. 622 RIC Card Configuration Options, continued  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITION  
Signal  
Degrade BER  
Threshold  
5
5 through 9  
Defines the number of bit errors the port can incur  
before a signal degrade occurs and generates an  
alarm message and probably protection switch.  
Medium Type SONET  
SONET  
SDH  
Not configurable on RIC. This is determined by the  
dipswitch on the SC EIM, which sets the shelf type.  
Can be SONET, Synchronous Optical Network, US,  
or Synchronous Digital Hierarchy, European  
standard for transporting data over fiber.  
Loopback  
towards  
None  
None  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Terminal  
Sends cells back to the cellbus and back out to the  
ring. No changes are made to the path layer data.  
Facility  
Loops the incoming signal back to the CPE and  
generates AIS to the cellbus.  
Line Coding  
Line Type  
NRZ  
Not configurable by user.  
Card  
Dependant  
SonetOther  
Not configurable by user, dependant on card type  
inserted.  
sonetShortSingle  
Mode  
sonetLongSingle  
Mode  
sonetMultiMode  
Transmit Path (example)  
Trace  
Card position dependent. This is assigned by the  
system according to the NE and slot it is equipped in.  
NE1_Slot17_  
Port1 (OC12)  
1
Page 2-236  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-752  
Page 1 of 4  
SET 155 SM/MM CRS CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the 155 SM/MM CRS card  
configurations utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI).  
Configuration can be set for the card, port and ATM interface on individual ports. This procedure  
is divided into two sections with the second section dealing with the ATM interface screens. The  
user must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to  
performing this procedure.  
A. CARD AND PORT CONFIGURATION  
1. Double click on the 155 SM/MM CRS card displayed in the shelf level GUI “Chassis  
View”at the top of the window.  
2. The 155 SM/MM CRS card display appears as shown in Figure 752-1. Click on the port to  
be configured (Port 1 or 2) located on the simulated card on the left side of the window.  
3. Click and drag the small block upward to expand the Configuration section of the window  
so all options are visible. The Administrative State of the card and port should be  
“Unlocked” if in service. If “Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse  
button to enable the port for service.  
4. At Timing Port, select the port that will be used as a reference if this slot is selected as a  
timing source from the Timing Resource Screen.  
5. If this card and port are being utilized as an expansion shelf interface (either from ring to  
EPS, or EPS to ring), select the Expansion Shelf Interface button.  
6. Set the Port Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to Table 752-1 for a list of  
options the user may select for this card type.  
7. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the window to back up the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the 155 SM/MM CRS window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window  
display and all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close  
will close this window.  
B. ATM INTERFACE CONFIGURATION  
8. Double click on either of the ports available (1 or 2). The ATM interface screen appears.  
Refer to the example shown in Figure 752-2.  
9. Set the ATM options as needed using Table 752-2 as a reference.  
Page 2-237  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-752  
Page 2 of 4  
10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for each 155 SM/MM CRS card installed in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - 155 Cell Relay Service Single Mode  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card: 155 SM CRS  
Status:  
1
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
9
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
155 SM  
CRS  
Unlocked  
CARD LEVEL  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Timing Port:  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Expansion Shelf Interface  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Port Level  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
ADC  
System  
Locked  
Unlocked  
Recieved  
Status  
Active  
Do not use for synchronization  
Enable Signal Degrade  
APS  
155 MBPS PORT LEVEL  
Timing  
Signal Degrade BER Threshold: 10E-  
Medium Type:  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
5
Port  
1
2
SONET  
SDH  
Loopback towards:  
None  
Terminal  
Facility  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13452-B  
Figure 752-1. 155 SM CRS Card Shelf Level GUI Configuration Screen  
Table 752-1. 155 SM/MM CRS Card Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
Admin State  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Unlock  
Lock / Unlock Enable or disable card / port for service.  
Congestion Threshold 80  
0-100  
Auto  
Percentage of ingress buffer capacity that will cause  
a congestion threshold notification.  
Ring Selection  
Auto  
Card will automatically select traffic from the ring  
direction with the best signal.  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 16 direction.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 17 direction.  
Timing Port Selection  
1
1 or 2  
Selects the port to use as a reference when this slot  
is selected as the shelf timing source.  
Shelf Expansion  
Interface  
Selected  
Selected  
Determines if the 155 SM/MM CRS card is being  
used as an expansion shelf interface (SEPIC) in an  
EPS or RNE. Click on the box to select it.  
Not selected  
(continued)  
Page 2-238  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-752  
Page 3 of 4  
SELECTION  
Table 752-1. 155 SM/MM CRS Card Configuration Options, continued  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Transmit  
System  
System  
Uses Primary timing reference.  
Timing Source  
Received  
Uses clock derived from incoming receive fiber  
(also known as Line-Timing).  
Do Not Use for False  
Sync  
Selected (True)  
Non-selected (False)  
Selected  
Outputs DUS (Do not Use for Sync) in the S1  
byte of the SONET overhead.  
Enable Signal  
Degrade  
Not  
Selected  
Enables a protection switch of the traffic if the  
input signal strength drops below tolerable  
levels set by the user in the BER threshold  
selection.  
Not Selected  
Signal Degrade  
BER Threshold  
5
5 through 9  
Defines the number of bit errors the port can  
incur before a signal degrade occurs and  
generates an alarm message and probably  
protection switch.  
Medium Type  
SONET  
SONET  
SDH  
Synchronous Optical Network, US standard for  
transporting data over fiber.  
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy, European  
standard for transporting data over fiber.  
Loopback  
Towards  
None  
None  
No loopback is requested or active.  
Terminal  
A loopback has been activated sending the  
signal back to the terminal side.  
Facility  
A loopback has been activated sending the  
signal back to the facility side.  
Line Coding  
Line Type  
NRZ  
Not configurable by user.  
Card  
Dependant  
SonetOther  
Not configurable by user, dependant on card  
type inserted.  
sonetShortSingleMode  
sonetLongSingleMode  
sonetMultiMode  
Transmit Path  
Trace  
User  
defined  
User can define a unique ID to this port for  
identification purposes on SM cards only.  
Table 752-2. ATM Interface Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
<default>  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Interface Name  
Alphanumeric User defined, up to 20 alphanumeric characters.  
Alphanumeri Used to loopback the incoming signal and transmit it  
Loopback Location All 1s  
Code  
c
back to the customer equipment. The code is limited  
to 16 numeric characters.  
(continued)  
Page 2-239  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-752  
Page 4of 4  
Table 752-2. ATM Interface Configuration Options, continued  
DEFAULT OPTIONS DEFINITIONS  
SELECTION  
Recording Interface All 0s  
ID  
Numeric  
Identifies the site card and port location for  
customer billing capabilities, (allows  
assignment of a customer ID for each port.)  
The code is limited to 15 numeric characters.  
UNI/ NNI Select  
CAC Formula  
UNI  
PCR  
UNI  
NNI  
Specifies interface type as User to Network  
Interface or Network to Network Interface.  
PCR  
SCR  
Specifies Peak Cell Rate or Sustained Cell Rate  
for Connection Admission Control  
calculations.  
Traffic Policing  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
User sets whether traffic will be policed for  
Quality Of Service (QOS).  
Cell Scrambling  
Subscription Rate  
True  
100  
True or False  
User sets whether traffic will be scrambled.  
User sets depending on traffic contract.  
PCR: 100 to 1000  
SCR: 1 to 100  
Max Active  
VPI/VCI Bits  
0
0 to 12  
0-4096  
0-8192  
Sets maximum number of bits allowed to select  
virtual channel from.  
Max number of  
VPCs  
4096  
0
Sets maximum number of virtual path circuits  
that may be assigned on this port.  
Max number of  
VCCs  
Sets maximum number of virtual channel  
circuits that may be assigned on this port.  
Cellworx Vision: ATM Interface  
X
Node Name: Cellworx1  
Slot Number:  
9
Node Id:  
1
Card :  
155 SM CRS  
1
Location:  
5th Street  
Port Number:  
Interface Name:  
Slot9_Port1 OC3SM  
1111111111111111  
0000000000000000  
Loopback Location Code:  
Recording Interface ID:  
Provisioned Endpoints:  
Number of VPCs:  
Number of VCCs:  
0
0
Interface Type:  
CAC Formula:  
UNI  
NNI  
PCR Based  
SCR Based  
Policing  
Cell Scrambling  
Over Subscription Rate (%):  
VP/VC Allocation:  
100  
(100-10  
Max Active VPI Bits:  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
1
Max Active VCI Bits:  
0
0
(1-128)  
(0-8192)  
Max Number of VPCs:  
Max Number of VCCs:  
4096  
0
Error Log:  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Card View  
13429-B  
Figure 752-2. 155 SM/MM CRS ATM Port Interface Configuration Screen  
Page 2-240  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-753  
Page 1 of 4  
SET T3 CRS CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the T3 CRS card configurations  
utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI). User must have  
the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to performing this  
procedure.  
1. Double click on the T3 CRS card displayed in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View”at the top  
of the window.  
2. The T3 CRS card display appears as shown in Figure 753-1. Click on the port to be  
configured (Port 1, 2, or 3) located on the simulated card on the left side of the window.  
3. Click and drag the small block upward to expand the Configuration section of the window  
so all options are visible. The Administrative State of the card and port should be  
“Unlocked” if in service. If “Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse  
button to enable the card and/or port for service.  
4. If this card and port are being utilized as an expansion shelf interface (either from ring to  
EPS, or EPS to ring), select the Expansion Shelf Interface button.  
5. At Timing Port, select the port that will be used as a reference when this slot is selected as a  
timing source from the Timing Resource Screen.  
6. Set the Port Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to Table 753-1 for a list of  
options the user may select for this card type.  
7. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the window to back up the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the T3 CRS window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window display  
and all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close will  
close this window.  
B. ATM INTERFACE CONFIGURATION  
8. Double click on one of the ports available (1, 2, or 3). The ATM interface screen appears.  
Refer to the example shown in Figure 753-2.  
9. Set the ATM configuration options as needed using Table 753-2 as a reference.  
10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for each T3 CRS card/port installed in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-241  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-753  
Page 2 of 4  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T3 Cell Relay Service  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
Configuration:  
Card Level  
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Card:T3 CRS  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
9
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
T3  
CRS  
Unlocked  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Ring Selection:  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Expansion Shelf Interface  
Timing Port:  
None  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Port 3  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
Administrative State:  
ATM Mapping Type  
ADC  
PLCP  
Direct  
Locked  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Timing  
Unlocked  
Circuit Identifier:  
Line Type:  
default  
T3 CRS PORT LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Transmit Timing Source:  
Recieved  
Port  
M23  
1
2
3
Local  
C-bit Parity  
CLICK ON THE PORT TO  
CONFIGURE INDIVIDUAL  
DS1 PORTS.  
Line Coding: B3ZS  
Line Build Out (LBO):  
150-450 feet  
0-150 feet  
Loopback Config:  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
REPAINTS WINDOW  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
13450-C  
CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
Figure 753-1. T3 CRS Configuration Screen  
Table 753-1. T3 CRS Configuration Options  
OPTIONS  
SELECTION  
Slot #  
DEFAULT  
DEFINITIONS  
2
2 to 15 for Ring NE  
2 to 15 for STN-  
EPS  
Physical slot locations of the T3 cards in the  
shelf.  
Admin State  
(Card or Port)  
LOCKED  
LOCKED/  
UNLOCKED  
0 to 100  
Locked = Out of service.  
Unlocked = In service.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
0
Threshold for CLP=1 cells to be discarded on  
the ingress/egress path.  
Ring Selection  
Auto  
Auto  
Card will automatically select traffic from the  
ring direction with the best signal.  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 16 direction.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 17 direction.  
Expansion Shelf Not Selected Selected  
Determines if the card is being used as an  
expansion shelf interface (SEPIC) in an EPS or  
RNE. Click on the box to select it.  
Interface  
Not Selected  
(continued)  
Page 2-242  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-753  
Page 3 of 4  
Table 753-1. T3 CRS Configuration Options, continued  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Timing Port  
None  
None  
None does not provide timing when card slot is  
selected, or uses Port 1, 2, or 3 for timing source  
when slot is selected for system timing from  
Timing Resource screen.  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Port 3  
Line Type  
M23  
M23  
Asynchronous, M23 multiplex format, PM  
parameters based on P-Bit Parity Errors (PE).  
C-bit Parity  
Synchronous T3, M13 multiplex format,  
separate PM parameters based on P-Bit Parity  
Errors (PE) CRC violations.  
ATM Mapping Types  
Direct  
Local  
Direct  
HEC based “Direct” mapping.  
PLCP  
Physical Layer Convergence Protocol mapping.  
Transmit Timing Source  
Received  
The Tx clock (and data rate) is the same  
frequency as the RX clock and data rate (receive  
clock is looped to the transmitter).  
Local  
The on-board crystal oscillator is used for the  
clock source, so the transmit clock will be a  
nominal 44.736 Mhz and will not equal the  
receive clock frequency.  
Line Build Out  
Off  
Off / On  
Sets the signal level to compensate for the  
distance between the system and the interfacing  
equipment.  
Loopback Config.  
None  
None  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Terminal  
Sends cells back to the cellbus and back out to  
the ring. No changes are made to the path layer.  
Loops the incoming signal back to the CPE and  
generates AIS to the cellbus.  
Facility  
Payload  
Loops the signal back to the CPE AFTER  
framing is performed and before being converted  
to ATM cells.  
Far End Loopback  
None  
Payload  
Reset  
Line  
Determine the type of loop back at the far end to  
test continuity between the far end and near end.  
Table 753-2. ATM Interface Configuration Options  
DEFAULT OPTIONS DEFINITIONS  
SELECTION  
Interface Name  
Alphanumeric User defined, up to 20 alpha numeric characters.  
Loopback Location Code All 1s  
Alphanumeric Used to loopback the incoming signal and  
transmit it back to the customer equipment. The  
code is limited to 16 numeric characters.  
Recording Interface ID  
All 0s  
Numeric  
Identifies the site card and port location for  
customer billing capabilities, (allows assignment  
of a customer ID for each port.) The code is  
limited to 15 numeric characters.  
(continued)  
Page 2-243  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-753  
Page 4 of 4  
Table 753-2. ATM Interface Configuration Options, Continued  
DEFAULT OPTIONS DEFINITIONS  
UNI UNI  
SELECTION  
Interface Type  
Specifies interface type as User to Network  
Interface or Network to Network Interface.  
NNI  
CAC Formula  
Policing  
PCR  
Off  
PCR  
SCR  
Specifies Peak Cell Rate or Sustained Cell Rate  
for Connection Admission Control calculations.  
On or Off  
User sets whether traffic will be policed for  
Quality Of Service (QOS).  
Cell Scrambling  
Off  
On or Off  
User sets whether traffic will be scrambled.  
User sets depending on traffic contract.  
Over Subscription Rate 100  
Max Active VPI/VCI  
Bits  
0
1
0
0-12  
Sets maximum number of bits allowed to select  
VCs from.  
Max number of VPCs  
1 to 2048  
0 to 8192  
Sets the maximum number of VPCs that may be  
utilized from this port.  
Max number of VCCs  
Sets the maximum number of VCCs that may be  
utilized from this port.  
Cellworx Vision: ATM Interface  
X
Node Name: Cellworx1  
Slot Number:  
Card :  
9
Node Id:  
1
T3 CRS  
1
Location:  
5th Street  
Port Number:  
Interface Name:  
Slot9_Port1 DS3  
Loopback Location Code:  
Recording Interface ID:  
1111111111111111  
0000000000000000  
Provisioned Endpoints:  
Number of VPCs:  
Number of VCCs:  
0
0
Interface Type:  
CAC Formula:  
UNI  
NNI  
PCR Based  
SCR Based  
Policing  
Cell Scrambling  
Over Subscription Rate (%):  
VP/VC Allocation:  
100  
(100-10  
Max Active VPI Bits:  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
1
Max Active VCI Bits:  
0
0
(1-2048)  
(0-256)  
Max Number of VPCs:  
Max Number of VCCs:  
2048  
0
Error Log:  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Card View  
13432-A  
Figure 753-2. T3 CRS ATM Interface Screen  
Page 2-244  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-754  
Page 1 of 7  
SET T3 TMUX MULTI 1 AND TMUX EXP CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the T3 TMUX Multi 1 and TMUX  
EXP (expansion) card configurations utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical  
User Interface (GUI). User must have the GUI launched, and have accessed the shelf level GUI  
display per NTP-006 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the T3 TMUX Multi 1 card displayed in the shelf level GUI “Chassis  
View”at the top of the window. If this card has a TMUX EXP associated with it, they will  
be treated as one card for configuration.  
2. The T3 TMUX Multi 1 card display appears either as a single T3 TMUX Multi 1 or as  
shown in Figure 754-1 as a T3 TMUX Multi 1 and TMUX EXP pair.  
Note: When the T3 TMUX Multi 1 is accompanied by a TMUX EXP card, selecting  
either card will result in having both cards displayed since they are treated as a pair.  
3. Click and drag the small block upward to expand the Configuration section of the window  
so all or most options are visible. The Administrative State of both cards and port should be  
“Unlocked” if in service. If “Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse  
button to enable either or both cards and/or port for service. To select the TMUX EXP card,  
click on the tab with the correct slot number on it. This will allow the user to toggle between  
the T3 TMUX MULTI 1 and TMUX EXP.  
4. At the Circuit Identifier field, enter a unique ID for this circuit per work order or customer  
requirements.  
5. Set the rest of the Port Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to Table 754-1  
for a list of options the user may select for this card type.  
6. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the window to back up the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the T3 TMUX Multi 1 window. Selecting Refresh will update the current  
window display and all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting  
Close will close this window and return the user to the Chassis View window.  
7. Click on the DS1 Channel tab shown on the simulated T3 TMUX Multi1 card view. This  
will bring up the DS1 Channel view as shown in Figure 754-2.  
8. Select a DS1 channel that needs to be configured at the upper left block of the screen above  
the card view.  
9. Again, the Administrative State of the channels should be “Unlocked” if in service. If  
“Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse button to enable the channel  
for service.  
Page 2-245  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-754  
Page 2 of 7  
10. Set the rest of the DS1 Channel Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to  
Table 754-2 for a list of options the user may select.  
11. Select the Apply button after configuring the channel.  
12. Double click on the DS3 port on the faceplate to bring up the Interface type screen. If CRS  
was selected, the screen shown in Figure 754-3 will appear. If CES service type was  
selected, the screen shown in Figure 754-4 will appear. Select the configuration for the  
Service type on the port using Table-754-3 as a reference for CRS mode or Table 754-4 for  
CES mode.  
13. Select the Apply button followed by the Close button to return to the card view screen.  
14. Repeat steps 8 through 14 for each channel on the T3 port.  
15. Select the Close button on the DS1 Channel window and the T3 TMUX Multi 1 window  
using the left mouse button once all channels have been configured.  
16. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for each T3 TMUX Multi 1 card installed in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T3 TMUX Multi 1 Mother Card  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card:T3 TMUX MULTI 1 / TMUX E  
Status:  
1
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
9
1
Slot: 3  
Slot: 4  
SELECT DS1 CHANNEL  
Channel Number:  
Congestion Thresholds:  
Administrative State:  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
T3 TMUX  
MULTI 1  
TMUX  
EXP  
80  
Locked  
%
%
Ingress:  
Egress:  
Unlocked  
80  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
DS1 Channel  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
DS3 Port  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
Locked  
Recieved  
Local  
Unlocked  
Line Type:  
Line Build Out (LBO):  
0-150 feet  
ADC  
ADC  
M23  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
C-bit Parity  
150-450 feet  
DS3 PORT LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Loopback Config:  
None  
DOUBLE-CLICK TO BRING  
UP ATM INTERFACE  
SCREEN AFTER SELECTING  
THE DS1 CHANNEL TAB.  
Port  
1
Facility Payload  
Facility Line  
Terminal  
None  
default  
Far End Loopback:  
Circuit Identifier:  
Line Coding: B3ZS  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13435-B  
Figure 754-1. T3 TMUX Multi 1 Card Configuration Window  
Page 2-246  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-754  
Page 3 of 7  
SELECTION  
Table 754-1. T3 TMUX Multi 1 Card Configuration Options  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Card and Port  
Administrative State  
Unlocked  
Unlocked  
Locked  
Enables or disables card for service,  
respectively.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
0
0 to 100  
Threshold for CLP=1 cells to be  
discarded on the ingress/egress path.  
Ring Selection  
Auto  
Auto  
Card will automatically select traffic from  
the ring direction with the best signal.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 16  
direction.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 17  
direction.  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Transmit Timing  
Source  
Local  
Received  
The Tx clock (and data rate) is the same  
frequency as the RX clock and data rate,  
(receive clock is looped to the  
transmitter).  
Local  
M23  
The on-board crystal oscillator in used for  
the clock source and will not equal the  
receive clock frequency.  
Line Type  
M23  
Asynchronous, M23 multiplex format,  
PM parameters based on P-Bit Parity  
Errors (PE).  
(CRS ONLY)  
Cbit Parity.  
None  
ANSI T1.107a-1989 Synchronous T3, M13 multiplex format,  
Cbit Parity  
separate PM parameters based on P-Bit  
Parity Errors (PE) CRC violations.  
Loopback Config.  
None  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Terminal  
Sends cells back to the cellbus and back  
out to the ring. No changes are made to  
the path layer data.  
Facility  
Payload  
Loops the incoming signal back to the  
CPE and generates AIS to the cellbus.  
Loops the signal back to the CPE AFTER  
framing is performed and before being  
converted to ATM cells.  
Far End Loopback  
None  
None  
No loopback has been requested for far  
end.  
Payload  
Requests a Payload loopback for far end.  
Resets a loopback at the far end.  
Reset  
Requests a loopback for the line at the far  
end.  
Line  
Circuit Identifier  
Line Coding  
<blank>  
B3ZS  
Off  
Any alphanumeric  
characters, up to 20. or customer, slot, and port.  
User defined. Usually describes the traffic  
<none>  
This field is not configurable, display  
only.  
Line Build Out  
Off / On  
Sets the signal level to compensate for the  
distance between the system and the  
interfacing equipment.  
Page 2-247  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-754  
Page 4 of 7  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T3 TMUX Multi 1 Mother Card  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card:T3 TMUX MULTI 1 / TMUX E  
Status:  
1
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
9
1
Slot: 3 Slot: 4  
SELECT DS1 CHANNEL  
Channel Number:  
Congestion Thresholds:  
Administrative State:  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
T3 TMUX  
MULTI 1  
TMUX  
EXP  
Locked  
80  
80  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
Unlocked  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
DS1 Channel  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
DS3 Port  
Administrative State:  
Service Type:  
TOGGLE BETWEEN DS3 PORT  
AND DS1 CHANNEL USING TABS.  
Locked  
Circuit Emulation (CES)  
Cell Relay (CRS)  
Unlocked  
ADC  
ADC  
Loopback Config:  
None  
Line Type:  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
DS1 CHANNEL LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Extended Superframe  
Superframe  
Facility Line  
Port  
1
None  
Facility Data Link (FDL): None  
Far End Loopback:  
Circuit Identifier:  
default  
Line Coding: AMI  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
14589-A  
Figure 754-2. T3 TMUX Multi 1 T1 Level Configuration Screen  
Table 754-2. T3 TMUX Multi 1 T1 Channel Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Administrative State Unlocked  
Unlocked  
Locked  
CES  
Enables or disables channel for service,  
respectively.  
Service Type  
Line Type  
CRS  
Circuit Emulation Service.  
Cell Relay Service.  
CRS  
Extended  
Extended  
Superframe  
Superframe  
Superframe  
NotApplicable  
None  
Only for CES mode.  
Loopback Config  
Far End Loopback  
None  
None  
No Loopback has been activated.  
Activates a facility loopback.  
Facility Line  
None  
No loopback has been requested for far  
end. Options only available with FDL on.  
Payload  
Requests a Payload loopback for far end.  
Resets a loopback at the far end.  
Reset  
Line  
Requests a loopback for the line at the far  
end.  
(continued)  
Page 2-248  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-754  
Page 5 of 7  
Table 754-2. T3 TMUX Multi 1 T1 Channel Configuration Options ,continued  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Facility Data Link  
None  
None  
A peer-to-peer protocol across a T1 line  
providing OA&M functions (performance  
monitoring, loop back etc.) implemented  
via the framing bits in the T1 frame.  
ANSI T1-403 FDL  
Circuit Identifier  
Line Coding  
<blank>  
AMI  
Any alphanumeric  
characters, up to 20? customer, and/or channel number.  
User defined. Usually describes the traffic,  
AMI  
Alternate Mark Inversion format. Not  
selectable by user.  
Table 754-3. ATM Interface Configuration Options for CRS Mode  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Interface Name  
<default>  
Alphanumeric  
User defined, up to 20 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Loopback Location Code All 1s  
Alphanumeric  
Numeric  
Used to loopback the incoming signal and  
transmit it back to the customer equipment.  
The code is limited to 16 numeric  
characters.  
Recording Interface ID  
All 0s  
Identifies the site card and port location for  
customer billing capabilities, (allows  
assignment of a customer ID for each port.)  
The code is limited to 15 numeric  
characters.  
Provisioned Endpoints  
Interface Type  
CAC Formula  
Policing  
Displays how many VPC or VCC endpoints  
are configured by administrator on this card.  
UNI  
PCR  
Off  
UNI  
NNI  
Specifies interface type as User to Network  
Interface or Network to Network Interface.  
PCR  
SCR  
Specifies Peak Cell Rate or Sustained Cell  
Rate for Connection Admission Control.  
On or Off  
User sets whether traffic will be policed for  
Quality Of Service (QOS).  
Cell Scrambling  
Off  
On or Off  
User sets whether traffic will be scrambled.  
User sets depending on traffic contract.  
Over Subscription Rate  
Max Active VPI Bits  
<blank>  
0
0to 8  
Sets the maximum number of bits that may  
be utilized from this port.  
Max Active VCI Bits  
Max number of VPCs  
Max number of VCCs  
0
0 to 12  
0 to 256  
0-8192  
Sets the maximum number of bits that may  
be utilized from this port.  
4096  
0
Sets the maximum number of VPCs that  
may be utilized from this port.  
Sets the maximum number of VCCs that  
may be utilized from this port.  
Page 2-249  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-754  
Page 6 of 7  
Cellworx Vision: ATM Interface  
X
Node Name: Cellworx1  
Slot Number:  
8
Node Id:  
1
Card :  
T1 MULTI 1  
1
Location:  
5th Street  
Port Number:  
Interface Name:  
Slot8_Port1 DS1CESUNI  
1111111111111111  
0000000000000000  
Loopback Location Code:  
Recording Interface ID:  
Provisioned Endpoints:  
Number of VPCs:  
Number of VCCs:  
0
0
Interface Type:  
CAC Formula:  
UNI  
NNI  
PCR Based  
SCR Based  
Policing  
Cell Scrambling  
Over Subscription Rate (%):  
VP/VC Allocation:  
100  
(100-10  
Max Active VPI Bits:  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Max Active VCI Bits:  
1
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(1-1)  
(0-256)  
Max Number of VPCs:  
Max Number of VCCs:  
Error Log:  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Card View  
13431-A  
Figure 754-3. ATM Interface Menu Options  
Table 754-4. Configuration Options for CES Mode  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Interface Name  
ATM VPI  
<default>  
Alphanumeric User defined, up to 20 alpha numeric characters.  
<user  
0-8  
This is a read only to show the available bits  
defined>  
configured for this port during connection creation.  
ATM VCI  
<user  
0-10  
This is a read only to show the available bits  
defined>  
configured for this port during connection creation.  
Operational State  
Up  
Up/Down  
This is a read only to show the state of the port.  
Buffer Maximum  
Size  
<default>  
5300 to 6220 Maximum size measured in microseconds and  
selectable in 10 microsecond increments.  
Cell Arrival Jitter  
Tolerance  
<default>  
<default>  
950 to 2650  
Maximum size measured in microseconds and  
selectable in 10 microsecond increments.  
CBR Clock Mode  
Adaptive or  
Synchronous  
Sets the Constant Bit Rate clock to either adapt to  
the incoming bit stream or look for a constant  
synchronous bit stream.  
Page 2-250  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-754  
Page 7 of 7  
Cellworx Vision: CES Interface  
Node Name: Cellworx1  
X
Slot Number:  
6
Node Id:  
1
Card : E1 MULTI 1  
Location:  
5th Street  
Channel Number:  
1
Interface Name:  
ATM VPI:  
Slot8_Port1 DS1CESUNI  
1
32  
ATM VCI:  
Up  
Operational State:  
Buffer Maximum Size:  
Cell Arrival Jitter Tolerance:  
CBR Clock Mode  
6220  
1040  
microsecon  
microsecon  
Adaptive  
Synchronous  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Card View  
14547-A  
Figure 754-4. CES Interface Menu Options  
Page 2-251  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-755  
Page 1 of 5  
SET T1 MULTI 1 CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the T1 Multi 1 card configurations  
utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI). User must have  
the GUI launched, and have accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to  
performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the T1 Multi 1 card displayed in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View”at the  
top of the window. The T1 or E1 Multi 1 card display appears as shown in Figure 755-1.  
2. Click and drag the small block upward to expand the Configuration section of the window  
so all or most options are visible. The Administrative State of the card and port should be  
“Unlocked” if in service. If “Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse  
button to enable the card and/or port for service.  
3. Select a Port on the simulated card using the left mouse button.  
4. Set the Port Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to Table 755-1 for a list of  
options the user may select for this card type.  
5. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the window to back up the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the T1 Multi 1 window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window display  
with all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close will  
close this window.  
6. If configuring the port for Cell Relay Service, continue with step 7. If configuring the port  
for Circuit Emulation Service, go to step 13.  
B. ATM INTERFACE CONFIGURATION (CRS MODE)  
7. Double click on one of the ports available (1 to 16). The ATM interface screen appears.  
Refer to the example shown in Figure 755-2.  
8. Set the ATM configuration options as needed. Table 755-2 shows a list of options the user  
may select.  
9. Select the Close button to return to the T1 card display.  
10. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each T1 Multi 1 port on the card.  
11. Select the Close button to return to the Chassis View window.  
12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 for each card in the shelf.  
Page 2-252  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-755  
Page 2 of 5  
C. CES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION  
13. Single click on the port to be assigned as a Circuit Emulation Service port.  
14. Select the Circuit Emulation Service option on the Port Level Service Type followed by the  
Apply button at the bottom of the screen.  
15. Double click on the port to bring up the CES interface screen. Refer to the example shown  
in Figure 755-3.  
16. Set the CES configuration options as needed using Table 755-3 as a reference.  
17. Select the Apply button and then the Close button to return to the T1 card display.  
18. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each T1 Multi 1 port on the card.  
19. Select the Close button to return to the Chassis View window.  
20. Repeat steps 1 through 20 for each card in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T1 Circuit Emulation Service  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card:T1 MULTI 1  
Status:  
1
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
8
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
T1 MULTI  
1
Unlocked  
Port Level  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
Received  
Local  
Locked  
Unlocked  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Service Type:  
Circuit Emulation (CES)  
Cell relay (CRS)  
ADC  
DS1 PORT LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
SELECT PORT FIRST.  
0-133 feet  
B8ZS  
Line Build Out (LBO):  
Line Coding:  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Line Type:  
Extended Superframe  
Port  
Facility Data Link (FDL):  
Far End Loopback:  
None  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
None  
CLICK ON THE PORT TO  
CONFIGURE INDIVIDUAL  
DS1 PORTS.  
Send Code:  
Looped or normal data  
None  
Loopback Config:  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13448-C  
Figure 755-1. T1 Multi 1 Card Configuration Window  
Page 2-253  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-755  
Page 3 of 5  
Table 755-1. T1 Multi 1 Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Card and Port  
Administrative State  
Unlocked  
Unlocked  
Locked  
Enables or disables card for service.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
0
0 to 100  
Threshold for CLP=1 cells to be discarded  
on the ingress/egress path.  
Ring Selection  
Auto  
Auto  
Card will automatically select traffic from  
the ring direction with the best signal.  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Received  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 16  
direction.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 17  
direction.  
Transmit Timing  
Source  
Local  
The Tx clock (and data rate) is the same  
frequency as the RX clock and data rate,  
(receive clock is looped to the transmitter).  
Local  
The on-board crystal oscillator in used for  
the clock source and will not equal the  
receive clock frequency.  
Service Type  
CES  
CES  
CRS  
Circuit Emulation Service.  
Cell Relay Service.  
Line Build Out  
0-133 feet  
0 – 133 ft  
Sets the signal strength according to the  
distance in feet that the Cellworx STN is  
from the T1 interfacing equipment.  
133 – 266 ft  
266 – 399ft  
399 – 533ft  
533 – 655  
Line Coding  
B8ZS  
B8ZS  
AMI  
Bit 8 Zero Substitution  
Alternate Mark Inversion  
Line Type  
Extended− Extended−Superframe  
Superframe Superframe  
Sets the line type to reflect customer  
equipment on a per port basis.  
Facility Data Link  
None  
ANSI-T1-403 FDL  
None  
A peer-to-peer protocol across a T1 line  
providing OA&M functions (performance  
monitoring, loop back etc.) implemented  
via the framing bits in the T1 frame.  
Far End Loopback  
Looped or  
Normal  
Data  
None  
No loopback is requested. Values only  
selectable when FDL is on.  
Reset  
Line  
Tells far end to stop the loopback.  
Tells far end to loop the line back.  
Payload  
Tells the far end to loop the payload after  
line data is extracted.  
(continued)  
Page 2-254  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-755  
Page 4 of 5  
Table 755-1. T1 Multi 1 Configuration Options, continued  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Loopback Config  
None  
None  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Facility Payload  
Loops the payload after line data is  
extracted.  
Terminal  
Sends cells to the cellbus and back to the  
ring. No changes are made to the payload.  
Facility Line  
Loops the incoming signal back to CPE,  
generates AIS to the cellbus.  
Circuit Identifier  
<blank>  
Up to 20 alphanumeric  
characters.  
User defined. Usually describes the traffic,  
customer, and/or channel number.  
Table 755-2. ATM Interface Configuration Options for CRS Mode  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Interface Name  
<default>  
Alphanumeric  
User defined, up to 20 alpha numeric  
characters.  
Loopback Location Code All 1s  
Alphanumeric  
Numeric  
Used to loopback the incoming signal and  
transmit it back to the customer equipment.  
The code is limited to 16 numeric  
characters.  
Recording Interface ID  
All 0s  
Identifies the site card and port location for  
customer billing capabilities, (allows  
assignment of a customer ID for each port.)  
The code is limited to 15 numeric  
characters.  
Provisioned Endpoints  
Interface Type  
CAC Formula  
Policing  
Displays how many VPC or VCC endpoints  
are configured by administrator on this card.  
UNI  
PCR  
Off  
UNI  
NNI  
Specifies interface type as User to Network  
Interface or Network to Network Interface.  
PCR Based  
SCR Based  
Specifies Peak Cell Rate or Sustained Cell  
Rate for Connection Admission Control.  
On or Off  
User sets whether traffic will be policed for  
Quality Of Service (QOS).  
Cell Scrambling  
Off  
On or Off  
User sets whether traffic will be scrambled.  
User sets depending on traffic contract.  
Over Subscription Rate  
Max Active VPI Bits  
<blank>  
0
0 to 8  
Sets the maximum number of bits that may  
be utilized from this port.  
Max Active VCI Bits  
Max number of VPCs  
Max number of VCCs  
0
0 to 12  
0 to 256  
0-8192  
Sets the maximum number of bits that may  
be utilized from this port.  
256  
0
Sets the maximum number of VPCs that  
may be utilized from this port.  
Sets the maximum number of VCCs that  
may be utilized from this port.  
Page 2-255  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-755  
Page 5 of 5  
Table 755-3. Configuration Options for CES Mode  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Interface Name  
ATM VPI  
<default>  
Alphanumeric User defined, up to 20 alpha numeric characters.  
<user  
0-8  
This is a read only to show the available bits  
defined>  
configured for this port during connection creation.  
ATM VCI  
<user  
0-10  
This is a read only to show the available bits  
defined>  
configured for this port during connection creation.  
Operational State  
Up  
Up/Down  
This is a read only to show the state of the port.  
Buffer Maximum  
Size  
<default>  
5300 to 6220 Maximum size measured in microseconds and  
selectable in 10 microsecond increments.  
Cell Arrival Jitter  
Tolerance  
<default>  
<default>  
950 to 2650  
Maximum size measured in microseconds and  
selectable in 10 microsecond increments.  
CBR Clock Mode  
Adaptive or  
Synchronous  
Sets the Constant Bit Rate clock to either adapt to  
the incoming bit stream or look for a constant  
synchronous bit stream.  
Cellworx Vision: ATM Interface  
X
Node Name: Cellworx1  
Slot Number:  
8
Node Id:  
1
Card :  
T1 MULTI 1  
1
Location:  
5th Street  
Port Number:  
Interface Name:  
Slot8_Port1 DS1CESUNI  
1111111111111111  
0000000000000000  
Loopback Location Code:  
Recording Interface ID:  
Provisioned Endpoints:  
Number of VPCs:  
Number of VCCs:  
0
0
Interface Type:  
CAC Formula:  
UNI  
NNI  
PCR Based  
SCR Based  
Policing  
Cellworx Vision: CES Interface  
Cell Scrambling  
X
Node Name: Cellworx1  
Slot Number:  
6
Over Subscription Rate (%):  
VP/VC Allocation:  
100  
(100-10  
Node Id:  
1
Card : E1 MULTI 1  
Location:  
5th Street  
Channel Number:  
1
Max Active VPI Bits:  
0
Interface Name:  
ATM VPI:  
Slot8_Port1 DS1CESUNI  
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
32  
ATM VCI:  
Max Active VCI Bits:  
Up  
Operational State:  
Buffer Maximum Size:  
Cell Arrival Jitter Tolerance:  
CBR Clock Mode  
1
1
6220  
1040  
microsecon  
microsecon  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(1-1)  
(0-256)  
Max Number of VPCs:  
Max Number of VCCs:  
Adaptive  
Synchronous  
Error Log:  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Card View  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Card View  
13431-A  
14547-A  
Figure 755-2. T1 Multi 1 ATM Interface Options  
Figure 755-3. CES Interface Menu Options  
Page 2-256  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-756  
Page 1 of 3  
SET 2488 RING INTERFACE CARD (RIC) CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the 2488 Ring Interface Card  
configurations utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI).  
User must the have GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to  
performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the 2488 RIC located in slot 16 or 17 in the shelf level GUI “Chassis  
View”at the top of the window. The 2488 card level display apears similar to Figure 756-1.  
2. Set the configuration options for the card and port using Table 756-1 as a reference for the  
options.  
3. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the window to send the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the 2488 RIC window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window display  
and all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close will  
close this window.  
4. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the second 2488 RIC card installed in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-257  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-756  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - 622 Ring Interface Card  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Card: 622 Ring  
Slot Number: 17  
Port Number:  
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
2488  
Ring  
Unlocked  
Ring Selection :  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
System  
Locked  
Unlocked  
Recieved  
ADC  
Do not use for synchronization  
Enabvle signal degrade  
Status  
Active  
Timing  
Medium Type:  
SONET  
Loopback towards:  
PORT LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
SDH  
Port  
1
None  
Terminal  
Facility  
Line Coding:  
Line Type:  
sonetMediumNRZ  
sonetLongSingleMode  
Transmit Path Trace: NE1_slot17_Port1(RIC)  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
0026-050  
Figure 756-1. 2488 RIC Shelf Level GUI Configuration Screen  
Table 756-1. 2488 RIC Card Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITION  
Admin State  
Unlock  
80  
Lock / Unlock Not configurable on RIC.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
0-100  
Percentage of buffer capacity that will cause a  
congestion threshold notification.  
Ring  
Auto  
Auto  
Not configurable on RIC.  
Selection  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Transmit  
Timing  
Source  
System  
System  
Uses Primary timing reference.  
Received  
Uses clock derived from incoming receive fiber (also  
known as Line-Timing).  
Do Not Use  
for Sync  
False  
Selected (true) If “True”, causes the RIC to output DUS (Do not Use  
for Sync) in the S1 byte of the SONET overhead.  
Not selected  
(false)  
Enable Signal Not Selected  
Degrade  
Selected  
Enables a protection switch of the traffic if the input  
signal strength drops below tolerable levels set by the  
user in the BER threshold selection.  
Not Selected  
(continued)  
Page 2-258  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-756  
Page 3 of 3  
SELECTION  
Table 756-1. 2488 RIC Configuration Options, continued  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITION  
Signal  
Degrade BER  
Threshold  
5
5 through 9  
Defines the number of bit errors the port can incur  
before a signal degrade occurs and generates an  
alarm message and probably protection switch.  
Medium Type SONET  
SONET  
SDH  
Not configurable on RIC. This is determined by the  
dip-switch on the SC EIM, which sets the shelf type.  
Loopback  
towards  
None  
None  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Terminal  
Sends cells back to the cellbus and back out to the  
ring. No changes are made to the path layer data.  
Facility  
Loops the incoming signal back to the CPE and  
generates AIS to the cellbus.  
Line Coding  
Line Type  
NRZ  
Not configurable by user.  
Card  
Dependant  
sonetOther  
Not configurable by user, card type dependant on  
card inserted.  
sonetShortSingle  
Mode  
sonetLongSingle  
Mode  
sonetMultiMode  
Transmit Path (example)  
Trace  
Card position dependent. This is assigned by the  
system according to the NE and slot it is equipped in.  
NE1_Slot17_  
Port1 (OC48)  
Page 2-259  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-757  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE SC CARD STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf-level GUI card status  
display for the SC card. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI  
display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the SC card located in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at the top of the  
window.  
2. The SC card display appears as shown in Figure 757-1. Click the small block between the  
Status and Configuration sections and drag it downwards to view all the status information.  
Refer to Table 757-1 for definitions of status information provided.  
3. Select the Close button to close the screen and return to the chassis view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - Shelf Controller  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Card: SC  
Operational State:  
Up  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
1
1
Availability State:  
Available  
Not Protected  
Locked  
False  
Protection State:  
SC  
Synchronization State:  
Alarms Acknowledged:  
Timing Reference:  
Critical  
Maj/Min  
RMT  
ACO  
Active  
None  
TX Synchronization Signal Status:  
ST3  
Craft  
Access  
ACO  
PCMCIA  
ADC  
Status  
Active  
Source  
Sync  
Craft  
Access  
Enable  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Port Level  
Shelf  
Craft  
Reset  
Configuration:  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
CHANGES. SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13437-B  
CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
Figure 757-1. SC Card Status Window  
Page 2-260  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-757  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 757-1. Shelf Controller Status Definitions  
STATUS DEFINITION  
ITEM  
ACTION  
Operational  
Status  
Up  
Card is installed and functioning  
properly.  
No action required.  
Down  
Card is not functioning properly, is Verify card is installed,  
in reset mode, or failed.  
check for failure indications  
and alarms.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the operational  
Wait a few seconds for  
system to complete its  
operations and then update  
the screen.  
Availability  
State  
Available  
Unavailable  
In Test  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is in standby mode or busy  
processing commands.  
Wait a few moments and  
recheck status.  
Card is currently in a test mode.  
Wait a few moments and  
recheck status.  
Failed  
Card requires operator  
intervention.  
On site replacement of failed  
SC card. Refer to DLP-777.  
Power off  
Not Installed  
No power is applied to card.  
Check power source. Replace  
card if necessary per DLP-777.  
Card is not physically installed into Try other SC card slot, install  
the backplane.  
missing card if required. Per  
DLP-777.  
Offline  
Card is installed but not in service. No action required.  
Dependency  
Card is supplying timing reference, Perform a soft switch over  
traffic, or other data to the system.  
(manual) per DLP-771 to  
release card dependency if  
removing.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the availability  
status.  
Wait for processor to update  
current status, may need to  
perform a card reset per DLP-  
773.  
Protection State Enabled  
Not Protected  
Protection operation is supported.  
No protection card is available.  
No action required.  
Add or replace the inactive  
SC card per DLP-777.  
(continued)  
Page 2-261  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-757  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 757-1. Shelf Controller Status Definitions, Continued  
ITEM  
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
Synchronization Locked  
State  
Card is currently in sync with the  
reference source.  
No action required.  
Unlocked  
Card is not currently in sync with  
reference source.  
Allow a minimum of 5  
minutes for cards to sync up  
to reference, then check  
configuration and monitor  
source.  
Alarms  
Acknowledged  
No  
Alarm Cut Off condition is not  
currently active.  
No action required.  
Yes  
Alarm Cut Off has been initiated to ACO will deactivate upon a  
silence audible alarms.  
new alarm condition. Ativate  
if required per DLP-776 .  
Timing  
Reference  
DB7  
SC is providing clock for cell bus  
7.  
No action required. If a card  
will be removed, it is best to  
perform a switch over to the  
stand-by card first. Refer to  
DLP-771.  
DB8  
SC is providing clock for Cell bus  
8.  
Both Buses  
None  
SC is providing clock for both cell  
buses.  
SC is not providing clock reference  
to any cell bus.  
TX  
ST3  
Non-Configurable. Indicates the  
quality of the SC clock signal to  
the shelf. TX Sync Status should  
match RX Sync Status if SC is  
locked to the timing reference.  
Status will show DUS while it is  
acquiring to the reference, and  
transmit ST3 while in holdover.  
No action required. To select  
a different timing source,  
refer to DLP-749.  
Synchronization PRS  
Signal Status  
STU  
ST2  
SMC  
DUS  
Table 757-2. Timing Reference Status Definitions  
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
PRC  
SDH Primary Reference Clock  
Primary Reference Source  
SDH Equipment Clock Traceable  
SDH Sync Supply Unit Traceable  
Stratum 1 level source  
Synchronized Traceability Unknown  
Stratum 2 level source  
Stratum 3 level source  
PRS  
SEC  
SSU  
ST1  
STU  
ST2  
ST3  
SMC  
DUS  
SONET Minimum level Clock  
Reference cannot be used for source  
Page 2-262  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-758  
Page 1 of 3  
SET 155 RING INTERFACE CARD (RIC) CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the 155 Ring Interface Card  
configurations utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI).  
User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to  
performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the 155 RIC located in slot 16 or 17 in the shelf level GUI “Chassis  
View”at the top of the window.  
2. Set the configuration options for the card and port using Table 758-1 as a reference for  
descriptions of the selectable options.  
3. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the window to send the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the 155 RIC window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window display  
and all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close will  
close this window and return the user to the Chassis View window.  
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the second 155 RIC card installed in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-263  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-758  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - 155 Ring Interface Card  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id: 16  
Status:  
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Card: 155 Ring  
Slot Number: 16  
Port Number:  
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
155  
Ring  
Unlocked  
Ring Selection :  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH REAL TIME ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
System  
Locked  
Unlocked  
Recieved  
ADC  
Do not use for synchronization  
Enable Signal Degrade  
Status  
Active  
Timing  
5
155 MBPS PORT LEVEL  
Signal Degrade BER Threshold: 10E-  
Medium Type:  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Port  
1
SONET  
SDH  
NRZ  
Line Coding:  
Line Type:  
Long range single-mode fiber  
NE16_slot116_Port1(OC3)  
Transmit Path Trace:  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
0026-051  
Figure 758-1. 155 RIC Configuration Screen  
Table 758-1. 155 RIC Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
Unlock  
80  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITION  
Admin State  
Lock / Unlock Disables or enables the card or port for service.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
0-100  
Percentage of buffer capacity that will cause a  
congestion threshold notification.  
Ring  
Auto  
Auto  
Not configurable on RIC cards.  
Selection  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Transmit  
Timing  
Source  
System  
System  
Uses Primary timing reference.  
Received  
Uses clock derived from incoming receive fiber (also  
known as Line-Timing).  
Do Not Use  
for Sync  
False  
Selected (true) If “True”, causes the RIC to output DUS (Do not Use  
for Sync) in the S1 byte of the SONET overhead.  
Not selected  
(false)  
Enable Signal Not Selected  
Degrade  
Selected  
Enables a protection switch of the traffic if the input  
signal strength drops below tolerable levels set by the  
user in the BER threshold selection.  
Not Selected  
(continued)  
Page 2-264  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-758  
Page 3 of 3  
SELECTION  
Table 758-1. 155 RIC Configuration Options, continued  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITION  
Signal  
Degrade BER  
Threshold  
5
5 through 9  
Defines the number of bit errors the port can incur  
before a signal degrade occurs and generates an  
alarm message and probably protection switch.  
Medium Type SONET  
SONET  
SDH  
Not configurable on RIC cards.  
Loopback  
towards  
None  
None  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Terminal  
Sends cells back to the cellbus and back out to the  
ring. No changes are made to the path layer data.  
Facility  
Loops the incoming signal back to the CPE and  
generates AIS to the cellbus.  
Line Coding  
Line Type  
NRZ  
Not configurable by user.  
Card  
Dependent  
sonetOther  
Not configurable by user, type dependent on card  
installed. This will show sonetLongSingleMode for  
RICs and 155 SM cards, and sonetMultiMode for  
155 MM cards.  
sonetShortSingle  
Mode  
sonetLongSingle  
Mode  
sonetMultiMode  
Transmit Path (example)  
Trace  
Card position dependent. This is assigned by the  
system according to the NE and slot it is equipped in.  
NE1_Slot17_  
Port1 (OC48)  
Page 2-265  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-759  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE 622 RING INTERFACE CARD (RIC) STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI card status  
display for the 622 RIC card. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI  
display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the 622 RIC located in slot 16 or 17 in the shelf level GUI “Chassis  
View”at the top of the window.  
2. Click the small block between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downwards  
to view all the status information. Refer to Table 759-1 for definitions of status information  
provided.  
3. Select the Close button to return to the shelf view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - 622 Ring Interface Card  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Card: 622 Ring  
Up  
Available  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Slot Number: 17  
Port Number:  
1
622  
Port Level  
Ring  
Section Status:  
Line Status:  
Path Status:  
No Alarm  
No Alarm  
AIS  
No Alarm  
LOS  
STS LOP  
STS AIS  
LOF  
RDI  
STS RDI  
Unequipped  
Signal Label  
Mismatch  
ADC  
Synachronization Status:  
TC Alarm Status:  
ST3  
Status  
Active  
No Alarm  
Timing  
Recieve Path Trace:  
NE3_Slot16_Port1 (OC12)  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Port  
1
Configuration:  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13444-B  
CONTROLLER.  
CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
Figure 759-1. 622 RIC Status Window  
Page 2-266  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-759  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 759-1. 622 RIC Card Status Definitions  
ITEM  
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
CARD  
Operational  
State  
Up  
Card is functioning properly.  
No action required.  
Down  
Card is not functioning properly, is Verify card is installed,  
in reset mode, or failed. Check  
Admin state.  
check for failure indications or  
provision card for service per DLP-  
751.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the operational  
status.  
Wait a few seconds for system to  
complete its operations and then  
refresh the screen.  
Availability  
State  
Available  
In Test  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing test  
signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to  
update.  
Failed  
Card has failed operation and  
system has placed it out of service. the bus may be busy.  
Card may be performing a reset, or  
PowerOff  
Not Installed  
No power to the card.  
Card is not installed.  
Check power source. Replace card  
if source is good per DLP-777.  
If required, install card in selected  
slot per DLP-777 and provision per  
DLP-751.  
Offline  
Card is installed and provisioned  
but currently off line.  
If required, set module on line per  
DLP-751.  
Dependency  
Card is supplying timing reference, Perform a soft switch over (manual)  
traffic, or other data to the system.  
per DLP-771 to release card  
dependency if removing.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the availability  
status.  
Wait for processor to update current  
status, may need to perform a  
manual reset of SC per DLP-773.  
PORT  
Section  
Status  
No Alarm  
LOS  
No errors between local and next  
node.  
No action required.  
Loss Of Signal (cannot locate  
section data)  
Check connectors, fiber, and  
transmitter at other end.  
LOF  
Loss Of Frame (cannot locate  
frame bit of section data)  
Check signal type, and power level  
of received signal.  
Line Status  
No Alarm  
AIS  
Receiving good input signal  
No action required.  
Alarm Indication Signal, inserted  
all 1s or blue signal at originating  
node.  
Check signal status at traversing  
nodes, and low speed signal input at  
transmitting node.  
RDI  
Remote Defect Indicator. Far end  
sending indication that it is  
receiving a defective signal.  
Check local transmitting end signal  
for defects.  
(continued)  
Page 2-267  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-759  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 759-1. 622 RIC Status Definitions, continued  
STATUS DEFINITION  
ITEM  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Path Status  
No Alarm  
STS LOP  
Receiving good input signal.  
STS signal Loss Of Pointer.  
Check sync reference sources and  
input.  
STS AIS  
STS RDI  
STS Alarm Indication Signal.  
Remote end transmitting AIS due to  
loss of payload for path.  
STS signal Remote Defect  
Indication.  
Remote end informing local end it is  
receiving a defective signal.  
Unequipped Unequipped time slot.  
This time slot is not being utilized.  
Signal Label Payload descriptor does not  
Check VP/VC connection for  
provisioning errors per DLP-704.  
Mismatch  
match overhead description.  
Sync Status  
(S1)  
PRC  
PRS  
SEC  
SDH Primary Reference Clock  
Primary Reference Source  
SDH Equipment Clock  
Traceable  
SDH Sync Supply Unit  
Traceable  
Timing reference reliability levels.  
If sync status does not meet required  
level, check source and inputs.  
Provide the required clock source  
and change configuration settings  
for the card per DLP-749.  
SSU  
ST1  
STU  
Stratum 1 level source  
Synchronized Traceability  
Unknown  
ST2  
ST3  
SMC  
DUS  
Stratum 2 level source  
Stratum 3 level source  
SONET Minimum level Clock  
Reference cannot be used for  
source  
No action required.  
Received Path  
Trace (J1)  
User  
Defined  
Path trace is a 64-character string No action required. Path trace is not  
assigned to a path between nodes configurable by user.  
in either direction identifying the  
transmitting node using the  
following format:  
NE<id>_Slot<slot#>_Port1  
(OC12)  
Page 2-268  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-760  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE 155 CRS STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI card status  
display for the 155 CRS card. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI  
display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the 155 CRS card located in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at the top  
of the window.  
2. Click the small block between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downwards  
to view all the status information. Refer to Table 760-1 for definitions of status information  
provided.  
3. Select the Close button to close the screen and return to the shelf view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - OC3c Cell Relay Service Single Mode  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card: 155 SM CRS  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Up  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection Status:  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
9
1
Available  
Not Protected  
155 SM  
CRS  
Port Level  
Section Status:  
Line Status:  
Path Status:  
No Alarm  
No Alarm  
AIS  
No Alarm  
LOS  
STS LOP  
STS AIS  
LOF  
RDI  
STS RDI  
XMT RAI Failure  
RCV AIS  
Unequipped  
Signal Label  
Mismatch  
XMT AIS  
ADC  
Synachronization Status: BAD  
Status  
Active  
APS  
TC Alarm Status:  
No Alarm  
Timing  
Receive Path Trace:  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Port  
1
2
Configuration:  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13442-B  
Figure 760-1. 155 CRS Card Status Window  
Page 2-269  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-760  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 760-1. 155 CRS Card Status Definitions  
STATUS DEFINITION  
ITEM  
ACTION  
Operational State  
Up  
Card is installed and provisioned No action required.  
for service.  
Down  
Card is not provisioned for  
service, is in reset mode, or  
failed.  
Verify card is installed,  
check for failure indications or  
provision card for service per  
DLP-752.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
currently know the operational  
status.  
Wait a few seconds for operations  
to complete and update the screen.  
Availability State  
Available  
In Test  
Failed  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing test  
signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to  
update.  
Card has failed operation and  
system has placed it out of  
service.  
Card may be performing a reset,  
or the bus may be busy.  
PowerOff  
Card is manually powered off.  
Check power source, replace card  
if source is good per DLP-777.  
Not Installed Card is not currently installed in If required, install card in selected  
selected slot of the shelf.  
slot per DLP-777and provision  
per DLP-752.  
Offline  
Card is installed and provisioned If required, set module on line  
but currently off line.  
(unlocked) per DLP-752.  
Dependency Card is supplying timing  
Perform a soft switch over  
reference, traffic, or other data to (manual) per DLP-771 to release  
the system.  
card dependency if removing.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
currently know the availability  
status.  
Wait for processor to update  
current status, may need to  
perform a manual reset of SC per  
DLP-773.  
Section Status  
No Alarm  
LOS  
No errors between local and next No action required.  
node.  
Loss Of Signal. Cannot locate  
section data.  
Check connectors, fiber, and then  
transmitter at remote end.  
LOF  
Loss Of Frame. Cannot locate  
frame bit of section data.  
Check signal configuration and  
power level of received signal.  
Line Status  
Path Status  
No Alarm  
AIS  
Receiving good input signal.  
No action required.  
Alarm Indication Signal. All 1s  
or blue signal inserted at  
originating node.  
Check signal status at traversing  
nodes, and low speed signal input  
at transmitting node.  
RDI  
Remote Defect Indicator.  
Receiving good input signal.  
STS signal Loss Of Pointer.  
Problem at transmitting end.  
No action required.  
No Alarm  
STS LOP  
Check sync reference sources and  
inputs.  
(continued)  
Page 2-270  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-760  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 760-1. 155 Card Status Definitions, continued  
ITEM  
STATUS  
STS AIS  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
Path Status  
(continued)  
STS Alarm Indication Signal.  
Remote end transmitting AIS due input signal.  
to loss of payload for path.  
Check remote transmitting end’s  
STS RDI  
STS Remote Defect Indication.  
Remote end is receiving a  
defective signal.  
Check local end transmitter and  
connections.  
Unequipped  
This time slot is not utilized  
(unequipped).  
Create a connection if needed on  
this available timeslot per DLP-708.  
SignalLabel  
Mismatch  
Type of signal does not match  
overhead description.  
Check VP connection for  
provisioning errors per DLP-710.  
Sync Status  
PRC  
PRS  
SEC  
SSU  
ST1  
STU  
SDH Primary Reference Clock  
Primary Reference Source  
SDH Equipment Clock Traceable level, check source and inputs.  
Timing reference reliability levels.  
If sync status does not meet required  
SDH Sync Supply Unit Traceable Provide the required clock source  
Stratum 1 level source  
Synchronized Traceability  
Unknown  
and change configuration settings  
for the card per DLP-749.  
ST2  
ST3  
SMC  
DUS  
Stratum 2 level source  
Stratum 3 level source  
SONET Minimum level Clock  
Reference cannot be used for  
source  
No action required.  
Received Path User Defined Path trace is a 64-character string No action required. If message states  
Trace Msg  
assigned to a path between nodes  
in either direction identifying the  
transmitting node.  
no path trace, one may be  
No Path  
Trace  
provisioned, for SM cards only, at  
either or both of the two adjacent  
nodes (clockwise and counter-  
clockwise node). Refer to DLP-752.  
(SM card  
only)  
Protection  
State  
Not Protected Not Protected  
If equipped, set up a protection  
group and provision card for  
protection per DLP-765.  
Enabled  
Protection is available for  
selected card but is not active.  
No action necessary.  
Manual  
switch  
User has manually switched the  
card to protection.  
If required, switch the card back per  
DLP-771.  
Forced  
Switch  
User has forced card to  
protection.  
If required, release forced switch per  
DLP-771.  
Lockout  
Card cannot switch to protection.  
It has been locked out by  
If required, release manual lock-out  
per DLP-771.  
command or switch count.  
Unknown  
Protection status information is  
not available to the shelf  
controller.  
Wait a few minutes and update  
screen. May need to reset SC, refer  
to DLP-773.  
Page 2-271  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-761  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE T3 CRS CARD STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI display for  
the T3 CRS card status. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI  
display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the T3 CRS card located in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at the top of  
the window.  
2. Click the small block between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downward  
to view all the status information. Refer to Table 761-1 for definitions of status information  
provided.  
3. Select each port on the card to view the statuses.  
4. Select the Close button at the bottom of the window to close the screen and return to the  
chassis level display.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T3 CellRelay Service  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Card:T3 CRS  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
Up  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection State:  
8
1
Availabli  
Not Protected  
T3  
Port Level  
Line State:  
CRS  
No Alarm  
RCV RAI Failure  
Xmt RAI Alarm  
Rcv AIS  
Xmit AIS  
ADC  
LOF  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Timing  
LOS  
Loopback State  
Rcv Test Code  
Other Failure  
Port  
1
2
3
TC Alarm Status:  
No Alarm  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
PLCP Alarm Status: No Alarm  
Configuration:  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13451-B  
Figure 761-1. T3 CRS Card Status Window  
Page 2-272  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-761  
Page 2 of 3  
ITEM  
Table 761-1. T3 CRS Card Status Definitions  
DEFINITION  
Card is functioning properly.  
STATUS  
Up  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Operational  
State  
Down  
Card is not functioning properly, Verify card is installed, check for  
is in reset mode, or failed. Check failure indications, or provision card  
Admin state.  
for service per DLP-753.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
currently know the operational  
status.  
Wait a few seconds for operations to  
complete and update the screen.  
Availability  
State  
Available  
In Test  
Failed  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing test  
signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to  
update.  
Card has failed operation and  
system has placed it out of  
service.  
Card may be performing a reset, or  
the bus may be busy.  
Power Off  
No power to the card.  
Check power source, replace card if  
source is good.  
Not Installed Card is not currently installed in If required, install card in selected  
selected slot of the shelf.  
slot per DLP-777 and provision per  
DLP-753.  
Off Line  
Card is installed and provisioned If required, set module on line per  
but currently off line.  
DLP-753.  
Dependency Card is supplying timing  
Perform a soft switch over (manual)  
reference, traffic, or other data to per DLP-771 to release card  
the system.  
dependency if removing.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the availability  
status.  
Wait for processor to update current  
status, may need to perform a  
manual reset of SC per DLP-773.  
Protection State Not  
Protected  
Not Protected  
If equipped, set up a protection  
group and provision card for  
protection per DLP-765.  
Enabled  
Protection is available for  
selected card but is not active.  
No action necessary.  
Manual  
switch  
User has manually switched the  
card to protection.  
If required, switch the card back per  
DLP-771.  
Forced  
Switch  
User has forced card to  
protection.  
If required, release forced switch per  
DLP-771.  
Lockout  
Card cannot switch to protection. If required, release manual lock-out  
It has been locked out by  
per DLP-771.  
command or switch count.  
Unknown  
Protection status information is  
not available to the shelf  
controller.  
Wait a few minutes and update  
screen. May need to reset SC, refer  
to DLP-773.  
(continued)  
Page 2-273  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-761  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 761-1. Display T3 Card Status Definitions, continued  
STATUS DEFINITION  
ITEM  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Line Status  
No Alarm  
T3 line is operating within  
normal parameters.  
Rcv RAI  
Failure  
Access interface (AIC)  
Receiving Remote Alarm  
Indication.  
Check VP connection per DLP-710,  
and local access interface.  
Xmt RAI  
Alarm  
Card transmitting a Remote  
Alarm Indication signal (RAI) and remote transmit end.  
to customer equipment.  
Check VP connection per DLP-710,  
Rcv AIS  
Xmit AIS  
LOF  
Card is receiving an Alarm  
Indication Signal (AIS).  
Check remote end T3 input signal.  
Card is transmitting an AIS  
signal.  
Check local T3 signal input.  
Input signal frame format not  
recognized.  
Verify correct frame format setting  
and change if needed per DLP-753.  
LOS  
No input signal being  
received.  
Check metallic input and DSX.  
Loopback  
State  
Card has been manually set to Check customer end for  
loop signal back to customer  
troubleshooting activity. If required,  
release loopback per DLP-772.  
equipment.  
Rcv Test Code Card is receiving a test signal  
input.  
Check with administrator for testing  
activity.  
Other Failure  
Card is experiencing a failure  
other than these listed.  
Page 2-274  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-762  
Page 1 of 6  
RETRIEVE T3 TMUX MULTI 1 CARD STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI display for  
the T3 TMUX MULTI1 card status. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf  
level GUI display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the T3 TMUX MULTI 1 card located in the shelf level view at the top of  
the window.  
2. Click the small block between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downward  
to view all the status information. Refer to Table 762-1 for definitions of status information  
provided. To view status information for the T3Tmux Multi 1, click on the tab for the first  
slot in the group. Click on the second slot tab for the TMUX EXP card.  
3. To view a status of individual DS1 channels contained in a DS3, select a Channel Number  
at the upper right block above the simulated card and then click on the DS1 Channel tab  
under the Port heading. The window should appear similar to the one shown in Figure 762-  
2 displaying the DS1 port selected. Change the channel number above the simulated card as  
needed. Refer to Table 762-2 for DS1 port status definitions.  
4
Select Close button to return to the chassis level view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-275  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-762  
Page 2 of 6  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T3 TMUX Multi 1 Mother Card  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card:T3 TMUX MULTI 1 / TMUX E  
Slot Number: 3 / 4  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Slot: 3 Slot: 4  
Port Number:  
Channel Number:  
1
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection State:  
Up  
Available  
Unknown  
1
T3 TMUX  
MULTI 1  
TMUX  
EXP  
Port Level  
DS1 Channel  
DS3 Port  
Line State:  
Transmit:  
Xmit AIS  
Recieve:  
No Alarm  
Xmt RAI Alarm  
Rcv AIS  
RCV RAI Failure  
Rcv Test Code  
ADC  
ADC  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Other:  
LOF  
LOS  
Port  
1
Loopback State  
Configuration:  
Port Level  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
CONTROLLER.  
CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
CHANGES.  
13436-B  
Figure 762-1. T3 TMUX Multi 1/TMUX EXP Card Status Window  
Table 762-1. Display T3 TMUX Multi 1 and TMUX EXP Card Status Definitions  
ITEM  
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Operational  
State  
Up  
Card is functioning properly.  
Down  
Card is not functioning  
properly, is in reset mode, or  
failed. Check Admin state.  
Verify card is installed, check for  
failure indications, or provision card  
for service per DLP-754.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
currently know the  
Wait a few seconds for operations to  
complete and update the screen.  
operational status.  
(continued)  
Page 2-276  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-762  
Page 3 of 6  
Table 762-1. Display T3 TMUX Multi 1 and TMUX EXP Card Status Definitions, continued  
ITEM  
STATUS  
Available  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Availability  
Status  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
In Test  
Failed  
Card is currently processing test Wait a few seconds for screen to  
signals.  
update.  
Card has failed operation and  
system has placed it out of  
service.  
Card may be performing a reset, or  
the bus may be busy.  
Power Off  
Not Installed  
Off Line  
No power to the card.  
Check power source, replace card if  
source is good per DLP-777.  
Card is not currently installed in If required, install card in selected  
selected slot of the shelf.  
slot per DLP-777 and provision per  
DLP-754.  
Card is installed and  
provisioned but currently off  
line.  
If required, set module on line per  
DLP-754.  
Dependency  
Unknown  
Card is supplying timing  
reference, traffic, or other data  
to the system.  
Perform a soft switch over (manual)  
per DLP-771 to release card  
dependency if removing.  
The system processor does not  
currently know the availability  
status.  
Wait for processor to update current  
status, may need to perform a manual  
reset of SC per DLP-773.  
Protection  
State  
Not Protected  
Enabled  
Not Protected  
If equipped, set up a protection group  
and provision card for protection per  
DLP-753.  
Protection is available for  
No action necessary.  
selected card but is not active.  
Manual switch User has manually switched the If required, switch the card back per  
card to protection.  
DLP-771.  
Forced Switch User has forced card to  
protection.  
If required, release forced switch per  
DLP-771.  
Lockout  
Card cannot switch to  
protection. It has been locked  
out by command or switch  
count.  
If required, release manual lock-out  
per DLP-771.  
Unknown  
Protection status information is  
not available to the shelf  
controller.  
Wait a few minutes and update  
screen. May need to reset SC, refer to  
DLP-773.  
(continued)  
Page 2-277  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-762  
Page 4 of 6  
Table 762-1. Display T3 TMUX Multi 1 and TMUX EXP Card Status Definitions, continued  
ITEM  
STATUS  
Xmt RAI  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
Transmit Line  
State  
Card transmitting a Remote  
Alarm Indication signal (RAI) and remote transmit end.  
to customer equipment.  
Check VP connection per DLP-709,  
Alarm  
Xmt AIS  
No Alarm  
Rcv AIS  
Card is transmitting an AIS  
signal.  
Check local T3 signal input.  
Receive Line  
State  
T3 line is operating within  
normal parameters.  
No action required.  
Card is receiving an Alarm  
Indication Signal (AIS).  
Check remote end T3 input signal.  
Rcv RAI  
Failure  
Access interface (AIC)  
Receiving Remote Alarm  
Indication.  
Check VP connection per DLP-709,  
and local access interface.  
Rcv Test Code Card is receiving a test signal Check with administrator for testing  
input. activity.  
Other  
LOF  
Input signal frame format not Verify correct frame format setting  
recognized.  
and change if needed per DLP-754.  
LOS  
No input signal being  
received.  
Check metallic input and DSX.  
Loopback  
State  
Card has been manually set to Check customer end for  
loop signal back to customer  
equipment.  
troubleshooting activity. If required,  
release loopback per DLP-772.  
Page 2-278  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-762  
Page 5 of 6  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T3 TMUX Multi 1 Mother Card  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Card:T3 TMUX MULTI 1 / TMUX E  
Slot Number: 3 / 4  
Slot: 3 Slot: 4  
Port Number:  
Channel Number:  
1
Operational State: Up  
Availability State: Available  
Protection State: Unknown  
1
T3 TMUX  
MULTI 1  
TMUX  
EXP  
Port Level  
DS1 Channel  
DS3 Port  
Line State:  
Recieve:  
No Alarm  
Rcv AIS  
Rcv Test Code  
ADC  
ADC  
Other:  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
Status  
Active  
Protect  
LOF  
Loopback State  
Other Failure  
Port  
1
TC Alarm Status:  
Configuration: LCD Alarm  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13438-B  
Figure 762-2. DS1 Channel Status Window  
Page 2-279  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-762  
Page 6 of 6  
Table 762-2. T3 TMUX Multi 1/TMUX EXP DS1 Port Status Definitions  
ITEM  
STATUS  
No Alarm  
Rcv AIS  
DEFINITION  
No alarms are present.  
ACTION  
No action required.  
DS1 Line State  
Receive  
Alarm indication signal  
received from the far end.  
Check framing format on local  
transmitting equipment or customer  
interfacing equipment..  
Rcv Test Code Local end is recieveing a test  
Check for troubleshooting activity on  
code generated by the remote system. Release test signal at remote  
end.  
end.  
Other  
LOF  
Loss of Frame  
Check signal type and format.  
Loopback  
State  
Indicates a loopback has been Check for troubleshooting activity.  
activated locally on this port.  
Other Failure  
Channel is experiencing a  
failure other than the ones  
listed here.  
Page 2-280  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-763  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE 155 RING CARD STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI display for  
the 155 Ring card status. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI  
display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the 155 Ring card located in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at the top  
of the window. These should be in slots 16 and 17.  
2. The 155 Ring card display appears as shown in Figure 763-1. Click the small block  
between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downward to view all the status  
information. Refer to Table 763-1 for definitions of status information provided.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - 155 Ring Interface Card  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id: 16  
Status:  
Card Level  
Card: 155 Ring  
Slot Number: 16  
Up  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection State:  
Available  
Not Protected  
Port Number:  
1
155  
Port Level  
Ring  
Section Status:  
Line Status:  
Path Status:  
No Alarm  
No Alarm  
AIS  
No Alarm  
LOS  
STS LOP  
STS AIS  
LOF  
RDI  
STS RDI  
Unequipped  
Signal Label  
Mismatch  
ADC  
Synachronization Status: ST3  
Status  
Active  
TC Alarm Status:  
No Alarm  
Timing  
NE15 Slot 16 Port1 (OC3)  
Recieve Path Trace:  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Port  
1
Configuration:  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
0026-052  
Figure 763-1. 155 Ring Card Status Display  
Page 2-281  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-763  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 763-1. 155 RIC Card Status Definitions  
DEFINITION  
ITEM  
STATUS  
ACTION  
CARD  
Operational  
State  
Up  
Card is functioning properly.  
No action required.  
Down  
Card is not functioning properly, is Verify card is installed,  
in reset mode, or failed. Check  
Admin state.  
check for failure indications or  
provision card for service per DLP-  
758.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the operational  
status.  
Wait a few seconds for system to  
complete its operations and then  
update the screen.  
Availability  
State  
Available  
In Test  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing test  
signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to  
update.  
Failed  
Card has failed operation and  
Card may be performing a reset, or  
system has placed it out of service. the bus may be busy.  
PowerOff  
Not Installed  
No power to the card.  
Card is not installed.  
Check power source. Replace card if  
source is good per DLP-777.  
If required, install card in selected  
slot per DLP-777 and provision per  
DLP-758.  
Offline  
Card is installed and provisioned  
but currently off line.  
If required, set module on line per  
DLP-758.  
Dependency  
Card is supplying timing reference, Perform a soft switch over (manual)  
traffic, or other data to the system.  
per DLP-771 to release card  
dependency if removing.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the availability  
status.  
Wait for processor to update current  
status, may need to perform a  
manual reset of SC per DLP-773.  
PORT  
Section  
Status  
No Alarm  
LOS  
No errors between local and next  
node.  
No action required.  
Loss Of Signal, cannot locate  
section data.  
Check connectors, fiber, and  
transmitter at other end.  
LOF  
Loss Of Frame, cannot locate  
frame bit of section data.  
Check signal type, and power level  
of received signal.  
Line Status  
No Alarm  
AIS  
Receiving good input signal  
No action required.  
Alarm Indication Signal, inserted  
all 1s or blue signal at originating  
node.  
Check signal status at traversing  
nodes, and low speed signal input at  
transmitting node.  
RDI  
Remote Defect Indicator.  
(continued)  
Page 2-282  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-763  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 763-1. 155 RIC Status Definitions, continued  
ITEM  
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Path Status  
No Alarm  
STS LOP  
Receiving good input signal.  
STS signal Loss Of Pointer.  
Check sync reference sources and  
input.  
STS AIS  
STS RDI  
STS Alarm Indication Signal.  
Remote end transmitting AIS due to  
loss of payload for path.  
STS signal Remote Defect  
Indication.  
Remote end informing local end it is  
receiving a defective signal.  
Unequipped Unequipped time slot.  
This time slot is not being utilized.  
Signal Label Payload descriptor does not  
Check VP/VC connection for  
Mismatch  
match overhead description.  
provisioning errors per DLP-704.  
Sync Status (S1) PRC  
SDH Primary Reference Clock  
Primary Reference Source  
SDH Equipment Clock Traceable level, check source and inputs.  
SDH Sync Supply Unit  
Traceable  
Stratum 1 level source  
Synchronized Traceability  
Unknown  
Timing reference reliability levels.  
If sync status does not meet required  
PRS  
SEC  
SSU  
Provide the required clock source  
and change configuration settings  
for the card per DLP-749.  
ST1  
STU  
ST2  
ST3  
SMC  
DUS  
Stratum 2 level source  
Stratum 3 level source  
SONET Minimum level Clock  
Reference cannot be used for  
source  
No action required.  
Received Path  
Trace (J1)  
User  
Defined  
Path trace is a 64-character string No action required. Path trace is not  
assigned to a path between nodes configurable by user.  
in either direction identifying the  
transmitting node using the  
following format:  
NE<id>_Slot<slot#>_Port1 (RIC)  
Page 2-283  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-764  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE T1 MULTI 1 CARD STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI display for  
the T1 Multi 1 CRS card status. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level  
GUI display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the T1 Multi 1 CRS card located in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at  
the top of the window.  
2. The T1 Multi 1 CRS card display appears as shown in Figure 764-1. Click the small block  
between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downward to view all the status  
information. Refer to Table 764-1 for definitions of status information provided.  
3. Select each port on the card to view the port status.  
4. Select Close button to return to the chassis level view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T1 Cell Emulation Service  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card:T1 MULTI 1  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Up  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection State:  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
8
1
Availabli  
Not Protected  
T1 MULTI  
1
Port Level  
Line State:  
Receive:  
Transmit:  
Xmt AIS  
No Alarm  
XMT Far End LOF  
RCV AIS  
RCV Far End LOF  
RCV Test Code  
Other:  
ADC  
LOF  
Status  
Active  
APS  
LOS  
Loopback State  
Other Failure  
Port  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
TC Alarm Status: LCD Alarm  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Configuration:  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13449-B  
Figure 764-1. T1 Multi 1 Card Status Window  
Page 2-284  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-764  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 764-1. Display T1 Multi 1 Card Status Definitions  
ITEM  
STATUS  
Up  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Operational  
State  
Card is functioning properly.  
Down  
Card is not functioning  
properly, is in reset mode, or  
failed. Check Admin state.  
Verify card is installed, check for failure  
indications, or provision card for service  
per DLP-755.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
Wait a few seconds for operations to  
currently know the operational complete and update the screen.  
status.  
Availability  
State  
Available  
In Test  
Failed  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing  
test signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to update.  
Card has failed operation and  
system has placed it out of  
service.  
Card may be performing a reset, or the  
bus may be busy.  
Power Off  
No power to the card.  
Check power source, replace card if  
source is good per DLP-777.  
Not Installed Card is not currently installed  
in selected slot of the shelf.  
If required, install card in selected slot  
per DLP-777 and provision per DLP-  
755.  
Off Line  
Card is installed and  
provisioned but currently off  
line.  
If required, set module on line per DLP-  
755.  
Dependency Card is supplying timing  
Perform a soft switch over (manual) per  
reference, traffic, or other data DLP-771 to release card dependency if  
to the system. removing.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not Wait for processor to update current  
currently know the availability status, may need to perform a manual  
status.  
reset of SC per DLP-773.  
Protection  
State  
Not  
Protected  
Not Protected  
If equipped, set up a protection group  
and provision card for protection per  
DLP-753.  
Enabled  
Protection is available for  
No action necessary.  
selected card but is not active.  
Manual  
Switch  
User has manually switched  
the card to protection.  
If required, switch the card back per  
DLP-771.  
Forced  
Switch  
User has forced card to  
protection.  
If required, release forced switch per  
DLP-771.  
Lockout  
Card cannot switch to  
protection. It has been locked  
out by command or switch  
count.  
If required, release manual lock-out per  
DLP-771.  
Unknown  
Protection status information  
is not available to the shelf  
controller.  
Wait a few minutes and update screen.  
May need to reset SC, refer to DLP-773.  
(continued)  
Page 2-285  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-764  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 764-1. Display T1 Multi 1 Card Status Definitions, continued  
STATUS DEFINITION ACTION  
No Alarm T3 line is operating within No action required.  
ITEM  
Line State  
normal parameters.  
Rcv AIS  
Card transmitting a Remote  
Check VP connection per DLP-709,  
Alarm Indication signal (RAI) and remote transmit end.  
to customer equipment.  
RCV Far End  
LOF  
Card receiving a Loss Of  
Frame indication from far end and local access interface.  
NE.  
Check VP connection per DLP-709,  
Xmt RAI  
Alarm  
Access interface (AIC)  
Receiving Remote Alarm  
Indication.  
Check remote end T3 input signal.  
Xmt Far End  
LOF  
Transmit Far End Loss of  
Frame  
Xmit AIS  
Card is transmitting an Alarm  
Indication Signal (AIS).  
Check local T3 signal input.  
LOF  
Input signal frame format not  
recognized.  
Verify correct frame format setting  
and change if needed per DLP-755.  
LOS  
No input signal being  
received.  
Check metallic input and DSX.  
Loopback  
State  
Card has been manually set to  
loop signal back to customer  
equipment.  
Check customer end for  
troubleshooting activity. If required,  
release loopback per DLP-772.  
Rcv Test Code Card is receiving a test signal  
input.  
Check with administrator for testing  
activity.  
Other Failure  
Card is experiencing a failure  
other than these listed.  
Page 2-286  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-765  
Page 1 of 3  
CONFIGURE CARD PROTECTION GROUPS  
Summary: This procedure defines the steps required to create card protection groups using the  
shelf level GUI screens. Card protection capabilities are also addressed in this procedure. User  
must have launched the GUI and accessed the shelf level GUI screen prior to attempting this  
procedure. Refer to NTP-006.  
1. From the shelf level GUI screen, select the Configuration menu using the left mouse  
button and then select Protection Groups or hit ALT+N and Alt+P. Refer to Figure 765-1.  
2. The Protection Groups and Protection Switch window appears as shown in Figure 765-2.  
Observe the cards equipped in the shelf and compare with work order. Card level protection  
capabilities are defined in Table 765-1. Select the Protection Group Configuration button.  
3. To configure a protection group, select the first card slot of the first protection group to be  
configured and at the bottom of the window enter a Protection Group Number value 1  
through 8.  
4. Next select the Protection Type as 1:N, or 1+1.  
5. Enter the slot number of the first card in the protection group into the First Slot box at the  
bottom of the screen.  
6. Select the last card slot of the protection group by entering a slot number in the Last Slot  
box at the bottom of the window. This slot should either have a protection EIM (PEIM)  
installed (T1, T3, or T3 TMUX) or be a redundant optical card which does not require an  
EIM installed at the rear of the shelf.  
5. If applicable, select the Revertive box if revertive operation is desired and set the Restore  
Time in seconds for the system to automatically revert to the working card.  
6. Select the Protection Direction for the group as either Unidirectional, or Bi-directional  
(1+1 only, not 1:n).  
Note: OC3 and OC12 SEPIC cards must be configured for Bi-directional.  
7. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the window to send new information to the SC  
database. This information will be backed up to the NMIC as changes are made.  
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for each protection group on the shelf or select the Close button at  
the bottom of the screen to return to the shelf level GUI screen.  
9. Select the next shelf in the network and repeat this procedure until all shelves are  
configured.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-287  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-765  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
X
SELECT THE CONFIGURATION  
PULLDOWN MENU USING LEFT  
MOUSE BUTTON OR BY PRESSING  
THE ALT+N KEYS SIMULTANEOUSLY.  
File Configuration Fault Security  
Hardware Inventory  
Protection Groups  
S
C
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
E
1
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
Timing Resources  
Reset Slots  
C
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
M
u
l
M
u
l
R
i
n
R
i
n
E
X
t
i
t
t
13470-B  
Figure 765-1. Shelf Level GUI Configuration Pull Down Menu  
X
Cellworx Vision: Protection Groups and Protection Switch  
Node Name:  
Node Id:  
"Cellworx1"  
1
Configuration Selection:  
Protection Group Configuration  
Protection Switch  
1
2
16 17 18  
6
7
8
9
10 11 12  
S
C
N
M
I
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
1
T
3
T
3
E
1
E
1
M
U
L
T
I
M
U
L
T
I
M
U
L
T
I
C
T
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
g
R
i
n
g
E
X
P
1
1
1
1
2
Groups  
Protection Group Number:  
Protection Type:  
1
1:N  
Revertive  
Restore Time: seconds  
Protection Direction:  
First Slot:  
Last Slot:  
9
10  
Unidirectional  
Bidirectional  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Delete  
Close  
13468-C  
Figure 765-2. Protection Groups and Protection Switch GUI Screen  
Page 2-288  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-765  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 765-1. Card Protection Schemes  
CARD TYPE  
PROTECTION SCHEME  
REQUIREMENTS  
NMIC  
1:1  
Cards required at Gateway Node installed in adjacent  
slots. Working card in slots 2 and 3, protect card in slots  
4 and 5. The ring network may operate with a minimum  
of one card but redundancy is recommended.  
SC  
1:1  
Cards required in all Cellworx STN shelves, working  
in slot 1, protect in slot 18. Shelf may operate with a  
minimum of one card but redundancy is recommended.  
622 Ring Card  
155 CRS  
N/A  
1+1  
All ring nodes must have cards installed in slots 16 and  
17. Optical paths redundant though RICs which perform  
Automatic Virtual Path Switching (AVPS).  
Cards must be installed in adjacent AIC slots starting  
with an even number. Dual port cards support two  
separate interfaces. If configured for SEPIC operation,  
the protection scheme MUST be set to Bi-directional.  
T3 CRS  
1:N (N≤ 3)  
Three ports per card will switch to protect with a single  
port failure. One group of contiguous slots across the  
backplane up to four total cards per group.  
T3 TMUX Multi 1 / 1:N (N = 1)  
T3 EXP  
One set of cards can be protected by a second set, or a  
single T3 TMUX can be protected by a redundant T3  
TMUX.  
T1 Multi 1  
E1 Multi 1  
1:N (N≤ 8)  
1:N (N≤ 8)  
One group of contiguous slots across the backplane up to  
nine total cards per group.  
One group of contiguous slots across the backplane up to  
nine total cards per group.  
Page 2-289  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-766  
Page 1 of 3  
PERFORM DIAGNOSTICS ON OPTICAL CARDS  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to perform card level diagnostics on any of  
the 2488, 622, or 155 Ring or 155 CRS cards in a Cellworx STN shelf. The diagnostics provided  
allows the user to inject a Bit Interleaved Parity error (BIP) into the Section, Line, or Path of the  
optical signal to verify connectivity to the correct module or node, or just to verify the  
continuity.  
User must have launched the Graphical User Interface and accessed the shelf level GUI before  
attempting this procedure. Refer to NTP-011.  
1. From the GUI main display, select the node desired by double clicking on it using the left  
mouse button.  
2. The shelf level “Chassis View” display appears as shown in Figure 766-1, displaying all of  
the cards in the shelf. Select the optical card desired by double clicking on it using the left  
mouse button.  
3. The respective card display appears with the status and configuration information displayed  
similar to the one shown in Figure 766-2. If the 155 CRS card was selected, you must now  
select which port to run the diagnostics on. This can be accomplished by single clicking on  
the Port number 1 or 2 shown on the simulated faceplate at the left of the window. The  
screen should display Port 1 selected by default.  
4. Select the Diagnostics button at the bottom of the window.  
5. The Bit Interleave Parity window appears as shown in Figure 766-3. Select the Section,  
Line, or Path button according to where the BIP errors will be manifested. Using the left  
mouse button, select also the up or down arrows at the BIP Command Duration box to  
specify the duration of the BIP errors. Times specified are in seconds.  
6. Select the Apply button to start the BIP error insertion into the overhead. Select the Stop  
button to stop the BIP error insertion, if desired, before the BIP Command Duration time  
has expired. The Card View button will redisplay the card view window and the Close  
button will close the Bit Interleave Parity window.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-290  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-766  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
S
C
N
M
I
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
1
5
5
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
M
u
l
E
1
M
u
l
C
T
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
g
R
i
n
g
S
M
E
X
P
t
i
t
i
t
i
C
R
S
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18  
Status:  
Power Status: normal  
Alarm Status: minor  
2
Identifier:  
Start Time:  
Vendor:  
Version:  
Current Time: 10:12:09 09/01/1999  
Up Time: 1d 19:41:22:00  
1.2.0.35  
19:30:47 8/31/1999  
ADC-TSG  
Configuration:  
Cellworx2  
5th Street  
Name:  
Memory Utilization Threshold:  
Suppress Zero Stats  
Location:  
Apply  
Topology View  
Refresh  
Close  
13455-B  
Figure 766-1. Shelf Level GUI Chassis View Display  
Page 2-291  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-766  
Page 3 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - OC3c Cell Relay Service Single Mode  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card: 155 SM CRS  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Up  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection Status:  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
9
1
Available  
Not Protected  
155 SM  
CRS  
Port Level  
Section Status:  
Line Status:  
Path Status:  
No Alarm  
No Alarm  
AIS  
No Alarm  
LOS  
STS LOP  
STS AIS  
LOF  
RDI  
STS RDI  
XMT RAI Failure  
RCV AIS  
Unequipped  
Signal Label  
Mismatch  
XMT AIS  
ADC  
Synachronization Status: BAD  
Status  
Active  
APS  
TC Alarm Status:  
No Alarm  
Timing  
Receive Path Trace:  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Port  
1
2
Configuration:  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13442-B  
Figure 766-2. 155 SM CRS Card View Window  
Cellworx Vision: Bit Inerleave Parity  
X
6
Slot Number:  
Card:  
Node Name: Cellworx 1  
155  
1
Node Id:  
1
Port Number:  
Location:  
5th Avenue  
Transmit for:  
Section  
Line  
Path  
BIP Command Duration:  
0
Apply  
Card View  
Stop  
Close  
13433-B  
Figure 766-3. Bit Interleave Parity Error Diagnostics Window  
Page 2-292  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-767  
Page 1 of 2  
SET SYSTEM IDENTIFIER  
Summary: This procedure defines the steps required to set a system identifier for each node.  
The system ID will help differentiate between the nodes displayed on the system GUI main  
screen. Setting the system ID does not affect the communications of the network in any way. The  
ID will also be displayed at the top of each GUI window and/or craft screen. The ID given to  
each node should be unique in order for the user to discern between them when viewing the GUI.  
It is assumed that the user has gained access to the Cellworx STN system, has launched the GUI,  
and performed a discovery of each node before attempting this procedure.  
1. From the GUI main display, select the node desired by double clicking on it using the left  
mouse button.  
2. The shelf level “Chassis View” display appears as shown in Figure 767-1, displaying all of  
the cards in the shelf. The bottom section of the window has fields that the user can set  
under Configuration. Enter a unique name for the node and a location according to network  
planning.  
3. Memory utilization threshold is a way to monitor the consumption of memory on the  
NMIC. If the field is set and the value reached, an informational alarm will be generated.  
Set the memory utilization by entering a value between 1 and 100 percent.  
4. As performance-monitoring statistics are collected on each interface, the counts may be all  
zeros. By enabling the “suppress zero stats” option, the PM file with all zeros is not  
forwarded to the NMIC. This allows for less use of the management traffic bandwidth.  
Select the “Suppress Zero Stats” box to stop the shelf controller from reporting any  
historical data statistics that have a value of “0”.  
5. Hit the Apply button to send the changes to the database.  
5. Select the Close button to return to the topology view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-293  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-767  
Page 2 of 2  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
S
C
N
M
I
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
1
5
5
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
M
u
l
E
1
M
u
l
C
T
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
g
R
i
n
g
S
M
E
X
P
t
i
t
i
t
i
C
R
S
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18  
Status:  
Power Status: normal  
Alarm Status: minor  
2
Identifier:  
Start Time:  
Vendor:  
Version:  
Current Time: 10:12:09 09/01/1999  
Up Time: 1d 19:41:22:00  
1.2.0.35  
19:30:47 8/31/1999  
ADC-TSG  
Configuration:  
Cellworx2  
5th Street  
Name:  
Memory Utilization Threshold:  
Suppress Zero Stats  
Location:  
Apply  
Topology View  
Refresh  
Close  
13455-B  
Figure 767-1. Cellworx Vision Chassis View  
Page 2-294  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-768  
Page 1 of 3  
SET CRAFT USER CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully add, delete, or modify  
user access to the Cellworx STN shelf. The user account specifies the name, password, and  
access level for the system software which defines what the user can or cannot do while logged  
into the shelf. The user account is only active on the shelf it is created on, so it must be  
duplicated for each node within the network if the user is to have access to the entire network.  
The administrator whom assigns the users must have the highest level of access, which is a level  
3 user, to enable administrative duties. Only one administrator should have access to this level at  
a time. It is assumed that the Administrator has already gained access to the system and has  
launched the Cellworx Vision GUI interface.  
1. From the GUI main display, select the node desired by double clicking on it using the left  
mouse button.  
2. The shelf level “Chassis View” display appears as shown in Figure 768-1.  
3. Select the Security pull down menu by clicking on it using the left mouse button.  
4. Select the Craft User Configuration option by clicking on it using the left mouse button.  
5. The Craft User Configuration window appears as shown in Figure 768-2. Use the up and  
down arrow to toggle the user ID field from 1 to 25, selecting the ID number to be assigned  
to a user on this node.  
Note: Up to 25 users may be assigned per node but only one may be active on a node at a  
time.  
6. At the User Name field, enter a unique name for the user being assigned. Up to 10  
alphanumeric characters may be used.  
7. At the Password field, enter a unique password assigned to the user entered above, using at  
least 6 and up to 10 characters with at least one character being a numeric value and one  
being a special character (dot, dash, etc.).  
8. At the Password Verify field, re-enter the password to confirm the password chosen. If the  
password is not entered exactly as it was above, the system will not create the user account.  
9. At the Days Remaining for Account field, enter the number of days the account will be  
allowed to be active. The administrator may wish to re-establish the accounts on a yearly  
basis for full time users, or create a temporary account for a few days or a week for a  
maintenance person to have temporary access. The accounts can be activated up to 999  
days or left at 0 so the account will never expire.  
10. At the Privilege Level field, select the Level number, from one to three, that corresponds to  
the level of access the user may have. The levels are defined in Table 768-1.  
Page 2-295  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-768  
Page 2 of 3  
11. Select the Apply button to send the new information to the database.  
12. Repeat this procedure for each user at each node as needed.  
13. To delete a user from the database, enter the user name and password and verify password.  
Now select the Delete button to remove them from the system database. This must be done  
at each node the user is to be removed from if applicable. The last super-user with a  
lifetime expiration cannot be deleted.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
SELECT THE SECURITY  
PULLDOWN MENU USING  
LEFT MOUSE BUTTON OR  
BY PRESSING THE ALT+A  
KEYS SIMULTANEOUSLY.  
Craft User Configuration  
Craft Menu Configuration  
S
C
N
M
I
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
REE  
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
1
1
M
u
l
M
u
l
C
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
R
i
n
E
X
t
t
t
i
i
i
13474-B  
Figure 768-1. Cellworx Vision Security Menu Display  
Cellworx Vision: Craft User Configuration  
X
Node Name: "Cellworx 1"  
Node Id:  
1
1
User Id (1-25):  
User Name:  
Password:  
Password Verify:  
Days Remaining for Account (0-999):  
LEVEL1  
Privilege Level:  
LEVEL2  
LEVEL3  
Delete  
Apply  
Close  
Refresh  
13457-B  
Figure 768-2. Cellworx Vision Craft User Configuration Display  
Page 2-296  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-768  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 768-1. User Account Privilege Levels  
PRIVILEGE LEVEL  
PRIVILEGE PROVIDED  
1
Lowest level of access. User is allowed to perform displays, alarm cut-off (ACO), or  
diagnostics on down facilities. No access to system configurations, card  
configurations, protection switching, or administrative duties (i.e., assigning user  
accounts, passwords, and security logs.).  
2
3
User is allowed to perform all functions except administrative duties.  
Highest level of access. User is allowed access to any screens and may perform any  
functions including administrative duties.  
Page 2-297  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-769  
Page 1 of 2  
SET CRAFT MENU CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps involved to assign the minimal craft user levels  
required to access each craft menu. The craft “display” screens should be made available to all  
users (Level 1 and above). Any screens that allow configuration changes to cards, ports, or  
features, should be at least a Level 2. Level 2 users will not have access to the user accounts. The  
administrator Level 3 user will have access to all menus including user accounts. It is assumed  
that the user has gained access to the system and launched the Cellworx Vision GUI prior to this  
procedure. This feature has been disabled for release 2.0 systems.  
1. From the GUI main display, select the node desired by double clicking on it using the left  
mouse button  
2. The shelf level “Chassis View” display appears as shown in Figure 769-1.  
3. Select the Security pull down menu by clicking on it using the left mouse button.  
4. Select the Craft Menu Configuration option by clicking on it using the left mouse button.  
5. The Craft Menu Configuration window appears as shown in Figure 769-2. Select a menu  
title on the left and then a User Level on the right. Any display screens should be set at a  
level 1 so all users can retrieve this information. Configuration screens should be set to  
level 2 so all level 2 users can configure the cards in a shelf. System administration screens  
should be set to level 3 so the level three administrator can do level one and two tasks as  
well as assign new users.  
6. After changing the privilege levels on the craft screens, select the Apply button to send the  
information to the system database followed by the Close button to return to the shelf level  
GUI screen.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
SELECT THE SECURITY  
PULLDOWN MENU USING  
LEFT MOUSE BUTTON OR  
BY PRESSING THE ALT+A  
KEYS SIMULTANEOUSLY.  
Craft User Configuration  
Craft Menu Configuration  
S
C
N
M
I
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
M
U
X
1
M
u
l
3
3
1
1
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
C
C
R
S
C
R
S
M
u
l
M
u
l
R
i
n
R
i
n
E
X
t
i
t
t
13475-B  
Figure 769-1. Cellworx Vision Chassis Level Display  
Page 2-298  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-769  
Page 2 of 2  
X
Cellworx Vision: Craft Menu Configuration  
"Cellworx1"  
1
Node Name:  
Node Id:  
Menu or Command:  
Level  
2
155 SM/MM CRS Card Configuration  
155 SM/MM CRS Interface Loopback  
622 Ring Card Configuration  
ADSL Layer PM Config  
ATM Interface Configuration  
ATM Layer PM Configuration  
ATM Test Connection Setup  
Card Reset  
Clear All alarm History  
DS1 Layer PM Configuration  
DS3 Card Configuration  
DS3 Layer PM Configuration  
Execute Alarm Cutoff  
Protection Group Configuration  
Protection Switch  
RADSL-A Card Configuration  
SONET Diagnostics  
SONET Layer PM Configuration  
Serial Port Configuration  
Set Craft Alarm Notification Level  
Shelf Controller Ethernet IP Config  
Shelf Housekeeping Alarm Config  
Software Switch-over  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Privilege Level:  
LEVEL1  
LEVEL2  
LEVEL3  
System ID Configuration  
Ti MULTI 1 Card Configuration  
T1 MULTI Interface Loopback Test  
T3 CRS Interface Loopback Test  
T3 TMUX Card Configuration  
T3 TMUX MULTI/EXP Interface Loopback  
Timing Resource Configuration  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
13456-A  
Figure 769-2. Craft Menu Configuration Display  
Page 2-299  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-770  
Page 1 of 2  
HARDWARE INVENTORY  
Summary: This procedure instructs the operator in the steps required to display information for  
the cards residing in the Cellworx STN system. Inventory status information may be used for  
documenting card serial numbers and date of manufacture for warranty purposes, or obtaining  
part numbers for ordering spare cards.  
It is assumed that the user has gained access to the system and has launched the Cellworx Vision  
GUI.  
1. From the GUI main display, select the node desired by double clicking on it using the left  
mouse button.  
2. The shelf level “Chassis View” display appears as shown in Figure 770-1. Select the  
Configuration pull down menu by clicking on Configuration using the left mouse button  
and then selecting the Hardware Inventory option. User can also obtain this screen using  
shortcut keys Alt+N, followed by Alt+H..  
3. The Inventory status screen appears as shown in the example in Figure 770-2. Screen prints  
can be generated and kept in a system installation log for future reference. When  
replacement cards are ordered, these installation logs should be referred to, to ensure the  
same card types are ordered and correct serial numbers are sent back for warranty if  
applicable.  
4. Select the Close button at the bottom of the window to return to the Chassis View screen.  
5. Select the Topology View Button on the Chassis view screen to return to the GUI main  
window. Selecting the Close button will also return the user to the GUI main screen and  
close the Chassis View window.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
X
SELECT THE CONFIGURATION  
PULLDOWN MENU USING LEFT  
MOUSE BUTTON OR BY PRESSING  
THE ALT+N KEYS SIMULTANEOUSLY.  
File Configuration Fault Security  
Hardware Inventory  
Protection Groupss  
S
C
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
E
1
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
Timing Resources  
Reset Slots  
C
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
M
u
l
M
u
l
R
i
n
R
i
n
E
X
t
i
t
t
13469-B  
Figure 770-1. Chassis View Configuration Pull-down Menu  
Page 2-300  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-770  
Page 2 of 2  
Cellworx Vision: Card Inventory  
X
"Cellworx 1"  
1
Node Name:  
Node Id:  
Card Type  
Part Number Serial Number Catalog Number Manufacturing Date  
Slot  
ADC-part#  
ADC-serial#  
ADC-serial#  
9828  
9923  
SC  
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx  
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx  
1
2
ADC-part#  
NMIC  
3
4
5
ADC-part#  
ADC-part#  
ADC-part#  
ADC-part#  
ADC-part#  
ADC-part#  
ADC-part#  
ADC-serial#  
ADC-serial#  
ADC-serial#  
ADC-serial#  
ADC-serial#  
ADC-serial#  
ADC-serial#  
9928  
6
T3 TMUX MULTI 1  
TMUX EXP  
T1 MULTI 1  
T3 CRS  
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx  
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx 9945  
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx 9951  
7
8
9918  
9
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx  
0002  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx  
T3 CRS  
155 MM CRS  
155 MM CRS  
0012  
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx  
0008  
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx  
155 SM CRS  
ADC-part#  
ADC-serial#  
9912  
STN-ADC-xx-xxx-xx  
Close  
Refresh  
13441-B  
Figure 770-2. Hardware Inventory Display  
Page 2-301  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-771  
Page 1 of 3  
INITIATE A PROTECTION SWITCH  
Summary: This procedure instructs the operator in the steps required to initiate a protection  
switch for the various interface types in the system that are equipped with a protection  
mechanism. The user may issue a Manual switch, Forced Switch, Lockout of protection, or  
Enable a card for switching. Frame Relay Service cards do not support a protection mechanism  
for Release 3.1 systems.  
Prerequisites of issuing a switch request are:  
•
•
•
•
•
Card Admin Status must be UP.  
Cards must be configured in a protection group.  
Card APS Status must be Enabled.  
Card Protection Group must indicate a protecting card that meets the previous criteria.  
Both the working and protection card must have the same software and configuration  
data so the same level of service may be provided if a switch occurs.  
•
User must have launched the Graphical User Interface and accessed the shelf level GUI  
before attempting this procedure. Refer to DLP-705.  
1. From the GUI main screen, select the node that will have the protection switch performed  
on it by double clicking on it using the left mouse button. The shelf level GUI “Chassis  
View” window will appear.  
2. Select the Configuration pull down menu on the toolbar by clicking on it using the left  
mouse button, or by hitting the Alt+N keys on the keyboard. Refer to Figure 771-1.  
3. Select Protection Groups by clicking on it using the left mouse button or by hitting Alt+P  
on the keyboard.  
4. When the Protection Groups/Protection Switch window appears select the Protection  
Switch box at the upper left side of the window.  
5. Select the card to be switched using the left mouse button. Refer to Table 771-1 for valid  
protection group configurations.  
6. Select the protection switch type (Lock out, Manual, etc.) Refer to Table 771-2 for  
protection switch definitions.  
7. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the window to send the switch request.  
8. To release the switch, select the working or protect card and select the Enable Auto Switch  
followed by the Apply button.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-302  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-771  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
SELECT THE CONFIGURATION  
PULLDOWN MENU USING LEFT  
MOUSE BUTTON OR BY PRESSING  
THE ALT+N KEYS SIMULTANEOUSLY.  
Hardware Inventory  
Protection Groups  
S
C
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
E
1
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
Timing Resources  
Reset Slots  
C
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
M
u
l
M
u
l
R
i
n
R
i
n
E
X
t
i
t
t
13470-B  
Figure 771-1. Chassis View Configuration Pull-down Menu  
X
Cellworx Vision: Protection Groups and Protection Switch  
Node Name:  
Node Id:  
"Cellworx1"  
1
Protection Group Configuration  
Protection Switch  
1
2
16 17 18  
6
7
8
9
10 11 12  
S
C
N
M
I
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
1
T
3
T
3
E
1
E
1
M
U
L
T
I
M
U
L
T
I
M
U
L
T
I
C
T
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
g
R
i
n
g
E
X
P
1
1
1
Groups  
Protection Status:  
Slot Number:  
APS State:  
Lock out  
Forced switch  
Active State:  
Manual Switch  
Administrative State:  
Enable Auto Switch  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Delete  
Close  
13468-B  
Figure 771-2. Protection Switch Screen  
Page 2-303  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-771  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 771-1. Card Protection Schemes  
CARD TYPE  
PROTECTION  
SCHEME  
REQUIREMENTS  
NMIC  
1:1  
Cards required at Gateway Node installed in adjacent slots.  
Working card in slots 2 and 3, protect card in slots 4 and 5.  
Shelf may operate with a minimum of one card but  
redundancy is recommended.  
SC  
1:1  
Cards required in all Cellworx STN shelves, working  
in slot 1, protect in slot 18. Shelf may operate with a  
minimum of one card but redundancy is recommended.  
622 Ring Card  
155 CRS  
N/A  
All ring nodes must have cards installed in slots 16 and 17.  
Optical paths redundant though RICs.  
1+1  
Cards must be installed in any adjacent AIC slots. Dual port  
cards support two separate interfaces.  
T3 CRS  
1:N (N≤ 3)  
Three ports per card will switch to protect with a single port  
failure. One group of contiguous slots across the backplane  
up to four total cards per group.  
T3 TMUX Multi 1 /  
T3 EXP  
1:N (N ≤ 1)  
One set of cards can be protected by a second set, or a  
single T3 TMUX can be protected by a redundant T3  
TMUX.  
T1 Multi 1  
E1 Multi 1  
1:N (N≤ 8)  
1:N (N≤ 8)  
One group of contiguous slots across the backplane up to  
nine total cards per group.  
One group of contiguous slots across the backplane up to  
nine total cards per group.  
Table 771-2. Protection Switch Command Definitions  
SELECTION  
OPTIONS  
Lock out  
DEFINITIONS  
Command  
Prevents card from switching to protect.  
Forced Switch  
Force card to go to protection even if path is not reliable or  
available.  
Manual Switch  
A manual request to switch to or from protection, depending on  
card selected, will take effect if no other cards are switched to  
protect and if path is good.  
Enable Auto  
Switch  
If card is part of a protection mechanism and a switch is activated,  
enabling the card will allow the revertive switch to take place after  
specified time period.  
Page 2-304  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-772  
Page 1 of 4  
LOOBACK TEST  
Summary: This procedure instructs the operator in the steps required to perform loopback test  
for the various interface types in the system. Loopbacks can be used to isolate network problems  
or confirm continuity to customer equipment. A loopback will remain active if the user logs out  
of the shelf.  
1. From the GUI main screen, select the node that will have the loopback performed on it by  
double clicking on it using the left mouse button. The shelf level GUI “Chassis View”  
window appears similar to the one shown in Figure 772-1.  
2. Select the card that will have the loopback performed on it by double clicking on it using  
the left mouse button. The card level display will appear whether it is a 622 RIC, 155  
SM/MM CRS, T3 CRS, etc. Refer to Figure 772-2 for an example.  
3. Select a port to loopback if applicable.  
4. Select the Loopback type of loopback to be performed using the radio buttons shown in the  
window (None, Terminal, Facility, and/or Payload). Refer to Table 772-1 for definitions of  
the loopback options for each card type. Figure 772-3 shows loopback signal  
configurations.  
5. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to initiate the loopback.  
6. Select the None option and Apply again to release the loopback.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-305  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-772  
Page 2 of 4  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
S
C
N
M
I
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
1
5
5
T
3
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
M
u
l
E
1
M
u
l
C
T
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
g
R
i
n
g
S
M
E
X
P
t
i
t
i
t
i
C
R
S
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18  
Status:  
Power Status: normal  
Alarm Status: minor  
2
Identifier:  
Start Time:  
Vendor:  
Version:  
Current Time: 10:12:09 09/01/1999  
Up Time: 1d 19:41:22:00  
1.2.0.35  
19:30:47 8/31/1999  
ADC-TSG  
Configuration:  
Cellworx2  
5th Street  
Name:  
Memory Utilization Threshold:  
Suppress Zero Stats  
Location:  
Apply  
Topology View  
Refresh  
Close  
13455-B  
Figure 772-1. Cellworx Vision Chassis View  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - 622 Ring Interface Card  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Card: 622 Ring  
Slot Number: 17  
Port Number:  
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
622  
Ring  
Unlocked  
Ring Selection :  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Port Level  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
System  
Locked  
Unlocked  
Recieved  
ADC  
Do not use for synchronization  
Enable signal degrade  
Status  
Active  
Timing  
5
Signal Degrade BER Threshold: 10E-  
Medium Type:  
Port  
1
SONET  
SDH  
Loopback towards:  
SELECT THE TYPE OF  
LOOPBACK.  
None  
Terminal  
Facility  
Line Coding:  
Line Type:  
sonetMediumNRZ  
sonetLongSingleMode  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
14569-A  
Figure 772-2. 622 RIC Card Configuration View  
Page 2-306  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-772  
Page 3 of 4  
Table 772-1. Loopback Screen Options  
DEFINITION  
1 for the 155,622, or 2488 RIC Selects the port that will have the loopback  
PARAMETER  
OPTIONS  
Port  
1 or 2 for 155 CRS  
activated on it.  
1 to 3 for T3 CRS  
1 to 16 for T1 or E1 Multi 1  
1 DS3 port on a T3 TMUX  
1 to 28 for T1 Ports between  
the T3 TMUX and TMUX  
EXP cards.  
Loopback Test None  
(155)  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Facility  
Sends cells back to the cellbus and back out to  
the ring. No changes are made to the path layer  
data.  
Terminal  
Loops the incoming signal back to the CPE and  
generates AIS to the cellbus.  
Local  
None  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Loopback  
(T3, T1, E1)  
Facility  
Sends cells back to the cellbus and back out to  
the ring. No changes are made to the path layer  
data.  
Terminal  
Payload  
Loops the incoming signal back to the CPE and  
generates AIS to the cellbus.  
Loops the signal back to the CPE AFTER  
framing is performed and before being converted  
to ATM cells.  
Far End  
Send No Code  
Loopback (T3, Send Line Code  
T1, E1) Send Reset Code  
Page 2-307  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-772  
Page 4 of 4  
1
COUNTER-  
CLOCKWISE  
OPTICAL RING  
INTERFACE  
CARD  
CLOCKWISE  
OPTICAL  
RING  
INTERFACE  
2
CARD  
BACKPLANE CELLBUS  
3
4
ACCESS  
INTERFACE  
CARD  
INPUTS  
CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT  
1. LOOPBACK TOWARDS FACILITY ON AN OPTICAL CARD LOOPS INCOMING SIGNAL BACK OUT THE TRANSMITTING SOURCE.  
NO CHANGES ARE MADE TO THE INCOMING SIGNAL SECTION OR LINE DATA  
2. OC12C CRS LOOPBACK TOWARDS THE TERMINAL LOOPS CELLS BACK TO THE CELLBUS.  
3. LOOPBACK TOWARDS TERMINAL ON AN AIC SENDS CELLS BACK TO CELLBUS AND BACK OUT TO THE RING, NO CHANGES  
ARE MADE TO THE PATH LAYER DATA.  
4. LOOPBACK TOWARDS FACILITY ON AN AIC CARD LOOPS THE INCOMING SIGNAL FROM CPE EQUIPMENT BACK TO THE  
CPE EQUIPMENT. AIC GENERATES AIS TO CELLBUS. A DS3 "PAYLOAD LOOPBACK" LOOPS THE SIGNAL BACK TOWARDS  
THE FACILITY AFTER FRAMING IS PERFORMED AND BEFORE BEING CONVERTED TO ATM.  
11729-D  
Figure 772-3. Loopback Direction and Signal Flow Diagram  
Page 2-308  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-773  
Page 1 of 3  
CARD AND SHELF RESET  
Summary: This procedure instructs the operator in the steps required to perform software reset  
on the shelf or various cards within the Cellworx STN shelf. Cards can be individually reset or a  
group of cards can be selected at one time to be reset. It is assumed that the user has gained  
access to the system and launched the GUI before attempting this procedure.  
1. Select the node to have the reset performed on it by double clicking on the icon shown on  
the main GUI screen.  
2. Select the Configuration pull down menu by either clicking on it with the left mouse  
button or entering Alt+C on the keyboard. Refer to Figure 773-1 for an example.  
3. Select the Reset Slots option using the left mouse button or by entering Alt+R on the  
keyboard.  
4. The Chassis Reset window appears displaying the cards equipped in the shelf. Refer to  
Figure 773-2. Select the card type in the appropriate column according to the reset type  
required (Hard/Soft). Refer to Table 773-2 for definitions or Soft and Hard Reset and  
service impact. Individual or multiple cards may be reset simultaneously. To reset the  
entire shelf, click on the “Hard Reset” or “Soft Reset” at the top of the columns.  
Note: If initiating a soft rest on the shelf, it may take up to five minutes before the  
AICs/RICs actually reset.  
5. Select the apply button once all cards and reset types are selected. The system responds  
with a confirmation message. Refer to Figure 773-3. Select OK to continue.  
6. A final confirmation message is displayed showing the request was sent. Refer to Figure  
773-4.  
Note: The confirmation message does not indicate whether the cards were successful in  
their resets, only that the request was sent.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
X
SELECT THE CONFIGURATION  
PULLDOWN MENU USING LEFT  
MOUSE BUTTON OR BY PRESSING  
THE ALT+N KEYS SIMULTANEOUSLY.  
Hardware Inventory  
Protection Groups  
S
C
T
M
U
X
T
1
M
u
l
T
3
T
3
E
1
M
u
l
E
1
M
u
l
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
Timing Resources  
Reset Slots  
C
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
R
i
n
R
i
n
E
X
t
t
t
i
i
i
13472-B  
Figure 773-1. Chassis View Configuration Pull-down Menu  
Page 2-309  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-773  
Page 2 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis Reset - Network Element 2  
X
Click on the desired cell in the table to select a  
card for reset. Click on the column title to select  
all cells in that column.  
i
Slot Number Hard Reset Soft Reset  
Card Type  
SC  
1
2
3
NMIC  
X
T3 TMUX MULTI 1  
TMUX EXP  
T1 MULTI 1  
T3 CRS  
4
X
5
6
7
8
T3 CRS  
X
E1 MULTI 1  
E1 MULTI 1  
9
10  
Apply  
Close  
13479-B  
‘
Figure 773-2. Card Reset Display  
Table 773 -1. Card Reset Level Definitions  
HARDWARE / PERFORMANC  
SOFTWARE CONFIG  
DEFINITION  
Reset  
Level  
NE TEST  
E MONITORING  
Hard  
Reset  
Unaffected Reset  
Reset  
Resets and tests all hardware, executes  
new card software download, cleans up  
temporary memory and affects traffic.  
Soft  
No  
Unaffect Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected  
ed  
Cleans up temporary memory, initializes  
card software, will not affect traffic.  
Unaffect Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected  
ed  
No changes to card or shelf.  
Cellworx Vision: Question  
X
Reset Selected Cards?  
?
OK  
Close  
13478-A  
Figure 773-3. Card Reset Question  
Page 2-310  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-773  
Page 3 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: information  
Reset commands have successfully been  
sent for each selected card.  
i
OK  
13460-A  
Figure 773-4. Card Reset Confirmation Message  
Page 2-311  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-774  
Page 1 of 4  
FINDING AND CHANGING THE NMIC IP ADDRESS  
Summary: This procedure defines the steps required to find and change the IP address stored on  
the Network Management Interface Card (NMIC). To help in the navigation of the unix shell,  
here are some general commands that the user may need.  
Some vi commands:  
• :help – use arrows to navigate  
• :q – quit  
• :sh – Opens shell in vi 9  
• Up arrow – scrolls through recalled commands  
• Delete key – exits without saving to start over, NEVER use backspace!!!  
1. The first NMIC should be resting (not plugged into the backplane) in slot 2 and 3. Connect  
the RS232 DB9 serial port cable from the PC into the craft port on the NMIC in slot 2.  
2. Start up the terminal emulation software. Insert the NMIC into the back plane (slot 2 NMIC  
only). The NMIC will start the boot process and will echo line after line of data to the  
terminal window.  
Note: The terminal emulator (ProComm Plus or HyperTerminal) needs to be set up  
using 9600bps, 8bits, 1stop bit and no parity.  
3. The NMIC boot process quickly flashes by. And finishes at the Login: prompt. Log into the  
NMIC. From the factory the user id is root with NO password set. If the NMIC has been set  
up previously and you do not know the name and password, see your system administrator.  
4. After logging into the NMIC either a bash# prompt will appear or you will be asked to  
configure the IP network. If left at the bash# then GOTO STEP 5. If asked to configure the  
IP network answer NO and continue with step 5.  
SHUTTING DOWN THE NMIC  
The commands listed in Table-774-1 can be entered at the NMIC PROMPT> to shut it down and  
must be all lower case. Refer to the commands listed in the description column for the one  
applicable to your NMIC state.  
5. Type command 4 from Table 774-1 at the bash# prompt before the NMIC has completed  
the PSM process (green active and status LEDs, approximately 3 minutes).  
Page 2-312  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-774  
Page 2 of 4  
Table 774-1. NMIC Shut Down Commands  
COMMAND  
DESCRIPTION  
1
/usr/bin/killall psm  
Stops processes running on NMIC. If NMIC is fully operational than use  
this command. An operational NMIC can be identified by the two green  
LEDs, Status and Active.  
2
3
4
/usr/bin/shutdown –r now  
init 6  
Shuts down NMIC and reinitializes it.  
Shuts down NMIC and reinitializes it.  
/usr/bin/killall –9 psm  
As NMIC is rebooting you have 30 to 90 seconds to stop the process using  
this command. Reboot is indicated by a single amber/green LED.  
6. Type the following command to set the window size of your display followed by an Enter.  
• bash# export TERM=vt100  
7. Look for pre-existing databases in the /cellworx/config directory. You will be looking for  
files that match the following criteria: NMIC and or NE.1. Type the following command:  
• bash# /bin/ls /cellworx/config [enter]  
8. If the files NMIC and or NE.1 do not exist, GOTO STEP 10, otherwise continue.  
9. Remove the NMIC and or NE.1 files using the following command.  
•
bash# rm /cellworx/config/NMIC [enter] y to acknowledge.  
• bash# rm /cellworx/config/NE.? [enter] y to acknowledge.  
10. Look in the /etc/hosts file for IP addresses and names after the custom definitions at the end  
of the file.  
bash# /usr/bin/tail /etc/hosts [enter]  
The file should look like this: also NO entries after the last line of hash marks.  
###########################################  
#
#
#
#
#
#
End of Cellwox Custom Network Definitions  
###########################################  
11. If there are NO lines after the last line of hash marks then GOTO STEP 14  
Page 2-313  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-774  
Page 3 of 4  
Note: The UNIX command, /usr/bin/tail will display the last 10 lines of the  
specified file.  
12. Delete all the lines after the last hash lines (all lines after line 111) in the /etc/hosts file.  
bash# /bin/vi /etc/hosts [enter]  
13. Type the following commands in the vi editor:  
[shift] g(this will take you to the end of the file)  
dd  
(this will delete the line the cursor is on), continue till the cursor ends up  
on the last line of hash marks.  
[esc][esc]ZZ (these three command will save the file and exit the vi editor)  
CONFIGURING THE NMIC IP ADDRESS  
14. Once the log-on process is completed, the commands listed in Table 774-2 should be  
entered in the sequence shown to properly set up the display.  
Table 774-2. PC/Laptop Display Parameters  
COMMAND  
DESCRIPTION  
export TERM=vt100  
tail /etc/hosts  
If working from pc/laptop it is good to use following command.  
The command displays the last ten lines of the file when looking for  
additional information below the hash-marked box.  
vi /etc/hosts  
This command takes you into an edit mode of this file.  
Shift+G (keystroke)  
Brings cursor to end of file. Any additional information below the hash-  
marked box, past line 110, needs to be deleted.  
dd  
Deletes the line the cursor is on.  
Escape key (Esc)  
ZZ  
When hit multiple times, it causes the system to exit the file/complete mode.  
Saves and exits.  
/sbin/.cw/cw_netcfg  
Reconfigures NMIC.  
CONFIGURING A SECOND NMIC (STAND-BY)  
shutdown -h now  
init 0  
Shuts down NMIC and halts reinitialization while  
the second NMIC is being configured if needed.  
Shuts down NMIC and halts reinitialization  
CONFIGURING A SINGLE NMIC  
shutdown –r now  
-or-  
Either of these commands will shut down the NMIC  
and reinitialize it.  
init 6  
Page 2-314  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-774  
Page 4 of 4  
TELNET TO THE NMIC  
15. At this point it is necessary to telnet back to the NMIC after it reboots. Following the log in  
process, the Run command for your particular application will initialize the configuration  
of the NMIC system files. The commands listed in Table 747-3 can be entered in the  
sequence shown from the UNIX PROMPT.  
Table 774-3. Telnet and Configuration Initialization  
COMMAND  
DEFINITION  
Telnet (name given NMIC)  
Following the telnet command, enter the actual name given  
to the NMIC.  
Export TERM=vt100  
If working from pc/laptop, enter this command.  
IP address is of machine you are working from.  
For Windows 95 and 98, this will start the configuration.  
Export DISPLAY=(IP address)  
Start, Run, winipcfg  
-or-  
ipconfig  
–or-  
/sbin/ifconfig –a  
–or-  
/usr/sbin/ifconfig –a  
To find in Windows NT go to DOS prompt and enter command.  
To find in a Linux operating system, enter this command.  
To find in a Solaris operating system, enter this command.  
16. Look for Ethernet Zero address: INET address plus:0+0  
17. Enter the following command to launch the Cellworx Vision Graphical User Interface:  
“CellworxVision”  
18. Follow GUI  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-315  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-775  
Page 1 of 3  
ADD OR CHANGE AN SNMP TRAP HOST ON THE NMIC  
Summary: The following procedure describes the steps required to add or change SNMP trap  
hosts on the Cellworx STN NMICs. A trap host is the system or network IP configured to receive  
traps that are initiated by the Cellworx STN system. The trap messages may be used to track  
problems with the system or stored for statistical data. The file to be changed is is  
config.snmp.active and is located in the /cellworx/config directory. To help in the navigation of  
the unix shell, here are some general commands that the user may need. The user should have  
some UNIX experience before accessing or modifying these files.  
Some vi commands:  
• :help – use arrows to navigate  
• :q – quit  
• :sh – Opens shell in vi 9  
• Up arrow – scrolls through recalled commands  
• Delete key – exits without saving to start over, NEVER use backspace!!!  
1. Telnet to the NMIC and at the NMIC command line, type in the following command:  
• # export TERM=vt100  
• # vi /cellworx/config/config.snmp.active  
2. Figure 775-1 shows an example of an unedited NMIC file that should be displayed. Notice  
the last MANAGER line shows only a localhost as the recipient of the traps.  
3. There are two lines that need to be added to the file. In the example shown in Figure 775-2,  
we have added an SNMP Trap host of 192.168.10.90. To do this, use the Down Arrow  
keys to move the cursur to the last line starting with “MANAGER”.  
4. With the cursor at the beginning of the line enter “y3y”. This will “yank” three lines to the  
clip board.  
5. Use the Down Arrow keys to step down one line and enter a “p” to paste the two lines into  
the file.  
6. An exact duplicate of the MANAGER localhost lines are now displayed. Use the Arrow  
keys to move the cursor to the second MANAGER localhost line and position the cursor  
just before localhost.  
7. Enter a Shift+C and begin typing the new SNMP Trap host IP address. Typing will  
overwrite the localhost if the Shift+C keys were entered correctly.  
8. After correctly entering the IP address, hit Esc to leave the insert mode.  
Page 2-316  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-775  
Page 2 of 3  
9. The file: /cellworx/config/config.snmp.active is READ-ONLY, so save the file in vi by  
entering the command string :w!  
10. The vi will display a confirmation message that the file has been written. Exit vi by  
entering the command string :q!  
11. Repeat this procedure starting at step 1 replacing /cellworx/config/config.snmp.active with  
the directory string /cellworx/config/config.snmp.local.  
12. Once completed, perform this procedure on the stand-by NMIC also.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
# WARNING ::::  
#
# Default agent configuration file. Please DON'T modify if you don't know  
# what you are doing because it can have adversed affect on the NMIC software.  
#
# WARNING ::::  
# !!! START USER CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS.  
#
# The following lines are the only one that may be configurable by the user.  
#
# Each "MANAGER" clause define one destination. The syntax is as follows :  
# MANAGER  
<host | IP address>  
#
#
SEND ALL TRAPS TO PORT <trap port on destination>  
# Define the forwarding of the traps to the Cellworx GUI  
MANAGER localhost  
SEND ALL TRAPS TO PORT 10162  
# !!! END USER CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS.  
# WARNING :::  
Figure 775-1. Unmodified SNMP Trap Host File  
Page 2-317  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-775  
Page 3 of 3  
# WARNING ::::  
#
# Default agent configuration file. Please DON'T modify if you don't know  
# what you are doing because it can have adverse affect on the NMIC software.  
#
# WARNING ::::  
# !!! START USER CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS.  
#
# The following lines are the only one that may be configurable by the user.  
#
# Each "MANAGER" clause define one destination. The syntax is as follows :  
# MANAGER  
<host | IP address>  
#
#
SEND ALL TRAPS TO PORT <trap port on destination>  
# Define the forwarding of the traps to the Cellworx GUI  
MANAGER localhost  
SEND ALL TRAPS TO PORT 10162  
MANAGER  
192.168.10.90  
SEND ALL TRAPS TO PORT 10162  
# !!! END USER CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS.  
#WARNING ::::  
Figure 775-2. Modified SNMP Trap Host File  
Page 2-318  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-776  
Page 1 of 1  
ALARM CUT-OFF (ACO)  
Summary: This procedure instructs the operator in the steps required to perform an alarm cut-  
off on a node in the Cellworx node. An alarm cut off disables the shelf audible alarm for any  
currently active alarm conditions. Any alarm conditions that are activated subsequently will  
reenact the audible alarm until the alarm conditions are cleared, or the operator reinitiates the  
ACO condition. An ACO will not extinguish any visual or message indications; visible  
indications shall be changed from unacknowledged (i.e., flashing) to acknowledged (constant).  
The user must have gained access to the Cellworx Graphical User Interface (GUI) before  
performing this procedure.  
1. From the GUI main screen, select the node that will have the ACO activated on it by double  
clicking on it using the left mouse button. The shelf level GUI “Chassis View” window  
appears similar to the one shown in Figure 776-1.  
2. Select the Fault pull-down menu using the left mouse button or by entering Alt+F.  
3. Select the Execute Alarm Cut-Off on the menu using the left mouse button or by entering  
Alt+C.  
4. The system responds with a confirmation message as shown in Figure 776-2. Select OK to  
continue with the ACO or Cancel to abort the operation.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
SELECT THE FAULT PULLDOWN  
MENU USING LEFT MOUSE  
BUTTON OR BY PRESSING THE  
ALT+A KEYS SIMULTANEOUSLY.  
Cellworx Vision: Chassis View, Network Element 2  
File Configuration Fault Security  
Configure Housekeeping Alarms  
X
Execute Alarm Cut-Off  
S
C
N
M
I
3
M
U
X
1
M
u
l
3
3
1
1
6
2
2
6
2
2
S
C
T
C
M
U
X
C
R
S
C
R
S
M
u
l
M
u
l
R
i
n
R
i
n
E
X
t
i
t
t
13473-C  
Figure776-1. Shelf Level Alarm Cut-Off Window  
Alarm Cut-off  
Are you sure you want to execute an  
Alarm Cut-Off?  
?
Cancel  
OK  
14572-A  
Figure 776-2. Alarm Cut-Off Confirmation Window  
Page 2-319  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-777  
Page 1 of 3  
REMOVE AND/OR REPLACE CELLWORX CARDS  
Summary: This procedure instructs the operator in the steps required to remove a defective AIC,  
SC, RIC, or EIM from the shelf and install a replacement card in its place. Before removing a  
card from the shelf, the user should verify there is no traffic on it by performing a switch over to  
the protect card if available.  
1. Place the ESD wristband on your wrist and snap the ground wire to it. Plug the ground plug  
into the grounded ESD jack located at the upper right side of the STN shelf.  
2. Locate the cards to be removed and their replacements.  
3. To remove a card from the shelf, pry outward on the ejector ears using the thumbs. This  
will dislodge the card from the backplane and allow it to be withdrawn from the card  
guides. Refer to Figure 777-1 for an example of removing a card from the shelf. This can  
be applied to the front access or the rear access cards.  
4. Using one hand to support the card underneath as it is drawn out, remove the card with the  
other hand.  
5. Place the card in an Electro-statically protected bag and place in the proper packaging  
material in anticipation for its return to ADC Telecommunications for evaluation.  
6. Align the replacement card with the card guides in the shelf at the proper slot position  
holding the card with the component side facing right. Refer to Figure 777-2.  
7. Slide the card in until the ejector ears reach the card cage trough. Fully seat the card into  
the backplane by pressing the ejector ears toward the shelf until they rest against the  
faceplate or the printed circuit board for EIMs. Once seated, give the card a gentle push to  
ensure it makes good contact with the backplane.  
Warning: Do not use excessive force. If excessive resistance is felt, remove the  
module, check for alignment and/or obstructions, and try seating it again. Take care not  
to bend any pins in the backplane.  
8. After replacing the card, the user may perform some acceptance tests per NTP-011.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-320  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-777  
Page 2 of 3  
622 RING SLOT 16 AND 17  
622  
Ring  
2
2
g
6
in  
R
ritical  
C
in  
aj/M  
M
T
RM  
O
AC  
Ac  
e
tiv  
ft  
Cra  
ss  
ce  
Ac  
O
AC  
CIA  
M
PC  
Status  
Active  
Status  
Active  
APS  
APS  
Timing  
Timing  
Craft  
Access  
Port  
1
Port  
1
Shelf  
Craft  
Reset  
16  
17  
18  
10544-B  
10540-A  
Figure 777-1. Removing a Front Access Card or EIM from the Shelf  
Page 2-321  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-777  
Page 3 of 3  
WORKING SHELF  
CONTROLLER  
IN SLOT 1  
SC  
al  
ritic  
C
in  
/M  
aj  
M
ESD JACK  
T
RM  
O
tiv  
AC  
Ac  
e
aft  
Cr  
ss  
ce  
Ac  
O
AC  
A
CI  
M
PC  
Craft  
Access  
Shelf  
Craft  
Reset  
1
2
3
4
5
10550-B  
10547-B  
EJECTOR EARS  
SEAT IN TROUGHS.  
Figure 777-2. Example of Seating a Front Access Card or EIM in a Shelf  
Page 2-322  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-778  
Page 1 of 1  
ENDING A GUI SESSION FOLLOWING AN ABNORMAL SESSION ENDING  
Summary: This procedure will help the user log back onto the GUI system after an abnormal  
session ending. An abnormal session ending might have occurred by operator error, time out, or  
other unforeseen events. In this event, it might be necessary to free up the GUI and log back in.  
If the NMIC for some reason reboots and the GUI goes down, the user only needs to log in and  
start the GUI as usual.  
If the session is ended because the machine that the GUI was exported to was rebooted/crashed,  
the GUI process may or may not shut down. If the GUI process still exists then:  
1. Log onto the NMIC as the root user.  
2. The administrator can display all GUI users that are currently logged onto the system by  
entering the following command at the root bash prompt exactly as shown:  
• manageGui  
3. The system displays all active users one through five and indicates the “1st Privileged User”  
as shown in Figure 778-1. This is the first Level 3 user who logged onto the system and in  
doing such is the only one that can make topology changes and perform protection  
switches/restoration. If logged on as the root user, you have the privilege of “killing” the  
GUI sessions of other users at this point. The system prompts the administrator to type in  
the number of the user top boot off (numbers 1 to 5).  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
ADC LINUX for Cellworx (R)  
Warning: Unauthorized use of this  
system may lead to prosecution.  
Login: root  
Last login: Mon May 8 09:36:45 from 155.xxx.245.xxx  
This is a list of GUIs currently active:::  
GUI Id = 1: User = root DISPLAY=155.xxx.245.123:0.0 (1st Privileged User)  
GUI Id = 2 is not currently active  
GUI Id = 3 is not currently active  
GUI Id = 4 is not currently active  
GUI Id = 5 is not currently active  
Please enter the GUI Id of the GUI to be terminated or –1 to exit :  
Figure 778-1. Terminal Display for Managing GUI  
Page 2-323  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-779  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE 2488 RIC STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI card status  
display for the 2488 RIC card. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level  
GUI display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the 2488 Ring card located in slot 16 in the shelf level GUI “Chassis  
View”at the top of the window.  
2. The 2488 Ring card display appears as shown in Figure 779-1. Click the small block  
between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downwards to view all the status  
information. Refer to Table 779-1 for definitions of status information provided.  
3. Select the Close button to return to the shelf view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - OC3c/STM1 Ring Interface Card  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id: 16  
Status:  
Card Level  
Card: 2488 Ring  
Slot Number: 16  
Up  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection State:  
Available  
Not Protected  
Port Number:  
1
2488  
Ring  
Port Level  
Section Status:  
Line Status:  
Path Status:  
No Alarm  
No Alarm  
AIS  
No Alarm  
LOS  
STS LOP  
STS AIS  
LOF  
RDI  
STS RDI  
Unequipped  
Signal Label  
Mismatch  
ADC  
Synachronization Status: ST3  
Status  
Active  
TC Alarm Status:  
No Alarm  
Timing  
NE15 Slot 16 Port1 (OC48)  
Recieve Path Trace:  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Port  
1
Configuration:  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Diagnostics  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
PERFORMS TEST REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING OVER FIBER  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
CONTROLLER.  
CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
LINK.  
0026-052  
Figure 779-1. 2488 RIC Status Window  
Page 2-324  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-779  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 779-1. 2488 RIC Card Status Definitions  
DEFINITION  
ITEM  
STATUS  
ACTION  
CARD  
Operational  
State  
Up  
Card is functioning properly.  
No action required.  
Down  
Card is not functioning properly, is Verify card is installed,  
in reset mode, or failed. Check  
Admin state.  
check for failure indications or  
provision card for service per DLP-  
756.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the operational  
status.  
Wait a few seconds for system to  
complete its operations and then  
update the screen.  
Availability  
State  
Available  
In Test  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing test  
signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to  
update.  
Failed  
Card has failed operation and  
Card may be performing a reset, or  
system has placed it out of service. the bus may be busy.  
PowerOff  
Not Installed  
No power to the card.  
Card is not installed.  
Check power source. Replace card if  
source is good per DLP-777.  
If required, install card in selected  
slot per DLP-777 and provision per  
DLP-756.  
Offline  
Card is installed and provisioned  
but currently off line.  
If required, set module on line per  
DLP-756.  
Dependency  
Card is supplying timing reference, Perform a soft switch over (manual)  
traffic, or other data to the system.  
per DLP-771 to release card  
dependency if removing.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the availability  
status.  
Wait for processor to update current  
status, may need to perform a  
manual reset of SC per DLP-773.  
PORT  
Section  
Status  
No Alarm  
LOS  
No errors between local and next  
node.  
No action required.  
Loss Of Signal, cannot locate  
section data.  
Check connectors, fiber, and  
transmitter at other end.  
LOF  
Loss Of Frame, cannot locate  
frame bit of section data.  
Check signal type, and power level  
of received signal.  
Line Status  
No Alarm  
AIS  
Receiving good input signal  
No action required.  
Alarm Indication Signal, inserted  
all 1s or blue signal at originating  
node.  
Check signal status at traversing  
nodes, and low speed signal input at  
transmitting node.  
RDI  
Remote Defect Indicator.  
Problem at the far end.  
(continued)  
Page 2-325  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-779  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 779-1. 2488 RIC Status Definitions, continued  
ITEM  
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Path Status  
No Alarm  
STS LOP  
Receiving good input signal.  
STS signal Loss Of Pointer.  
Check sync reference sources and  
input.  
STS AIS  
STS RDI  
STS Alarm Indication Signal.  
Remote end transmitting AIS due to  
loss of payload for path.  
STS signal Remote Defect  
Indication.  
Remote end informing local end it is  
receiving a defective signal.  
Unequipped Unequipped time slot.  
This time slot is not being utilized.  
Signal Label Payload descriptor does not  
Check VP/VC connection for  
Mismatch  
match overhead description.  
provisioning errors per DLP-704.  
Sync Status (S1) PRC  
SDH Primary Reference Clock  
Primary Reference Source  
SDH Equipment Clock Traceable level, check source and inputs.  
SDH Sync Supply Unit  
Traceable  
Stratum 1 level source  
Synchronized Traceability  
Unknown  
Timing reference reliability levels.  
If sync status does not meet required  
PRS  
SEC  
SSU  
Provide the required clock source  
and change configuration settings  
for the card per DLP-749.  
ST1  
STU  
ST2  
ST3  
SMC  
DUS  
Stratum 2 level source  
Stratum 3 level source  
SONET Minimum level Clock  
Reference cannot be used for  
source  
No action required.  
Received Path  
Trace (J1)  
Card  
Dependent  
Path trace is a 64-character string No action required.  
assigned to a path between nodes  
in either direction identifying the  
transmitting node using the  
following format:  
NE<id>_Slot<slot#>_Port1 (RIC)  
Page 2-326  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 1 of 10  
2.0 TO 3.0 SOFTWARE RELEASE UPGRADE PROCEDURE  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to upgrade the Release 2.0 system software  
to Release 3.0. The user should have access to an X-terminal or similar workstation device that  
will allow telnet sessions to the NMIC. The following items are prerequisites to this procedure:  
• This procedure must be initiated with the slot 2 in the “Active” state.  
• A Shelf Controller Card (SCC) must be present in slot 1 of every shelf. The  
SCC does not have to be active but if only one SCC is present in any shelf, it  
must be in slot 1.  
• These UNIX based commands are case sensitive. Pay particular attention to  
the upper and lower cases shown in the examples when entering commands.  
All commands are written for a UNIX system. If the user is using a PC for the  
file transfers, appropriate changes should be made.  
• If this Cellworx system has two NMICs, both NMICs should be in the system  
with EIMs in place and Ethernet connectivity provided to the workstation  
used for the upgrade.  
• It is recommended that the user be familiar with all steps of the upgrade  
process before beginning.  
DELETE INCOMPLETE CONNECTIONS  
The software upgrade procedure cannot be performed if the system has any incomplete  
connections. Before beginning, open the "Connection List" screen in the CellworxVision  
GUI and verify that for each connection type there are no incomplete connections. Verify  
this for VP-VP, VC-VC, CES-VC, and CES-CES connection types. If you do find any  
incomplete connections, then you must either delete them or complete them.  
Note: Failure to delete incomplete connections prior to attempting the software upgrade  
procedure can result in irreversible database corruption.  
PLACE SYSTEM INTO STEADY STATE  
Verify the system is in steady state prior to proceeding with the software upgrade  
procedure, i.e., verify that for each protection group the working card is in the active state.  
Page 2-327  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 2 of 10  
SAVE DATABASES  
Summary: The user should save all databases (NMIC and NE) from the slot 2 NMIC prior to  
initiating the software upgrade procedure. Note that this is a precautionary measure only since  
the databases are also backed up during the procedure itself. Should the NMIC disk become  
corrupted for some reason, however, it’s best to have all databases saved to an external storage  
medium. The following steps explain how to do this:  
1. Open a new shell window or physically connect a laptop or workstation to the NMIC and  
log into the slot_2 NMIC as a root user. This shell will be referred to as the “slot_2 NMIC  
shell”.  
telnet [IP address of slot_2 NMIC]  
2. At the slot_2 NMIC shell, change to the directory in which the databases are located by  
entering the following command:  
cd /cellworx/config  
3. Make a directory on the slot_2 NMIC used to store the Release 1.2 databases during the  
upgrade by entering the following command:  
mkdir release2.0_dbs  
4. Copy the databases to the new directory by entering the following command:  
cp NE.? NE.?? NMIC phase2.0_dbs  
Note: The question marks are single character wildcards. (Do not delete the  
NE.default file.)  
COPY DATABASES TO AN EXTERNAL DEVICE  
Note: This next section is optional. Having the databases stored on an external device  
is an extra precaution.  
5. Invoke a new shell (not a NMIC shell) on the laptop or workstation. This shell will be  
referred to as the “Workstation shell”. From the Workstation shell, change to the root  
directory by entering the following command:  
cd / or cd \ on a PC  
6. Make a directory called “cellworx” on the external workstation by entering the following  
command:  
mkdir cellworx  
Page 2-328  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 3 of 10  
7. Within the cellworx directory on the external workstation, make another directory called  
release1.2_dbs by entering the following command:  
mkdir /cellworx/phase2.0_dbs  
8. Change to the new directory by entering the following command:  
cd /cellworx/phase2.0_dbs  
9. From the Workstation shell, establish an FTP connection to the slot_2 NMIC by entering  
the following command:  
ftp [IP address of slot_2 NMIC]  
10. Log into the NMIC as “cellworx” and enter the cellworx password. The default password is  
blank so the user may elect to press Enter or Return or enter the cellworx password set by  
the user followed by Enter or Return.  
11. At the FTP prompt, set the binary file transfer mode by entering the following command:  
bin  
12. At the FTP prompt, change to the directory created earlier on the slot_2 NMIC by entering  
the following command:  
cd /cellworx/config/phase2.0_dbs  
13. At the FTP prompt, retrieve (get) all the files in the current directory by entering the  
following command:  
mget*  
14. At the FTP prompt, exit the FTP session by entering the following command:  
bye  
FTP SOFTWARE TO EACH NMIC  
Summary: The software needed for upgrading each NMIC must be transferred from an external  
source (most likely a Cellworx CD), to each NMIC. Use the slot 2 NMIC shell from the previous  
steps to upgrade the slot 2 NMIC. Log into the slot 4 NMIC as the root user from a separate shell  
to upgrade the slot 4 NMIC.  
Note: Keep both NMIC shell windows open. They will be used throughout the upgrade  
process.  
telnet [IP address of the slot 4 NMIC]  
Page 2-329  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 4 of 10  
15. In the slot_2 NMIC shell, create a directory on the slot_2 NMIC to store the Release 3.0  
software. To do this, enter the following commands:  
cd /tmp - changes to a temporary directory  
mkdir p3- makes a directory called p3 under the /tmp directory  
chmod 777 p3 - adds write permissions to the /tmp/p2 directory  
16. Open a new shell window and log into the slot_4 NMIC as a root user. This shell will be  
referred to as the “slot_4 NMIC shell”.  
telnet [IP address of slot_4 NMIC]  
Note: Keep both NMIC shell windows open as they will be used throughout this  
upgrade process.  
17. Create a directory on the slot_4 NMIC to store the Release 3.0 software. In the slot_4  
NMIC shell type the following commands:  
cd /tmp - changes to a temporary directory  
mkdir p3- makes a directory called p3 under the tmp directory  
chmod 777 p3 - adds write permissions to the /tmp/p3 directory  
18. From the Workstation shell, ftp the software from the Cellworx CD to the directory  
previously created for the software on the slot_2 NMIC.  
ftp [IP address of the slot_2 NMIC]  
bin - sets the binary file transfer mode (done at the ftp prompt)  
hash - optional; provides visual feedback that files are transferring.  
prompt - optional; avoids having user input “y”to transfer each file.  
19. Change the directory to the CD ROM drive or where the release 3.0 software is located.  
Replace the “r” in the following command with the proper CD drive designator.  
lcd r:/versionUpgrade (This command is for PC systems only. For UNIX system  
commands, see the system administrator for mounting a CD ROM on UNIX.)  
cd /tmp/p3 - changes the directory on the slot_2 NMIC  
mput* - transfers files from the workstation CD drive to the slot_2 NMIC  
bye - exits the ftp session  
20. From the workstation shell, ftp the software from the Cellworx CD to the directory  
previously created for the software on the slot_4 NMIC.  
ftp [IP address of the slot_4 NMIC]  
Page 2-330  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 5 of 10  
bin - sets the binary file transfer mode  
hash - optional; provides visual feedback that files are transferring.  
prompt - optional; avoids having user input “y”to transfer each file.  
21. Change the directory to the CD ROM drive or where the release 3.0 software is located.  
Replace the “r” in the following command with the proper CD drive designator.  
lcd r:\versionUpgrade (This command is for PC systems only. For UNIX  
system commands, see the system administrator for mounting a CD ROM on  
UNIX.)  
cd /tmp/p3 - changes the directory on the NMIC  
mput* - transfers files from the workstation CD drive to the slot_4 NMIC  
bye - exits the ftp session  
INSTALL NEW SOFTWARE ONTO NMIC  
Note: The following upgrade steps will not take affect until the upgrade script is run on  
each NMIC. These steps only copy the images into place.  
22. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, upgrade the kernel by entering the following command:  
/sbin/.cw/cw_upgradekernel /tmp/p3/xImage.3.0.0.7  
23. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, upgrade the kernel by entering the following command:  
/sbin/.cw/cw_upgradekernel /tmp/p3/xImage.3.0.0.7  
24. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, upgrade the new operating system (OS) by entering the  
following command:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/ADC-Linux-upgrade-3.0.1.0-1.ppc.rpm  
Note: Wait for the second prompt “Done” to appear before continuing.  
25. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, upgrade the new operating system (OS) on the slot_4 NMIC  
by entering the following command:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/ADC-Linux-upgrade-3.0.1.0-1.ppc.rpm  
Note: Wait for the second prompt “Done” to appear before continuing.  
Page 2-331  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 6 of 10  
26. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, install the AIC/RIC and SCC software images by entering the  
following commands:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/AicSccSwImages-3.0.1-2.ppc.rpm  
27. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, install the AIC/RIC and SCC software images on the slot_4  
NMIC by entering the following commands:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/AicSccSwImages-3.0.1-2.ppc.rpm  
28. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, install the AIC/RIC and SCC bootrom flash images by  
entering the following commands:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/AicSccBootroms-3.0.1-2.ppc.rpm  
29. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, install the AIC/RIC and SCC software images by entering the  
following commands:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/AicSccBootroms-3.0.1-2.ppc.rpm  
30. Install the AIC bootrom flash patch image on the slot 2 NMIC:  
/cellworx/bin/installFlashImage aic 2.1.0.25 /tmp/p3/bootrom.2.1.0.25.bin  
31. Install the AIC bootrom flash patch image on the slot 4 NMIC:  
/cellworx/bin/installFlashImage aic 2.1.0.25 /tmp/p3/bootrom.2.1.0.25.bin  
32. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, enter the following commands to install the Cellworx NMIC  
software:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/cellworx-3.0.1.0-1.ppc.rpm  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/cellworx-3.0.1.0p-1.ppc.rpm  
33. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, install the Cellworx NMIC software:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/cellworx-3.0.1.0-1.ppc.rpm  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/cellworx-3.0.1.0p-1.ppc.rpm  
34. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, install the Feature Package software by entering the following  
command and replacing the “x” with an a, or c depending on the feature package ordered:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/FeatureControl_a(x)-3.0-1.ppc.rpm  
35. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, install the Feature Package software by entering the following  
command and replacing the “x” with an a, or c depending on the feature package ordered:  
/sbin/cwupgrade/tmp/p3/FeatureControl_a(x)-3.0-1.ppc.rpm  
Page 2-332  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 7 of 10  
Download New Flash Images to SCCs and SEPICs  
Note: To avoid traffic loss during the upgrade procedure, the following steps  
must be performed.  
36. Open the CellworxVision GUI. For each NE in the ring, perform the following two  
steps:  
• Open the Flash Upgrade screen and select the 3.0.0.5 flash image for each  
Shelf Controller in the shelf (slots 1 and 18), and hit the ’Apply’ button.  
*****DO NOT RESET THE SHELF CONTROLLER FOLLOWING  
DOWNLOAD OF THE NEW FLASH IMAGE*****  
• For each SEPIC in the shelf (note that this includes SEPICs on both Ring  
Network Elements as well as Expansion Shelves), select the 2.1.0.25 flash  
image and hit the ’Apply’ button.*****DO NOT RESET THE SEPIC  
FOLLOWING DOWNLOAD OF THE NEW FLASH IMAGE*****  
Upgrade The Standby NMIC (Slot 4)  
37. In the slot 4 NMIC shell, change to the directory in which the software upgrade process is  
located:  
cd /cellworx/swImage/swLoad_Ver3/nmic.3.0.1.0/bin  
38. Start the software upgrade process. (The entire procedure for upgrading the slot 4 NMIC  
(standby NMIC) should take no more than 15 minutes.) This step invokes a graphical  
procedure that is used to walk the user through all required steps for upgrading the slot 4  
NMIC.  
Note: The user should keep the NMIC shell open following this procedure, as a manual  
reboot of the slot 4 NMIC following upgrade will be necessary. At the end of this  
procedure, the application software on the slot 4 NMIC will be halted, and the LEDs will  
turn red.  
39. The -h flag in the following command is used to specify the number of hours in which  
software fallback is allowed. Valid values are 0-168 (up to and including 7 days). The  
default value is 24 hours. For example, a value of 48 means the user cannot perform  
software fallback after 48 hours following software upgrade:  
./cw_swupgrade -s 3.0.1.0 -h (hours)  
UPGRADE THE ACTIVE NMIC (SLOT 2)  
40. After standby NMIC upgrade completion (the LEDs on the slot 4 NMIC faceplate should  
be red), start the software upgrade procedure on the slot 2 NMIC (the active NMIC). This  
step invokes a graphical procedure that walks the user through the necessary steps for  
Page 2-333  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 8 of 10  
upgrading software for the entire ring. The user should follow the directions and load  
release 3.0 software onto each AIC, RIC, and SCC in the ring:  
cd cellworx/swImage/swLoad_Ver3/nmic.3.0.0.8/bin  
./cw_swupgrade -a 3.0.1.0 -h (hours)  
41. Periodically click the Refresh button on the software configuration screen(s) to see when  
the software download is completed for each NE. Optionally, the user may close all  
software configuration screens and use the Refresh button on the main status screen.  
Clicking this button is equivalent to clicking the Refresh button on each of the NE’s  
software configurations screens.  
42. When the release 3.0 software download is complete for each NE, its entry in the main  
status screen will read, "NE is eligible for switchover." This must be done for all NEs in the  
ring.  
43. Step 8 of the Task Overview (this is the window that outlines the software upgrade tasks,  
with check marks placed beside completed tasks and a hand pointing to the task in  
progress) allows the user to cancel the upgrade procedure. Note that this is not traffic  
affecting and a NMIC reset is unnecessary.  
44. Step 12 of the Task Overview also allows the user to cancel the procedure. Note that this is  
also not traffic affecting but does require the slot 2 NMIC to be rebooted.  
45. Following step 12 of the GUI Task Overview, any problems that cause software upgrade to  
fail can be traffic affecting. Should any assistance be needed at any point after this step,  
contact ADC Technical Support at 1-800-366-3891, extension 4878.  
46. Following the slot 2 NMIC upgrade, this NMIC is automatically rebooted. After reboot, it  
will be running release 3.0 software. Note that until each of the SCCs reach their 5-minute  
switchover time and performs a soft reset, there will be a window of time during which  
communication is lost between the slot 2 NMIC and the SCCs. This window should be no  
more than 10 minutes.  
47. After the slot 2 NMIC has successfully rebooted, log back into it and start the Cellworx  
GUI. Replace "[hostname]" in the following commands with the IP address of the laptop or  
workstation:  
telnet [IP address of the slot 2 NMIC]  
export DISPLAY=[hostname]:0  
/cellworx/bin/CellworxVision  
48. After the Cellworx GUI has been started on the slot 2 NMIC, manually reboot the slot 4  
NMIC by entering the following command in the slot 4 NMIC shell window:  
/sbin/reboot  
Page 2-334  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 9 of 10  
49. After the slot 4 NMIC reboots, a database restoration window will appear on the Cellworx  
GUI screen from the slot 2 NMIC.  
Note: It is imperative that the user selects the slot 2 NMIC for database restoration  
because only the database files on this NMIC were converted from release 2.0 format to  
release 3.0 format.  
Warning: Following the software upgrade procedure, there are several actions that could  
invalidate software fallback. The user SHOULD NOT perform any of the following  
tasks unless he is certain that a software fallback from release 3.0 to release 2.0 is not  
necessary.  
• Make any topology modifications (add/remove NE, all shelf types)  
• Remove any existing cards  
• Delete any existing connections  
• Change the time of day clock  
• Perform a ring upgrade (OC3c --> OC12c, etc.)  
• Remove any file in the /cellworx/config directory with the extension,  
".release2.0". These files must be present in order to perform a software  
fallback.  
• Also be aware of the following restrictions:  
• If a release 3.0 card is installed in a shelf (such as DS3 CES or T1/E1 Frame  
Relay), remove that card before performing software fallback.  
• Delete any connections that are created following software upgrade before  
attempting software fallback.  
UPGRADE THE BOOTROM FLASH  
50. From the main GUI screen (which is running on the slot 2 NMIC), open the Gateway  
Network Element (GNE) pop-up menu by right-clicking on the GNE icon (the text  
underneath the GNE icon will be yellow - text for all other NE icons is in white). Select the  
Reflash Boot Image menu option.  
51. In the resulting screen, select the release 3.0 bootrom for each card installed in the shelf  
(except the NMIC). To do this, right-click on each row in the table and select the  
appropriate bootrom image. The following images should be selected:  
SCC = 3.0.0.5 (the SCC flash image was previously installed in step 36)  
AIC/RIC = 3.0.1.2  
54. Once release 3.0 bootrom images have been selected for all cards in the GNE shelf, click  
the Apply button. Wait about 5 minutes and then click the Refresh button to update the  
Page 2-335  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
DLP-780  
Page 10 of 10  
download status for the cards. All cards should say, "Loaded". If not, wait a few more minutes  
and click Refresh again.  
55. Once all cards are loaded with the release 3.0 bootrom, each card in the shelf must be hard  
reset to load the new bootrom.  
Note: Hard resetting a card is traffic affecting. When you upgrade the flash bootrom on  
each card, you may want to take this into consideration. To minimize traffic loss, you  
should consider using 1+1 or 1:N protection and resetting the cards such that a card is  
always active. This will take longer, but you will avoid traffic loss.  
56. Repeat steps 46 through 49 for each NE in the ring.  
57. Following hard reset of all cards in all NEs in the ring, software upgrade is complete.  
58. Following software upgrade, the user should manually delete the 2.1.0.25 AIC flash image  
that was installed previously. This will remove the possibility of inadvertently selecting this  
image in a Release 3.0 system:  
rm –f /cellworx/flashImage/aic/bootrom_Ver2/bootrom.2.1.0.25  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
GNE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 21:35 GMT Time: 21:35  
10924-D  
Figure 780-1. GUI Main Screen (example)  
Page 2-336  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-781  
Page 1 of 3  
REMOVING A NMIC CARD FROM THE SHELF  
Summary: If replacing a defective NMIC card, it is preferable that it be shut down before  
removing.  
1. If the NMIC is responsive to commands, plug the computer cable into the front access port  
located under the hinged front panel. Otherwise, go to step 4.  
Note: A terminal emulator (ProComm Plus or HyperTerminal) needs to be set up using  
9600bps, 8bits, 1stop bit and no parity using a DB9 null modem cable wired as shown in  
Figure 781-1.  
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
PIN #  
FUNCTION  
STANDARD USAGE  
2
3
5
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
REFERENCE  
TRANSMIT DATA  
RECEIVE DATA  
LOGIC GROUND  
10564-B  
Figure 781-1. NMIC RS232 Port Cable Connector Wiring  
2. At the Login: prompt. Log into the NMIC. From the factory the userid is root with NO  
password set. If the NMIC has been set up previously and you do not know the name and  
password, see your system administrator.  
3. After logging into the NMIC a bash# prompt will appear Enter the following commands to  
execute a NMIC shut down:  
• /usr/bin/killall psm - Stops processes running on NMIC. If NMIC is  
fully operational than use this command. An operational NMIC can be  
identified by the two green LEDs, Status and Active.  
• /usr/bin/shutdown –h - Shuts down NMIC and halts it.  
4. To remove a card from the shelf, pry outward on the ejector ears using the thumbs. This  
will dislodge the card from the backplane and allow it to be withdrawn from the card  
guides. Refer to Figure 781-2 for an example of removing a card from the front of the shelf.  
5. Using one hand to support the card underneath as it is drawn out, remove the card with the  
other hand.  
6. Place the card in an Electro-statically protected bag and place in the proper packaging  
material in anticipation for its return to ADC Telecommunications for evaluation.  
7. Align the replacement card with the card guides in the shelf at the proper slot position  
holding the card with the component side facing right. Refer to Figure 781-3.  
Page 2-337  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-781  
Page 2 of 3  
10. Slide the card in until the ejector ears reach the card cage trough. Fully seat the card into  
the backplane by pressing the ejector ears toward the shelf until they rest against the  
faceplate. Do not use excessive force. If excessive resistance is felt, remove the module,  
check for alignment and/or obstructions, and try seating it again.  
11. After replacing the card, the user may perform turn up of the NMIC per DLP-702.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
622 RING SLOT 16 AND 17  
2
2
6
R
g
in  
622  
ing  
R
l
a
ic  
rit  
C
in  
M
j/  
a
M
T
M
R
O
C
A
A
e
ctiv  
ft  
es  
ra  
cc  
C
A
s
O
C
A
IA  
C
M
C
P
Status  
Active  
Status  
Active  
APS  
APS  
Timing  
Timing  
Craft  
Access  
Port  
1
Port  
1
Shelf  
Craft  
Reset  
1
6
1
7
1
8
10544-B  
Figure 781-2. Example of Removing a Front Access Card  
Page 2-338  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-781  
Page 3 of 3  
IC  
M
N
C
S
WORKING NMIC IN SLOTS  
2 & 3 AT THE GATEWAY NODE  
l
a
ritic  
C
in  
j/M  
a
M
RMT  
O
AC  
e
Activ  
aft  
Cr  
Access  
O
AC  
PCMCIA  
s
Statu  
e
Activ  
ft  
Cra  
Access  
Craft  
Access  
le  
Enab  
GMS  
Craft  
Shelf  
Craft  
set  
Re  
Reset  
3
4
5
6
7
10531-A  
Figure 781-3 Example of Seating a Front Access NMIC Card  
Page 2-339  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-782  
Page 1 of 6  
REBOOTING THE SYSTEM USING A SAVED OR DEFAULT DATABASE  
Summary: The following procedure defines the steps required to reboot the system using the  
database files previously stored from the NMIC, or clearing all existing database files and  
restarting the system from scratch. The database files can be used to restore a system if a  
catastrophic failure occurs and database corruption is imminent. Refer to DLP-745 for  
procedural information on saving the existing database. Section A below steps the user through  
the process of FTP’ing remote files to a tmp directory on the NMIC and rebooting using these  
files. Section B steps the user through the process of rebooting the system using a backup  
database previously stored on the NMIC in the config directory. For rebooting using the default  
system database and rediscovering the system from scratch go to section C below.  
A. FTP REMOTE DATABASE FILES TO THE NMIC AND REBOOT THE SYSTEM  
1. Telnet to the standby NMIC using the NMIC specific IP address.  
2. Execute the following command to stop all processes running on the standby NMIC.  
• killall psm  
3. Execute the following command to force the NMIC processes to die.  
• killall -9 nmic ftpClnt  
4. Telnet to the active NMIC using the NMIC specific IP address.  
5. Execute the following command to stop all processes running on active NMIC.  
• killall psm  
6. Execute the following command to force the active NMIC processes to die.  
• killall -9 nmic ftpClnt  
7. Enter the following command to change to the directory where the database files are stored  
on the active NMIC.  
• cd /cellworx/config  
8. Enter the following command to save off the corrupted NMIC db in case it is needed later:  
• mv NMIC NMIC.corrupted  
9. Enter “exit” to return to a DOS prompt.  
10. FTP to the NMIC by entering the following command at the DOS prompt:  
• ftp <active NMIC IP address>  
Page 2-340  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-782  
Page 2 of 6  
11. Logon to the NMIC using any user name and password other than the root user.  
12. From the ftp prompt, change to the temp directory by entering the following command:  
• ftp> cd /tmp  
13. Set the transfer mode to binary, (turn on the hash marks for progress indication), (and turn  
off the system prompting) by entering the following commands at the ftp prompt:  
• ftp> bin  
• ftp> hash (optional)  
• ftp> prompt (optional)  
14. Put the NMIC files from the workstation onto the NMIC by entering the following  
command:  
• ftp> put NMIC  
15. Put the multiple NE files from the workstation backup copy onto the NMIC by entering the  
following command:  
• ftp> mput NE.? NE.??  
16. After the files have been transferred to the NMIC, enter “quit” to return to the DOS  
prompt.  
17. Establish a Telnet session with the active NMIC again and logon as the root user.  
18. At the bash prompt, enter the following command to change to the directory where the new  
database files are stored on the active NMIC.  
• cd /tmp  
19. From the bash prompt, enter the following commands to associate the tmp files with the  
root user.  
• chmod 644 NMIC  
• chmod 644 NE.*  
• chown root NMIC  
• chown root NE.*  
• chgrp root NMIC  
• chgrp root NE.*  
Page 2-341  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-782  
Page 3 of 6  
20. Enter the following command to restore the backup NMIC database. This will move the  
database to the active NMIC only. Leave spaces between the files.  
• mv /tmp/NMIC /tmp/NE.* /cellworx/config  
21. Enter the following command to reboot the active NMIC.  
• /sbin/reboot  
22. On the standby NMIC: wait 60 seconds and then enter the following command to reboot:  
• /sbin/reboot  
23. When the active NMIC comes back up, logon to it.  
24. Configure the NMIC to launch the display back to the proper machine by entering the  
following command:  
• export DISPLAY=x.x.x.x:0.0  
Note: Here the x.x.x.x is the valid IP address of the PC or workstation that is to receive  
the display.  
25. Start the Graphical User Interface (GUI) by entering the following command at the NMIC  
prompt  
• CellworxVision  
26. The GUI display should appear on the designated PC or workstation. If the NMIC gives a  
message indicating it is unable to launch the display make sure the workstation in use is  
configured to accept displays from other machines. This is done by typing “xhost +” on the  
command line of the workstation (not the NMIC).  
27. When the standby NMIC starts, the NMIC Protection Restoration screen will appear  
because the database files are not synchronized. The operator MUST choose the correct  
NMIC to restore from to get the correct files synchronized on both NMICs. The currently  
active NMIC (the NMIC on which the database copies were done and the first to reboot)  
should be chosen for the restoration.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
B. REBOOTING THE SYSTEM USING A BACKUP DATABASE STORED ON THE NMIC  
28. Telnet to the standby NMIC using the NMIC specific IP address.  
29. Execute the following command to stop all processes running on the standby NMIC.  
• killall psm  
Page 2-342  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-782  
Page 4 of 6  
30. Execute the following command to force the NMIC processes to die.  
• killall -9 nmic ftpClnt  
31. Telnet to the active NMIC using the NMIC specific IP address.  
32. Execute the following command to stop all processes running on active NMIC.  
• killall psm  
33. Execute the following command to force the active NMIC processes to die.  
• killall -9 nmic ftpClnt  
34. Enter the following command to change to the directory where the database files are stored  
on the active NMIC.  
• cd /cellworx/config  
35. Enter the following command to save off the corrupted NMIC db in case it is needed later:  
• mv NMIC NMIC.corrupted  
36. Enter the following command to move the backup copy of the NMIC database to the  
working copy of the NMIC database.  
• mv NMIC.backup NMIC  
37. Enter the following command to reboot the active NMIC.  
• /sbin/reboot  
38. On the standby NMIC: wait 60 seconds and then enter the following command to reboot:  
• /sbin/reboot  
39. When the active NMIC comes back up, logon to it.  
40. Configure the NMIC to launch the display back to the proper machine by entering the  
following command:  
• export DISPLAY=x.x.x.x:0.0  
Note: Here the x.x.x.x is the valid IP address of the PC or workstation that is to receive  
the display.  
41. Start the Graphical User Interface (GUI) by entering the following command at the NMIC  
prompt  
• CellworxVision  
Page 2-343  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-782  
Page 5 of 6  
42. The GUI display should appear on the designated PC or workstation. If the NMIC gives a  
message indicating it is unable to launch the display make sure the workstation in use is  
configured to accept displays from other machines. This is done by typing “xhost +” on the  
command line of the workstation (not the NMIC).  
43. When the standby NMIC starts, the NMIC Protection Restoration screen will appear  
because the database files are not synchronized. The operator MUST choose the correct  
NMIC to restore from to get the correct files synchronized on both NMICs. The currently  
active NMIC (the NMIC on which the database copies were done and the first to reboot)  
should be chosen for the restoration.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
C. REBOOTING THE SYSTEM USING THE DEFAULT DATABASE.  
44. Telnet to the standby NMIC using the NMIC specific IP address.  
45. Execute the following command to stop all processes running on the standby NMIC.  
• killall psm  
46. Execute the following command to force the NMIC processes to die.  
• killall -9 nmic ftpClnt  
47. Telnet to the active NMIC using the NMIC specific IP address.  
48. Execute the following command to stop all processes running on active NMIC.  
• killall psm  
49. Execute the following command to force the active NMIC processes to die.  
• killall -9 nmic ftpClnt  
50. Enter the following command to change to the directory where the database files are stored  
on the active NMIC.  
• cd /cellworx/config  
51. Enter the following command to save off the corrupted NMIC db in case it is needed later:  
• mv NMIC NMIC.corrupted  
52. Display a list of the NE files that exist on the NMIC by entering a “ls”. The system  
displays all the files within the config directory. Take note of each file and delete the NE  
database files for the NEs that exist in the system.  
Page 2-344  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-782  
Page 6 of 6  
Example: If a three node ring with one expansion shelf is used with NE.1, NE.2 and NE.3 and  
NE.4, then the following command would need to be entered on the NMIC:  
• rm /cellworx/config/NE.?  
53. For each NMIC, delete the NMIC configuration file using the following command:  
• rm /cellworx/config/NMIC  
54. Perform a “shutdown -h now” on each NMIC to halt the LINUX operating system.  
55. Reboot all the nodes in the system, rebooting the node containing the NMICs last.  
Rebooting requires extracting and reinserting all cards in the shelf. The Shelf Controller  
and the NMIC can alternatively be rebooted without extraction by simultaneously pressing  
the enable and reset buttons under the front panel of the card.  
56. At this point follow the complete ring turn-up procedure described in NTP-002.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-345  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-783  
Page 1 of 4  
ADD/DELETE GUI USERS OR CHANGE GUI USER LEVEL SECURITY  
Summary: The NMIC supports up to 5 simultaneous GUI users and 3 external Network  
Management Systems (ENMS), meaning that the NMIC will allow the users to issue multiple  
requests to the system at the same time. There are three user access (privilege) levels defined as  
follows:  
•
LEVEL3 - The highest possible user level. A LEVEL3 user has write access to all NMIC GUI  
commands when they are applicable. The LEVEL3 user has write access to all NMIC platform  
functionality’s (e.g. setting time and file replication), as well as make topology changes (e.g. add  
NE or remove NE). The LEVEL3 user is a NMIC GUI admin only, and does not imply root  
privileges in a LINUX environment. It should be noted that due to multi-users, only the first  
LEVEL3 GUI user to logon is allowed to make topology changes or do protection  
switching/restoration.  
•
•
LEVEL2 - The second highest user level. A LEVEL2 user has write access to most screens when  
applicable. The LEVEL2 user cannot make NMIC platform changes, topology changes, or  
administer craft security.  
LEVEL1 - The lowest user level. A LEVEL1 user has read access only, and may not be able to  
access certain screens. A LEVEL1 user is not permitted to do any action that would be database  
(written to the database) or traffic affecting. However, a LEVEL1 user is able to modify user  
specific information such as the icon layout.  
Note: Modifying Objects – When the NMIC receives multiple simultaneous requests to  
modify the same piece of data, the requests are treated as if they were sent one at a time  
and in a given order. The last modification requests received will override any previous  
modifications. This method of handling this access pattern is consistent with how it is  
handled with a single user.  
Note: Retrieving Read-Only Data - If one user is in the process of modifying a  
managed object, then a second user requests data for the same managed object, the  
second user must wait for the completion of the first user set request to ensure that he  
does not get inconsistent data. The reverse is also true if one user is attempting to get a  
piece of data while another user try to modify it. The second user request must wait until  
the completion of the first request before it can be honored. However, if the two users  
access data in completely different "domains of control" then it is possible to honor both  
requests simultaneously.  
There are some administrative operations which really make no sense for multiple users to  
perform such as : ring turnup, add NEs, delete NEs, etc. For these kind of activities, multiple  
users access will NOT be allowed. Instead the GUI only allows the GUI user with an Id of one(1)  
to have access to this functionality.  
Page 2-346  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-783  
Page 2 of 4  
1. From the workstation establish a Telnet session to the Cellworx system using the floating  
NMIC IP address.  
2. At the Login prompt, logon as the root user.  
CREATE A NEW USER  
3. To create a new user, enter the following command using user defined variable for  
username, and the GUI defined access level of 1, 2 or 3. Refer to the summary for  
definitions of GUI user levels at the beginning of this procedure if needed. Use the LINUX  
command “make user” followed by a space, then the user name assigned by the  
administrator followed by a space, and the GUI access level followed by an Enter or  
Return.  
• mkuser <username> <GUI access level>  
4. The system responds with “created user <username> with user ID <id number>” and  
prompts the administrator for a LINUX password. If needed, enter a password for the user  
for authentication purposes followed by an Enter or Return. The password will not appear  
on the screen as you type. This will allow the user to access the LINUX system but does not  
affect the graphical user interface access.  
Note: The LINUX system will not allow a password that is defined as a dictionary word  
or based upon any user information that is considered unsecured.  
5. The system asks the user to retype the password. Retype the password entered in step 4  
exactly as it was entered previously followed by an Enter or Return.  
6. The system should respond with “all authentication tokens updated successfully”. If the  
password was not reentered correctly, the system prompts the user to start the LINUX  
password process over.  
7. The system now prompts the user for “finger” information on the new user. The finger  
information enables the administrator to identify users by their logon name and “finger”  
them in system activities. Enter the real user’s name followed by an Enter or Return.  
8. The system asks for the office number of the new user. Enter the office number if  
applicable followed by a Enter or Return or just skip it by hitting Enter or Return.  
9. The system then asks for the office phone number of the new user. Enter the office phone  
number for contact information purposes if needed followed by an Enter or Return or just  
skip it by hitting Enter or Return.  
10. The system prompts for the home phone number of the new user. Enter the home phone  
number for contact information purposes if needed followed by an Enter or Return or just  
skip it by hitting Enter or Return.  
Page 2-347  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-783  
Page 3 of 4  
11. The system responds with “Finger Information Changed” and then adds the new user to the  
GUI access level group requested. The system attempts to “replicate” or copy the new data  
to the “peer” or stand-by NMIC. If successful, the system responds with “Replicated user  
data to peer NMIC” and returns the administrator to the root prompt. If a stand-by NMIC is  
not available or not installed, the system responds with “Failed to replicate user data to peer  
NMIC.” If so, the user will have to perform a NMIC Protection Restoration per DLP-725  
once the stand-by NMIC is brought into service.  
VIEW ALL ACTIVE GUI USERS  
12. The administrator can display all GUI users that are currently logged onto the system by  
entering the following command at the root bash prompt exactly as shown:  
• manageGui  
13. The system displays all active users one though five and indicates the “1st Privileged User”  
as shown in Figure 783-1. This is the first Level 3 user who logged onto the system and in  
doing such is the only one that can make topology changes and perform protection  
switches/restoration. If logged on as the root user, you have the privilege of “killing” the  
GUI sessions of other users at this point. The system prompts the administrator to type in  
the number of the user to boot off (numbers 1 to 5).  
ADC LINUX for Cellworx (R)  
Warning: Unauthorized use of this  
system may lead to prosecution.  
login: root  
Last login: Mon May 8 09:36:45 from 155.xxx.245.xxx  
[root@ltar040 /root]# manageGui  
This is a list of GUIs currently active:::  
GUI Id = 1: User = root DISPLAY=155.xxx.245.123:0.0 (1st Privileged User)  
GUI Id = 2 is not currently active  
GUI Id = 3 is not currently active  
GUI Id = 4 is not currently active  
GUI Id = 5 is not currently active  
Please enter the GUI Id of the GUI to be terminated or –1 to exit :  
Figure 783-1. Terminal Display of Managing GUI  
Page 2-348  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-783  
Page 4 of 4  
REMOVE A USER  
14. To remove a GUI user from the system database, enter the LINUX command “remove  
user” as shown followed by a space, then the username assigned by the administrator  
followed by an Enter or Return.  
• rmuser <username>  
15. The system responds with “user <username> has been deleted”. The system attempts to  
“replicate” or copy the new data to the “peer” or stand-by NMIC. If successful, the system  
responds with “Replicated user data to peer NMIC” and returns the administrator to the  
root prompt. If a stand-by NMIC is not available or not installed, the system responds with  
“Failed to replicate user data to peer NMIC. If so, the user will have to perform a NMIC  
Protection Restoration per DLP-725 once the stand-by NMIC is brought into service.  
16. The system then asks the administrator if he wishes to remove the deleted users home  
directory. It is recommended that the deleted user’s directory be deleted as this will free up  
space on the drive. This directory contains topology layout information and other  
information specific to that user and will not effect the other users. Enter a “Y” followed by  
an Enter or Return.  
CHANGE USER ACCESS LEVEL  
17. To change the access level of a current user, the administrator can enter the following  
command using the user defined variable for username, and the GUI defined access level of  
1, 2 or 3. Refer to the summary for definitions of GUI user levels at the beginning of this  
procedure if needed. Use the LINUX command “change access” followed by a space, then  
the user name assigned by the administrator followed by a space, and the new level of GUI  
access to be assign to the existing user followed by an Enter or Return.  
• chaccess <username> <GUI access level>  
18. The system responds with “Changing user <username> to access level <GUI access  
level>.” The system attempts to “replicate” or copy the new data to the “peer” or stand-by  
NMIC. If successful, the system responds with “Replicated user data to peer NMIC” and  
returns the administrator to the root prompt. If a stand-by NMIC is not available or not  
installed, the system responds with “Failed to replicate user data to peer NMIC.” If so, the  
user will have to perform a NMIC Protection Restoration per DLP-725 once the stand-by  
NMIC is brought into service.  
19. Next the system prompts the administrator to instruct the user changed to exit his/her GUI  
and restart it so the access level can take effect. This is intended to inform the user that  
until the exit takes place, the new changes will not take effect.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-349  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-784  
Page 1 of 7  
SET FE1 FRS CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the FE1 FRS card configurations  
utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI). User must have  
the GUI launched, and have accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to  
performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the FE1 FRS card displayed in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View”at the  
top of the window. The FE1 FRS card display appears as shown in Figure 784-1.  
2. Click and drag the small block upward to expand the Configuration section of the window  
so all or most options are visible. The Administrative State of the card and port should be  
“Unlocked” if in service. If “Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse  
button to enable the card and/or port for service.  
3. Set the Ingress and Egress Congestion Threshold for the switch fabric which will generate  
an alert when the traffic congestion crosses the threshold set.  
4. Set the Ring Selection to Auto, Ring 16, or Ring 17 as required. Refer to Table 784-2 for  
definitions of all options selectable by the user.  
5. Following the Ring Selection is the Smoothing Constant option. Click on the up or down  
arrow to select from 0.1 to 1.0 in .1 increments. This value provides for exponential  
smoothing for alarm notices that report/respond to congestion in the frame relay buffers. A  
smaller number (0.1) will reduce chattering of alarm notices/clearings due to buffer  
congestion during spikes in traffic.  
6. Following the Smoothing Constant settings is the Ingress and Egress, High and Low Buffer  
Congestion Thresholds settings for the frame relay buffers. Refer to Figure 784-2 for  
instructions on setting the thresholds.  
7. Following the Congestion Threshold settings, set the Port Mode for channelized or  
fractional as required via the display shown in Figure 784-3.  
Note: Selecting Channelized options will configure the card for four ports only (1, 2, 3,  
and 4). Refer to Table 784-1 below for Port Level configuration options:  
Table 784-1. FRS Port Configurations  
MODE  
PORT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
--  
8
--  
Channelized  
Fractional  
CH  
FR  
CH  
FR  
CH  
FR  
CH  
FR  
CH  
FR  
FR  
CH  
CH  
FR  
FR  
CH  
FR  
FR  
FR  
FR  
FR  
FR  
--  
FR  
FR  
--  
Combinations  
Page 2-350  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-784  
Page 2 of 7  
Note: The user may not change the Port Mode if there is an existing interface  
configured on that port.  
8. Click and drag the small block to expand the Port Level configuration section of the  
window.  
9. Select a Port on the simulated card by a single click on the port LED using the left mouse  
button. This will bring up the configuration data for that port in the Port Level section of  
the window. Ensure the Administrative State is set to Unlocked to enable the port for  
service.  
10. Set the Port Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to Table 784-2 for a list of  
options the user may select for this card type.  
11. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the window to back up the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller and configure the port before attempting to create interfaces on the port.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the FE1 FRS window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window display  
with all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close will  
close this window and return the user to the Chassis View window.  
12. Double click on the port just configured (1 to 8, depending on Port Mode selected) to bring  
up the Frame Relay Interface screen. Refer to the example shown in Figure 784-4. Within  
this screen, the user may elect to change the port interface by double clicking on the port  
desired in the Circuit box on the left.  
13. There are 24 DS0 channels selectable for the interface in the Interface Selection block of  
the window. If creating a Channelized connection, the user may create up to 24 single  
interfaces, or multiple interfaces made up of any number of contiguous channels using this  
tool. If creating a Fractional connection, the user may select up to 24 channels to create a  
single interface one time. The system will then indicate “Interface Creation Disabled”.  
Select the individual or range of DS0 channels to create the first interface using the left  
mouse button. Click on the first channel and then on the last contiguous channel of the  
range. The channels will become white and are shown linked by a bracket in the window.  
The GUI indicates this is the number 1 interface and shows it as the “Current” selection.  
14. In the main block of the window the user can assign multiple identifiers, and configure the  
interface. Refer to Table 784-3 for definitions of each option. Once all interface data is  
entered, select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to create the interface on the  
port.  
15. The user may now select the next channel(s) for another channelized interface and repeat  
step 13 or select Close and return to step 9 to create the next Port Level configuration. If  
creating another channelized interface on this port, the user will notice the color changes to  
Page 2-351  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-784  
Page 3 of 7  
blue for the next channel(s) selected and the system will number it 2 and indicate it is the  
“Current” channel. If multiple interfaces are displayed, the user must “double-click” on any  
channel of the interface desired to make it “Current” to allow configuration changes or to  
delete that interface.  
16. Select the Close button to return to the FE1 FRS card display.  
17. Select the Close button to return to the Chassis View window.  
18. Repeat steps 1 through 17 for each card in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - E1 Frame Relay Service  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id: 20  
Status:  
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Card: FE1 FRS  
Slot Number: 13  
Port Number:  
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
FE1  
FRS  
Unlocked  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Ring Selection:  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
0.3  
Smoothing Constant:  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
Recieved  
Local  
Locked  
ADC  
Unlocked  
Status  
Active  
APS  
120 Ohms  
HDB3  
Line Build Out (LBO):  
Line Coding:  
E1 PORT LEVEL  
Line Type:  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
SELECT PORT FIRST.  
E1 CRC-4 MF  
default  
Port  
Circuit Identifier:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Loopback:  
None  
CLICK ON ANY PORT TO  
CONFIGURE INDIVIDUAL  
FE1 PORTS.  
Facility Line  
Terminal  
Facility Payload  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
0026-011  
Figure 784-1. FE1 FRS Card Configuration Window  
Page 2-352  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-784  
Page 4 of 7  
CLICK ON THE UP OR DOWN ARROWS TO INCREASE OR DECREASE THE  
VALUE WHICH PROVIDES EXPONENTIAL SMOOTHING FOR ALARM NOTICES  
THAT REPORT/RESPOND TO FR BUFFER CONGESTION  
0.3  
Smoothing Constant:  
Ingress:  
Low Buffer Congestion Threshold:  
40  
Abatement  
0
100  
100  
Onset  
High Buffer Congestion Threshold:  
65  
Abatement  
0
Onset  
SELECT THE RED BLOCK AND DRAG  
TO THE DESIRED BUFFER CONGESTION  
THRESHOLD FOR ALARM ONSET. ANY  
CELLS TAGGED AS DISCARD ELIGIBLE  
FOR ANY INTERFACE AND PORT MAY BE  
DISCARDED ONCE THIS THRESHOLD IS  
SELECT THE BLACK BLOCK AND DRAG  
TO THE DESIRED BUFFER CONGESTION  
THRESHOLD FOR ALARM ABATEMENT.  
THIS VALUE WILL BE 10 PERCENT LESS  
THAN THE THRESHOLD ONSET.  
CROSSED.  
0026-001  
Figure 784-2. FRS Buffer Congestion Threshold Settings  
Port Mode:  
Ports 1 and 2 Channelized; Ports 5 and 6 disabled  
Ports 1, 2, 5, and 6 Fractional  
Ports 3 and 4 Channelized; Ports 7 and 8 disabled  
Ports 3, 4, 7, and 8 Fractional  
SELECT THE DESIRED PORT CONFIGURATION AND THEN  
HIT THE APPLY BUTTON. NOTE THAT IF SELECTING  
CHANNELIZED CONFIGURATION, PORTS 5 AND 6, AND/OR  
7 AND 8 WILL NOT BE SELECTABLE FOR INTERFACE  
CONFIGURATION.  
0026-021  
Figure 784-3. FRS Port Mode Settings  
Page 2-353  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-784  
Page 5 of 7  
Table 784-2. FE1 FRS Card Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Card and Port  
Administrative  
State  
Unlocked  
Unlocked  
Locked  
Enables or disables card/port for service,  
respectively.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
80  
0-100  
Auto  
Percentage of ingress/egress buffer capacity that will  
cause a congestion threshold notification.  
Ring Selection  
Auto  
Card will automatically select traffic from the ring  
direction with the best signal.  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 16 direction.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 17 direction.  
Low Ingress/Egress <default>  
Buffer Congestion  
Onset/Abatement  
Variable  
This will cause the FECN/BECN in the frame relay  
header to be set or cleared. Abatement is always ten  
percent less than onset.  
High  
<default>  
Variable  
Exceeding threshold causes frames with DE field  
equal to 1 to be discarded. Frame discarding stops  
upon reaching abatement level. Abatement is always  
ten percent less than onset.  
Ingress/Egress  
Buffer Congestion  
Onset/Abatement  
Transmit Timing  
Source  
Local  
FRS  
Received  
Local  
Incoming clock pulse used for outgoing signal.  
Clock pulse supplied by the SC cards used for  
outgoing signal.  
Service Type  
FRS  
Frame Relay Service.  
Line Build Out  
120 Ohms 120 Ohms  
Sets the signal strength according to the distance in  
feet that the Cellworx STN is from the E1  
interfacing equipment, not user configurable.  
Line Coding  
Line Type  
HDB3  
E1  
HDB3  
European Standard, not user configurable.  
E1  
E1 MF  
E1 CRC-4  
E1 CRC-4 MF  
Circuit Identifier  
Loopback  
<default>  
None  
Up to 20  
alphanumeric  
characters.  
User defined. Usually describes the traffic,  
customer, and/or channel number.  
None  
No Loopback selected.  
Facility Line  
Terminal  
Loops frames back out to EIM.  
Loops ATM cells back to Cellbus.  
Facility Payload Not user selectable on FE1 FRS interfaces.  
N/A Not user selectable on FE1 FRS interfaces.  
Far End Loopback  
None  
Page 2-354  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-784  
Page 6 of 7  
X
Cellworx Vision: Frame Relay Interface  
Slot Number:  
Node Name:  
Node ID:  
NE-2  
6
DISPLAYS NE AND  
CARD TYPE/SLOT  
INFORMATION.  
4
Card:  
FT1 FRS  
4
Location:  
Broadway  
Port Number:  
Double click on an interface to display it.  
Select a channel number with the left mouse button to start channel selection.  
Select a channel number with the right mouse button to end channel selection.  
Select a port to switch ports.  
Interface Name:  
Interface Contact:  
Interface Location:  
DS0-E0 FRS : Slot 04 : Port 01 : Channels 01-24  
Port  
1
2
3
4
Channel  
DOUBLE-CLICK ON  
A PORT TO CHANGE  
TO THAT PORT FOR  
INTERFACE CONFIG-  
URATION.  
X
X
X
X
default  
default  
Recording Interface Id: 0000000000000000  
Up  
Operational Status:  
Interface selection enabled  
Interface creation allowed  
0
Provisioned Endpoints:  
DLCI Length:  
2 Octets 10 Bits  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
SELECT THE FIRST  
CHANNEL AND/OR THE  
LAST CONTIGUOUS  
CHANNEL TO CREATE  
AN INTERFACE.  
Used Bandwidth:  
2
1
Egress:  
100.00  
Ingress:  
%
%
0.00  
0.00  
Current  
%
Effective Bandwidth:  
Interface Type:  
IWF Type:  
FRF.5  
FRF.8  
UNI  
NNI  
Signaling Parameters  
Signaling Protocol:  
None  
LMI Rev1  
Annex D: ANSI T1.617D  
Annex A: CCITT  
Q
SELECT THE APPL  
Y
BUTTON AFTER CREA  
TING  
EACH INTERFA  
PORT.  
CE ON THE  
Delete  
Refresh  
Close  
Apply  
Card View  
DELETES THE INTERFACE  
SHOWN AS "CURRENT"  
ABOVE.  
RETURNS TO THE  
CARD VIEW.  
REFRESHES  
SCREEN  
DATA.  
CLOSES THE WINDOW  
AND RETURNS TO THE  
CARD VIEW WINDOW.  
0026-012  
Figure 784-4. FE1 FRS Interface Configuration Window  
Table 784-3. FE1 Frame Relay Interface Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
Interface Name  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
<default>  
Any alphanumeric  
characters.  
User defined. Can describe the card type, slot,  
port, and/or channel number, etc.  
Interface Contact <default>  
Any alphanumeric  
characters.  
User defined. Can describe the name or number  
of a contact person or place.  
Interface  
Location  
<default>  
All 0s  
Any alphanumeric  
characters.  
User defined. Can describe the location of the  
interface (street, building, row, rack, shelf, etc.)  
Recording  
Interface ID  
Numeric  
Identifies the site card and port location for  
customer billing capabilities, (allows assignment  
of a customer ID for each port), limited to 15  
numeric characters.  
(continued)  
Page 2-355  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-784  
Page 7 of 7  
Table 784-3. FE1 Frame Relay Interface Configuration Options, continued  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Operational  
Status  
Up  
Display Only  
Indicates the operational status of the interface.  
Provisioned  
Endpoints  
0
Display Only  
Displays how many FR endpoints are configured  
by administrator on this interface.  
DLCI Length  
2 Octets 10 Display Only  
Bits  
Indicates the size of the data link connection  
identifier assigned to this interface.  
Used Bandwidth  
Traffic  
Dependant  
Display Only  
Indicates a percentage of Ingress and Egress  
bandwidth utilized for the selected interface.  
Effective  
Traffic  
Display Only  
Indicates a percentage  
Bandwidth  
Dependant  
Interface Type  
IWF Type  
UNI  
UNI  
NNI  
User to Network Interface  
Network to Network Interface  
FRF.5  
None  
FRF.5  
FRF.8  
Frame Relay Forum standards.  
Frame Relay to ATM internetworking type.  
Signaling  
Protocol  
None  
LMI Rev 1  
Link Management Interface Protocol  
Annex D: ANSI-  
T1.617D  
Annex A: CCITT-  
Q933A  
Page 2-356  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-785  
Page 1 of 7  
SET FT1 FRS CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the FT1 FRS card configurations  
utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI). User must have  
the GUI launched, and have accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to  
performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the FT1 FRS card displayed in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at the  
top of the window. The FT1 FRS card display appears as shown in Figure 785-1.  
2. Click and drag the small block upward to expand the Configuration section of the window  
so all or most options are visible. The Administrative State of the card and port should be  
“Unlocked” if in service. If “Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse  
button to enable the card and/or port for service.  
3. Set the Ingress and Egress Congestion Threshold for the switch fabric, which will generate  
an alert when the traffic congestion crosses the threshold set.  
4. Set the Ring Selection to Auto, Ring 16, or Ring 17 as required. Refer to Table 785-2 for  
definitions of all options selectable by the user.  
5. Following the Ring Selection is the Smoothing Constant option. Click on the up or down  
arrow to select from 0.1 to 1.0 in .1 increments. This value provides for exponential  
smoothing for alarm notices that report/respond to congestion in the frame relay buffers. A  
smaller number (0.1) will stop chattering of alarm notices/clearings due to buffer  
congestion during spikes in traffic.  
6. Following the Smoothing Constant settings is the Ingress and Egress, High and Low Buffer  
Congestion Thresholds settings for the frame relay buffers. Refer to Figure 785-2 for  
instructions on setting the thresholds.  
7. Following the Congestion Threshold settings, set the Port Mode for channelized or  
fractional as required via the display shown in Figure 785-3.  
Note: Selecting Channelized options will configure the card for four ports only (1, 2, 3,  
and 4). Refer to Table 785-1 below for Port Level configuration options:  
Table 785-1. FRS Port Configurations  
MODE  
PORT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
--  
8
--  
Channelized  
Fractional  
CH  
FR  
CH  
FR  
CH  
FR  
CH  
FR  
CH  
FR  
FR  
CH  
CH  
FR  
FR  
CH  
FR  
FR  
FR  
FR  
FR  
FR  
--  
FR  
FR  
--  
Combinations  
Page 2-357  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-785  
Page 2 of 7  
Note: The user may not change the Port Mode if there is an existing interface  
configured on that port.  
8. Click and drag the small block to expand the Port Level configuration section of the  
window.  
9. Select a Port on the simulated card by a single click on the port LED using the left mouse  
button. This will bring up the configuration data for that port in the Port Level section of  
the window. Ensure the Administrative State is set to Unlocked to enable the port for  
service.  
10. Set the Port Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to Table 785-2 for a list of  
options the user may select for this card type.  
11. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the window to back up the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller and configure the port before attempting to create interfaces on the port.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the FT1 FRS window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window display  
with all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close will  
close this window and return the user to the Chassis View window.  
12. Double click on the port just configured (1 to 8, depending on Port Mode selected) to bring  
up the Frame Relay Interface screen. Refer to the example shown in Figure 785-4. Within  
this screen, the user may elect to change the port interface by double clicking on the port  
desired in the Circuit box on the left.  
13. There are 24 DS0 channels selectable for the interface in the Interface Selection block of  
the window. If creating a Channelized connection, the user may create up to 24 single  
interfaces, or multiple interfaces made up of any number of contiguous channels using this  
tool. If creating a Fractional connection, the user may select up to 24 channels to create a  
single interface one time. The system will then indicate “Interface Creation Disabled”.  
Select the individual or range of DS0 channels to create the first interface using the left  
mouse button. Click on the first channel and then on the last contiguous channel of the  
range. The channels will become white and are shown linked by a bracket in the window.  
The GUI indicates this is the number 1 interface and shows it as the “Current” selection.  
14. In the main block of the window the user can assign multiple identifiers, and configure the  
interface. Refer to Table 785-3 for definitions of each option. Once all interface data is  
entered, select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to create the interface on the  
port.  
15. The user may now select the next channel(s) for another channelized interface and repeat  
step 13 or select Close and return to step 9 to create the next Port Level configuration. If  
creating another channelized interface on this port, the user will notice the color changes to  
blue for the next channel(s) selected and the system will number it 2 and indicate it is the  
“Current” channel. If multiple interfaces are displayed, the user must “double-click” on any  
Page 2-358  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-785  
Page 3 of 7  
channel of the interface desired to make it “Current” to allow configuration changes or to  
delete that interface.  
16. Select the Close button to return to the FT1 FRS card display.  
17. Select the Close button to return to the Chassis View window.  
18. Repeat steps 1 through 14 for each card in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T1 Frame Relay Service  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id: 20  
Status:  
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Card: FT1 FRS  
Slot Number: 12  
Port Number:  
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
FT1  
FRS  
Unlocked  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Ring Selection:  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
0.3  
Smoothing Constant:  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Administrative State:  
Transmit Timing Source:  
Recieved  
Local  
Locked  
ADC  
Unlocked  
Status  
Active  
APS  
Channel Bit Rate:  
Facility Data Rate:  
64 Kbps  
56 Kbps  
None  
T1 PORT LEVEL  
ANSI T1-403  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
SELECT PORT FIRST.  
Port  
0-133 feet  
Line Build Out (LBO):  
Line Coding:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B3ZS  
CLICK ON ANY PORT TO  
CONFIGURE INDIVIDUAL  
FT1 PORTS.  
Extended Superframe  
Line Type:  
default  
Circuit Identifier:  
Loopback:  
Far End Loopback:  
None  
None  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
0026-020  
Figure 785-1. FT1 FRS Card Configuration Window  
Page 2-359  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-785  
Page 4 of 7  
CLICK ON THE UP OR DOWN ARROWS TO INCREASE OR DECREASE THE  
VALUE WHICH PROVIDES EXPONENTIAL SMOOTHING FOR ALARM NOTICES  
THAT REPORT/RESPOND TO FR BUFFER CONGESTION  
0.3  
Smoothing Constant:  
Ingress:  
Low Buffer Congestion Threshold:  
40  
Abatement  
0
100  
100  
Onset  
High Buffer Congestion Threshold:  
65  
Abatement  
0
Onset  
SELECT THE RED BLOCK AND DRAG  
TO THE DESIRED BUFFER CONGESTION  
THRESHOLD FOR ALARM ONSET. ANY  
CELLS TAGGED AS DISCARD ELIGIBLE  
FOR ANY INTERFACE AND PORT MAY BE  
DISCARDED ONCE THIS THRESHOLD IS  
SELECT THE BLACK BLOCK AND DRAG  
TO THE DESIRED BUFFER CONGESTION  
THRESHOLD FOR ALARM ABATEMENT.  
THIS VALUE WILL BE 10 PERCENT LESS  
THAN THE THRESHOLD ONSET.  
CROSSED.  
0026-001  
Figure 785-2. FRS Buffer Congestion Threshold Settings  
Port Mode:  
Ports 1 and 2 Channelized; Ports 5 and 6 disabled  
Ports 1, 2, 5, and 6 Fractional  
Ports 3 and 4 Channelized; Ports 7 and 8 disabled  
Ports 3, 4, 7, and 8 Fractional  
SELECT THE DESIRED PORT CONFIGURATION AND THEN  
HIT THE APPLY BUTTON. NOTE THAT IF SELECTING  
CHANNELIZED CONFIGURATION, PORTS 5 AND 6, AND/OR  
7 AND 8 WILL NOT BE SELECTABLE FOR INTERFACE  
CONFIGURATION.  
0026-021  
Figure 785-3. FRS Port Mode Settings  
Page 2-360  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-785  
Page 5 of 7  
Table 785-2. FT1 FRS Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Card and Port  
Administrative  
State  
Unlocked  
Unlocked  
Locked  
Enables or disables card/port for service,  
respectively.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
80  
0-100  
Auto  
Percentage of ingress/egress buffer capacity that will  
cause a congestion threshold notification.  
Ring Selection  
Auto  
Card will automatically select traffic from the ring  
direction with the best signal.  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 16 direction.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 17 direction.  
Low Ingress/Egress <default>  
Buffer Congestion  
Onset/Abatement  
Variable  
This will cause the FECN/BECN in the frame relay  
header to be set or cleared. Abatement is always ten  
percent less than onset.  
High  
<default>  
Variable  
Exceeding threshold causes frames with DE field  
equal to 1 to be discarded. Frame discarding stops  
upon reaching abatement level. Abatement is always  
ten percent less than onset.  
Ingress/Egress  
Buffer Congestion  
Onset/Abatement  
Transmit Timing  
Source  
Local  
Received  
Local  
Incoming clock pulse used for outgoing signal.  
Clock pulse supplied by the SC cards used for  
outgoing signal.  
Channel Bit Rate  
Facility Data Link  
64  
64  
56  
Sets the Kilobits Per Second (Kbps) data rate for the  
channels provisioned on the port.  
None  
ANSI-T1-403  
FDL  
A peer-to-peer protocol across a T1 line providing  
OA&M functions (performance monitoring, loop  
back etc.) implemented via the framing bits in the  
T1 frame.  
None  
Line Build Out  
0-133 feet  
0 – 133 ft  
Sets the signal strength according to the distance in  
feet that the Cellworx STN is from the T1  
interfacing equipment.  
133 – 266 ft  
266 – 399ft  
399 – 533ft  
533 – 655ft  
Line Coding  
Line Type  
B8ZS  
Non  
configurable  
Bit 8 Zero Substitution  
Extended Superframe  
Extended  
Non  
Superframe configurable  
Circuit Identifier  
<default>  
Up to 20  
alphanumeric  
characters.  
User defined. Usually describes the traffic,  
customer, and/or channel number.  
Page 2-361  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-785  
Page 6 of 7  
Table 785-2. FT1 FRS Configuration Options, Continued  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Loopback  
None  
None  
No Loopback selected.  
Facility Line  
Loops frames back out to EIM after assigning  
overhead and buffering.  
Terminal  
Loops ATM cells back to Cellbus.  
Facility  
Payload  
Loops the payload back to customer interfacing  
equipment before assigning overhead and buffering.  
Far End Loopback  
None  
None  
No loopback is requested.  
Line  
Tells the far end to loop the line back.  
Payload  
Tells the far end to loop the payload after line data is  
extracted.  
Reset  
Tells the far end to stop the loopback.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Frame Relay Interface  
Node Name:  
Node ID:  
NE-2  
Slot Number:  
Card:  
6
DISPLAYS NE AND  
CARD TYPE/SLOT  
INFORMATION.  
4
FT1 FRS  
4
Location:  
Broadway  
Port Number:  
Double click on an interface to display it.  
Select a channel number with the left mouse button to start channel selection.  
Select a channel number with the right mouse button to end channel selection.  
Select a port to switch ports.  
Interface Name:  
Interface Contact:  
Interface Location:  
DS0-E0 FRS : Slot 04 : Port 01 : Channels 01-24  
Port  
1
2
3
4
Channel  
DOUBLE-CLICK ON  
A PORT TO CHANGE  
TO THAT PORT FOR  
INTERFACE CONFIG-  
URATION.  
X
X
X
X
default  
default  
Recording Interface Id: 0000000000000000  
Up  
Operational Status:  
Interface selection enabled  
Interface creation allowed  
0
Provisioned Endpoints:  
DLCI Length:  
2 Octets 10 Bits  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
SELECT THE FIRST  
CHANNEL AND/OR THE  
LAST CONTIGUOUS  
CHANNEL TO CREATE  
AN INTERFACE.  
Used Bandwidth:  
2
1
Egress:  
100.00  
Ingress:  
%
%
0.00  
0.00  
Current  
%
Effective Bandwidth:  
Interface Type:  
IWF Type:  
FRF.5  
FRF.8  
UNI  
NNI  
Signaling Parameters  
Signaling Protocol:  
None  
LMI Rev1  
Annex D: ANSI T1.617D  
Annex A: CCITT  
Q
SELECT THE APPL  
Y
BUTTON AFTER CREA  
TING  
EACH INTERFA  
PORT.  
CE ON THE  
Delete  
Refresh  
Close  
Apply  
Card View  
DELETES THE INTERFACE  
SHOWN AS "CURRENT"  
ABOVE.  
RETURNS TO THE  
CARD VIEW.  
REFRESHES  
SCREEN  
DATA.  
CLOSES THE WINDOW  
AND RETURNS TO THE  
CARD VIEW WINDOW.  
0026-012  
Figure 785-4. FT1 FRS Interface Configuration Window  
Page 2-362  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-785  
Page 7 of 7  
Table 785-3. Frame Relay Interface Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Interface Name  
<default>  
Any alphanumeric  
characters.  
User defined. Can describe the card type, slot,  
port, and/or channel number, etc.  
Interface Contact <default>  
Any alphanumeric  
characters.  
User defined. Can describe the name, number  
etc. of contact person.  
Interface  
Location  
<default>  
All 0s  
Any alphanumeric  
characters.  
User defined. Can describe the location of the  
plant, shelf, slot, port, etc.  
Recording  
Interface ID  
Numeric  
Identifies the site card and port location for  
customer billing capabilities, (allows assignment  
of a customer ID for each port), limited to 15  
numeric characters.  
Operational  
Status  
Up  
0
Display Only  
Display Only  
Indicates the operational status of the interface.  
Provisioned  
Endpoints  
Displays how many FR endpoints are configured  
by administrator on this interface.  
DLCI Length  
2 Octets 10 Display Only  
Bits  
Indicates the size of the data link connection  
identifier assigned to this interface.  
Used Bandwidth  
Traffic  
Dependant  
Display Only  
Indicates a percentage of Ingress and Egress  
bandwidth utilized for the selected interface.  
Effective  
Traffic  
Display Only  
Indicates a percentage  
Bandwidth  
Dependant  
Interface Type  
IWF Type  
UNI  
UNI  
NNI  
User to Network Interface  
Network to Network Interface  
FRF.5  
None  
FRF.5  
FRF.8  
Frame Relay Forum standards.  
Frame Relay to ATM inter-working type.  
Signaling  
Protocol  
None  
LMI Rev 1  
Annex D: ANSI-  
T1.617D  
Annex A: CCITT-  
Q933A  
Page 2-363  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 1 of 10  
CREATE A FRAME RELAY CONNECTION  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to provision a frame relay to frame relay  
(FRF.5) or frame relay to ATM VC (FRF.8) connection through the Cellworx STN network.  
Creating a connection entails selecting the originating and terminating NEs, cards, ports and  
interfaces, and assigning identifiers and traffic contract types. For ATM and CES connections,  
refer to DLP-708. For ATM Multicast connections, refer to DLP-787. Frame relay traffic  
contracts will also be discussed in this procedure. Prerequisites of establishing a connection are:  
•
•
A discovery must have been performed on the system.  
The connection endpoints hardware (cards/ports) must be provisioned and in service  
(unlocked) per NTP-006.  
Note: User may navigate through the GUI menus using the mouse or by using the Alt  
key plus the underlined letters in the menus simultaneously, and then the arrow keys to  
scroll up, down, or across. Refer to the Graphical User Interface Operation in Section 2  
of this document.  
1. There are three ways to initiate the process of establishing a connection.  
a. Using the left mouse button, select the Configuration pull-down menu, click on  
Connection, and then Create (or press Alt+C, Alt+N, Alt+C.) Refer to Figure 786-1.  
b. Using the Select tool (arrow) on the left toolbar, select the NE where the connection is  
originating by a click and hold on the right mouse button. A pop-up window appears as  
shown in Figure 786-1. Continue holding down the right mouse button and move the  
cursor to select Create Connection. Release the mouse button.  
c. Using the left mouse button, select the connection tool on the toolbar to the left of the  
workspace. Click and hold the left mouse button down on the NE where the connection  
is originating and drag to the destination NE. A line is drawn between the two NEs as the  
crosshair pointer progresses. Refer to Figure 786-2.  
2. The Cellworx Vision Connection Configuration window appears displaying all NEs  
discovered in the network in both the top section and the bottom section of the window.  
Refer to Figure 786-3. Ensure the originating and destination NEs are highlighted, if not,  
select them using the left mouse button.  
3. Enter an identification for the connection in the Connection Name text box using any  
alphanumeric and special characters. This ID should be unique in character so the user can  
discern between it and other connections for management purposes. The IDs assigned here  
will be displayed when viewing connections. System will allow duplicate connection names  
but will also assign a unique ID to the connection if the user does not enter one.  
Page 2-364  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 2 of 10  
4. Following the example shown in Figure 786-3, specify the connection type by left mouse  
clicking on the Connection Type pull down menu and selecting the FR connection type  
desired. The window displays the two FR connection types as follows:  
• FR-ATM VC  
• FR-FR  
5. Using the left mouse button, select the desired NE, Slot/Card Type, and Network  
Interface/Interface Type for the originating and destination endpoints. Click on Next>>  
using the left mouse button.  
6. For FR-FR connections, the screen shown in Figure 786-4 appears. For FR-ATM VC  
connections, the screen shown in Figure 786-5 appears. The two sections below the  
Connection Name text box of the next window represent the two connection endpoints. The  
network element identifications for both end points are displayed as well as the interface  
type. Using the left mouse button, click on the up or down arrows to select a Maximum  
Frame Size for this connection up to 4096 bytes.  
7. On the upper FR section, select a Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) under the  
heading DLCI/NE/Rate using the left mouse button. DLCIs that are already in use will not  
be selectable. The NE and Rate (Kbps) fields being visible to the user indicate these are in  
use already. If needed, use the scroll bar to display the available DLCIs not displayed in the  
window.  
8. To the right are the PVC Endpoint Parameter selections. Click on each box that pertains to  
this connection. Refer to Table 786-1 below for definitions of each parameter. The bottom  
section of the table defines the additional FRF.8 parameters for FR-ATM connections.  
Note: If selecting Discard Eligible (DE) Bit Tagging, the connection will be treated as  
NRT-VBR3 (non-real time variable bit rate level 3). If not selected, the connection will  
be treated as NRT-VBR2.  
Table 786-1. FR Endpoint Parameter Definitions  
PARAMETER  
Ingress NDC  
OPTION  
DEFINITION  
All selections are either  
on or off. Selecting the  
box turns the parameter  
On, indicated by the box  
turning dark.  
Enables or disables the Network Data Collection to  
monitor incoming traffic of this endpoint.  
Egress NDC  
ATM OAM  
Enables or disables the Network Data Collection to  
monitor outgoing traffic of this endpoint  
ATM Operation Administration and Maintenance  
selection only valid for FR-ATM VC connections.  
This variable controls whether the FR endpoint  
should support ATM F4 OAM flows.  
(continued)  
Page 2-365  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 3 of 10  
Table 786-1. FR Endpoint Parameter Definitions, Continued  
OPTION DEFINITION  
PARAMETER  
SSCS LMI  
Service Specific Convergence Sub-layer Link  
Management Interface used to establish a  
communications link between two frame relay  
endpoints. These are used to report connection  
problems to the transmitting endpoints.  
DE Bit Tagging  
Discard Eligible BIT Tagging is used to identify  
cells that are over and above the Committed  
Information Rate (CIR). Cells are tagged as “1” and  
may be discarded if system congestion occurs. Cells  
tagged as “0” are buffered and transmitted during  
system congestion. If selected, the connection will  
be treated as NRT-VBR3 (non-real time variable bit  
rate level 3). If not selected, the connection will be  
treated as NRT-VBR2  
FRF.8 PVC ENDPOINT PARAMETERS  
Frame Relay to ATM  
Mapping  
CLP=DE  
FR Discard Eligible markings will be carried over to  
the ATM Cell Loss Priority markings.  
All FR frames will be tagged CLP=0.  
CLP=0  
CLP=1  
All FR frames will be tagged CLP=1 and possibly  
discarded in the ATM stream in the event of system  
congestion.  
FECN to EFCI Mapping Forward Explicit Congestion Notification marked  
FR cells will be mapped to the Explicit Forward  
Congestion Indicator markings in the ATM stream.  
ATM to Frame Relay  
Mapping  
DE=CLP  
ATM Cell Loss Priority markings will be carried  
over to the FR Discard Eligible markings.  
DE=0  
DE=1  
All FR frames will be tagged CLP=0.  
All FR frames will be tagged CLP=1 and possibly  
discarded in the FR stream in the event of system  
congestion.  
Encapsulation  
Transparent  
Translation  
?
?
9. The Remote Connection Identifier (DLCI) is read only and reflects the DLCI number at the  
originating end of the connection. Under the Service Provider Profile heading are several  
blocks of information that will eventually be used for customer billing capabilities. These  
parameters are not yet selectable and are read only.  
10. The lower section of the window displays either another FR section for FR-FR connections,  
or an ATM VC section for FR-ATM VC connections. For FR-FR connections, repeat steps  
7 through 9 and select the Next button at the bottom of the window, then go to step 17,  
otherwise continue for FR-ATM VC connections.  
Page 2-366  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 4 of 10  
FR-ATM VC CONNECTIONS  
11. The bottom section of the FR-ATM window show in Figure 786-5 displays all the  
parameters for the ATM half of the connection. The network element and interface  
identification are displayed.  
12. If the connection is to be configured as a segment endpoint, select the Segment Endpoint  
box using the left mouse button for both the originating and destination ends. This option  
will enable OAM cell loopback from this point to the originating end for performance  
monitoring capabilities.  
13. Just below the Segment Endpoint box are the Ingress and Egress NDC selections. These  
will enable network data collection for the inbound and/or outbound traffic.  
14. Next, under the heading VPI / NE / Rate (Kbps) and VCI / NE / Rate (Kbps), select an  
available VPI and VCI number to be assigned for the endpoint. VPIs and VCIs with an NE  
and Rate displayed are already in use.  
15. To the right, the Service Provider Profile is displayed. Fill in the text boxes for each of the  
following parameters:  
•
•
•
Remote Interface Identifier - a fifteen-digit decimal number identifying the far end  
interface (UNI or B-ICI).  
Remote Connection Identifier - a four-digit VPI or five digit VCI decimal number  
identifying the VCI and/or VPI at the remote interface.  
Study Indication - select using the left mouse button. This indicates the usage  
information is to be generated for study purposes.  
16. When all of the parameters are filled in for both the originating FR endpoint and the  
destination ATM VC endpoint, select the Next button at the bottom of the window to  
continue.  
17. The screen shown in Figure 786-6 appears. Again the connection name assigned and the  
connection type selected from the previous screens are displayed. The window is divided  
again showing the originating and destination NEs, and the Network Interface/Interface  
Type and this time displays the DLCI or VCI at the end of the string. If DE Bit Tagging  
was selected from the previous screen under the PVC Endpoint Parameters, the Service  
Class Type will be NRT-VBR3. If not selected the class will be NRT-VBR2. This is not a  
selectable field for the FR end of the connection. The ATM VC endpoint is configurable for  
either VBR2 or VBR3.  
18. Under the Ingress Traffic Contract heading is listed “NEW” and any existing traffic  
contracts. Select from an existing traffic contract if available at both ends of the connection  
or select NEW to create a new contract. If an existing contract is selected, click on the  
Apply button to finish configuring the connection, otherwise go to step 19. The system  
should respond with “Connection Configuration Successful”.  
Page 2-367  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 5 of 10  
CREATING FR TRAFFIC CONTRACTS  
19. If creating a new FR traffic contract, the screen shown in Figure 786-7 appears. Here all  
traffic contracts configured on the system will be displayed. To create a new contract, type  
in the name in the box. It is suggested that the user try to make the name intuitive enough  
that another user might know what its purpose and data rate are by looking at the name.  
20. Next select the Traffic Contract Type. For this procedure the user should select the FR,  
QOS Class II.  
21. Next select a Committed Information Rate (CIR specified in Kbps) according to the  
customer contract and needs. This will be the “committed” maximum rate the network  
agrees to transfer under normal conditions.  
22. Next select an Excessive Information Rate (EIR specified in Kbps). This is the maximum  
“uncommitted” rate in excess of CIR the network will attempt to transfer over a specified  
measurement interval.  
23. Next select a Measurement Interval specified in milliseconds. This is the time over which  
CIR and EIR are measured.  
24. Select the Tagging option box if marking the cells as DE. Selecting the tagging option will  
create a Service Class Type NRT-VBR3 traffic contract. Not selecting the tagging option  
will create a Service Class Type NRT-VBR2 traffic contract.  
25. Select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to complete the traffic contract  
configuration. The system returns to the Connection Configuration window.  
26. The traffic contract just created will appear in the Ingress Traffic Contract window. Select  
the new traffic contract for each end of the connection via a single click using the left  
mouse button.  
27. Select Apply using the left mouse button to configure the connection. If the traffic contract  
was not selected, a message window will appear asking the user to select a Traffic Contract  
first. If the connection could not be established due to other conditions, a trouble message  
will appear giving more specific error messages.  
28. The system responds with “Subnetwork Configuration <connection name> Created  
Successfully”.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-368  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 6 of 10  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management Syste
CREATE CONNECTION  
MENU TREE ACCESS  
USING MOUSE SELECTION  
OR "ALT+C, ALT+N, AND  
ALT+C".  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
NE DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL  
Create...  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
CREATE A CONNECTION  
TOOL  
NMIC Platform  
NE POP UP WINDOW  
ACCESSED USING THE  
NE DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL. SELECT TOOL  
WITH LEFT MOUSE CLICK,  
POSITION ON AN NE, AND  
CLICK THE RIGHT MOUSE  
BUTTON.  
About...  
Craft Interface...  
Create Connection...  
View Connection...  
Configure Alarm Threshold...  
Configure Software...  
Reflash Boot Image...  
GNE-1  
11718-D  
Figure 786-1. Cellworx Vision GUI Configuration Pull Down Menu  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
CREATE A CONNECTION TOOL  
GNE-1  
DRAWING A CONNECTION  
BETWEEN TWO NEs USING  
THE CREATE A CONNECTION  
TOOL. CLICK AND HOLD LEFT  
BUTTON ON MOUSE OVER  
FIRST NE AND DRAG TO  
DESTINATION NE.  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 21:35 GMT Time: 21:35  
10905-E  
Figure 786-2. Cellworx Vision Click and Drag Connection Creation  
Page 2-369  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 7 of 10  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
ASSIGN A CONNECTION NAME  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
Connection Name:  
Connection Type:  
GNE-21 <--> RNE-22  
FR - FR  
SELECT A CONNECTION  
TYPE:VC,VP, FR, OR CES  
Unlocked  
Please select an endpoint 1 network element.  
Endpoint 1  
SELECT AN NE FROM  
AVAILABLE LIST FOR  
ORIGINATING CONNECTION  
ENDPOINT.  
Network Element: NE-21  
Slot / Card Type:  
Network Interface / Interface Type:  
DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 13: Port 01: Cha  
DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 13: Port 02: Cha  
DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 13: Port 03: Cha  
DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 13: Port 04: Cha  
13 FE1 FRS  
14 FE1 FRS  
15 FT1 FRS  
SELECT THE PORT AND  
GNE-21  
RNE-22  
RNE-23  
INTERFACE FROM AVAILABLE  
LIST FOR THE ORIGINATING  
CONNECTION ENDPOINT.  
THE SLOT / CARD TYPE ARE  
THEN DISPLAYED FOR  
SELECTION HERE.  
USE SLIDER BARS TO VIEW  
MORE INTERFACES.  
Endpoint 2  
SELECT AN NE FROM  
AVAILABLE LIST FOR  
DESTINATION CONNECTION  
ENDPOINT.  
Slot / Card Type:  
Network Interface / Interface Type:  
Network Element: NE-22  
GNE-21  
RNE-22  
RNE-23  
11 FE1 FRS  
12 FE1 FRS  
13 FT1 FRS  
14 FT1 FRS  
SELECT THE PORT AND  
INTERFACE (FR) OR PORT  
(ATM) FROM AVAILABLE  
LIST FOR THE DESTINATION  
CONNECTION ENDPOINT.  
DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 12: Port 01: Cha  
DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 12: Port 02: Cha  
DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 12: Port 03: Cha  
DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 12: Port 04: Cha  
THE SLOT / CARD TYPE ARE  
THEN DISPLAYED FOR  
SELECTION HERE.  
Refresh  
Close  
Apply  
Next >>  
0026-015  
Figure 786-3. Connection Configuration Window  
Page 2-370  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 8 of 10  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
Connection Name:  
ASSIGN A CONNECTION NAME.  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
GNE- 21 <--> RNE- 22  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION TYPE  
SPECIFIED IN PREVIOUS  
WINDOW.  
Unlocked  
Connection Type: FR - FR  
bytes  
Maximum Frame Size:  
4096  
INCREASE OR DECREASE  
FRAME SIZE.  
Network Element: GNE-21  
FRF.5: DS0-E0 FRS: Slot 14: Port 03: Channels 01-24  
PVC Endpoint Parameters:  
Page  
19  
Remote Connection Identifier (DLCI)  
Service Provider Profile  
:
DISPLAYS SELECTED  
DLCI.  
CONFIGURE ENDPOINT  
PARAMETERS BY CLICKING  
ON BOXES.  
1
Ingress NDC  
FR Interface Identifier:  
Study Indication  
Egress NDC  
0
DLCI / NE / Rate (Kbps):  
ATM OAM  
FUTURE USE FOR  
BILLING INFORMATION.  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
/
RNE 22  
/
1
Remote Interface Type:  
SSCS LMI  
DE Bit Tagging  
UNI  
BICI  
FR UNI  
SELECT AN OPEN DLCI  
NUMBER. NUMBERS WITH  
NE AND RATE INDICATED  
ARE ALREADY IN USE.  
INDICATES NE AND INTERFACE  
INFORMATION.  
Network Element: RNE-22  
FRF.5: DS0-E0 FRS: Slot 14: Port 03: Channels 01-24  
20  
PVC Endpoint Parameters:  
Page  
Remote Connection Identifier (DLCI)  
Service Provider Profile  
:
DISPLAYS SELECTED  
DLCI.  
CONFIGURE OPPOSITE  
ENDPOINT PARAMETERS  
BY CLICKING ON BOXES.  
1
Ingress NDC  
FR Interface Identifier:  
Study Indication  
Egress NDC  
0
DLCI / NE / Rate (Kbps):  
ATM OAM  
FUTURE USE FOR  
BILLING INFORMATION.  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
/
GNE 21  
/
1
Remote Interface Type:  
SSCS LMI  
SELECT AN OPEN DLCI  
NUMBER FOR OPPOSITE  
END OF CONNECTION.  
NUMBERS WITH NE AND  
RATE INDICATED ARE  
ALREADY IN USE.  
DE Bit Tagging  
UNI  
BICI  
FR UNI  
Close  
<< Previous  
Next >>  
RETURNS TO PREVIOUS SCREEN  
TO MAKE CORRECTIONS OR  
CHANGES.  
CONTINUES TO NEXT  
SCREEN AFTER CONFIGURING  
THE CONNECTION ENDPOINTS.  
CLOSES SCREEN WITHOUT  
SAVING CHANGES.  
0026-016  
Figure 786-4. FR-FR Connection Configuration Window  
Page 2-371  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 9 of 10  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
ASSIGN A CONNECTION NAME.  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
Connection Name:  
GNE- 21 <--> RNE- 22  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION TYPE  
SPECIFIED IN PREVIOUS  
WINDOW.  
Unlocked  
Connection Type: FR - ATM VC  
bytes  
Maximum Frame Size:  
4096  
INCREASE OR DECREASE  
FRAME SIZE.  
Network Element: GNE-21  
FRF.5: DS0-E0 FRS: Slot 14: Port 03: Channels 01-24  
PVC Endpoint Parameters:  
Page  
19  
Remote Connection Identifier (DLCI)  
Service Provider Profile  
:
DISPLAYS SELECTED  
DLCI FOR FAR END.  
CONFIGURE ENDPOINT  
PARAMETERS BY CLICKING  
ON BOXES.  
1
Ingress NDC  
FR Interface Identifier:  
Study Indication  
Egress NDC  
0
DLCI/ NE / Rate (Kbps):  
ATM OAM  
FUTURE USE FOR  
BILLING INFORMATION.  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
/
RNE 22  
/
1
Remote Interface Type:  
SSCS LMI  
DE Bit Tagging  
UNI  
BICI  
FR UNI  
SELECT AN OPEN DLCI  
NUMBER. NUMBERS WITH  
NE AND RATE INDICATED  
ARE ALREADY IN USE.  
DISPLAYS NE AND ATM  
PORT  
Network Element: RNE-22  
DS3: Slot8_Port2 DS3 SM  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
SETS AS SEGMENT ENDPOINT  
ENABLES NETWORK DATA  
COLLECTION FOR INBOUND  
OR OUTBOUND TRAFFIC.  
Egress NDC  
DISPLAYS SELECTED  
VCI FOR FAR END.  
Page  
1
Service Provider Profile  
VCI / NE / Rate (Kbps)  
1
/
GNE 21  
/
1537  
Remote Interface Identifier:  
SELECT AN OPEN VPI AND  
VCI NUMBER FOR OPPOSITE  
END OF CONNECTION.  
NUMBERS WITH NE AND  
RATE INDICATED ARE  
ALREADY IN USE.  
VPI / NE / Rate (Kbps):  
2
3
4
5
6
FAR END LEC  
VP OR VC ID.  
Remote Connection Identifier:  
VCI:  
16  
17  
18  
/
GNE 21  
/
1
VPI:  
Study Indication  
Remote Interface Type:  
UNI BICI  
0
0
GENERATES USAGE  
INFORMATION FOR  
STUDY PURPOSES.  
FR UNI  
Next >>  
<< Previous  
Close  
RETURNS TO PREVIOUS SCREEN  
TO MAKE CORRECTIONS OR  
CHANGES.  
CONTINUES TO NEXT  
SCREEN AFTER CONFIGURING  
THE CONNECTION ENDPOINTS.  
CLOSES SCREEN WITHOUT  
SAVING CHANGES.  
0026-013  
Figure 786-5. FR-ATM VC Connection Configuration Window  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
DISPLAYS NAME AND TYPE  
Connection Name:  
GNE-21 <--> RNE-22  
OF SELECTED CONNECTION.  
Connection Type: FR-FR  
VERIFY INTERFACE AND DLCI  
BEING CONFIGURED.  
GNE-21  
FRF.5: DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 14:Port 01: Channels 01-24 DLCI: 18  
Service Class Type:  
NRT-VBR3  
SELECT A QOS CLASS.  
Ingress Traffic Contract:  
SELECT A TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
FROM AVAILABLE LIST OR  
SELECT NEW TO CREATE A  
NEW TRAFFIC CONTRACT.  
<NEW>  
fr.304.0.1000  
VERIFY DESTINATION INTERFACE  
AND VPI BEING CONFIGURED.  
RNE-22  
FRF.5: DS0-E0 FRS:Slot 14:Port 01: Channels 01-24 DLCI: 22  
Service Class Type:  
NRT-VBR3  
SELECT A QOS CLASS.  
Ingress Traffic Contract:  
SELECT A TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
FROM AVAILABLE LIST OR  
SELECT NEW TO CREATE A  
NEW TRAFFIC CONTRACT FOR  
DESTINATION NE. SAME TRAFFIC  
CONTRACT CAN BE USED FOR  
BOTH NEs.  
<NEW>  
fr.304.0.1000  
Apply  
Refresh  
<< Previous  
SELECT APPLY TO CONFIGURE  
THE NEW CONNECTION.  
Close  
0026-017  
Figure 786-6 FR Connection Traffic Management Selection Window  
Page 2-372  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-786  
Page 10 of 10  
X
Cellworx Vision:Traffic Contract Configuration  
TYPE IN A NAME FOR  
TRAFFIC CONTRACT.  
Traffic Contract Name:  
Existing Traffic Contract:  
fr.304.0.1000  
OR  
SELECT FROM EXISTING  
TRAFFIC CONTRACTS  
DISPLAYED HERE.  
fr.1536.0.1000 (id 1)  
fr.304.0.1000 (id 3)  
fr.304.0.1000 (id 5)  
fr.504.0.1000 (id 2)  
nrt3.4078.4078 (id 4)  
Traffic Contract Type (Service Class) :  
ATM Constant Bit Rate (CBR), QoS Class I  
ATM Variable Bit Rate (VBR), QoS Class II  
SELECT THE SERVICE  
CLASS TYPE OR VERIFY  
ENABLED OPTION.  
ATM Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR), QoS Class Unspecified  
FR, QoS Class II  
SELECT A COMMITED  
INFORMATION RATE  
SPECIFIED AS KBPS.  
CIR (Kbps)  
EIR (Kbps)  
0
4.8  
8
9.6  
16  
19.2  
24  
32  
Measurement Inteval (milliseconds)  
160  
168  
176  
184  
192  
200  
208  
215  
100  
200  
300  
400  
500  
600  
700  
800  
SELECT AN EXCESSIVE  
INFORMATION RATE AT  
WHICH TIME CELLS COULD  
BE DISCARDED.  
SELECT A MEASURMENT  
INTERVAL TO BE USED TO  
CALCULATE THE EIR.  
Tagging  
Close  
Next >>  
Apply  
Delete  
0026-018  
Figure 786-7 FR Connection Configuration – Create a Traffic Contract  
Page 2-373  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 1 of 12  
CREATE AN ATM VP MULTICAST CONNECTION  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to provision a UBR, CBR or VBR real  
time or non-real time VP multicast connection through the Cellworx STN network. Creating a  
VP multicast connection entails selecting the originating and terminating NEs, cards, ports and  
interfaces. For Frame Relay connections refer to DLP-786 and for ATM Bundled VC Multicast  
connections, refer to DLP-790. Traffic contracts will be discussed in this procedure but  
performed elsewhere. Prerequisites of establishing a connection are:  
•
•
A discovery must have been performed on the system.  
The connection endpoints hardware (cards/ports) must be provisioned and in service  
(unlocked) per NTP-006.  
Note: User may navigate through the GUI menus using the mouse or by using the Alt  
key plus the underlined letters in the menus simultaneously, and then the arrow keys to  
scroll up, down, or across. Refer to the Graphical User Interface Operation in Section 2  
of this document.  
1. There are three ways to initiate the process of establishing a connection.  
a. Using the left mouse button, select the Configuration pull-down menu, click on  
Connection, and then Create (or press Alt+C, Alt+N, Alt+C.) Refer to Figure 787-1.  
b. Using the Select tool (arrow) on the left toolbar, select the NE where the connection is  
originating by a click and hold on the right mouse button. A pop-up window appears as  
shown in Figure 787-1. Continue holding down the right mouse button and move the  
cursor to select Create Connection. Release the mouse button.  
c. Using the left mouse button, select the connection tool on the toolbar to the left of the  
workspace. Click and hold the left mouse button down on the NE where the connection  
is originating and drag to the destination NE. A line is drawn between the two NEs as the  
crosshair pointer progresses. Refer to Figure 787-2.  
2. The Cellworx Vision Connection Configuration window appears displaying all NEs  
discovered in the network in both the top section and the bottom section of the window.  
Refer to Figure 787-3. Ensure the originating and destination NEs are highlighted, if not,  
select them using the left mouse button.  
3. Enter an identification for the connection in the Connection Name text box using any  
alphanumeric and special characters. This ID should be unique in character so the user can  
discern between it and other connections for management purposes. The IDs assigned here  
will be displayed when viewing connections. The system will allow duplicate connection  
names but will also assign a unique ID to the connection if the user does not enter one.  
Page 2-374  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 2 of 12  
4. Next specify the connection type by left mouse clicking on the Connection Type pull down  
menu and selecting ATM VP MULTICAST.  
5. Using the left mouse button, select the desired Root Network Element, Slot/Card Type, and  
Network Interface/Interface Type for the originating “Root” endpoint.  
6. Using the left mouse button, select the desired Leaf Network Element, Slot/Card Type, and  
Network Interface/Interface Type for the destination “Leaf” endpoint. After highlighting  
the Interface Type, select the Add button to define the Interface Type as a Leaf Interface.  
The Interface Type should now be displayed in the Leaf Interface box to the right of the  
screen and is removed from the available Leaf Interfaces box.  
7. Multiple interface types may be selected as leaf interfaces by selecting them, clicking on  
the Add button, and moving them to the Leaf Interface box. Only one port per card is  
supported for release 3.1 software packages. Once all leaf interfaces are selected for the VP  
multicast connection, click on Next>> using the left mouse button.  
8. The next configuration screen displays the root and leaf network elements in a split screen.  
Refer to Figure 787-4 for an example. At the Root Network Element upper section of the  
screen, select the Segment Endpoint and Ingress NDC if desired. Refer to Table 787-1 for  
definitions of each option selectable by the user.  
9. Using the left mouse button select VPI from the list provided in the VPI/NE/Rate box to be  
utilized at the Root NE. The VPI will become highlighted. These were defined during the  
card interface configuration. Refer to NTP-009 for configuration procedures on each card  
type if needed.  
10. Configure the Service Provider Profile if desired again referring to Table 787-1 for  
definitions.  
11. At the Leaf Network Element lower section of the screen, select the Segment Endpoint and  
Egress NDC if desired. Refer to Table 787-1 for definitions of each option.  
12. The interfaces selected from the previous screen are displayed in the “Leaf Interface” box.  
If they are already “configured”, they will have two asterisks preceding the identification,  
otherwise they may still be selected for configuration. Using the left mouse button, click on  
the interface to highlight it.  
13. Next select a VPI interface displayed in the VPI/NE/Rate (Kbps) box. These were defined  
during the card interface configuration. Refer to NTP-009 for configuration procedures on  
each card type if needed. Once the VPI are selected, the Update Leaf button below becomes  
selectable.  
14. Configure the Service Provider Profile if desired again referring to Table 787-1 for  
definitions.  
Page 2-375  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 3 of 12  
15. Click on the Update Leaf button to configure the leaf endpoint. The interface in the first  
“Leaf Interface” box will now have the asterisks before the identification string showing it  
as already configured. Select the next Leaf Interface to configure until all interfaces have  
VPI assigned. Select the Next button to continue.  
16. The next screen allows the user to select a pre-configured traffic contract for the connection  
or create a new traffic contract. Refer to Figure 787-5 for an example. Select the Service  
Class Type by clicking on the button and selecting CBR, VBR, UBR1, RT-VBR1, 2, or 3,  
or NRT-VBR1, 2, or3. Refer to Table 787-1 for definitions of these service class types.  
17. Once the service class type is selected, the available traffic contracts for that type are  
displayed. If a contract is not available for the connection, a new one can be created by  
double-clicking on <New>, otherwise select the existing traffic contract, click on the Apply  
button, and go to step 25.  
18. The Traffic Contract Configuration screen appears similar to the one shown in Figure 787-  
6. Type in a traffic contract name that will be intuitive to the user at a glance (i.e., specify  
the data rate in the name, etc.). Existing contracts listed in the next box may be selected to  
pre define the options if creating an identical contract with a different name.  
19. Select a Traffic Contract Type by clicking on the desired button. Refer to Table 787-2 for  
all traffic contract configuration options.  
20. Select a rate unit (Kpbs, Mbps) and enter the peak cell rate for the connection. This rate  
should not exceed the maximum data rate for any of the leaf endpoints (i.e., If the Root  
endpoint is a 155SM and the leaf endpoints are T3 and T1 cards, the maximum cell rate for  
the connection should be 1.544 Mbps as anything higher would be discarded.)  
21. Enter a Cell Delay Variation Tolerance specified in microseconds.  
22. Select the Sustainable Cell rate, CLP, tagging, and MBS as desired if applicable (ATM  
VBR QOS Class II).  
23. Click on the Apply button using the left mouse button to create the traffic contract. The  
system should respond with “Traffic Contract <name of contract> created successfully.”  
Select the OK button to close the message window, and then select Close on the traffic  
contract configuration window.  
24. The previous Connection Configuration window appears again displaying the Ingress  
Traffic Contract types. If the traffic contract just created is not displayed, ensure that the  
correct Service Class Type is selected. Select the traffic contract and click on the Apply  
button at the bottom of the screen.  
25. The system may take several seconds to complete the connection and responds with  
“Configuration Successful”. Verify the connection configuration was completed by  
accessing the Subnetwork Connection Filter window using one of the following methods  
from the GUI main window:  
Page 2-376  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 4 of 12  
a. Using the left mouse button, select Configuration, Connection, and View.  
Refer to Figure 787-7.  
b. Using the direct selection keys, enter Alt+C, Alt+N then Alt+V. Refer to  
Figure 787-7.  
c. Using the right mouse button, position the cursor over the NE, click and hold  
the button, select View Connections, and release the button.  
d. Using the left mouse button, select the connection icon above the workspace.  
36 The Connection Filter window appears as shown in Figure 787-8. Select a topic to filter  
information from using the folder tabs shown. These topics allow the user to retrieve only  
the information desired by Connection type, Network available, Traffic contract, or ATM  
traffic by port. The user may also specify all of these by using the All checkbox. Refer to  
Table 787-3 for descriptions of each filter type.  
Select the ATM VP MULTICAST  
button and the Apply at the bottom of the screen.  
37 The Connection List window appears as shown in the example in Figure 787-9. The list of  
connections can be displayed alphabetically by the connection name or by the NE name by  
using the Format pull down menu and selecting Sort by Name, or Sort by NE. The status  
column indicates the most current information for the connection. The status may be listed  
as INCOMPLETE, FUNCTIONAL, or as an UNKNOWN STATE. This screen displays up  
to 100 entries per page by using the up and down slide button on the right side of the  
window. If more than 100 entries are available for viewing, the user may use the slide bar  
on the right side of the window to scroll through the entries.  
38 If a connection is displayed as INCOMPLETE, select it using the left mouse button to  
highlight it and then select Retry to attempt to establish the connection.  
39. The user may delete a connection, or multiple connections, by selecting them using the left  
mouse button, and then selecting Delete. A confirmation message will appear requiring the  
user to select OK or Cancel. If a problem exists with the hardware between the NMIC and  
the endpoint shelf controllers, a denial message may appear detailing why the connection  
could not be deleted. Refer to DLP-713 and the trouble log for any error reports.  
40. To gain status information of a certain connection, using the left mouse button the user  
double clicks on the connection, or single clicks to highlight the connection followed by  
selecting Status at the bottom left of the window.  
41. The Connection Status window appears similar to the one shown in Figure 787-10. The  
connection name is displayed at the top of the window. The administrative state may show  
as Locked or Unlocked. Locked indicates the connection is taken down at both ends, no  
traffic is allowed on the ring. Unlocked indicates the connection is operable in a normal  
state. The user may change options on the connection by selecting Configure. Access to the  
Configure screen can also be obtained from the previous Connection List screen via the  
Configure selection button found there.  
Page 2-377  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 5 of 12  
42. The Connection Configuration screen appears. Refer to Figure 787-11. Again the  
connection name is displayed at the top of the window. The Root end of the connection can  
be taken down by changing the Administrative State to Locked using the button at the top  
right corner of the window and then selecting Apply. Similarly, the leaf endpoint can be  
locked using the feature at the bottom left of the screen.  
43. Either or both ends of the connection can be configured as OAM cell segment endpoints by  
selecting the Segment Endpoint box displayed at each section of the screen. This  
functionality can be used for maintenance or troubleshooting purposes. Select Apply to  
send configuration changes to the database or close to abort any changes.  
44. The “Configuration Change Completed” window appears. Select OK.  
45. Leaves may be added to the connection using the Add Leaf button at the bottom of the  
screen. Refer to DLP-791 to add a leaf to an existing connection.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management Syste
CREATE CONNECTION  
MENU TREE ACCESS  
USING MOUSE SELECTION  
OR "ALT+C, ALT+N, AND  
ALT+C".  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
NE DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
CREATE A CONNECTION  
TOOL  
NMIC Platform  
NE POP UP WINDOW  
ACCESSED USING THE  
NE DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL. SELECT TOOL  
WITH LEFT MOUSE CLICK,  
POSITION ON AN NE, AND  
CLICK THE RIGHT MOUSE  
BUTTON.  
About...  
Craft Interface...  
Create Connection...  
View Connection...  
Configure Alarm Threshold...  
Configure Software...  
Reflash Boot Image...  
GNE-1  
11718-D  
Figure 787-1. Cellworx Vision GUI Configuration Pull Down Menu  
Page 2-378  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 6 of 12  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
CREATE A CONNECTION TOOL  
GNE-1  
DRAWING A CONNECTION  
BETWEEN TWO NEs USING  
THE CREATE A CONNECTION  
TOOL. CLICK AND HOLD LEFT  
BUTTON ON MOUSE OVER  
FIRST NE AND DRAG TO  
DESTINATION NE.  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 21:35 GMT Time: 21:35  
10905-D  
Figure 787-2. Cellworx Vision Click and Drag Connection Creation  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
ENTER A UNIQUE  
CONNECTION NAME.  
Administrative State:  
Connection Name:  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
Locked  
Connection Type: ATM VP MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
SELECT THE CONNECTION  
TYPE.  
Please press Add to add the selected interface as a leaf of the multicast connection.  
Root Endpoint  
SELECT A ROOT NE, CARD/  
SLOT, AND NETWORK  
INTERFACE TYPE.  
Root Network Element:  
Slot / Card Type:  
Network Interface / Interface Type:  
ds3crs:S-12:P-1:L-atm-1/ UNI  
2 E1 Multi 1  
3 T1 Multi 1  
10 T3 TMUX MULTI 1  
12 T3 CRS  
Network Element 1  
Network Element 2  
Network Element 3  
ds3crs:S-12:P-2:L-atm-1/ UNI  
ds3crs:S-12:P-3:L-atm-1/ UNI  
13 T3 CRS  
14 155 MM CRS  
15 155 MM CRS  
Leaf Endpoint  
Network Interface/  
Interface Type:  
DISPLAYS SELECTED LEAF  
INTERFACES.  
Leaf Network Element: Slot / Card Type:  
Leaf Interface:  
SELECT A LEAF NE,  
CARD/SLOT, AND  
NETWORK INTERFACE  
TYPE.  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
t3tmuxexp:S-10P-1:L  
Network Element 1  
Network Element 2  
Network Element 3  
2 E1 Multi 1  
3 T1 Multi 1  
10 T3 TMUX MULTI 1  
12 T3 CRS  
NE: 2 / ds3crs:S-12:  
NE: 2 / ds3crs:S-12:  
ADDS HIGHLIGHTED  
NETWORK INTERFACE TO  
LEAF INTERFACE LIST. HIT  
APPLY BEFORE CONTINUING.  
Add>>  
13 T3 CRS  
14 155 MM CRS  
Remove  
DELETES HIGHLIGHTED  
LEAF INTERFACE FROM  
LEAF INTERFACE LIST. HIT  
APPLY BEFORE CONTINUING.  
Apply  
Refresh  
Next>>  
Close  
SENDS CHANGES ONCE  
ALL DATA HAS BEEN  
ENTERED.  
REFRESHES SCREEN  
AND DISPLAYS ANY  
CONFIGURATION  
CHANGES.  
MOVES TO NEXT  
CLOSES WINDOW  
WITHOUT SAVING  
CHANGES.  
SCREEN FOR MORE  
CONFIGURATION  
CHANGES.  
14463-A  
Figure 787-3. ATM VP Multicasting Configuration Screen  
Page 2-379  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 7 of 12  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
TYPE IN A UNIQUE  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
CONNECTION NAME.  
Connection Name:  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
LOCKS OR UNLOCKS  
ROOT END OF THE  
CONNECTION.  
CONNECTION TYPE IS  
DISPLAYED HERE.  
Connection Type: ATM VP MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-1  
SPECIFIES IF THE CONNECTION  
IS A SEGMENT ENDPOINT AND  
IF NDC IS DESIRED.  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-12:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
VPI / NE / Rate(Kbps)  
Service Provider Profile  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
Remote Provider Identifier:  
Remote Interface Identifier:  
SELECT A VPI NUMBER  
FOR THE ROOT ENDPOINT.  
ENTER LEAF ENDPOINT  
SPECIFIC IDENTIFIERS  
FOR USAGE INFORMATION  
IF DESIRED.  
VCC Service  
VPI  
0
VCI  
0
CLICK AND DRAG TO  
EXPAND VIEWING AREA.  
Leaf Network Element: Network Element 2  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
SPECIFIOES IF THIS LEAF  
IS A SEGMENT ENDPOINT AND  
IF NDC IS DESIRED.  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
Leaf Interfaces:  
Page  
1
SELECT AN AVAILABLE LEAF  
INTERFACE FROM THE LIST.  
LEAFS WITH ASTERISKS ARE  
ALREADY ASSIGNED.  
** NE-2 / ds3crs:S-12:P-3:L-atm:I-1  
** NE-2 / oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
NE-2 / oc3cmm:S-15:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
VPI / NE / Rate (Kbps) :  
0
1
UPDATES THE LEAF  
ASSIGN CONTIGUOUS VPI  
NUMBERS FOR THE LEAF  
ENDPOINT. EACH LEAF  
ADDED WILL UTILIZE THE  
SAME VPI NUMBERS.  
INFORMATION AFTER ALL  
DATA HAS BEEN ENTERED.  
LEAF INTERFACE WILL  
INDICATE IT IS ASSIGNED  
VIA DOUBNLE ASTERISKS.  
2 / NE-1/ 64Kbps  
3
4
5
Service Provider Profile  
Configured Leaf Interfaces:  
Remote Interface Identifier:  
Remote Connection Identifier:  
VPI VCI  
0
DISPLAYS CONFIGURED  
LEAF INTERFACES AFTER  
"UPDATE LEAF" HAS BEEN  
SELECTED.  
ENTER LEAF ENDPOINT  
SPECIFIC IDENTIFIERS  
FOR USAGE INFORMATION  
IF DESIRED.  
NE: 2 / ds3crs:S-12:P-3:L-atm:I-1  
NE: 2 / oc3cmm:S-14:P-3:L-atm:I-1  
Update  
Leaf  
0
0
<< Previous  
Close  
Next >>  
CONTINUES TO THE NEXT  
CONNECTION CONFIGURATION  
SCREEN AFTER ALL DATA HAS  
BEEN ENTERED AND LEAFS HAVE  
BEEN UPDATED.  
CLOSES THE SCREEN AND  
ABORTS THE CONNECTION  
CONFIGURATION.  
RETURNS TO THE PREVIOUS  
CONNECTION CONFIGURATION  
SCREEN.  
14457-A  
Figure 787-4. ATM VP Multicasting Configuration Window – Leaf Assignments  
Table 787-1. VP Multicast Connection Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
OPTIONS  
DESCRIPTION  
Segment Endpoint Single selection box Sets end of connection as a segment endpoint for OAM cells.  
Ingress / Egress  
NDC  
On or Off  
Enables or disables the network data collection for endpoint.  
VPI/NE/Rate  
User Selectable  
The VPI available is determined by the card interface  
configuration. VPI with asterisks before them are already  
utilized and not selectable.  
Remote Provider  
Identifier  
User Defined  
Enter alphanumeric data to help identify the far end provider  
interface.  
Remote Interface  
Identifier  
VPI  
VCI  
Enter the VPI and VCI numbers to identify the remote  
provider circuit. This data may be utilized for usage  
information.  
Leaf Interface  
User Selectable  
This list displays the configured leaf endpoints selected from  
the previous configuration window. Ids with asterisks before  
them are already utilized and not selectable.  
Page 2-380  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 8 of 12  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
Connection Name:  
Connection Type: ATM VP MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-1  
UNI/NNI: ds3crs:S-12:P-2:L-atm:I-1 VPI: 2 VCI:  
Service Class Type:  
CBR  
Ingress Traffic Contracts:  
<NEW>  
cbr-15  
Apply  
Refresh  
<< Previous  
Close  
14456-A  
Figure 787-5. VP Multicast Connection Traffic Contract Selection Window  
X
Cellworx Vision:Traffic Contract Configuration  
TYPE IN A NAME FOR  
TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
Traffic Contract Name:  
********  
OR  
Existing Traffic Contract:  
SELECT FROM EXISTING  
TRAFFIC CONTRACTS  
DISPLAYED HERE.  
CBR=1.5 MB  
SELECT THE SERVICE  
CLASS TYPE OR VERIFY  
ENABLED OPTION.  
Traffic Contract Type  
ATM Constant Bit Rate (CBR), QoS Class I  
ATM Variable Bit Rate (VBR), QoS Class II  
ATM Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR), QoS Class Unspecified  
FR, QoS Class II  
Kbps  
Rate Unit  
SELECT KBPS OR CELLS  
ENTER THE PCR FOR ATM  
CBR QOS CLASS 1, AND  
ATM VBR QOS CLASS II.  
Peak Cell Rate (PCR):  
Cell Loss Priority (CLP) = 0 +1  
64  
0
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) microseconds:  
Note: Selecting 0 for CDVT will cause the board default  
to be chosen. Default values are:  
DS1/E1 = 4150 DS34 = 1550 OC3 = 1400 OC12 = 350  
Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) :  
SELECT OPTIONS TO  
DETERMINE SERVICE  
CLASS TYPE FOR VBR  
CONNECTIONS (VBR.1,  
VBR.2, OR VBR.3).  
CLP=0  
CLP= 0 + 1  
Tagging  
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) Cells:  
Real Time  
Close  
Refresh  
Apply  
Delete  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND CREATES NEW  
TRAFFIC CONTRACT.  
DELETES SELECTED  
TRAFFIC CONTRACT.  
REFRESHES DATA  
AFTER SELECTIONS CONTRACT SCREEN.  
HAVE BEEN APPLIED.  
CLOSES TRAFFIC  
0026-002  
Figure 787-6. Traffic Contract Creation Window  
Page 2-381  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 9 of 12  
Table 787-2. User Selectable Service Class Types and Parameters  
SERVICE CLASS TYPE  
SELECTABLE PARAMETERS  
COMMENTS  
ATM CBR, QoS Class I  
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) Kbps  
Card type and contract dependent.  
Cell Loss Priority (CLP) = 0 + 1 QoS Class I defined, not selectable.  
ATM VBR, QoS Class II  
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) Kbps  
Card type and contract dependent, CLP always  
equals 0+1.  
Sustained cell rate (SCR)  
Cell Loss Priority (CLP)  
Card type and contract dependent.  
Determines if SCR connection is a VBR.1  
(CLP=0+1) or VBR.2 (CLP=0).  
Tagging  
Determines if SCR connection is a VBR.2 (No)  
or VBR.3 (Yes).  
Maximum Burst Size (MBS)  
Predetermined selectable values of 32, 50, 100,  
150, or 210. See note below.  
ATM UBR, QoS Class  
Unspecified  
None  
No Selectable Parameters for UBR service.  
User defined according to traffic contract.  
Cell Delay Variation  
Tolerance  
Specified in microseconds  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Software  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
NMIC Platform  
10963-D  
Figure 787-7. GUI Connection Menu Tree  
Page 2-382  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 10 of 12  
X
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Connection Filter  
SELECT A TAB TO FILTER  
FOR A SPECIFIC ITEM.  
Network  
Traffic  
FR  
ATM  
CES  
Connection  
Connection Types:  
SELECT AN ITEM IN THE  
FOLDERS TO FILTER.  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES - ATM VC  
CES - CES  
FR - ATM VC  
FR - FR  
ATM VP MULTICAST  
ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Retrieve All Selected Type Connections  
SELECT THE APPLY BUTTON  
TO RETRIEVE CONNECTION  
INFO FOR FILTERED  
Close  
SELECTION.  
Reset  
Apply  
11000-F  
Figure 787-8 Connection Filter Window  
Table 787-3. Cellworx Vision Connection Filter Descriptions  
FILTER TYPE  
Connection  
OPTIONS  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES -VC  
DESCRIPTION  
Selects all ATM VP connections.  
Selects all ATM VC connections.  
Selects all Circuit Emulation Service to ATM Virtual  
Channel connections.  
CES - CES  
Selects all Circuit Emulation Service connections  
(Phase II).  
FR-ATM VC  
FR-FR  
Frame Relay not supported for Release 2.0 software  
packages.  
Network  
Traffic  
Administrator defined. Allows user to specify certain NEs when filtering  
connections.  
Administrator defined. Selects the traffic contract to be queried. These are  
user-defined names. Several connections may utilize the  
same traffic contract.  
ATM  
Administrator defined. Selects the UNI or NNI to be queried. These are user-  
defined names and apply to specific ports.  
Page 2-383  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 11 of 12  
USE FORMAT TO SPECIFY  
ORDER BY NE OR NAME,  
OR RETURN TO FILTER  
WINDOW.  
DISPLAYS THE STATUS  
OF EACH CONNECTION.  
INDICATES NUMBER  
OF LEAVES ON THE  
CONNECTION.  
USE VIEW TO DISPLAY  
NDC DATA.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection List: ATM Bundled VC MULTICAST  
Format  
View  
Connection Name  
Root NE  
NE-1  
NE-1  
NE3  
Number of Leaves  
Status  
Broadcast-1 Uptown  
Broadcast-2 Downtown  
Video Trans-Office  
3
6
2
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
INCOMPLETE  
Clear Selected  
Status...  
Configure...  
Delete  
Retry  
Close  
RETRIEVES STATUS  
OF SELECTED  
CONNECTION IN  
A NEW WINDOW.  
BRINGS UP A  
CONFIGURATION  
WINDOW FOR  
SELECTED  
DELETES  
SELECTED  
CONNECTION.  
TRIES TO  
REMOVES  
HIGHLIGHT  
FRO SELECTED  
CONNECTIONS.  
CLOSES  
WINDOW.  
COMPLETE  
SELECTED  
CONNECTION.  
CONNECTION.  
14466-A  
Figure 787-9. ATM VP Multicast Connection List Screen  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Status  
Administrative State:  
Connection Name: VP-Multicast  
Locked  
Connection Type: ATM VP MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-2  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
VPI: 5  
VCI:  
5
Administrative State: up  
Traffic Contract: cbr-1.5  
Leaf Endpoints:  
Network Element  
Interface  
VPI  
Status  
NE-2  
NE-4  
NE-6  
oc3cmm:S-11:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
ds3crs:S-8:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
t1multi1:S-14:P-5:L-atm:I-1  
2
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
2
2
VCI: 32  
Administrative State: up  
Configure  
Refresh  
Close  
CONFIGURES THE  
SELECTED LEAF  
ENDPOINT.  
REFRESHES STATUS  
INFORMATION.  
CLOSES WINDOW.  
14469-A  
Figure 787-10. ATM VP Multicast Connection Status Window  
Page 2-384  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-787  
Page 12 of 12  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
Administrative State:  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION NAME.  
Connection Name: Banko 1 Main St VP Multicast  
Locked  
LOCKS OUT ENTIRE  
CONNECTION.  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION TYPE  
SPECIFIED IN SEARCH.  
Connection Type: ATM VP MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-2  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
VPI:  
5
VCI: 32  
SELECT USAGE DATA OR  
NDC COLLECTION FOR  
ROOT ENDPOINT. HIT  
APPLY TO UPDATE ANY  
CHANGES.  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
DISPLAYS THE STATUS OF  
LEAF ENDPOINTS. IF  
INCOMPLETE OR FAILED,  
HIGHLIGHT AND SELECT  
THE RETRY BUTTON AT THE  
BOTTOM OF THE WINDOW.  
Leaf Endpoints:  
Network Element  
Interface  
VPI  
Status  
NE-6  
NE-8  
oc3cmm:S-11:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
ds3crs:S-11:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
5
5
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
USE SLIDER BAR TO VIEW  
MORE DATA IF AVAILABLE.  
VCI: 32  
LOCK OUT ANY SELECTED  
LEAF ENDPOINT.  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
Ingress NDC  
Unlocked  
Segment Endpoint  
Egress NDC  
HIGHLIGHT A LEAF AND  
SELECT USAGE DATA  
OR NDC COLLECTION.  
HIT APPLY TO UPDATE  
ANY CHANGES.  
Add  
Leaf  
Retry  
Leaf  
Delete  
Leaf  
CLOSES WINDOW.  
Apply  
Close  
Refresh  
USE TO APPLY NEW  
NDC AND USAGE  
DATA SELECTIONS.  
USE TO REFRESH  
DISPLAYED DATA  
AFTER RETRY, ADD, CONNECTION.  
OR DELETE LEAF  
USE TO RETRY  
A FAILED LEAF  
TAKES USER TO  
DELETES THE HIGHLIGHTED  
LEAF ENDPOINT.  
A NEW LEAF  
CONFIGURATION  
WINDOW.  
CONNECTIONS.  
Figure 787-11. ATM VP Multicast Leaf Endpoint Status Window  
Page 2-385  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-788  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE FT1 FRS CARD STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI display for  
the FT1 FRS card status. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI  
display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the FT1 FRS card located in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at the top  
of the window.  
2. The FT1 FRS card display appears as shown in Figure 788-1. Click the small block  
between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downward to view all the status  
information. Refer to Table 788-1 for definitions of status information provided.  
3. Select each port on the card to view the port status.  
4. Select Close button to return to the chassis level view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T1 Cell Emulation Service  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Card:T1 MULTI 1  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Up  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection State:  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
8
1
Availabli  
Not Protected  
T1 MULTI  
1
Port Level  
Line State:  
Receive:  
Transmit:  
Xmt AIS  
No Alarm  
XMT Far End LOF  
RCV AIS  
RCV Far End LOF  
RCV Test Code  
Other:  
ADC  
LOF  
Status  
Active  
APS  
LOS  
Loopback State  
Other Failure  
Port  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
TC Alarm Status: LCD Alarm  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Configuration:  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
13449-B  
Figure 788-1. FT1 FRS Card Status Window  
Page 2-386  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-788  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 788-1. Display FT1 FRS Card Status Definitions  
STATUS DEFINITION  
CARD LEVEL  
ITEM  
ACTION  
Operational  
State  
Up  
Card is functioning properly.  
No action required.  
Down  
Card is not functioning  
properly, is in reset mode, or  
failed. Check Admin state.  
Verify card is installed, check for failure  
indications, or provision card for service  
per DLP-785.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
Wait a few seconds for operations to  
currently know the operational complete and update the screen.  
status.  
Availability  
State  
Available  
In Test  
Failed  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing  
test signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to update.  
Card has failed operation and  
system has placed it out of  
service.  
Card may be performing a reset, or the  
bus may be busy.  
Power Off  
No power to the card.  
Check power source, replace card if  
source is good per DLP-777.  
Not Installed Card is not currently installed  
in selected slot of the shelf.  
If required, install card in selected slot  
per DLP-777 and provision per DLP-  
785.  
Off Line  
Card is installed and  
provisioned but currently off  
If required, set module on line per DLP-  
785.  
line.  
Dependency  
Card is supplying timing  
reference, traffic, or other data  
to the system.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not Wait for processor to update current  
currently know the availability status, may need to perform a manual  
state.  
reset of SC per DLP-773.  
Protection  
Status  
Not  
Protected  
Not Protected  
Protection operation on FRS cards is not  
available with release 3.1 software.  
(continued)  
Page 2-387  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-788  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 788-1. Display FT1 FRS Card Status Definitions, continued  
ITEM  
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
PORT LEVEL  
ACTION  
Line Status  
No Alarm  
FT1 line is operating within  
normal parameters.  
No action required.  
RCV Far End  
LOF  
Receive Far End Loss of  
Frame  
Check VP connection per DLP-709,  
and local access interface.  
RCV AIS  
Card transmitting a Remote  
Check VP connection per DLP-709,  
Alarm Indication signal (RAI) and remote transmit end.  
to customer equipment.  
RCV Far End  
LOMF  
Card receiving a Loss Of  
Multi-Frame indication from  
far end NE.  
Check VP connection per DLP-709,  
and local access interface.  
RCV Test Code Card is receiving a test signal  
input.  
Check with administrator for testing  
activity  
XMT Far End  
LOF  
Transmit Far End Loss of  
Frame  
Far end NE has lost it’s framing, near  
end is transmitting alarm back.  
XMT AIS  
Card is transmitting an Alarm  
Indication Signal (AIS).  
Check local FT1 signal input and EIM.  
Verify correct frame format setting  
and signal input.  
LOF  
Input signal frame format not  
recognized.  
Check signal input at EIM and DSX.  
LOS  
No input signal being  
received.  
Check customer end for  
Loopback State Card has been manually set to  
loop signal back to customer  
equipment.  
troubleshooting activity. If required,  
release loopback per DLP-772.  
Take appropriate actions according to  
local practices.  
Other Failure  
Card is experiencing a failure  
other than these listed.  
Page 2-388  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-789  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE FE1 FRS CARD STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI display for  
the FE1 FRS card status. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI  
display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the FE1 FRS card located in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at the top  
of the window.  
2. The FE1 FRS card display appears as shown in Figure 789-1. Click the small block  
between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downward to view all the status  
information. Refer to Table 789-1 for definitions of status information provided.  
3. Select each port on the card to view the port status.  
4. Select Close button to return to the chassis level view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - FE1 Frame Relay Service  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id: 21  
Status:  
Card Level  
Card: FE1 FRS  
Slot Number: 13  
Operational State:  
Up  
Available  
Not Protected  
Availability State:  
Protection State:  
Port Number:  
1
FE1  
FRS  
Port Level  
Line State:  
Recieve:  
Transmit:  
XMT Far End LOF  
XMT AIS  
No Alarm  
RCV Far End LOF  
RCV AIS  
XMT Far End LOMF  
RCV Far End LOMF  
RCV Test Code  
Other:  
ADC  
LOF  
Status  
Active  
APS  
LOS  
Loopback State  
Other Failure  
Port  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Configuration:  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
0026-010  
Figure 789-1. FE1 FRS Card Status Window  
Page 2-389  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-789  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 789-1. Display FE1 FRS Card Status Definitions  
STATUS DEFINITION  
Up Card is functioning properly.  
ITEM  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Operational  
State  
Down  
Card is not functioning  
Verify card is installed, check for failure  
indications, or provision card for service  
per DLP-784.  
properly, is in reset mode, or  
failed. Check Admin state.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
Wait a few seconds for operations to  
currently know the operational complete and update the screen.  
status.  
Availability  
State  
Available  
In Test  
Failed  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing  
test signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to update.  
Card has failed operation and  
system has placed it out of  
service.  
Card may be performing a reset, or the  
bus may be busy.  
Power Off  
No power to the card.  
Check power source, replace card if  
source is good per DLP-777.  
Not Installed Card is not currently installed  
in selected slot of the shelf.  
If required, install card in selected slot  
per DLP-777 and provision per DLP-  
784.  
Off Line  
Card is installed and  
provisioned but currently off  
line.  
If required, set module on line per DLP-  
784.  
Dependency Card is supplying timing  
Perform a soft switch over (manual) per  
reference, traffic, or other data DLP-771 to release card dependency if  
to the system. removing.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not Wait for processor to update current  
currently know the availability status, may need to perform a manual  
status.  
reset of SC per DLP-773.  
Protection  
State  
Not  
Protected  
Not Protected  
Protection operation on FRS cards is not  
available with release 3.1 software.  
(continued)  
Page 2-390  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-789  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 789-1. Display FE1 FRS Card Status Definitions, continued  
ITEM  
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Line State  
No Alarm  
FE1 line is operating within  
normal parameters.  
RCV Far End  
LOF  
Receive Far End Loss of  
Frame  
Check connection per DLP-709, and  
local access interface.  
RCV AIS  
Card transmitting a Remote  
Check connection per DLP-709, and  
Alarm Indication signal (RAI) remote transmit end.  
to customer equipment.  
RCV Far End  
LOMF  
Card receiving a Loss Of  
Multi-Frame indication from  
far end.  
Check connection per DLP-709, and  
local access interface.  
RCV Test  
Code  
Card is receiving a test signal  
input.  
Check with administrator for testing  
activity.  
XMT Far End  
LOF  
Transmit Far End Loss of  
Frame  
Far end NE has lost it’s framing,  
near end is transmitting alarm back.  
XMT AIS  
LOF  
Card is transmitting an Alarm  
Indication Signal (AIS).  
Check local FE1 signal input and  
EIM.  
Input signal frame format not  
recognized.  
Verify correct frame format setting  
and signal input.  
LOS  
No input signal being  
received.  
Check signal input at EIM and DSX.  
Check customer end for  
Loopback  
State  
Card has been manually set to  
loop signal back to customer  
equipment.  
troubleshooting activity. If required,  
release loopback per DLP-772.  
Take appropriate actions according  
to local practices.  
Other Failure  
Card is experiencing a failure  
other than these listed.  
Page 2-391  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 1 of 14  
CREATE AN ATM VC BUNDLED MULTICAST CONNECTION  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to provision a UBR, CBR or VBR real  
time or non-real time VC bundled multicast connection through the Cellworx STN network.  
Multicasting is an extension of point to point CRS which allows the user to establish uni-  
directional PVCs to transport ATM cells across the Cellworx ring from one NE (called root) to  
one or more NEs (called leaves). Creating a VC multicast connection entails selecting the  
originating and terminating NEs, cards, ports and interfaces. For Frame Relay connections refer  
to DLP-786 and for ATM VP Multicast connections, refer to DLP-787. Traffic contracts will  
also be covered in this procedure. Prerequisites of establishing a connection are:  
•
•
A discovery must have been performed on the system.  
The connection endpoints hardware (cards/ports) must be provisioned and in service  
(unlocked) per NTP-006.  
Note: User may navigate through the GUI menus using the mouse or by using the Alt  
key plus the underlined letters in the menus simultaneously, and then the arrow keys to  
scroll up, down, or across. Refer to the Graphical User Interface Operation in Section 2  
of this document.  
1. There are three ways to initiate the process of establishing a connection.  
a. Using the left mouse button, select the Configuration pull-down menu, click on  
Connection, and then Create (or press Alt+C, Alt+N, Alt+C.) Refer to Figure 790-1.  
b. Using the Select tool (arrow) on the left toolbar, select the NE where the connection is  
originating by a click and hold on the right mouse button. A pop-up window appears as  
shown in Figure 790-1. Continue holding down the right mouse button and move the  
cursor to select Create Connection. Release the mouse button.  
c. Using the left mouse button, select the connection tool on the toolbar to the left of the  
workspace. Click and hold the left mouse button down on the NE where the connection  
is originating and drag to the destination NE. A line is drawn between the two NEs as the  
crosshair pointer progresses. Refer to Figure 790-2.  
2. The Cellworx Vision Connection Configuration window appears displaying all NEs  
discovered in the network in both the top section and the bottom section of the window.  
Refer to Figure 790-3. Ensure the originating and destination NEs are highlighted, if not,  
select them using the left mouse button.  
3. Enter an identification for the connection in the Connection Name text box using any  
alphanumeric and special characters. This ID should be unique in character so the user can  
discern between it and other connections for management purposes. The IDs assigned here  
will be displayed when viewing connections. The system will allow duplicate connection  
names but will also assign a unique ID to the connection if the user does not enter one.  
Page 2-392  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 2 of 14  
4. Next specify the connection type by left mouse clicking on the Connection Type pull down  
menu and selecting ATM VC BUNDLED MULTICAST.  
5. Using the left mouse button, select the desired Root Network Element, Slot/Card Type, and  
Network Interface/Interface Type for the originating “Root” endpoint.  
6. Using the left mouse button, select the desired Leaf Network Element, Slot/Card Type, and  
Network Interface/Interface Type for the destination “Leaf” endpoint. After highlighting  
the Interface Type, select the Add button to define the Interface Type as a Leaf Interface.  
The highlighted interface should now be displayed in the Leaf Interface box to the right of  
the screen, and the interface card is removed from the Slot/Card Type box.  
7. Multiple interface types may be selected as leaf interfaces by selecting them and clicking  
on the Add button to move them to the Leaf Interface box. Only one interface may be  
utilized per card for release 3.1 software packages. Once all leaf interfaces are selected for  
the VC bundled multicast connection, click on Apply using the left mouse button.  
Note: If an interface was inadvertently selected as a Leaf Interface, it may be removed  
from the Leaf Interface box by highlighting it and clicking on the Delete button.  
8. The next configuration screen displays the root and leaf network elements in a split screen.  
Refer to Figure 790-4 for an example. At the upper section of the screen, select the Root  
Network Element VPI/NE/Rate (Kbps) to be utilized by using the left mouse button to  
click on and highlight the VPI number. VPIs with asterisks in front of them have already  
been utilized.  
9. Next select the VCI numbers in the VCI/NE/Rate (Kbps) box. These VCI were defined  
during the card interface configuration. Refer to NTP-009 for card configuration procedures  
if needed. Multiple VCIs may be selected (must be contiguous) by clicking on the first VCI  
selection and dragging to the last one. The user may opt to click on the first VCI, hold the  
shift key, and click on the last VCI to select multiple selections. VCIs with asterisks in  
front of them have already been utilized. These VCIs will be transported within the VPI  
selected. The quantity of VCIs selected must match the Leaf VCI quantity.  
10. Once the Root VCIs are selected, the leaf interfaces become selectable at the lower section  
of the screen. Use the left mouse button to select them. These define each interface within  
the network where the Root VPI will terminate. If the leaf interfaces are already  
“configured”, they will have two asterisks preceding the interface identification, otherwise  
they may still be selected for configuration. Click on the interface to highlight it.  
11. Next select a VPI interface displayed in the VPI/NE/Rate (Kbps) box. The number of VPIs  
for this port should have been configured at the port level during card interface  
configuration. Refer to NTP-009 for card configuration procedures if needed.  
12. Next select the VCI numbers for the leaf interfaces in the VCI/NE/Rate (Kbps) box.  
Multiple VCIs may be selected but must be contiguous. VCIs with asterisks in front of  
them have already been utilized. These VCIs will be duplicated for each leaf interface  
Page 2-393  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 3 of 14  
configured. The quantity of VCIs selected must match the Root VCI quantity or an error  
message will appear asking the user to select the same quantity of VCIs selected at the root  
endpoint.  
13. Click on the Update Leaf button to configure the leaf endpoint. The Leaf interface in the  
first box will now have the asterisks before the definition string showing it is already  
configured. It should now be observed in the Configured Leaf Interface box. If a leaf was  
misconfigured, highlight it in the Configured Leaf Interface box and click on Reset Leaf to  
remove it and start over, otherwise, select the next leaf interface to configure. When  
selecting the VCIs for the second and consecutive leaf endpoints, the VCI numbers must be  
identical (ex. al leaves use VCI numbers 32 through 36 on a multi-point connection).  
14. Once all the Leaf interfaces are configured, select the Next button to continue  
Note: If the user tries to select the Next>>button before configuring all the leaf  
interfaces, an error message appears.  
15. The next window appears and allows the user to create a VCI “translation” from the Root to  
the Leaf Endpoint. Refer to Figure 790-5. Select the Root VCI number using the drop down  
arrow and then the Leaf VCI below it.  
16. Select the >> button to map the VCIs and verify they are moved to the Selected Translation  
box to the right. The user may opt not to mix the VCI translation by just selecting the >>  
button multiple times to move each VCI to the translation box for a one to one match up. If  
the VCIs desired are not displayed, the user may use the <<Previous button at the bottom  
of the window to return to the previous configuration screen to reallocate the VCI numbers  
being utilized.  
17. Once all VCIs are mapped in the Selected Translation box, use the left mouse button to  
select the Next>> button at the bottom of the window.  
18. The next screen appears allowing the user to specify the usage information (NDC) and  
service provider information for each VCI. Refer to Figure 790-6. Select the Root VCI  
being configured by left mouse clicking on the down arrow and selecting a VCI from the  
list.  
19. Select the Segment Endpoint and Ingress NDC boxes if desired. Refer to Table 790-1 for  
definitions of each option for Service Provider and network data collection information.  
20. Select a Leaf Interface from the list provided at the lower half of the window. Select the  
Root VCI being configured by left mouse clicking on the down arrow and selecting a VCI  
from the list.  
21. Select the configuration options as needed for the VCI using Table 790-1 as a reference.  
Configure each leaf interface and each VCI number. Once completed, select the Next>>  
button at the bottom of the window to continue to the next configuration window.  
Page 2-394  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 4 of 14  
22. The next screen allows the user to select a pre-configured traffic contract for the connection  
or create a new traffic contract. Refer to Figure 790-7 for an example. Select the Service  
Class Type by clicking on the button and selecting CBR, UBR, UBR1, NRT-VBR1, 2, or 3.  
Refer to Table 790-1 for definitions of these service class types.  
23. Once the service class type is selected, the available traffic contracts for that type are  
displayed in the Ingress Traffic Contract box. Select the Root VC to assign a traffic  
contract from the list provided.  
24. If a usable contract is not available for the connection, a new one can be created by double-  
clicking on <New>. If creating a new contract, go to step 28, otherwise continue. Select an  
existing traffic contract from the list provided.  
25. Using the left mouse button, click on the Update Leaf box to assign the interface a traffic  
contract. It should now be observed in the Configured Root VCs box to the right. The Root  
VC box on the left will show the interface has now been configured by displaying two  
asterisks before the root VC id. To remove the traffic contract/Root VC configuration, left  
mouse click on the configured root VC to highlight it and select the Reset Root button.  
26. Assign the traffic contracts for each root VC. Multiple root VC ids may be selected  
simultaneously by a left mouse click and hold on the first VC, then drag to the last VC. The  
user may also click on the first VC, then hold the shift key down and select the last VC of  
the range.  
27. Click on the Apply button to configure the connection. The system takes several seconds to  
complete the connection mapping. Once completed it will respond with “Configuration  
Successful”. Click on the Close button to close the configuration window and return to the  
GUI main screen. Go to step 45.  
28. The Traffic Contract Configuration screen appears similar to the one shown in Figure 790-  
8. Type in a traffic contract name that will be intuitive to the user at a glance (i.e., specify  
the data rate in the name, etc.). Existing contracts listed in the next box may be selected to  
pre-define the options if creating an identical contract with a different name.  
29. Select a Traffic Contract Type by clicking on the desired button. Refer to Table 790-2 for  
all traffic contract configuration options.  
30. Select a rate unit (Kpbs, Mbps) and enter the peak cell rate for the connection. This rate  
should not exceed the maximum data rate for any of the leaf endpoints (i.e., If the Root  
endpoint is a 155SM and the leaf endpoints are T3 and T1 cards, the maximum cell rate for  
the connection should be 1.544 Mbps as anything higher would be discarded.)  
31. Enter a Cell Delay Variation Tolerance specified in microseconds.  
Page 2-395  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 5 of 14  
32. Select the Sustainable Cell rate, CLP, tagging, and MBS as desired if applicable (ATM  
VBR QOS Class II).  
33. Click on the Apply button using the left mouse button to create the traffic contract. The  
system should respond with “Traffic Contract <name of contract> created successfully.”  
Select the OK button to close the message window, and then select Close on the traffic  
contract configuration window.  
34. The previous Connection Configuration window appears again displaying the Ingress  
Traffic Contract types. If the traffic contract just created is not displayed, ensure that the  
correct Service Class Type is selected. Select the traffic contract and click on the Apply  
button at the bottom of the screen.  
35. The system may take several seconds to complete the connection and responds with  
“Configuration Successful”. Verify the connection configuration was completed by  
accessing the Subnetwork Connection Filter window using one of the following methods  
from the GUI main window:  
a. Using the left mouse button, select Configuration, Connection, and View.  
Refer to Figure 790-9.  
b. Using the direct selection keys, enter Alt+C, Alt+N then Alt+V. Refer to  
Figure 790-9.  
c. Using the right mouse button, position the cursor over the NE, click and hold  
the button, select View Connections, and release the button.  
d. Using the left mouse button, select the connection icon above the workspace.  
36 The Connection Filter window appears as shown in Figure 790-10. Select a topic to filter  
information from using the folder tabs shown. These topics allow the user to retrieve only  
the information desired by Connection type, Network available, Traffic contract, or ATM  
traffic by port. The user may also specify all of these by using the All checkbox. Refer to  
Table 790-2 for descriptions of each filter type.  
Select the ATM BUNDLED VC  
MULTICAST button and the Apply at the bottom of the screen.  
37 The Connection List window appears as shown in the example in Figure 790-11. The list of  
connections can be displayed alphabetically by the connection name or by the NE name by  
using the Format pull down menu and selecting Sort by Name, or Sort by NE. The status  
column indicates the most current information for the connection. The status may be listed  
as INCOMPLETE, FUNCTIONAL, or as an UNKNOWN STATE. This screen displays up  
to 100 entries per page by using the up and down slide button on the right side of the  
window. If more than 100 entries are available for viewing, the user may use the slide bar  
on the right side of the window to scroll through the entries.  
38 If a connection is displayed as INCOMPLETE, select it using the left mouse button to  
highlight it and then select Retry to attempt to establish the connection.  
Page 2-396  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 6 of 14  
39. The user may delete a connection, or multiple connections, by selecting them using the left  
mouse button, and then selecting Delete. A confirmation message will appear requiring the  
user to select OK or Cancel. If a problem exists with the hardware between the NMIC and  
the endpoint shelf controllers, a denial message may appear detailing why the connection  
could not be deleted. Refer to DLP-713 and the trouble log for any error reports.  
40. To gain status information of a certain connection, the user double clicks on the connection  
using the left mouse button, or single clicks to highlight the connection followed by  
selecting Status at the bottom left of the window.  
41. The Connection Status window appears similar to the one shown in Figure 790-12. The  
connection name is displayed at the top of the window. The administrative state may show  
as Locked or Unlocked. Locked indicates the connection is taken down at both ends, no  
traffic is allowed on the ring. Unlocked indicates the connection is operable in a normal  
state. The user may change options on the connection by selecting Configure. Access to the  
Configure screen can also be obtained from the previous Connection List screen via the  
Configure selection button found there.  
42. The Connection Configuration screen appears. Refer to Figure 790-13. Again the  
connection name is displayed at the top of the window. The Root end of the connection can  
be taken down by changing the Administrative State to Locked using the button at the top  
right corner of the window and then selecting Apply. Similarly, the leaf endpoint can be  
locked using the feature at the bottom left of the screen.  
43. Either or both ends of the connection can be configured as OAM cell segment endpoints by  
selecting the Segment Endpoint box displayed at each section of the screen. This  
functionality can be used for maintenance or troubleshooting purposes. Select Apply to  
send configuration changes to the database or close to abort any changes.  
44. The “Configuration Change Completed” window appears. Select OK.  
45. Leaves may be added to the connection using the Add Leaf button at the bottom of the  
screen. Refer to DLP-791 to add a leaf to an existing connection.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-397  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 7 of 14  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management Syste
CREATE CONNECTION  
MENU TREE ACCESS  
USING MOUSE SELECTION  
OR "ALT+C, ALT+N, AND  
ALT+C".  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
NE DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL  
Create...  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
CREATE A CONNECTION  
TOOL  
NMIC Platform  
NE POP UP WINDOW  
ACCESSED USING THE  
NE DIRECT SELECTION  
TOOL. SELECT TOOL  
WITH LEFT MOUSE CLICK,  
POSITION ON AN NE, AND  
CLICK THE RIGHT MOUSE  
BUTTON.  
About...  
Craft Interface...  
Create Connection...  
View Connection...  
Configure Alarm Threshold...  
Configure Software...  
Reflash Boot Image...  
GNE-1  
11718-D  
Figure 790-1. Cellworx Vision GUI Configuration Pull Down Menu  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
CREATE A CONNECTION TOOL  
GNE-1  
DRAWING A CONNECTION  
BETWEEN TWO NEs USING  
THE CREATE A CONNECTION  
TOOL. CLICK AND HOLD LEFT  
BUTTON ON MOUSE OVER  
FIRST NE AND DRAG TO  
DESTINATION NE.  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 21:35 GMT Time: 21:35  
10905-D  
Figure 790-2. Cellworx Vision Click and Drag Connection Creation  
Page 2-398  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 8 of 14  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
Connection Name:  
Connection Type: ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
ENTER A UNIQUE  
CONNECTION NAME.  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
Unlocked  
SELECT THE CONNECTION  
TYPE.  
Please press Add to add the selected interface as a leaf of the multicast connection.  
Root Endpoint  
SELECT A ROOT NE, CARD/  
SLOT, AND NETWORK  
INTERFACE TYPE.  
Network Interface / Interface Type:  
Slot / Card Type:  
Root Network Element:  
Slot 11_Port 1 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 11_Port 2 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 12_Port 1 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 12_Port 2 Oc3SM / UNI  
Slot 13_Port 1 T3 TMUX  
Slot 16_Port 1 Oc3MM / UNI  
Slot 16_Port 2 Oc3MM / UNI  
Slot 9_Port 1 DS3 / UNI  
9 T3 CRS  
NE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
10 T1 MULTI 1  
11 155 SM CRS  
12 155 SM CRS  
13 T3 TMUX  
16 155 SM CRS  
Slot 9_Port 2 DS3 / UNI  
Slot 9_Port 3 DS3 / UNI  
Leaf Endpoint  
Network Interface /  
Interface Type:  
DISPLAYS SELECTED LEAF  
INTERFACES.  
SELECT A LEAF NE,  
CARD/SLOT, AND  
NETWORK INTERFACE  
TYPE.  
Leaf Network Element:  
Slot / Card Type:  
Leaf Interface:  
NE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
3 T3 CRS  
4 T3 CRS  
Slot 11_Port 1 Oc3  
Slot 11_Port 2 Oc3  
Slot 12_Port 1 Oc3  
Slot 12_Port 2 Oc3  
Slot 13_Port 1 T3 T  
Slot 16_Port 1 Oc3  
Slot 16_Port 2 Oc3  
Slot 9_Port 1 DS3 /  
Slot 9_Port 2 DS3 /  
Slot 9_Port 3 DS3 /  
NE: 2 / ds3crs:S-12:  
NE: 2 / oc3cmm:S-14  
ADDS HIGHLIGHTED  
5 155 SM CRS  
6 155 SM CRS  
7 T3 TMUX  
10 155 SM CRS  
11 155 SM CRS  
12 155 SM CRS  
13 155 SM CRS  
NETWORK INTERFACE TO  
LEAF INTERFACE LIST. HIT  
APPLY BEFORE CONTINUING.  
Add>>  
DELETES HIGHLIGHTED  
LEAF INTERFACE FROM  
LEAF INTERFACE LIST. HIT  
APPLY BEFORE CONTINUING.  
Remove  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Next >>  
SENDS CHANGES ONCE REFRESHES SCREEN  
MOVES TO NEXT  
CLOSES WINDOW  
WITHOUT SAVING  
CHANGES.  
ALL DATA HAS BEEN  
ENTERED.  
AND DISPLAYS ANY  
CONFIGURATION  
CHANGES.  
SCREEN FOR MORE  
CONFIGURATION  
CHANGES.  
14458-A  
Figure 790-3. ATM VC Bundled Multicasting Configuration Screen  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION NAME.  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
Connection Name:  
Connection Type: ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Please press Update Leaf  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
DISPLAYS PREVIOUSLY  
SELECTED CONNECTION TYPE.  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-1  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
SELECT A ROOT VPI FOR THE  
CONNECTION. VPI NUMBERS  
WITH ASTERISKS BEFORE  
THEM ARE ALREADY IN USE.  
NEXT SELECT THE VCI FOR  
THE ROOT.  
VCI / NE / Rate(Kbps):  
32  
33  
Page  
1
34  
VPI / NE / Rate (Kbps):  
35  
36  
37  
0
1
** 2  
3
** 38 VCC Service  
Leaf Network Element: NE-2  
UNI.NNI: ds3crs:S-12:P-3:L-atm:I-1  
Leaf Interfaces:  
VPI / NE / Rate(Kbps:  
ds3crs:S-12:P-3:L-atm:I-1  
oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
SELECT A LEAF INTERFACE.  
MULTIBLE LEAFS MAY BE  
SELECTED ONE AT A TIME.  
NEXT SELECT A VPI FOR THE  
LEAF END.  
Configured Leaf Interfaces:  
VCI / NE / Rate(Kbps):  
Update  
Leaf  
SELECT A VCI AND DATA RATE  
FOR THE LEAF END. MULTIPLE  
VCI MAY BE SELECTED BUT  
MUST BE CONTIGUOUS.  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
Reset  
Leaf  
SELECT TO ADD NEW LEAF  
VCI DATA TO CONFIGURED  
LEAF INTERFACE BOX.  
<< Previous  
Close  
Next >>  
RETURNS TO PREVIOUS  
CONFIGURATION SCREEN.  
CONTINUES TO NEXT  
CONFIGURATION SCREEN.  
CLOSES SCREEN WITHOUT  
SAVING CONFIGURATION  
CHANGES.  
14459-A  
Figure 790-4. ATM VC Bundled Multicasting VCI Configuration Screen  
Page 2-399  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 9 of 14  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
Administrative State:  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION NAME  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION TYPE  
NE-1 --> NE-2  
Connection Name:  
Locked  
Unlocked  
Connection Type: ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Please map the root VCI to the leaf VCI  
Selected Translation:  
ROOT VCI ---> LEAF VCI  
------------  
53  
54  
SELECT THE ORIGINATING ROOT  
ID FROM THE LIST FOR THIS VPI.  
NEXT SELECT THE DESTINATION  
LEAF VCI TO MAP THE ROOT VCI  
TO. FINALLY SELECT THE >>  
BUTTON TO SEND THE PAIR TO  
THE SELECTED TRANSLATION  
BOX. USER CAN JUST SELECT  
THE >> TOOL MULTIPLE TIMES  
TO SELECT ONE FOR ONE VCI  
TRANSLATION MAPPING.  
------------  
34  
35  
Root VCI: 36  
>>  
Leaf VCI:  
55  
<<  
<< Previous  
Close  
Next >>  
RETURNS TO PREVIOUS  
CONFIGURATION SCREEN.  
CONTINUES TO NEXT  
CLOSES WINDOW  
WITHOUT SAVING  
CHANGES.  
CONFIGURATION SCREEN  
AFTER ALL SELECTIONS  
HAVE BEEN MADE.  
14460-A  
Figure 790-5. ATM VC Bundled Multicasting VCI Mapping  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
Administrative State:  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION NAME.  
Connection Name:  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
LOCKS ROOT END OF  
THE CONNECTION ONLY.  
Locked  
DISPLAYS PREVIOUSLY SELECTED  
CONNECTION TYPE.  
Connection Type: ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-1  
DISPLAYS ROOT NE INFORMATION  
IN UPPER SECTION OF THIS WINDOW.  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
VPI:  
VCI:  
2
DISPLAYS VCI NUMBER BEING  
CONFIGURED.  
34  
SET ROOT AS A SEGMENT ENPOINT  
AND INITIATE NETWORK DATA  
COLLECTION AS NEEDED.  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
Service Provider Profile  
Remote Interface Identifier:  
0
FAR END LEC INTERFACE ID.  
Remote Connection Identifier:  
VPI: VCI:  
GENERATES USAGE INFORMATION  
FOR STUDY PURPOSES.  
Study Indication  
Remote Interface Type:  
USE SLIDERS TO SCROLL  
DOWN AND VIEW OTHER  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
FAR END LEC INTERFACE TYPE.  
UNI  
B-ICI  
FR UNI  
Leaf Interfaces:  
DISPLAYS LEAF INTERFACES  
BEING CONFIGURED.  
NE:2 / ds3crs:S-12:P-3:L-atm:l-1 / VPI: 3  
NE:2 / oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:l-1 / VPI: 3  
Leaf Network Element:  
DISPLAYS VCI NUMBER BEING  
CONFIGURED.  
VPI:  
VCI:  
3
34  
SET LEAF AS A SEGMENT ENPOINT  
AND INITIATE NETWORK DATA  
COLLECTION AS NEEDED.  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
Service Provider Profile  
Remote Interface Identifier:  
0
FAR END LEC INTERFACE ID.  
Remote Connection Identifier:  
VPI: VCI:  
Study Indication  
Remote Interface Type:  
UNI B-ICI  
GENERATES USAGE INFORMATION  
FOR STUDY PURPOSES.  
FR UNI  
FAR END LEC INTERFACE TYPE.  
<< Previous  
Close  
Next >>  
RETURNS TO PREVIOUS  
CONTINUES TO NEXT  
CLOSES CONFIGURATION  
CONFIGURATION WINDOW.  
CONFIGURATION WINDOW.  
WINDOW WITHOUT SAVING  
CHANGES.  
14461-A  
Figure 790-6. ATM VC Bundled Multicast Connection Configuration  
Page 2-400  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 10 of 14  
Table 790-1. Sub-network Connection Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
OPTIONS  
DESCRIPTION  
VCI  
User Defined  
Virtual Connection Identifier numbers defined during card  
interface configuration. Refer to NTP_009 for card  
configuration procedures if needed.  
Segment Endpoint  
Single selection  
box  
Sets this end of the connection as a segment endpoint for  
OAM cells.  
Ingress / Egress  
NDC  
On or Off  
Enables or disables the network data collection for selected  
circuit.  
Remote Provider  
Identifier  
User Defined  
Enter alphanumeric data to help identify the far end provider  
interface.  
Remote Interface  
Identifier  
VPI  
VCI  
Enter the VPI and VCI numbers to identify the remote  
provider circuit. This data may be utilized for usage  
information.  
Study Indication  
On or Off  
Generates usage information for study purposes.  
Remote Interface  
Type  
UNI  
B-ICI  
User to Network Interface  
Broadband- Inter-Exchange Carrier Interface  
Leaf Interface  
User Selectable  
This list displays the configured leaf endpoints selected from  
the previous configuration window. Ids with asterisks before  
them are already utilized and not selectable.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
Administrative State:  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION NAME.  
Connection Name:  
NE-1 <--> NE-2  
Locked  
LOCKS ROOT END OF  
CONNECTION ONLY.  
DISPLAYS PREVIOUSLY SELECTED  
CONNECTION TYPE.  
Connection Type: ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-1  
DISPLAYS ROOT NE AND INTERFACE  
IDENTIFICATIO.N  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1 VPI: 2 VCI:  
SELECT THE SERVICE CLASS  
DESIRED FROM DROP DOWN  
LIST. WILL DISPLAY LIKE  
CONTRACTS IN THE INGRESS  
TRAFFIC CONTRACT BOX.  
Service Class Type:  
CBR  
BOX DISPLAYS ROOT VCs  
THAT HAVE BEEN UPDATED  
WITH A TRAFFIC CONTRACT.  
Root VCs:  
Ingress Traffic Contracts:  
Configured Root VCs:  
oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1/ VPI: 2 VCI: 34  
oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1/ VPI: 2 VCI: 35  
oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1/ VPI: 2 VCI: 36  
<NEW>  
cbr-15  
cbr-1.5 MB  
cbr-100 kB  
cbr- 44 MB  
: 1 VCI: 33 / CBR=100kB  
: 1 VCI: 34 / CBR=100kB  
: 1 VCI: 35 / CBR=100kB  
SELECT TO ADD HIGHLIGHTED  
ROOT VC TO THE CONFIGURED  
ROOT VCs BOX.  
Update  
Root  
DISPLAYS LIST OF ROOT VCs  
AVAILABLE. HIGHLIGHT VC THEN  
SELECT INGRESS TRAFFIC  
CONTRACT. SELECT <NEW> IF  
CREATING A NEW CONTRACT  
AND THEN APPLY.  
Reset  
Root  
SELECT AFTER HIGHLIGHTING  
CONFIGURED ROOT VC TO  
SELECT A NEW TRAFFIC  
CONTRACT. ROOT WIL BE  
REMOVED FROM CONFIGURED  
ROOT VC BOX UNTIL A NEW  
CONTRACT HAS BEEN SELECTED  
AND UPDATED.  
Apply  
Refresh  
<< Previous  
Close  
APPLYS TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
TO SELECTED ROOT VC AFTER  
UPDATE ROOT HAS BEEN  
SELECTED, OR CONTINUES TO  
CREATE A TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
WINDOW IF <NEW> WAS SELECTED.  
REFRESHES WINDOW  
AND DISPLAYS NEW  
CONFIGURATION  
CHANGES.  
RETURNS TO PREVIOUS  
CONFIGURATION WINDOW.  
CLOSES TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
WINDOW WITHOUT SAVING  
CHANGES.  
14462-A  
Figure 790-7. ATM VC Bundled Multicasting Traffic Contract  
Page 2-401  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 11 of 14  
X
Cellworx Vision:Traffic Contract Configuration  
TYPE IN A NAME FOR  
TRAFFIC CONTRACT  
Traffic Contract Name:  
********  
OR  
Existing Traffic Contract:  
CBR=1.5 MB  
SELECT FROM EXISTING  
TRAFFIC CONTRACTS  
DISPLAYED HERE.  
SELECT THE SERVICE  
CLASS TYPE OR VERIFY  
ENABLED OPTION.  
Traffic Contract Type  
ATM Constant Bit Rate (CBR), QoS Class I  
ATM Variable Bit Rate (VBR), QoS Class II  
ATM Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR), QoS Class Unspecified  
FR, QoS Class II  
Kbps  
Rate Unit  
SELECT KBPS OR CELLS  
ENTER THE PCR FOR ATM  
CBR QOS CLASS 1, AND  
ATM VBR QOS CLASS II.  
Peak Cell Rate (PCR):  
Cell Loss Priority (CLP) = 0 +1  
64  
0
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) microseconds:  
Note: Selecting 0 for CDVT will cause the board default  
to be chosen. Default values are:  
DS1/E1 = 4150 DS34 = 1550 OC3 = 1400 OC12 = 350  
Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) :  
SELECT OPTIONS TO  
DETERMINE SERVICE  
CLASS TYPE FOR VBR  
CONNECTIONS (VBR.1,  
VBR.2, OR VBR.3).  
CLP=0  
CLP= 0 + 1  
Tagging  
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) Cells:  
Real Time  
Close  
Refresh  
Apply  
Delete  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND CREATES NEW  
TRAFFIC CONTRACT.  
DELETES SELECTED  
TRAFFIC CONTRACT.  
REFRESHES DATA  
AFTER SELECTIONS CONTRACT SCREEN.  
HAVE BEEN APPLIED.  
CLOSES TRAFFIC  
0026-002  
Figure 790-8. Create a Traffic Contract  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Topology  
Create...  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10963-D  
Figure 790-9. GUI Connection Menu Tree  
Page 2-402  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 12 of 14  
X
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Connection Filter  
SELECT A TAB TO FILTER  
FOR A SPECIFIC ITEM.  
Network  
Traffic  
FR  
ATM  
CES  
Connection  
Connection Types:  
SELECT AN ITEM IN THE  
FOLDERS TO FILTER.  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES - ATM VC  
CES - CES  
FR - ATM VC  
FR - FR  
ATM VP MULTICAST  
ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Retrieve All Selected Type Connections  
SELECT THE APPLY BUTTON  
TO RETRIEVE CONNECTION  
INFO FOR FILTERED  
Close  
SELECTION.  
Reset  
Apply  
11000-F  
Figure 790-10. Subnetwork Connection Filter Window  
Table 790-2. Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Connection Filter Descriptions  
FILTER TYPE  
Connection  
OPTIONS  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES -VC  
DESCRIPTION  
Selects all ATM VP connections.  
Selects all ATM VC connections.  
Selects all Circuit Emulation Service to ATM Virtual  
Channel connections.  
CES - CES  
Selects all Circuit Emulation Service connections  
(Phase II).  
FR-ATM VC  
FR-FR  
Frame Relay not supported for Release 3.1 software  
packages.  
ATM VP Multicast  
Selects all virtual path connections that have multiple  
endpoints associated with them.  
ATM Bundled VC  
Multicast  
Selects all virtual path connections that have multiple  
endpoints associated with them and bundled virtual  
circuits contained in the path.  
Network  
Traffic  
Administrator defined. Allows user to specify certain NEs when filtering  
connections.  
Administrator defined. Selects the traffic contract to be queried. These are  
user-defined names. Several connections may utilize the  
same traffic contract.  
ATM  
Administrator defined. Selects the UNI or NNI to be queried. These are user-  
defined names and apply to specific ports.  
Page 2-403  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 13 of 14  
USE FORMAT TO SPECIFY  
ORDER BY NE OR NAME,  
OR RETURN TO FILTER  
WINDOW.  
DISPLAYS THE STATUS  
OF EACH CONNECTION.  
INDICATES NUMBER  
OF LEAVES ON THE  
CONNECTION.  
USE VIEW TO DISPLAY  
NDC DATA.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection List: ATM VP MULTICAST  
Format  
View  
Connection Name  
Root NE  
NE-1  
NE-1  
NE3  
Number of Leaves  
Status  
Broadcast-1 Uptown  
Broadcast-2 Downtown  
Video Trans-Office  
3
6
2
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
INCOMPLETE  
Clear Selected  
Status...  
Configure...  
Delete  
Retry  
Close  
RETRIEVES STATUS  
OF SELECTED  
CONNECTION IN  
A NEW WINDOW.  
BRINGS UP A  
CONFIGURATION  
WINDOW FOR  
SELECTED  
DELETES  
SELECTED  
CONNECTION.  
TRIES TO  
COMPLETE  
SELECTED  
CONNECTION.  
REMOVES  
HIGHLIGHT  
FRO SELECTED  
CONNECTIONS.  
CLOSES  
WINDOW.  
CONNECTION.  
14467-A  
Figure 790-11. ATM Bundled VC Multicast Connection List Screen  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Status  
Administrative State:  
Connection Name: Broadcast-1 Uptown  
Locked  
Connection Type: ATM Bundled VC MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-1  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
VPI: 5  
VCI:  
5
Administrative State: up  
Traffic Contract: cbr-1.5  
Leaf Endpoints:  
Network Element  
Interface  
VPI  
Status  
NE-2  
NE-4  
NE-6  
oc3cmm:S-11:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
ds3crs:S-8:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
t1multi1:S-14:P-5:L-atm:I-1  
2
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
2
2
VCI: 32  
Administrative State: up  
Configure  
Refresh  
Close  
CONFIGURES THE  
SELECTED LEAF  
ENDPOINT.  
REFRESHES STATUS  
INFORMATION.  
CLOSES WINDOW.  
Figure 790-12. ATM Bundled VC Multicast Connection Status Window  
Page 2-404  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-790  
Page 14 of 14  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
Administrative State:  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION NAME.  
Connection Name: Broadcast-1 Uptown  
Locked  
LOCKS OUT ENTIRE  
CONNECTION.  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION TYPE  
SPECIFIED IN SEARCH.  
Connection Type: ATM Bundled VC MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-1  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
VPI:  
VCI: 32  
Segment Endpoint  
5
SELECT USAGE DATA OR  
NDC COLLECTION FOR  
ROOT ENDPOINT. HIT  
APPLY TO UPDATE ANY  
CHANGES.  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
DISPLAYS THE STATUS OF  
LEAF ENDPOINTS. IF  
Leaf Endpoints:  
INCOMPLETE OR FAILED,  
HIGHLIGHT AND SELECT  
THE RETRY BUTTON AT THE  
BOTTOM OF THE WINDOW.  
Network Element  
Interface  
VPI  
Status  
NE-2  
NE-4  
NE-6  
oc3cmm:S-11:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
5
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
5
5
DS3crs:S-8:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
T1multi1:S-14:P-5:L-atm:I-1  
USE SLIDER BAR TO VIEW  
MORE DATA IF AVAILABLE.  
VCI: 32  
LOCK OUT ANY SELECTED  
LEAF ENDPOINT.  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
Ingress NDC  
Unlocked  
Segment Endpoint  
Egress NDC  
HIGHLIGHT A LEAF AND  
SELECT USAGE DATA  
OR NDC COLLECTION.  
HIT APPLY TO UPDATE  
ANY CHANGES.  
CLOSES WINDOW.  
Add  
Leaf  
Delete  
Leaf  
Retry  
Leaf  
Close  
Apply  
Refresh  
USE TO APPLY NEW  
NDC AND USAGE  
DATA SELECTIONS.  
USE TO REFRESH  
DISPLAYED DATA  
AFTER RETRY, ADD, CONNECTION.  
OR DELETE LEAF  
USE TO RETRY  
A FAILED LEAF  
TAKES USER TO  
DELETES THE HIGHLIGHTED  
LEAF ENDPOINT.  
A NEW LEAF  
CONFIGURATION  
WINDOW.  
14464-A  
CONNECTIONS.  
Figure 790-13. ATM Bundled VC Multicast Leaf Endpoint Status Window  
Page 2-405  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-791  
Page 1 of 7  
ADD/DELETE A LEAF ENDPOINT TO/FROM AN EXISTING MULTICAST CONNECTION  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully add a leaf endpoint to a  
configured multicast connection. This procedure is generic in nature so it can encompass VP  
Multicasting AND Bundled VC Multicasting. Adding a leaf endpoint to a bundled VC multicast  
connection does not affect the VCI configuration and so is identical to adding a VP multicast  
endpoint. If adding a port level multicast leaf endpoint to a connection that has only one existing  
leaf endpoint, a traffic hit will occur. Prerequisites of establishing a connection are:  
•
The connection endpoints hardware (cards/ports) must be provisioned and in service  
(unlocked) per NTP-006.  
Note: User may navigate through the GUI menus using the mouse or by using the Alt  
key plus the underlined letters in the menus simultaneously, and then the arrow keys to  
scroll up, down, or across. Refer to the Graphical User Interface Operation in Section 2  
of this document.  
1. Access the existing connections using one of the following processes:  
a. Using the left mouse button, select Configuration, Connection, and View.  
Refer to Figure 791-1.  
b. Using the direct selection keys, enter Alt+C, Alt+N then Alt+V. Refer to  
Figure 791-1.  
c. Using the right mouse button, position the cursor over the NE, click and hold  
the button, select View Connections, and release the button.  
d. Using the left mouse button, select the connection icon above the workspace.  
2. The Connection Filter window appears as shown in Figure 791-2. Select a topic to filter  
information from using the folder tabs shown. These topics allow the user to retrieve only  
the information desired by Connection type, Network available, Traffic contract, or ATM  
traffic by port. The user may also specify all of these by using the All checkbox. Refer to  
Table 791-2 for descriptions of each filter type.  
Select either the ATM BUNDLED VC  
MULTICAST button or the ATM VP Multicast button followed by the Apply button at the  
bottom of the screen.  
3. The Connection List window appears as shown in the example in Figure 791-3. The list of  
connections can be displayed alphabetically by the connection name or by the NE name by  
using the Format pull down menu and selecting Sort by Name, or Sort by NE. The status  
column indicates the most current information for the connection. The status may be listed  
as INCOMPLETE, FUNCTIONAL, or as an UNKNOWN STATE. This screen displays up  
to 100 entries per page by using the up and down slide button on the right side of the  
window. If more than 100 entries are available for viewing, the user may use the slide bar  
on the right side of the window to scroll through the entries.  
4. If a connection is displayed as INCOMPLETE, select it using the left mouse button to  
highlight it and then select Retry to attempt to establish the connection.  
Page 2-406  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-791  
Page 2 of 7  
Deleting Connections  
5. The user may delete a connection, or multiple connections, by selecting them using the left  
mouse button, and then selecting Delete. A confirmation message will appear requiring the  
user to select OK or Cancel. If a problem exists with the hardware between the NMIC and  
the endpoint shelf controllers, a denial message may appear detailing why the connection  
could not be deleted. Refer to DLP-713 and the trouble log for any error reports.  
6. To gain status information of a certain connection, the user double clicks on the connection  
using the left mouse button, or single clicks to highlight the connection followed by  
selecting Status at the bottom left of the window.  
7. The Connection Status window appears similar to the one shown in Figure 791-4. The  
connection name is displayed at the top of the window. The administrative state may show  
as Locked or Unlocked. Locked indicates the connection is taken down at both ends, no  
traffic is allowed on the ring. Unlocked indicates the connection is operable in a normal  
state. The user may change options on the connection by selecting Configure. Access to the  
Configure screen can also be obtained from the previous Connection List screen via the  
Configure selection button found there.  
Deleting Endpoints  
8. Select the Configure button at the bottom of either the status window or the Connection  
List window. The Connection Configuration screen appears. Refer to Figure 791-5. The  
connection name is displayed at the top of the window. The user may delete n endpoint or  
multiple endpoints by selecting them using the left mouse button, and then selecting Delete.  
A confirmation message will appear requiring the user to select OK or Cancel. If deleting  
the last endpoint on a connection, the system will warn that the root end of the connection  
will also be deleted.  
Changing Endpoint Configuration  
9. Either or both ends of the connection can be configured as OAM cell segment endpoints by  
selecting the Segment Endpoint box displayed at each section of the screen. This  
functionality can be used for maintenance or troubleshooting purposes. Select Apply to  
send configuration changes to the database or close to abort any changes.  
10. The “Configuration Change Completed” window appears. Select OK.  
Adding Leaves to a Multicast Connection  
11. Leaves may be added to the connection using the Add Leaf button at the bottom of the  
Connection Configuration window. The Leaf Endpoint Configuration screen appears  
similar to the one shown in Figure 791-6.  
Page 2-407  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-791  
Page 3 of 7  
12. Set the leaf endpoint parameters as needed. The VCI numbers are not configurable as all  
leaf endpoints share the same VCI ids. Refer to Table 791-2 for configurable endpoint  
options. Select the Apply button once all parameters are entered.  
13. The system responds “Successfully Added Leaf to Connection”. Click on OK to finish.  
14. Click on Close to close the Add Leaf window and return to the Connection Configuration  
window.  
15. Repeat steps 11 though 14 for any other leaves that need to be added.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Time and Date  
Connection  
Create...  
Topology  
View ...  
Configure Traffic Contract ...  
Configure Service Provider Profile ...  
View Ring Resource Usage ...  
View Fiber Bandwidth Usage ...  
Software  
NMIC Platform  
10963-D  
Figure 791-1. GUI Connection Menu Tree  
Page 2-408  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-791  
Page 4 of 7  
X
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Connection Filter  
SELECT A TAB TO FILTER  
FOR A SPECIFIC ITEM.  
Network  
Traffic  
FR  
ATM  
CES  
Connection  
Connection Types:  
SELECT AN ITEM IN THE  
FOLDERS TO FILTER.  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES - ATM VC  
CES - CES  
FR - ATM VC  
FR - FR  
ATM VP MULTICAST  
ATM BUNDLED VC MULTICAST  
Retrieve All Selected Type Connections  
SELECT THE APPLY BUTTON  
TO RETRIEVE CONNECTION  
INFO FOR FILTERED  
Close  
SELECTION.  
Reset  
Apply  
11000-F  
Figure 791-2. Connection Filter Window  
Table 791-1. Cellworx Vision Connection Filter Descriptions  
FILTER TYPE  
Connection  
OPTIONS  
ATM VP - ATM VP  
ATM VC - ATM VC  
CES -VC  
DESCRIPTION  
Selects all ATM VP connections.  
Selects all ATM VC connections.  
Selects all Circuit Emulation Service to ATM Virtual  
Channel connections.  
CES - CES  
Selects all Circuit Emulation Service connections  
(Phase II).  
FR-ATM VC  
FR-FR  
Frame Relay not supported for Release 3.1 software  
packages.  
ATM VP Multicast  
Selects all virtual path connections that have multiple  
endpoints associated with them.  
ATM Bundled VC  
Multicast  
Selects all virtual path connections that have multiple  
endpoints associated with them and bundled virtual  
circuits contained in the path.  
Network  
Traffic  
Administrator defined. Allows user to specify certain NEs when filtering  
connections.  
Administrator defined. Selects the traffic contract to be queried. These are  
user-defined names. Several connections may utilize the  
same traffic contract.  
ATM  
Administrator defined. Selects the UNI or NNI to be queried. These are user-  
defined names and apply to specific ports.  
Page 2-409  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-791  
Page 5 of 7  
USE FORMAT TO SPECIFY  
ORDER BY NE OR NAME,  
OR RETURN TO FILTER  
WINDOW.  
DISPLAYS THE STATUS  
OF EACH CONNECTION.  
INDICATES NUMBER  
OF LEAVES ON THE  
CONNECTION.  
USE VIEW TO DISPLAY  
NDC DATA.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection List: ATM Bundled VC MULTICAST  
Format  
View  
Connection Name  
Root NE  
NE-1  
NE-1  
NE3  
Number of Leaves  
Status  
Broadcast-1 Uptown  
Broadcast-2 Downtown  
Video Trans-Office  
3
6
2
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
INCOMPLETE  
Clear Selected  
Status...  
Configure...  
Delete  
Retry  
Close  
RETRIEVES STATUS  
OF SELECTED  
CONNECTION IN  
A NEW WINDOW.  
BRINGS UP A  
CONFIGURATION  
WINDOW FOR  
SELECTED  
DELETES  
SELECTED  
CONNECTION.  
TRIES TO  
REMOVES  
HIGHLIGHT  
FRO SELECTED  
CONNECTIONS.  
CLOSES  
WINDOW.  
COMPLETE  
SELECTED  
CONNECTION.  
CONNECTION.  
0026-054  
Figure 791-3. ATM Bundled VC Multicast Connection List Screen  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Status  
Administrative State:  
Connection Name: Broadcast-1 Uptown  
Locked  
Connection Type: ATM Bundled VC MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-1  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
VPI: 5  
VCI:  
5
Administrative State: up  
Traffic Contract: cbr-1.5  
Leaf Endpoints:  
Network Element  
Interface  
VPI  
Status  
NE-2  
NE-4  
NE-6  
oc3cmm:S-11:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
ds3crs:S-8:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
t1multi1:S-14:P-5:L-atm:I-1  
2
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
2
2
VCI: 32  
Administrative State: up  
Configure  
Refresh  
Close  
CONFIGURES THE  
SELECTED LEAF  
ENDPOINT.  
REFRESHES STATUS  
INFORMATION.  
CLOSES WINDOW.  
14468-A  
Figure 791-4. ATM Bundled VC Multicast Connection Status Window  
Page 2-410  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-791  
Page 6 of 7  
X
Cellworx Vision: Connection Configuration  
Administrative State:  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION NAME.  
Connection Name: Broadcast-1 Uptown  
Locked  
LOCKS OUT ENTIRE  
CONNECTION.  
DISPLAYS CONNECTION TYPE  
SPECIFIED IN SEARCH.  
Connection Type: ATM Bundled VC MULTICAST  
Unlocked  
Root Network Element: NE-1  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
VPI:  
VCI: 32  
Segment Endpoint  
5
SELECT USAGE DATA OR  
NDC COLLECTION FOR  
ROOT ENDPOINT. HIT  
APPLY TO UPDATE ANY  
CHANGES.  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
DISPLAYS THE STATUS OF  
LEAF ENDPOINTS. IF  
Leaf Endpoints:  
INCOMPLETE OR FAILED,  
HIGHLIGHT AND SELECT  
THE RETRY BUTTON AT THE  
BOTTOM OF THE WINDOW.  
Network Element  
Interface  
VPI  
Status  
NE-2  
NE-4  
NE-6  
oc3cmm:S-11:P-2:L-atm:I-1  
5
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
FUNCTIONAL  
DS3crs:S-8:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
T1multi1:S-14:P-5:L-atm:I-1  
5
5
USE SLIDER BAR TO VIEW  
MORE DATA IF AVAILABLE.  
VCI: 32  
LOCK OUT ANY SELECTED  
LEAF ENDPOINT.  
Administrative State:  
Locked  
Ingress NDC  
Unlocked  
Segment Endpoint  
Egress NDC  
HIGHLIGHT A LEAF AND  
SELECT USAGE DATA  
OR NDC COLLECTION.  
HIT APPLY TO UPDATE  
ANY CHANGES.  
CLOSES WINDOW.  
Add  
Leaf  
Delete  
Leaf  
Retry  
Leaf  
Close  
Apply  
Refresh  
USE TO APPLY NEW  
NDC AND USAGE  
DATA SELECTIONS.  
USE TO REFRESH  
DISPLAYED DATA  
AFTER RETRY, ADD, CONNECTION.  
OR DELETE LEAF  
USE TO RETRY  
A FAILED LEAF  
TAKES USER TO  
DELETES THE HIGHLIGHTED  
LEAF ENDPOINT.  
A NEW LEAF  
CONFIGURATION  
WINDOW.  
14464-A  
CONNECTIONS.  
Figure 791-5. ATM Bundled VC Multicast Configuration Window  
SELECT AN NE FROM  
LIST FOR DESTINATION  
ENDPOINT.  
SELECT A CARD  
FROM NE FOR  
DESTINATION  
ENDPOINT.  
SELECT A NETWORK INTERFACE  
FROM LIST FOR DESTINATION  
ENDPOINT.  
SPECIFY A VPI FOR THE  
ENDPOINT.  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add Leaf  
Resource: NE-1  
NE-1 Cellworx1  
Cellworx2  
NE-2  
NE-3 Cellworx3  
Slot / Card Type  
Network Interface / Interface Type  
oc3cmm:S-14:P-1:L-atm:I-1 / UNI  
oc3cmm:S-14:P-2:L-atm:I-1 / UNI  
Page  
1
17 622 Ring  
16 622 Ring  
5
6
7
8
9
T3 TMUX Multi 1  
155-UNI SM/ST  
155-UNI SM/ST  
155-UNI SM/ST  
155-UNI SM/ST  
VPI / NE / Rate (Kbps):  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10 DS3 CRS  
11 DS3 CRS  
12 T1 Multi 1 CRS  
14 155-UNI MM/ST  
Next>>  
Close  
Refresh  
CLICK ON NEXT TO  
CONTINUED TO NEXT  
CONFIGURATION WINDOW.  
REFRESHES THE DATA  
ON THIS WINDOW AFTER  
CHANGES ARE MADE.  
CLOSES THIS WINDOW WITHOUT  
SAVING CHANGES.  
14455-A  
Figure 791-6. Add Leaf Window – NE, Slot, VPI Selection  
Page 2-411  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-791  
Page 7 of 7  
X
Cellworx Vision: Add Leaf  
DISPLAYS SELECTED  
CONNECTION NAME.  
Connection Name: VP- Multicast  
SELECTED LEAF NE  
Leaf Network Element: NE-3  
UNI/NNI: oc3cmm:S-14:P-1:L-atm:I-1  
VPI: 5  
SELECTED INTERFACE  
CONFIGURED VPI  
Segment Endpoint  
Ingress NDC  
Egress NDC  
SET USAGE DATA OR  
NETWORK DATA  
COLLECTION.  
Service Provider Profile  
Remote Interface Identifier :  
0
SET FAR END LEC  
IDENTIFICATION IF  
DESIRED.  
Remote Connection Identifier :  
VPI: VCI:  
0
0
SET TO GENERATE USAGE  
INFORMATION FOR STUDY  
PURPOSES.  
Study Indication  
Remote Interface Type:  
SET THE INTERFACE TYPE.  
UNI  
B-ICI  
FR UNI  
Apply  
Close  
<< Previous  
CLOSE WINDOW  
WITHOUT SAVING  
CHANGES.  
APPLY ALL CHANGES AND  
ADD THE NEW LEAF ENDPOINT  
TO THE CONNECTION.  
RETURN TO PREVIOUS  
WINDOW TO CORRECT  
OR CHANGE DATA.  
14454-A  
Figure 791-7. Add Leaf Window – Configure Endpoint  
Page 2-412  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-792  
Page 1 of 4  
SET T3 CES CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the T3 CES card configurations  
utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI). User must have  
the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to performing this  
procedure.  
1. Double click on the T3 CES card displayed in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View”at the top  
of the window.  
2. The T3 CES card display appears as shown in Figure 792-1. Click on the port to be  
configured (Port 1, 2, or 3) located on the simulated card on the left side of the window.  
3. Click and drag the small block upward to expand the Configuration section of the window  
so all options are visible. The Administrative State of the card and port should be  
“Unlocked” if in service. If “Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse  
button to enable the card and/or port for service.  
4. Set the Port Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to Table 792-1 for a list of  
options the user may select for this card type.  
5. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the window to back up the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the T3 CES window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window display  
and all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close will  
close this window.  
6. Double click on one of the ports available (1, 2, or 3). The CES interface screen appears.  
Refer to the example shown in Figure 792-2.  
7. Set the CES configuration options as needed using Table 792-2 as a reference.  
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each T3 CES card/port installed in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-413  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-792  
Page 2 of 4  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T3 Cell Emulation Service  
X
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO WIDEN  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
Configuration:  
Card Level  
NE AND CARD TYPE/  
SLOT INFORMATION.  
Card:T3 CES  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
9
1
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
T3  
CES  
Unlocked  
CARD LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Ring Selection:  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG UP  
OR DOWN TO WIDEN PORT  
LEVEL VIEW.  
Port Level  
Administrative State:  
Line Build Out  
CARD REPRESENTATION  
WITH ALARM  
INDICATIONS.  
Off  
On  
Locked  
Unlocked  
ADC  
Transmit Vendor Circuit ID: default  
Status  
Active  
Line Coding: B3ZS  
T3 CES PORT LEVEL  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.  
Loopback Config:  
Line Type:  
None  
M23  
Port  
SYNTRAN  
C-bit Parity  
Clear Channel  
Facility Line  
Terminal  
1
2
3
CLICK ON THE PORT TO  
CONFIGURE INDIVIDUAL  
DS3 PORTS.  
USE SLIDERS TO VIEW  
HIDDEN SELECTIONS.  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
REPAINTS WINDOW  
TO REFLECT ANY  
CHANGES.  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING  
CONTROLLER.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
CARD LEVEL VIEW.  
0026-004  
Figure 792-1. T3 CES Configuration Screen  
Table 792-1. T3 CES Configuration Options  
OPTIONS  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
DEFINITIONS  
Slot Number  
2
2 to 15 for Ring NE  
Physical slot locations of the T3 cards in the  
2 to 15 for STN-EPS shelf.  
Admin State  
(Card or Port)  
UNLOCKED LOCKED/  
UNLOCKED  
Locked = Out of service.  
Unlocked = In service.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
80  
0 to 100 %  
Threshold for CLP=1 cells to be discarded on the  
ingress/egress path.  
Ring Selection  
Auto  
Auto  
Card will automatically select traffic from the  
ring direction with the best signal.  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 16 direction.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 17 direction.  
Line Build Out  
Off  
Off  
On  
Turns on the LBO to compensate for cabling  
distance between EIM and customer equipment.  
(continued)  
Page 2-414  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-792  
Page 3 of 4  
Table 792-1. T3 CES Configuration Options, continued  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Transmit Vendor Circuit  
ID  
default  
User Defined  
Can be used to assign a name to the port to  
identify certain customer circuits.  
Line Coding  
B3ZS  
Not User  
Display only of the line coding.  
Configurable  
Line Type  
Clear  
Not User  
Clear Channel only. No line type interfacing is  
performed. What transmission type comes in is  
transported across the network unchanged.  
Channel Configurable  
Loopback Config.  
None  
None  
No loopback activated on this card.  
Facility Line  
Loops the incoming signal back to the CPE and  
generates AIS to the cellbus.  
Terminal  
Sends cells back to the cellbus and back out to  
the ring. No changes are made to the path layer.  
Cellworx Vision: CES Interface  
X
Node Name: Cellworx1  
Slot Number:  
Card :  
9
DISPLAYS CARD,  
PORT, AND NE  
INFORMATION.  
Node Id:  
1
T3 CES  
1
Location:  
5th Street  
Port Number:  
ASSIGN INTERFACE  
NAME OR USE  
SYSTEM DEFAULT.  
Interface Name:  
ATM VPI:  
Slot9_Port1 DS3CESUNI  
0
DISPLAY ONLY OF  
VPI AND VCI IDs.  
ATM VCI:  
0
Operational State:  
Buffer Maximum Size:  
Cell Arrival Jitter Tolerance:  
Up  
DISPLAY ONLY.  
1600  
microseconds  
microseconds  
USER SETABLE.  
USER SETABLE.  
600  
CBR Clock Mode  
Adaptive  
SET CLOCK MODE  
PER REQUIREMENTS.  
Synchronous  
SRTS  
Apply  
Refresh  
Close  
Card View  
BRINGS CARD  
VIEW TO FRONT.  
REFRESHES  
WINDOW  
WITH ANY  
NEW INFO.  
CLOSES WINDOW  
WITHOUT SAVING  
CHANGES  
APPLIES  
CHANGES.  
0026-007  
Figure 792-2. T3 CES Interface Configuration Screen  
Page 2-415  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-792  
Page 4 of 4  
Table 792-2. T3 CES Interface Configuration Options  
DEFAULT OPTIONS DEFINITIONS  
SELECTION  
Interface Name  
User Defined  
Can be used to assign a name to the port or use  
the system default.  
ATM VPI  
<user  
defined>  
0-8  
This is a read only to show the available bits  
configured for this port during connection  
creation.  
ATM VCI  
<user  
defined>  
0-10  
This is a read only to show the available bits  
configured for this port during connection  
creation.  
Operational State  
Up  
Up  
Down  
Unknown  
Display only. State of the interface port is Up  
and available for service, Down due to a  
problem, or Unknown due to communication  
error.  
Buffer Maximum Size 1600  
1500 to 2000  
750 to 1000  
Maximum size measured in microseconds and  
selectable in 10 microsecond increments.  
Cell Arrival Jitter  
Tolerance  
800  
Maximum size measured in microseconds and  
selectable in 10 microsecond increments.  
CBR Clock Mode  
Adaptive  
Adaptive  
Synchronous  
SRTS  
Sets the Constant Bit Rate clock to adapt to the  
incoming bit stream, look for a constant  
synchronous bit stream, or Synchronous Residual  
Time Stamp used for recovering clock signals in  
a packet system (ATM).  
Page 2-416  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-793  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE T3 CES CARD STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI display for  
the T3 CES card status. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI  
display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the T3 CES card located in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at the top  
of the window.  
2. Click the small block between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downward  
to view all the status information. Refer to Table 793-1 for definitions of status information  
provided.  
3. Select each port on the card to view the statuses.  
4. Select the Close button at the bottom of the window to return to the chassis level display.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Card View - T3 Cell Emulation Service  
X
NE Name: Cellworx1  
NE Id:  
Status:  
1
Card Level  
Card:T3 CES  
Slot Number:  
Port Number:  
Up  
Operational State:  
Availability State:  
Protection State:  
CARD LEVEL STATUS.  
INDICATIONS.  
8
1
Availabli  
Not Protected  
T3  
Port Level  
CES  
DS3 Line State:  
PORT LEVEL STATUS.  
INDICATIONS.  
No Alarm  
Xmit AIS  
LOS  
Loopback State  
Other Failure  
ADC  
Configuration:  
Card Level  
Status  
Active  
Administrative State: Congestion Thresholds:  
80  
80  
Locked  
Ingress:  
Egress:  
%
%
Port  
Unlocked  
1
2
3
Ring Selection:  
CLICK ON BOX AND DRAG  
UP OR DOWN TO EXPAND  
STATUS OR CONFIGURATION  
VIEWS.  
Auto  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Port Level  
Apply  
Chassis View  
Refresh  
Close  
APPLIES CHANGES  
AND SENDS TO SHELF VIEW WITHOUT CLOSING TO REFLECT ANY  
CONTROLLER. CARD LEVEL VIEW. CHANGES.  
RETURNS TO CHASSIS  
REPAINTS WINDOW CLOSES CARD LEVEL  
VIEW AND RETURNS TO  
SHELF LEVEL VIEW.  
0026-008  
Figure 793-1. T3 CES Card Status Window  
Page 2-417  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-793  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 793-1. T3 CES Card Status Definitions  
DEFINITION  
Card is functioning properly.  
ITEM  
STATUS  
Up  
ACTION  
No action required.  
Operational  
State  
Down  
Card is not functioning properly, Verify card is installed, check for  
is in reset mode, or failed. Check failure indications, or provision card  
Admin state.  
for service per DLP- 792.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
currently know the operational  
status.  
Wait a few seconds for operations to  
complete and update the screen.  
Availability  
State  
Available  
In Test  
Failed  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing test  
signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to  
update.  
Card has failed operation and  
system has placed it out of  
service.  
Card may be performing a reset, or  
the bus may be busy.  
Power Off  
No power to the card.  
Check power source, replace card if  
source is good.  
Not Installed Card is not currently installed in  
selected slot of the shelf.  
If required, install card in selected  
slot per DLP-777 and provision per  
DLP- 792.  
Off Line  
Card is installed and provisioned If required, set module on line per  
but currently off line.  
DLP- 792.  
Dependency Card is supplying timing  
Perform a soft switch over (manual)  
reference, traffic, or other data to per DLP-771 to release card  
the system.  
dependency if removing.  
Unknown  
The system processor does not  
currently know the availability  
status.  
Wait for processor to update current  
status, may need to perform a  
manual reset of SC per DLP-773.  
Protection State Not  
Protected  
Not Protected  
If equipped, set up a protection  
group and provision card for  
protection per DLP-765.  
Enabled  
Protection is available for  
No action necessary.  
selected card but is not active.  
Manual  
switch  
User has manually switched the  
card to protection.  
If required, switch the card back per  
DLP-771.  
Forced  
Switch  
User has forced card to  
protection.  
If required, release forced switch per  
DLP-771.  
Lockout  
Card cannot switch to protection. If required, release manual lock-out  
It has been locked out by  
command or switch count.  
per DLP-771.  
Unknown  
Protection status information is  
not available to the shelf  
controller.  
Wait a few minutes and update  
screen. May need to reset SC, refer  
to DLP-773.  
(continued)  
Page 2-418  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-793  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 793-1. Display T3 CES Card Status Definitions, continued  
ITEM  
STATUS  
DEFINITION  
ACTION  
No action required.  
DS3 Line Status No Alarm  
T3 line is operating within  
normal parameters.  
Xmit AIS  
LOS  
Card is transmitting an AIS  
signal.  
Check local T3 signal input.  
No input signal being  
received.  
Check metallic input and DSX.  
Loopback  
State  
Card has been manually set to  
loop signal back to customer  
equipment.  
Check customer end for  
troubleshooting activity. If required,  
release loopback per DLP-772.  
Other Failure  
Card is experiencing a failure  
other than these listed.  
Page 2-419  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-794  
Page 1 of 3  
SET / RETRIEVE T3 CES PORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING STATISTICS  
Summary: This procedure describes the steps required to successfully retrieve the performance  
monitoring statistics for specified T3 CES interface ports within a Cellworx STN network.  
Information retrieved is on a per node and per port basis. This procedure assumes the user has  
already accessed the GUI and initiated the Performance Monitoring-Selection window per NTP-  
008.  
1. Select an NE from the list of NEs in the “Resource” section of the window. Refer to Figure  
794-1. This will bring up any available card slots in the NE in the next window.  
2. Select a slot/card type in the “Slot/Card Type” section of the window and all available ports  
will appear in the third window. Multiple slots may be selected.  
3. Select the port(s) desired to display the performance monitoring layers in the “Port” section  
of the window. Multiple ports may be selected also.  
4. Select the layer or layers to be retrieved in the “Layer” section of the window. If a T3 CES  
card was selected only AAL1 will be available in the PM layer window. If not, return to  
step 2 of this procedure and select the proper interface card.  
5. Select the time period for the report from the Interval selection window on the right. If  
multiple interfaces were selected, only a single time interval may be selected. If a single  
interface was selected, the user may specify several historical time periods to retrieve for  
the report. The “current” selection will retrieve any errors that are actively logged for the  
interface(s) specified. In no instance may the current interval and a history interval be  
selected at the same time.  
6. Select the Apply button once all selections have been specified for the performance report.  
The Performance Monitoring Data window appears. Refer to Figure 794-2 for an example.  
7. Error types reported are listed in Table 794-1. The slider bars are used to view the errors  
that are beyond the viewing area, either up or down for additional slots and ports, or to the  
right and left for additional error types. The user may update the counts using the Refresh  
button at the bottom of the screen. If retrieving history counts, the Refresh button is  
disabled. Refer to TAP-100 at the end of this section for troubleshooting guidelines.  
1 THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION  
8. Users may specify error counts required to trip a system alarm by clicking on the  
Configure Thresholds button at the bottom of the PM Data window. This will bring up a  
Performance Monitoring Configuration window similar to Figure 794-3.  
Page 2-420  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-794  
Page 2 of 3  
9. To configure the thresholds, place the cursor in the individual count boxes and type in the  
new threshold value. Refer to Table 794-1 for valid values. Once all counts are entered in  
each box, select the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to send the new data to the  
database.  
10. Select the Close button to dismiss the open windows.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Selection Criteria  
X
Resource:  
Slot / Card Type  
Port  
Layer  
Interval  
NE 1: Cellworx1  
NE 2: Cellworx2  
NE 3: Cellworx3  
NE 4: CellworxEXP  
current  
Slot 4 / T1 MULTI 1  
Slot 5 / RADSL-A CRS  
Slot 6 / T3 TMUX MULTI  
Slot 7 / T3 CRS  
Slot 10 / Port 1  
Slot 10 / Port 2  
Slot 10 / Port 3  
AAL-1  
00:00 - 00:15  
00:15 - 00:30  
00:30 - 00:45  
00:45 - 01:00  
01:00 - 01:15  
01:15 - 01:30  
01:30 - 01:45  
01:45 - 02:00  
02:00 - 02:15  
Slot 10 / T3 CES  
Slot 12 / 155 MM CRS  
Slot 16 / 622 Ring  
Slot 17 / 622 Ring  
Close  
Apply  
Save  
0026-006  
Figure 794-1.T3 CES PM Selection Criteria Window  
DISPLAYS  
SELECTED  
DISPLAYS CARD SLOT AND INTERVAL  
TYPE SELECTED. PORT.  
SUSPECTED  
RESET  
SELECTED. COUNTS  
REMAINING COLUMNS DISPLAY ERROR COUNTS FOR  
EACH ERROR TYPE.  
Cellworx Vision: Performance Monitoring Data NE 2  
AAL-1  
X
Card Type  
T3 CES  
Slot-Port  
8-1  
Interval Suspect  
SEs  
LCs  
BUs  
0
BOs  
SCIs  
DCs  
current  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset Selected  
Claear Selected  
Configure Thresholds  
Refresh  
Refresh All  
Close  
REFRESHES  
SELECTED  
LINE.  
REFRESHES  
EVERY LINE  
ITEM.  
RESETS COUNT  
OF SELECTED  
LINE ITEMS.  
RESETS COUNT  
OF ALL LINE  
ITEMS.  
BRINGS UP  
CONFIGURATION  
WINDOW FOR  
CARD.  
CLOSES WINDOW.  
0026-022  
Figure 794-2. Performance Monitoring Data T3 CES Port Window  
Page 2-421  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-794  
Page 3 of 3  
Cellworx Vision: PM Threshold Configuration AAL1 Layer  
X
Resource  
Card Type  
T3 CES  
SEs  
LCs  
BUs  
BOs  
SCIs  
DCs  
8-1  
60  
3
75  
10  
60  
3
Close  
Apply  
0026-005  
Figure 794-3. Performance Monitoring T3 CES Port Configuration Window  
Table 794-1. T3 CES Performance Monitoring Values  
MONTYPE  
SEs  
MAX 15-MINUTE  
THRESHOLD  
COMMENTS  
900  
Sets the number of AAL1 Sequence Errors the port can incur before the  
system declares a TCA.  
LCs  
BUs  
BOs  
SCIs  
DCs  
900  
Sets the number of Lost Cells the port can incur before the system declares a  
TCA.  
900  
Sets the number of Buffer Underflows the port can incur before the system  
declares a TCA.  
900  
Sets the number of Buffer Overflows the port can incur before the system  
declares a TCA.  
16383  
900  
Sets the number of Stuffing Cells Inserted the port can incur before the  
system declares a TCA.  
Sets the number of Discarded Cells the port can incur before the system  
declares a TCA.  
Page 2-422  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 1 of 11  
3.0 TO 3.1 SOFTWARE RELEASE UPGRADE PROCEDURE  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to upgrade the Release 3.0 system software  
to Release 3.1. The user should have access to an X-terminal or similar workstation device that  
will allow telnet sessions to the NMIC. The following items are prerequisites to this procedure:  
• This procedure must be initiated with the slot 2 NMIC in the “Active” state.  
• A Shelf Controller Card (SCC) must be present in slot 1 of every shelf. The  
SCC does not have to be active but if only one SCC is present in any shelf, it  
must be in slot 1.  
• These UNIX based commands are case sensitive. Pay particular attention to  
the upper and lower cases shown in the examples when entering commands.  
All commands are written for a UNIX system. If the user is using a PC for the  
file transfers, appropriate changes should be made.  
• If this Cellworx system has two NMICs, both NMICs should be in the system  
with EIMs in place and Ethernet connectivity provided to the workstation  
used for the upgrade.  
• It is recommended that the user be familiar with all steps of the upgrade  
process before beginning.  
2 DELETE INCOMPLETE CONNECTIONS  
The software upgrade procedure cannot be performed if the system has any incomplete  
connections. Before beginning, open the "Connection List" screen in the CellworxVision  
GUI and verify that for each connection type there are no incomplete connections. Verify  
this for VP-VP, VC-VC, CES-VC, CES-CES, VP Multicast, and VC Bundled Multicast  
connection types. If you do find any incomplete connections, then you must either delete  
them or complete them.  
Note: Failure to delete incomplete connections prior to attempting the software upgrade  
procedure can result in irreversible database corruption.  
3 PLACE SYSTEM INTO STEADY STATE  
Verify the system is in steady state prior to proceeding with the software upgrade  
procedure, i.e., verify that for each protection group the working card is in the active state.  
Page 2-423  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 2 of 11  
4 SAVE DATABASES  
Summary: The user should save all databases (NMIC and NE) from the slot 2 NMIC prior to  
initiating the software upgrade procedure. Note that this is a precautionary measure only since  
the databases are also backed up during the procedure itself. Should the NMIC disk become  
corrupted for some reason, however, it’s best to have all databases saved to an external storage  
medium. The following steps explain how to do this:  
1. Open a new shell window or physically connect a laptop or workstation to the NMIC and  
log into the slot_2 NMIC as a root user. This shell will be referred to as the “slot_2 NMIC  
shell”.  
telnet [IP address of slot_2 NMIC]  
2. At the slot_2 NMIC shell, change to the directory in which the databases are located by  
entering the following command:  
cd /cellworx/config  
3. Make a directory on the slot_2 NMIC used to store the Release 3.0 databases during the  
upgrade by entering the following command:  
mkdir release3.0_dbs  
4. Copy the databases to the new directory by entering the following command:  
cp NE.? NE.?? NMIC release3.0_dbs  
Note: The question marks are single character wildcards. (Do not delete the  
NE.default file.)  
5 COPY DATABASES TO AN EXTERNAL DEVICE  
Note: This next section is optional. Having the databases stored on an external device  
is an extra precaution.  
5. Invoke a new shell (not a NMIC shell) on the laptop or workstation. This shell will be  
referred to as the “Workstation shell”. From the Workstation shell, change to the root  
directory by entering the following command:  
cd / or cd \ on a PC  
6. Make a directory called “cellworx” on the external workstation by entering the following  
command:  
mkdir cellworx  
Page 2-424  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 3 of 11  
7. Within the cellworx directory on the external workstation, make another directory called  
release3.0_dbs by entering the following command:  
mkdir /cellworx/release3.0_dbs  
8. Change to the new directory by entering the following command:  
cd /cellworx/release3.0_dbs  
9. From the Workstation shell, establish an FTP connection to the slot_2 NMIC by entering  
the following command:  
ftp [IP address of slot_2 NMIC]  
10. Log into the NMIC as “cellworx” and enter the cellworx password. The default password is  
blank so the user may elect to press Enter or Return or enter the cellworx password set by  
the user followed by Enter or Return.  
11. At the FTP prompt, set the binary file transfer mode by entering the following command:  
bin  
12. At the FTP prompt, change to the directory created earlier on the slot_2 NMIC by entering  
the following command:  
cd /cellworx/config/release3.0_dbs  
13. At the FTP prompt, retrieve (get) all the files in the current directory by entering the  
following command:  
mget*  
14. At the FTP prompt, exit the FTP session by entering the following command:  
bye  
6 FTP SOFTWARE TO EACH NMIC  
Summary: The software needed for upgrading each NMIC must be transferred from an external  
source (most likely a Cellworx CD), to each NMIC. Use the slot 2 NMIC shell from the previous  
steps to upgrade the slot 2 NMIC. Log into the slot 4 NMIC as the root user from a separate shell  
to upgrade the slot 4 NMIC.  
Note: Keep both NMIC shell windows open. They will be used throughout the upgrade  
process.  
telnet [IP address of the slot 4 NMIC]  
Page 2-425  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 4 of 11  
15. In the slot_2 NMIC shell, create a directory on the slot_2 NMIC to store the Release 3.1  
software. To do this, enter the following commands:  
cd /tmp - changes to a temporary directory  
mkdir p3.1- makes a directory called p3.1 under the /tmp directory  
chmod 777 p3.1 - adds write permissions to the /tmp/p3.1 directory  
16. Open a new shell window and log into the slot_4 NMIC as a root user. This shell will be  
referred to as the “slot_4 NMIC shell”.  
telnet [IP address of slot_4 NMIC]  
Note: Keep both NMIC shell windows open because they will be used throughout this  
upgrade process.  
17. Create a directory on the slot_4 NMIC to store the Release 3.1 software. In the slot_4  
NMIC shell type the following commands:  
cd /tmp - changes to a temporary directory  
mkdir p3.1- makes a directory called p3.1 under the tmp directory  
chmod 777 p3.1 - adds write permissions to the /tmp/p3.1 directory  
18. From the Workstation shell, ftp the software from the Cellworx CD to the directory  
previously created for the software on the slot_2 NMIC.  
ftp [IP address of the slot_2 NMIC]  
bin - sets the binary file transfer mode (done at the ftp prompt)  
hash - optional; provides visual feedback that files are transferring.  
prompt - optional; avoids having user input “y”to transfer each file.  
19. Change the directory to the CD ROM drive or where the release 3.1 software is located.  
Replace the “r” in the following command with the proper CD drive designator.  
lcd r:/upgrade (This command is for PC systems only. For UNIX system  
commands, see the system administrator for mounting a CD ROM on UNIX.)  
cd /tmp/p3.1 - changes the directory on the slot_2 NMIC  
mput* - transfers files from the workstation CD drive to the slot_2 NMIC  
bye - exits the ftp session  
Page 2-426  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 5 of 11  
20. From the workstation shell, ftp the software from the Cellworx CD to the directory  
previously created for the software on the slot_4 NMIC.  
ftp [IP address of the slot_4 NMIC]  
bin - sets the binary file transfer mode  
hash - optional; provides visual feedback that files are transferring.  
prompt - optional; avoids having user input “y”to transfer each file.  
21. Change the directory to the CD ROM drive or where the release 3.1 software is located.  
Replace the “r” in the following command with the proper CD drive designator.  
lcd r:\upgrade (This command is for PC systems only. For UNIX system  
commands, see the system administrator for mounting a CD ROM on UNIX.)  
cd /tmp/p3.1 - changes the directory on the NMIC  
mput* - transfers files from the workstation CD drive to the slot_4 NMIC  
bye - exits the ftp session  
7 INSTALL NEW SOFTWARE ONTO NMIC  
Note: The following upgrade steps will not take affect until the upgrade script is run on  
each NMIC. These steps only copy the images into place.  
22. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, upgrade the kernel by entering the following command:  
/sbin/.cw/cw_upgradekernel /tmp/p3.1/xImage.3.0.0.7  
23. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, upgrade the kernel by entering the following command:  
/sbin/.cw/cw_upgradekernel /tmp/p3.1/xImage.3.0.0.7  
24. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, upgrade the new operating system (OS) by entering the  
following command:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/ADC-Linux-upgrade-3.1.0.0-1.ppc.rpm  
Note: Wait for the second prompt “Done” to appear before continuing.  
25. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, upgrade the new operating system (OS) on the slot_4 NMIC  
by entering the following command:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/ADC-Linux-upgrade-3.1.0.0-1.ppc.rpm  
Note: Wait for the second prompt “Done” to appear before continuing.  
Page 2-427  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 6 of 11  
26. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, install the AIC/RIC and SCC software images by entering the  
following commands:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/AicSccSwImages-3.1.0.2-2.ppc.rpm  
27. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, install the AIC/RIC and SCC software images on the slot_4  
NMIC by entering the following commands:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/AicSccSwImages-3.1.0.2-2.ppc.rpm  
28. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, install the AIC/RIC and SCC bootrom flash images by  
entering the following commands:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/AicSccBootroms-3.1.0.5-2.ppc.rpm  
29. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, install the AIC/RIC and SCC software images by entering the  
following commands:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/AicSccBootroms-3.1.0.5-2.ppc.rpm  
30. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, enter the following command to install the Cellworx NMIC  
software:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/cellworx-3.1.0.1-1.ppc.rpm  
31. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, install the Cellworx NMIC software:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/cellworx-3.1.0.1-1.ppc.rpm  
32. From the slot_2 NMIC shell, install the Feature Package software by entering either one of  
the following commands depending on the feature package ordered:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/FeatureControl_aa-3.1.0.0-1.ppc.rpm  
or  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/FeatureControl_ab-3.1.0.1-1.ppc.rpm  
33. From the slot_4 NMIC shell, install the Feature Package software by entering either one of  
the following commands depending on the feature package ordered:  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/FeatureControl_aa-3.1.0.0-1.ppc.rpm  
or  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3.1/FeatureControl_ab-3.1.0.1-1.ppc.rpm  
Page 2-428  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 7 of 11  
8 UPGRADE THE STANDBY NMIC (SLOT 4)  
34. In the slot 4 NMIC shell, change to the directory in which the software upgrade process is  
located:  
cd /cellworx/swImage/swLoad_Ver3/nmic.3.1.0.1/bin  
35. Start the software upgrade process. (The entire procedure for upgrading the slot 4 NMIC  
(standby NMIC) should take no more than 15 minutes.) This step invokes a graphical  
procedure that is used to walk the user through all required steps for upgrading the slot 4  
NMIC.  
Note: The user should keep the NMIC shell open following this procedure, as a manual  
reboot of the slot 4 NMIC following upgrade will be necessary. At the end of this  
procedure, the application software on the slot 4 NMIC will be halted, and the LEDs will  
turn red.  
36. The -h flag in the following command is used to specify the number of hours in which  
software fallback is allowed. Valid values are 0-168 (up to and including 7 days). The  
default value is 24 hours. For example, a value of 48 means the user cannot perform  
software fallback after 48 hours following software upgrade:  
./cw_swupgrade -s 3.1.0.1 -h (hours)  
9 UPGRADE THE ACTIVE NMIC (SLOT 2)  
37. After standby NMIC upgrade completion (the LEDs on the slot 4 NMIC faceplate should  
be red), start the software upgrade procedure on the slot 2 NMIC (the active NMIC). This  
step invokes a graphical procedure that walks the user through the necessary steps for  
upgrading software for the entire ring. The user should follow the directions and load  
release 3.1 software onto each AIC, RIC, and SCC in the ring:  
cd cellworx/swImage/swLoad_Ver3/nmic.3.1.0.1/bin  
./cw_swupgrade -a 3.1.0.1 -h (hours)  
38. Periodically click the Refresh button on the software configuration screen(s) to see when  
the software download is completed for each NE. Optionally, the user may close all  
software configuration screens and use the Refresh button on the main status screen.  
Clicking this button is equivalent to clicking the Refresh button on each of the NE’s  
software configurations screens.  
39. When the release 3.1 software download is complete for each NE, its entry in the main  
status screen will read, "NE is eligible for switchover." This must be done for all NEs in the  
ring.  
Page 2-429  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 8 of 11  
40. Step 8 of the Task Overview (this is the window that outlines the software upgrade tasks,  
with check marks placed beside completed tasks and a hand pointing to the task in  
progress) allows the user to cancel the upgrade procedure. Note that this is not traffic  
affecting and a NMIC reset is unnecessary.  
41. Step 12 of the Task Overview also allows the user to cancel the procedure. Note that this is  
also not traffic affecting but does require the slot 2 NMIC to be rebooted.  
42. Following step 12 of the GUI Task Overview, any problems that cause software upgrade to  
fail can be traffic affecting. Should any assistance be needed at any point after this step,  
contact ADC Technical Support at 1-800-366-3891, extension 4878.  
43. Following the slot 2 NMIC upgrade, this NMIC is automatically rebooted. After reboot, it  
will be running release 3.1 software. Note that until each of the SCCs reach their 5-minute  
switchover time and performs a soft reset, there will be a window of time during which  
communication is lost between the slot 2 NMIC and the SCCs. This window should be no  
more than 10 minutes.  
44.After the slot 2 NMIC has successfully rebooted, log back into it and start the Cellworx GUI.  
Replace "[hostname]" in the following commands with the IP address of the laptop or  
workstation:  
telnet [IP address of the slot 2 NMIC]  
export DISPLAY=[hostname]:0  
/cellworx/bin/CellworxVision  
45. After the Cellworx GUI has been started on the slot 2 NMIC, manually reboot the slot 4  
NMIC by entering the following command in the slot 4 NMIC shell window:  
/sbin/reboot  
Page 2-430  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 9 of 11  
46. After the slot 4 NMIC reboots, a database restoration window will appear on the Cellworx  
GUI screen from the slot 2 NMIC.  
Note: It is imperative that the user selects the slot 2 NMIC for database restoration  
because only the database files on this NMIC were converted from release 3.0 format to  
release 3.1 format.  
Warning: Following the software upgrade procedure, there are several actions that could  
invalidate software fallback. The user SHOULD NOT perform any of the following  
tasks unless he is certain that a software fallback from release 3.1 to release 3.0 is not  
necessary.  
• Make any topology modifications (add/remove NE, all shelf types)  
• Remove any existing cards  
• Delete any existing connections  
• Change the time of day clock  
• Perform a ring upgrade (OC3c --> OC12c, etc.)  
• Remove any file in the /cellworx/config directory with the extension,  
".release3.0". These files must be present in order to perform a software  
fallback.  
Also be aware of the following restrictions:  
• If a release 3.1 card is installed in a shelf (such as OC12c CRS), remove that  
card before performing software fallback.  
• Delete any connections that are created following software upgrade before  
attempting software fallback.  
Page 2-431  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 10 of 11  
10 UPGRADE THE BOOTROM FLASH  
47. From the main GUI screen (which is running on the slot 2 NMIC), open the Gateway  
Network Element (GNE) pop-up menu by right-clicking on the GNE icon (the text  
underneath the GNE icon will be yellow - text for all other NE icons is in white). Select the  
Reflash Boot Image menu option.  
48. In the resulting screen, select the release 3.1 bootrom for each card installed in the shelf  
(except the NMIC). To do this, right-click on each row in the table and select the  
appropriate bootrom image. The following images should be selected:  
SCC = 3.1.0.0 (the SCC flash image was previously installed in step 36)  
AIC/RIC = 3.0.1.3  
49. Once release 3.1 bootrom images have been selected for all cards in the GNE shelf, click  
the Apply button. Wait about 5 minutes and then click the Refresh button to update the  
download status for the cards. All cards should say, "Loaded". If not, wait a few more  
minutes and click Refresh again.  
50. Once all cards are loaded with the release 3.1 bootrom, each card in the shelf must be hard  
reset to load the new bootrom.  
Note: Hard resetting a card is traffic affecting. When you upgrade the flash bootrom on  
each card, you may want to take this into consideration. To minimize traffic loss, you  
should consider using 1+1 or 1:N protection and resetting the cards such that a card is  
always active. This will take longer, but you will avoid traffic loss.  
51. Repeat steps 50 through 55 for each NE in the ring.  
52. Following hard reset of all cards in all NEs in the ring, software upgrade is complete.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-432  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-795  
Page 11 of 11  
Cellworx Vision: Subnetwork Management System  
File Configuration Fault Performance  
Help  
GNE-1  
NE-2  
NE-3  
Cellworx User: root  
Local Time: 21:35 GMT Time: 21:35  
10924-D  
Figure 795-1. GUI Main Screen (example)  
Page 2-433  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-796  
Page 1 of 3  
RETRIEVE 622 CRS STATUS  
Summary: This procedure defines the information retrieved from the shelf level GUI card status  
display for the 622 CRS card. User must have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level  
GUI display per NTP-007 prior to performing this procedure.  
1. Double click on the 622 CRS card located in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View” at the top  
of the window.  
2. Click the small block between the Status and Configuration sections and drag it downwards  
to view all the status information. Refer to Table 796-1 for definitions of status information  
provided.  
3. Select the Close button to close the screen and return to the shelf view.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Figure 796-1. 622 CRS Card Status Window  
Page 2-434  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-796  
Page 2 of 3  
Table 796-1. 622 CRS Card Status Definitions  
STATUS DEFINITION  
ITEM  
ACTION  
Operational State  
Up  
Card is installed and provisioned No action required.  
for service.  
Down  
Card is not provisioned for  
service, is in reset mode, or  
failed.  
Verify card is installed,  
check for failure indications or  
provision card for service per  
DLP-797.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
currently know the operational  
status.  
Wait a few seconds for operations  
to complete and update the screen.  
Availability State  
Available  
In Test  
Failed  
Card is ready for processing  
commands.  
No action required.  
Card is currently processing test  
signals.  
Wait a few seconds for screen to  
update.  
Card has failed operation and  
system has placed it out of  
service.  
Card may be performing a reset,  
or the bus may be busy.  
PowerOff  
Card is manually powered off.  
Check power source, replace card  
if source is good per DLP-777.  
Not Installed Card is not currently installed in  
selected slot of the shelf.  
If required, install card in selected  
slot per DLP-777and provision per  
DLP-797.  
Offline  
Card is installed and provisioned If required, set module on line  
but currently off line.  
(unlocked) per DLP-797.  
Dependency Card is supplying timing  
Perform a soft switch over  
reference, traffic, or other data to (manual) per DLP-771 to release  
the system.  
card dependency if removing.  
Unknown  
The shelf controller does not  
currently know the availability  
status.  
Wait for processor to update  
current status, may need to  
perform a manual reset of SC per  
DLP-773.  
Section Status  
No Alarm  
LOS  
No errors between local and next No action required.  
node.  
Loss Of Signal. Cannot locate  
section data.  
Check connectors, fiber, and then  
transmitter at remote end.  
LOF  
Loss Of Frame. Cannot locate  
frame bit of section data.  
Check signal configuration and  
power level of received signal.  
Line Status  
Path Status  
No Alarm  
AIS  
Receiving good input signal.  
No action required.  
Alarm Indication Signal. All 1s  
or blue signal inserted at  
originating node.  
Check signal status at traversing  
nodes, and low speed signal input  
at transmitting node.  
RDI  
Remote Defect Indicator.  
Receiving good input signal.  
STS signal Loss Of Pointer.  
Problem at transmitting end.  
No action required.  
No Alarm  
STS LOP  
Check sync reference sources and  
inputs.  
(continued)  
Page 2-435  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-796  
Page 3 of 3  
Table 796-1. 622 Card Status Definitions, continued  
STATUS DEFINITION  
STS Alarm Indication Signal.  
ITEM  
ACTION  
Path Status  
(continued)  
STS AIS  
Check remote transmitting end’s  
Remote end transmitting AIS due input signal.  
to loss of payload for path.  
STS RDI  
Unequipped  
STS Remote Defect Indication.  
Remote end is receiving a  
defective signal.  
Check local end transmitter and  
connections.  
This time slot is not utilized  
(unequipped).  
Create a connection if needed on this  
available timeslot per DLP-708.  
SignalLabel  
Mismatch  
Type of signal does not match  
overhead description.  
Check VP connection for  
provisioning errors per DLP-710.  
Sync Status  
PRC  
PRS  
SEC  
SSU  
ST1  
STU  
SDH Primary Reference Clock  
Primary Reference Source  
SDH Equipment Clock Traceable level, check source and inputs.  
SDH Sync Supply Unit Traceable Provide the required clock source  
Stratum 1 level source  
Synchronized Traceability  
Unknown  
Timing reference reliability levels. If  
sync status does not meet required  
and change configuration settings for  
the card per DLP-749.  
ST2  
ST3  
SMC  
DUS  
Stratum 2 level source  
Stratum 3 level source  
SONET Minimum level Clock  
Reference cannot be used for  
source  
No action required.  
Received Path User Defined Path trace is a 64-character string  
No action required. If message states  
no path trace, one may be  
provisioned, for SM cards only, at  
either or both of the two adjacent  
nodes (clockwise and counter-  
clockwise node). Refer to DLP-797.  
Trace Msg  
assigned to a path between nodes  
in either direction identifying the  
transmitting node.  
No Path  
Trace  
(SM card  
only)  
Protection  
State  
Not Protected Not Protected  
If equipped, set up a protection  
group and provision card for  
protection per DLP-765.  
Enabled  
Protection is available for selected No action necessary.  
card but is not active.  
Manual  
switch  
User has manually switched the  
card to protection.  
If required, switch the card back per  
DLP-771.  
Forced  
Switch  
User has forced card to protection. If required, release forced switch per  
DLP-771.  
Card cannot switch to protection.  
Lockout  
It has been locked out by  
command or switch count.  
If required, release manual lock-out  
per DLP-771.  
Protection status information is  
not available to the shelf  
controller.  
Unknown  
Wait a few minutes and update  
screen. May need to reset SC, refer  
to DLP-773.  
Page 2-436  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-797  
Page 1 of 4  
SET 622 SM CRS CARD CONFIGURATION  
Summary: This procedure details the steps required to set the 622 SM CRS card configurations  
utilizing the Cellworx STN Phase 3.1 shelf level Graphical User Interface (GUI). Configuration  
can be set for the card, port and ATM interface on individual ports. This procedure is divided  
into two sections with the second section dealing with the ATM interface screens. The user must  
have the GUI launched and accessed the shelf level GUI display per NTP-006 prior to  
performing this procedure.  
1. CARD AND PORT CONFIGURATION  
1. Double click on the 622 SM CRS card displayed in the shelf level GUI “Chassis View”at  
the top of the window.  
2. The 622 SM CRS card display appears as shown in Figure 797-1. Click on the port to be  
configured (Port 1 or 2) located on the simulated card on the left side of the window.  
3. Click and drag the small block upward to expand the Configuration section of the window  
so all options are visible. The Administrative State of the card and port should be  
“Unlocked” if in service. If “Locked”, select the “Unlocked” option using the left mouse  
button to enable the port for service.  
4. At Timing Port, select the port that will be used as a reference if this slot is selected as a  
timing source from the Timing Resource Screen.  
5. If this card and port are being utilized as an expansion shelf interface (either from ring to  
EPS, or EPS to ring), select the Expansion Shelf Interface button.  
6. Set the Port Level configuration options per requirements. Refer to Table 797-1 for a list of  
options the user may select for this card type.  
7. Hit the Apply button at the bottom of the window to back up the new configuration data to  
the shelf controller.  
Note: Selecting Chassis View will return the user to the previous window without  
closing the 622 SM CRS window. Selecting Refresh will update the current window  
display and all the selections last recorded by the Shelf Controller card. Selecting Close  
will close this window.  
2. ATM INTERFACE CONFIGURATION  
8. Double click on port 1. The ATM interface screen appears. Refer to the example shown in  
Figure 797-2.  
9. Set the ATM options as needed using Table 797-2 as a reference.  
Page 2-437  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-797  
Page 2 of 4  
10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for each 622 SM CRS card installed in the shelf.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Figure 797-1. 622 SM CRS Card Shelf Level GUI Configuration Screen  
Table 797-1. 622 SM CRS Card Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
Admin State  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Unlock  
Lock / Unlock Enable or disable card / port for service.  
Congestion Threshold 80  
0-100  
Auto  
Percentage of ingress buffer capacity that will cause  
a congestion threshold notification.  
Ring Selection  
Auto  
Card will automatically select traffic from the ring  
direction with the best signal.  
Ring 16  
Ring 17  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 16 direction.  
Card will receive traffic from Ring 17 direction.  
Timing Port Selection  
1
1 or 2  
Selects the port to use as a reference when this slot  
is selected as the shelf timing source.  
Shelf Expansion  
Interface  
Selected  
Selected  
Determines if the 622 SM CRS card is being used as  
an expansion shelf interface (SEPIC) in an EPS or  
RNE. Click on the box to select it.  
Not selected  
(continued)  
Page 2-438  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-797  
Page 3 of 4  
Table 797-1. 622 SM CRS Card Configuration Options, continued  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Transmit  
System  
System  
Uses Primary timing reference.  
Timing Source  
Received  
Uses clock derived from incoming receive fiber  
(also known as Line-Timing).  
Do Not Use for False  
Sync  
Selected (True)  
Non-selected (False)  
Selected  
Outputs DUS (Do not Use for Sync) in the S1  
byte of the SONET overhead.  
Enable Signal  
Degrade  
Not  
Selected  
Enables a protection switch of the traffic if the  
input signal strength drops below tolerable  
levels set by the user in the BER threshold  
selection.  
Not Selected  
Signal Degrade  
BER Threshold  
5
5 through 9  
Defines the number of bit errors the port can  
incur before a signal degrade occurs and  
generates an alarm message and probably  
protection switch.  
Medium Type  
SONET  
SONET  
SDH  
Synchronous Optical Network, US standard for  
transporting data over fiber.  
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy, European  
standard for transporting data over fiber.  
Loopback  
Towards  
None  
None  
No loopback is requested or active.  
Terminal  
A loopback has been activated sending the  
signal back to the terminal side.  
Facility  
A loopback has been activated sending the  
signal back to the facility side.  
Line Coding  
Line Type  
NRZ  
Not configurable by user.  
Card  
Dependant  
SonetOther  
Not configurable by user, dependant on card  
type inserted.  
sonetShortSingleMode  
sonetLongSingleMode  
Transmit Path  
Trace  
User  
defined  
User can define a unique ID to this port for  
identification purposes on SM cards only.  
Table 797-2. ATM Interface Configuration Options  
SELECTION  
DEFAULT  
<default>  
OPTIONS  
DEFINITIONS  
Interface Name  
Alphanumeric User defined, up to 20 alphanumeric characters.  
Loopback Location All 1s  
Code  
Alphanumeri  
c
Used to loopback the incoming signal and transmit it  
back to the customer equipment. The code is limited  
to 16 numeric characters.  
(continued)  
Page 2-439  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-797  
Page 4of 4  
Table 797-2. ATM Interface Configuration Options, continued  
DEFAULT OPTIONS DEFINITIONS  
Identifies the site card and port location for  
SELECTION  
Recording Interface All 0s  
ID  
Numeric  
customer billing capabilities, (allows  
assignment of a customer ID for each port.)  
The code is limited to 15 numeric characters.  
UNI/ NNI Select  
CAC Formula  
UNI  
UNI  
NNI  
Specifies interface type as User to Network  
Interface or Network to Network Interface.  
PCR  
PCR  
SCR  
Specifies Peak Cell Rate or Sustained Cell Rate  
for Connection Admission Control calculations.  
Traffic Policing  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
User sets whether traffic will be policed for  
Quality Of Service (QOS).  
Cell Scrambling  
Subscription Rate  
True  
100  
True or False  
User sets whether traffic will be scrambled.  
User sets depending on traffic contract.  
PCR: 100 to 1000  
SCR: 1 to 100  
Max Active  
VPI/VCI Bits  
0
0 to 12  
0-4096  
0-8192  
Sets maximum number of bits allowed to select  
virtual channel from.  
Max number of  
VPCs  
4096  
0
Sets maximum number of virtual path circuits  
that may be assigned on this port.  
Max number of  
VCCs  
Sets maximum number of virtual channel  
circuits that may be assigned on this port.  
Figure 797-2. 622 SM CRS ATM Port Interface Configuration Screen  
Page 2-440  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-798  
Page 1 of 3  
SOFTWARE FALLBACK FROM RELEASE 3.1 TO RELEASE 3.0  
SUMMARY: The software fallback feature is used to revert to a previous software load after a  
successful software upgrade. The idea is to restore a system back to the state it was in prior to  
upgrade. Fallback implies that an unacceptable problem has been encountered after upgrade and  
the customer wants to revert to the previous software version.  
This procedure is specific to release 3.1. It is used after upgrading from release 3.0 to release 3.1 when  
unanticipated problems necessitate falling back to release 3.0 software. Note that fallback is only allowed  
for the first 24 hours following software upgrade by default. This timeframe is specified during the upgrade  
process. The fallback procedure consists of several steps outlined as follows:  
•
•
This procedure must be initiated with the slot_2 NMIC in the active state.  
The UNIX-based commands in this document are case sensitive. Pay particular attention to the  
upper and lower cases shown in the examples when entering commands.  
0
GENERAL  
1. Connect the laptop or workstation to the slot_2 NMIC and log in as the root user via a  
telnet session.  
telnet [IP address of the slot_2 NMIC]  
2. Create a directory on both NMICs called /tmp/p3 and manually ftp the kernel image, OS  
package, and feature control package to this directory on both NMICs. All other release 3.0  
packages including all software images and flash images should already be on the NMIC  
disk in the appropriate directories.  
3. Install the fallback OS on both NMICs.  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/ADC-Linux-fallback-3.0.1.0.ppc.rpm  
4. Install the appropriate 3.0 Feature Control package on both NMICs.  
/sbin/cwupgrade /tmp/p3/FeatureControl-a(x)-3.0-1.ppc.rpm  
Page 2-417  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-798  
Page 2 of 3  
11 FLASH FALLBACK  
5. Perform the following steps for each NE in the ring:  
• Invoke the Flash Upgrade screen in the GUI on the slot_2 NMIC.  
• Select release 3.0 boot images for each card in the shelf and press the ’Apply’button.  
• Execute a hard reset on each card immediately following successful download. Note  
that this can be traffic affecting, so you should take similar steps as done in software  
upgrade. See that procedure for details.  
Note: If the procedure is aborted anytime after flash fallback, you should reinstall  
release 3.1 flash for all cards.  
12 SOFTWARE FALLBACK  
6. Start the fallback procedure on the slot_4 NMIC (the standby NMIC). This step invokes a  
graphical procedure that walks you through the fallback steps for this NMIC. At the end of  
the procedure, all Cellworx application processes are killed. Keep the telnet session open,  
though, because the standby NMIC needs to be manually rebooted following active NMIC  
fallback.  
• cd /cellworx/bin  
• ./cw_swfallback -s 3.0.1.0  
7. After standy NMIC upgrade completion, start the fallback procedure on the slot_2 NMIC  
(the active NMIC). This step invokes a graphical procedure that walks you through the  
necessary steps for reverting software for the entire ring. These steps are identical to  
software upgrade except you will be loading release 3.0 software into the offline memory  
banks for each card in each NE instead of release 3.1 software.  
• cd /cellworx/bin  
• ./cw_swfallback -a 3.0.1.0  
As with software upgrade, you will need to periodically click the ’Refresh’ button to  
determine when each card has downloaded the designated release 3.0 software image.  
When all cards for all NEs have downloaded the image, each entry in the main screen will  
read, "NE is eligible for switchover." At this point, click the ’Next >>’ button to continue  
with the procedure and restore the release 3.0 databases. Note that these databases are  
currently in the /cellworx/config directory with the extension, ".release3.0". At the end of  
the procedure, the slot_2 NMIC is automatically rebooted.  
8. Following slot_2 NMIC reboot, start the CellworxVision GUI on the slot_2 NMIC.  
Page 2-418  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 • Issue 1 • February 2001• Section 2 Operation and Maintenance  
DLP-798  
Page 3 of 3  
9. Reboot the slot_4 NMIC by using /sbin/reboot. When this NMIC reboots, a database  
restoration window will appear in the slot_2 NMIC GUI. It’s very important that you  
select "Slot 2" for database restoration because only the databases on the slot_2  
NMIC were restored from release 3.1 to release 3.0.  
Stop! You have completed this procedure.  
Page 2-419  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 1 of 23  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES  
PHILOSOPHY OF MAINTENANCE  
The maintenance philosophy is built on the system signal flow from the Ring Interface Card  
(RIC) through the backplane and out the Access Interface cards or Electrical Interface Modules  
(EIMs). Since the Cellworx STN is an active interconnecting device, there are active components  
to troubleshoot and module, cable, or fiber removal may be necessary.  
Trouble Analysis Procedures  
Trouble analysis procedures found in this document involve obtaining alarm and status reports  
via craft or GUI sessions. Status and alarm reports are then analyzed to determine proper system  
operation and problem isolation.  
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Considerations  
Modules can be damaged by static electricity that builds up in work areas, especially in areas  
with low relative humidity. The static buildup in work areas, on work surfaces, personnel, and  
their clothing is produced by the rubbing of objects together to produce an electrical charge.  
The greatest potential for ESD damage occurs in areas with low relative humidity. All personnel  
handling modules should take the following precautions.  
1. Keep materials that tend to generate static electricity such as plastics, nylon clothing, and  
Styrofoam containers away from all modules.  
2. Read all caution and warning labels on bags and shipping cartons before opening any  
package.  
3. Open all modules, using properly grounded wrist straps and table mats designed to  
dissipate static electricity.  
4. If possible, wait to remove modules from their protective anti-static packaging until it is  
time to install them into a chassis.  
5. Never touch module components or connector pins. Handle all modules only by the front  
plate, extractor, or by the card edges.  
Page 2-420  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 2 of 23  
6. When opening modules or working on a chassis always wear a grounded wrist strap.  
7. Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed, are properly stored in  
anti-static packing material.  
8. The Cellworx STN shelf is equipped with a grounding jack for connecting anti-static  
grounding wrist straps. The jack is located on the front right side of the shelf .  
Caution: Modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling any  
modules, Electrostatic Discharge precautions (ESD) must always be used. Ensure that  
all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti-static  
packing material. When working with modules, always place the module on an  
electrically grounded approved anti-static mat.  
ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING  
Summary: This section provides the user and maintenance personnel with a table of definitions  
for all alarm messages that can be generated by the Cellworx STN system. Also provided are  
suggestions for troubleshooting the alarms incurred during system operation.  
A general knowledge of how the Cellworx STN functions and what alarm indications mean will  
aid in troubleshooting tasks. The following assumptions are made by this procedure:  
• All Cellworx STNs in the network are properly equipped.  
• There may be a single cause for multiple alarms or trouble indications.  
• Only a single failure exists.  
1. Accumulate the alarm information from the system to determine the highest level of  
alarm, and which node is generating the alarm.  
Reference: NTP-007.  
2. Locate the retrieved alarm message in Table 4-1 and refer to the suggested course of  
action provided. The alarms are listed alphabetically in bold and the actual TRAP  
messages are listed below the alarm message.  
Page 2-421  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 3 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Alarm  
Minor  
Service  
The line level has an alarm Check input source/  
Indication  
Signal Line  
Affecting  
indication signal present.  
TX AIS generally informs  
the user that the card has  
lost its input at the AIC,  
RX AIS informs the user  
that the card is receiving  
AIS from the far end which  
has lost its input at the  
AIC.  
connections and facility status.  
AIS is detected when the line  
has trouble.  
AIS-L  
Alarm  
Indication  
Signal Path  
Minor  
Service  
Affecting  
Generally informs the user  
that the transmitting LTE  
has lost its input at the  
AIC. TX AIS generally  
informs the user that the  
card has lost its input at the  
AIC, RX AIS informs the  
user that the card is  
Check input  
source/connections and facility  
status.  
AIS-P  
receiving AIS from the far  
end which has lost its input  
at the AIC.  
Burst  
Information Not Service  
al Alert Affecting  
DSX1 alarm: A burst of  
errored seconds at the T1  
level has exceeded the  
threshold setting.  
Check input source signal level  
and pulse mask, increase  
threshold level if needed.  
Errored  
Second  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
BESTca  
Card  
Inserted  
Information Maintenance  
al Alert  
Card is inserted into  
backplane slot. Informs  
user that a card is  
No action necessary.  
CardInserte  
d
physically present.  
Card  
Minor  
Maintenance  
Informs user that the card  
Locate card and reinstall if  
Removed  
has been removed from the necessary, otherwise, delete  
backplane.  
the card and facility from  
database. Refer to NTP-006  
section B.  
CardRemov  
ed  
Card Type Information Installation  
Informs user that the  
inserted card type is  
different from previous  
card type for that slot. A  
different card type may  
have been inserted into the  
wrong slot.  
Verify slot configuration and  
replace card with valid type. If  
changing configuration, delete  
previous configuration data for  
that slot and change out the  
EIM at the rear of the shelf if  
necessary.  
Mismatch  
al Alert  
Error  
CardTypeM  
ismatch  
(continued)  
Page 2-422  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 4 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
C-bit  
Information Service  
T3 C-bit coding violations  
threshold crossing alert.  
System is most likely  
Coding  
Violations  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
experiencing a line condition  
deterioration. Check signal  
level and pulse mask at input.  
Also verify LBO setting at  
CPE end.  
CCVTca  
C-bit  
Information Service  
T3 C-bit errored seconds  
threshold crossing alert.  
System is most likely  
Errored  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
experiencing a line condition  
deterioration. Check signal  
level and pulse mask at input.  
Also verify LBO setting at  
CPE end.  
CESTca  
C-bit  
Information Service  
T3 C-bit severely errored  
seconds threshold crossing  
alert. Port in alarm has  
received excessive errored  
seconds beyond user  
System is most likely  
Severely  
Errored  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
experiencing a line condition  
deterioration. Check signal  
level and pulse mask at input.  
Also verify LBO setting at  
CPE end.  
specified threshold.  
CSESTca  
Cellbus  
Parity  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Major –  
currently an affecting.  
information  
Not service  
Parity errors on the cell bus Very likely the backplane bus  
have exceeded the user  
definable threshold level.  
is bad. Shelf may need to be  
replaced.  
al alert.  
CellbusPari  
tyTca  
Channel  
Mismatch  
Minor  
Installation  
Error  
Channel number mismatch Verify working and protect  
in the SONET K1 and K2  
byte. Informs user that the  
facilities fibers are not  
installed properly.  
fibers are not crossed, and/or  
proper connectivity to EPS  
shelves.  
ChannelMis  
match  
(continued)  
Page 2-423  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 5 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
Information Service  
ALARM  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
MESSAGE  
Code  
Coding violations threshold Retrieve PM reports to check  
crossing alert for line layer for Section Code Violations  
Violation  
Line Far  
End  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
at far end. A bit of  
information has changed in cards/ports. Check input levels  
the transmission to the far and signal sources. Increase  
end target NE causing Line threshold settings if necessary.  
Code Violations (CVL) Check local requirements for  
(CVS) which identify problem  
that have exceeded the user proper levels.  
definable threshold level.  
Should be accompanied by  
CV-  
LFETca  
a CVS in the network.  
Code  
Violation  
Line  
Information Service  
Coding violations threshold Retrieve PM reports to check  
crossing alert for line layer. for Section Code Violations  
al Alert  
Degradation  
A bit of information has  
(CVS) which identify problem  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
changed in the transmission cards/ports. Check input levels  
from the far end originating and signal sources. Increase  
LTE, causing Line Code  
threshold settings if necessary.  
Violations (CVL) that have Check local requirements for  
exceeded the user definable proper levels.  
threshold level. Should be  
CV-Ltca  
accompanied by a CVS in  
the network.  
Code  
Information Service  
CV threshold crossing alert Retrieve PM reports to check  
Violation  
Path Far  
End  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
for path layer at far end. A  
bit of information has  
changed in the path layer  
transmission to the far end  
causing far end Path Code  
Violations (CVP) that have local requirements for proper  
exceeded the user definable levels.  
threshold level.  
for Section Code Violations  
(CVS) for problem cards/ports.  
Check input levels and signal  
sources. Increase threshold  
settings if necessary. Check  
CV-  
PFETca  
Code  
Violation  
Path  
Information Service  
Coding violations for path  
layer. A bit of information  
has changed in the path  
Retrieve PM reports to check  
for Section Code Violations  
(CVS) for problem cards/ports.  
al Alert  
Degradation  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
layer transmission from the Check input levels and signal  
far end causing local PTE sources. Increase threshold  
path code violations (CVP) settings if necessary. Check  
that have exceeded the user local requirements for proper  
CV-Ptca  
definable threshold level.  
levels  
(continued)  
Page 2-424  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 6 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Code  
Information Service  
Coding violation threshold  
crossing alert for section  
layer. A bit of information  
has changed in the  
Check input levels and signal  
sources. Increase threshold  
settings if necessary. Check  
local requirements for proper  
levels.  
Violation  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
transmission from the  
previous STE causing  
CV-Stca  
Section Code Violations  
(CVS) that have exceeded  
the user definable threshold  
level. Causes a CVL at the  
line terminating equipment.  
Configurat Minor –  
ion Failure currently an Eror  
Installation  
A request to configure a  
card or port has failed.  
Check configuration status,  
verify physical equipment is  
available and try again.  
information  
al alert  
Configurati  
onFailure  
Control  
Slip  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
DSX1 alarm: The timing  
Release is changing too  
much.  
Check timing source signal.  
al Alert  
Degradation  
CSSTca  
CRC  
Information Service  
Cyclic Redundancy Check  
has errors that have  
exceeded user definable  
levels.  
T1 frames may be bad at the  
far end or near end. Check  
signal inputs and line levels.  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
CRCErrorT  
ca  
Degraded  
Minutes  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
The input signal power  
level has dropped over a  
user definable amount of  
time.  
Check power level at input,  
verify cleanliness of fiber  
connections, adjust attenuator  
if equipped, and check transmit  
end output power level and  
replace card if necessary.  
al Alert  
Degradation  
DegradMin  
uteTca  
(continued)  
Page 2-425  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 7 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Discard  
Header  
Error  
Information Service  
Cells discarded due to  
Header Error Checksum  
have crossed the user  
definable threshold setting  
causing a Threshold  
Could be caused by a port  
failure at any ATM interface.  
Verify the port is online, check  
configuration, look for  
indications of high BER (Bit  
Error Rate), increase threshold  
settings if necessary, use line  
loopback to troubleshoot path  
through port.  
al Alert  
Degradation  
Count  
Violation  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
crossing alert (TCA).  
DiscardHec  
VioThresho  
ldExceeded  
EIM  
Removed  
Information Service  
EIM has physically been  
pulled from the backplane.  
Install EIM card as needed.  
al Alert  
Degradation  
Egress  
Congestion al Alert  
High  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Cells congested on the  
egress of reported port  
have crossed a user  
Review traffic contracts and  
modify threshold level if  
needed. Monitor for future  
congestion alarms. Cells  
tagged for discard become  
susceptible to termination.  
Degradation  
definable threshold level.  
EgressCong  
estHighTca  
Endpoint  
Alarm  
Minor  
Service  
Affecting  
Endpoint of reported  
connection is receiving AIS point by retrieving connection  
Check connection originating  
Indication  
Signal  
code due to a failure  
somewhere in the  
connection path.  
status and using OAM  
loopback from test equipment.  
Check input at the Electrical  
Interface Module (EIM) and  
the facility status on the  
EndpointAI  
S
Access Interface Card (AIC).  
Endpoint  
Loss of  
Clock  
Minor  
Minor  
Service  
Affecting  
No ATM cell traffic is  
present at connection  
endpoint.  
Perform ATM loopback to  
verify path continuity through  
port.  
EndpointL  
OC  
Endpoint  
Remote  
Defect  
Service  
Affecting  
Endpoint remote defect  
indication. AIS is detected  
by the remote endpoint  
causing an RDI.  
Check the AIC and EIM that  
feed the traffic for the  
connection.  
Indication  
EndpointR  
DI  
(continued)  
Page 2-426  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 8 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Errored  
Seconds  
Line Far  
End  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Errored seconds violations  
threshold crossing alert for for Errored Seconds Section  
Retrieve PM reports to check  
al Alert  
Degradation  
line layer at far end. A one  
second interval in the  
transmission to the far end  
target NE has had an error  
at the line layer causing an  
Errored Second Line  
(ESL). ESL errors have  
exceeded the user definable  
threshold level.  
Violations (ESS) which  
identify problem cards/ports  
across the network. Check  
input levels and signal sources.  
Increase threshold settings if  
necessary. Check local  
ES-LFETca  
requirements for proper levels.  
Errored  
Seconds  
Line  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Errored seconds violations  
threshold crossing alert for for Errored Seconds Section  
Retrieve PM reports to check  
al Alert  
Degradation  
line layer at local NE. A  
one second interval in the  
transmission from the far  
end originating NE has had threshold settings if necessary.  
an error at the line layer Check local requirements for  
Violations (ESS) which  
identify problem cards/ports  
across the network. Increase  
ES-Ltca  
causing an Errored Second proper levels.  
Line (ESL). ESL errors  
have exceeded the user  
definable threshold level  
(OC-N interface only).  
Errored  
Seconds  
Path Far  
End  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Errored seconds violations  
threshold crossing alert for for Errored Seconds Section  
path layer at far end. A one Violations (ESS) which  
second interval in the  
transmission to the far end  
target NE has had an error  
Retrieve PM reports to check  
al Alert  
Degradation  
identify problem cards/ports  
across the network. Check  
input levels and signal sources.  
at the path layer causing an Increase threshold settings if  
Errored Second Path  
(ESP). ESP errors have  
exceeded the user definable  
threshold level (OC-N  
interface only).  
necessary. Check local  
requirements for proper levels.  
ES-PFETca  
Errored  
Seconds  
Path  
Information Service  
ES violations threshold  
crossing alert for path layer for Errored Seconds Section  
at local NE. A one second Violations (ESS) which  
Retrieve PM reports to check  
al Alert  
Degradation  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
interval in the transmission identify problem cards/ports  
from the far end originating across the network. Check  
NE has had an error at the  
path layer causing an  
Errored Second Path  
(ESP). ESP errors have  
exceeded the user definable  
threshold level.  
input levels and signal sources.  
Increase threshold settings if  
necessary. Check local  
ES-Ptca  
requirements for proper levels.  
(continued)  
Page 2-427  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 9 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
SEVERITY IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Errored  
Seconds  
Section  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Informati Service  
ES violations threshold  
Check input levels and signal  
sources. Increase threshold  
settings if necessary. Check  
local requirements for proper  
levels.  
onal  
Degradation crossing alert for section  
layer at local NE. A one  
Alert  
second interval in the  
transmission from the far  
end originating NE has had  
an error at the section layer  
causing an Errored Second  
Section (ESS). ESS errors  
have exceeded the user  
ES-Stca  
definable threshold level.  
ESTca  
Informati Service  
Errored seconds threshold  
Check input levels and signal  
sources. Increase threshold  
settings if necessary. Check  
local requirements for proper  
levels.  
onal  
Degradation crossing alert for reported  
port.  
Errored  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Alert  
Excessive  
Ber  
Critical  
Service  
Affecting  
Excessive Bit Error Rate  
count.  
Applies to all SONET cards.  
Extended Cell Major  
Layer Cell  
Bus Interface  
Fault  
EclCellbusInter  
faceFault  
Service  
Affecting  
Cell bus hard failure.  
Each of these alarms indicate a  
switch fabric failure. Check  
alarm messages, is the failure  
on both buses? One card? All  
cards? If single card failure,  
remove from backplane, check  
pins in backplane connector,  
and reseat. One card failure  
could pull down the entire bus.  
Pull each card out one at a time  
starting with protect, check the  
pins in the backplane connector,  
monitor system traffic for  
recovery, then reseat the card.  
Perform switch over via GUI or  
craft interfaces before pulling  
EIMs if necessary. Do not pull  
the working cards. Repeat  
procedure for SC TEIM in slot  
18 at the rear of the shelf. This  
is a bus termination and the  
system will crash without it.  
Extended Cell  
Layer Egress  
Router Fault  
EclEgressRout  
erFault  
Extended Cell  
Layer Ingress  
Router Fault  
EclIngressRout  
erFault  
Extended Cell  
Layer Utopia  
Interface  
Fault  
EclUtopiaInterf  
aceFault  
Far End Loss Critical  
Of Signal  
Service  
Outage  
No input signal is being  
provided at the far end.  
Check input connections at the  
far end and transmitting  
equipment into the far end low  
speed facility.  
LOS-FE  
(continued)  
Page 2-428  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 10 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
SEVERITY IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Far End Loss Critical  
Of Signal  
Service  
Outage  
No input signal is being  
provided at the far end.  
Check input connections at the  
far end and transmitting  
equipment into the far end low  
speed facility.  
LOS-FE  
Far End  
Protection  
Line Failure  
Minor –  
currently Affecting  
an  
informati  
onal  
Service  
Far end protection line is  
no longer available.  
Check fiber facilities and  
connections to protect card.  
Verify Protection EIMs  
(PEIM) are installed. Check  
facility status and alarm  
reports.  
FarEndProtLi  
neFailed  
alert.  
Fifteen  
Informati Service  
Exceeded errored seconds  
have crossed a user  
definable major or minor  
threshold crossing alert for Replace problem cards if  
a 15 minute period causing necessary. See Section 6 of  
an alarm report.  
Retrieve PM data to determine  
problem cards/ports. Check  
inputs and signal levels.  
Minute  
Interval,  
Errored  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
onal  
Degradation  
Alert  
this manual for warranty and  
return authorization  
information.  
EESCMajor1  
5minTca  
Housekeepin Minor  
g AlarmX  
Not Service  
Affecting  
X = input numbers 1 to 8.  
User defined housekeeping panel for correlating input  
Refer to label inside front door  
input on port listed has  
received an alarm.  
type. Troubleshoot  
accordingly..  
HouseKeepin  
gAlarm”X”  
Ingress  
Informati Service  
Ingress congestion  
Review traffic contracts and  
modify threshold level if  
needed. Monitor for future  
congestion alarms. Cells  
tagged for discard become  
susceptible to termination.  
Congestion  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
onal  
Degradation  
threshold crossing alert.  
Cells congested on the  
ingress of reported port  
have crossed a user  
Alert  
definable threshold level.  
IngressConge  
stTca  
Line Code  
Violations  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Informati Service  
Line code violations have  
exceeded the user definable premise Equipment (CPE),  
threshold level causing a  
Threshold Crossing Alert  
(Tca).  
Check input from Customer  
onal  
Degradation  
Alert  
signal level and pulse mask.  
LCVTca  
(continued)  
Page 2-429  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 11 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Line  
Information Service  
A one second interval in  
the transmission from the  
far end originating NE has  
had an error at the line  
layer causing an Errored  
Second Line (ESL). ESL  
errors have exceeded the  
user definable threshold  
level.  
Check input from Customer  
premise Equipment (CPE)  
(signal level and pulse mask).  
Errored  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
LESTca  
Login  
Information Not Service  
A user has entered the  
wrong information to gain  
access in excess of user  
defined thresholds.  
Administrator should check  
user name and password or  
verify personnel authorization  
to access system.  
Failure  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Affecting.  
FailedLogin  
Tca  
Loss of  
Cell  
Delineation  
Critical /  
Service  
Outage  
except for  
RIC cards.  
System unable to determine Reset SC cards at shelf.  
or delineate between  
incoming cells.  
Replace if necessary. See  
Section 6 of this manual for  
warranty and return  
Major on  
RIC  
LCD  
authorization information.  
Loss of  
Frame  
Critical  
Service  
Outage  
except for  
RIC cards.  
T3 frame cannot be  
obtained or synced to.  
Retrieve facility configuration  
and check framing. Verify it  
matches CPE transmission.  
Major on  
RIC  
LOF  
Loss of  
Pointer  
Path  
Critical  
Service  
Outage  
except for  
RIC cards.  
Card cannot locate the  
payload due to a loss of  
pointer at the path layer.  
Retrieve SONET facility  
configuration and check the  
clock source.  
Major on  
RIC  
LOP-P  
Loss of  
Signal  
Critical  
Service  
Outage  
except for  
RIC cards.  
No input signal is being  
provided.  
Check input connections and  
transmitting equipment.  
Major on  
RIC  
LOS  
Loss of  
Sync  
Minor  
Minor  
Service  
Affecting  
Applies to all SONET cards.  
Mode  
Mismatch  
Installation  
Error  
Protection mode received  
in K1 and K2 bytes does  
not match configured  
mode. SONET interfaces  
only.  
Check each facility and verify  
the protection modes match  
(i.e., unidirectional versus bi-  
directional or 1:N versus 1+1).  
ModeMism  
atch  
(continued)  
Page 2-430  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 12 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Module  
Failure  
without  
protection  
Critical  
Service  
Card failure or card  
malfunction.  
Reset the card via software,  
reseat the card to reboot it. If it  
does not return to service,  
replace the card. Call ADC for  
warranty information and  
return authorization.  
Outage /  
RICs have  
outage only  
on dual  
ModuleFail  
failure.  
Module  
Failure  
Stand-by  
Ring  
Interface  
Card  
Major  
Not Service  
affecting.  
RICs have  
outage only  
on dual  
Card failure or card  
malfunction.  
Reset the card via software,  
reseat the card to reboot it. If it  
does not return to service,  
replace the card. Call ADC for  
warranty information and  
return authorization.  
failure.  
(RIC)  
ModuleFail  
Module  
Failure  
with  
Minor  
Not service  
affecting.  
Card failure or card  
malfunction.  
Reset the card via software,  
reseat the card to reboot it. If it  
does not return to service,  
replace the card. Call ADC for  
warranty information and  
return authorization.  
protection  
ModuleFail  
NE Power  
Failure (A) currently an Outage  
Critical –  
Service  
An input power failure on  
either the A side, or B side  
of the shelf.  
Check power supplies,  
breakers, and fuses. Investigate  
if anything in the equipment  
caused a breaker trip or blown  
fuse. Verify peroper ratings for  
current draw.  
information  
al alert.  
Power“X”Fa  
ilure (X = A  
or B)  
New  
Information Not Service  
New SONET path trace has Informs the user that a new  
SONET  
Path Trace  
al Alert  
Affecting  
been received.  
path trace has been established  
in the network, probably a new  
connection. No action  
necessary.  
NewPathTr  
ace  
Optical  
Laser  
Failure  
Critical/  
Service  
Outage  
except on  
RIC cards.  
Optical LASER failure at  
card/port reported in alarm card but generally a hard  
message.  
May try resetting or reseating  
Major on  
RIC  
failure. Replace card. See  
Section 6 of this manual for  
warranty and return  
LaserFail  
authorization information.  
(continued)  
Page 2-431  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 13 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Out Of  
Cell  
Delineation  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Installation  
Can indicate line  
degradation.  
Could be caused by a port  
failure at any ATM interface.  
Verify the port is online, check  
configuration, look for  
indications of high BER (Bit  
Error Rate), increase threshold  
settings if necessary, use line  
loopback to troubleshoot path  
through port.  
al Alert  
Error  
OCDThresh  
oldExceede  
d
Path  
Information Service  
T3 P-bit coding violations  
threshold crossing alert.  
Path code violations indicate a  
parity mismatch in the SONET  
or DSX path. Examine the  
physical circuit to determine if  
there are any impairments.  
Coding  
Violations  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
PCVTca  
Payload  
Label  
Mismatch  
Path  
Minor  
Installation  
Error  
Traffic in payload does not Check input source type and  
match what the payload  
label in the path layer  
expected.  
change payload label if  
needed.  
PLM-P  
P-bit  
Information Service  
T3 P-bit errored seconds  
threshold crossing alert. A  
one second interval in the  
transmission from the far  
end originating NE has had  
excessive parity errors.  
PES errors have exceeded  
the user definable threshold  
level.  
Parity bits on the incoming  
DS3 line. The transmitted  
signal does not match the  
received signal.  
Errored  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
PESTca  
P-bit  
Information Service  
T3 P-bit Severely Errored  
Seconds (SES) threshold  
crossing alert. Excessive  
one second intervals in the  
transmission from the far  
end originating NE have  
had Parity bit errors. P-Bit  
SES errors have exceeded  
the user definable threshold  
level.  
Parity bits on the incoming  
DS3 line. The transmitted  
signal does not match the  
received signal at an error rate  
of 1.6E-5 or worse for a period  
of time less than ten seconds.  
Severely  
Errored  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
al Alert  
Degradation  
PSESTca  
(continued)  
Page 2-432  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 14 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
Physical  
Layer  
Convergen  
ce Protocol  
Loss of  
Critical  
Service  
Affecting  
PLCP encoding problem at Check far end encoding and  
the far end, or line  
degradation.  
line levels.  
Frame  
PLCP-Lof  
Physical  
Layer  
Information Service  
PLCP severely errored  
frame seconds threshold  
crossing alert.  
The TCAs signal a problem  
with the integrity of the PLCP  
overhead in the DS3 frame.  
The most probable cause is a  
mismatch between the  
transmitter and the receiver.  
Examine the physical circuit to  
determine if there are any  
impairments.  
al Alert  
Degradation  
Convergen  
ce Protocol  
Severely  
Errored  
Framing  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
PLCP-  
SEFSTca  
Physical  
Layer  
Information Service  
PLCP unavailable seconds  
threshold crossing alert.  
An error rate of 1.6E-5 or  
worse for a period of time  
more than ten seconds.  
Examine the physical circuit to  
determine if there are any  
impairments.  
al Alert  
Degradation  
Convergen  
ce Protocol  
Unavailabl  
e Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
PLCP-  
UASTca  
Physical  
Layer  
Convergen  
ce Protocol  
Yellow  
Minor  
Installation  
Error  
PLCP yellow alarm.  
Remote end has detected a  
PLCP Loss of Frame  
(LOF).  
PLCP Yellow alarm indicates  
to the near end a problem with  
the framing in the PLCP  
header at the far end.Examine  
the physical circuit to  
Alarm  
determine if there are any  
impairments.  
PLCP-  
YellowAlar  
m
(continued)  
Page 2-433  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 15 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Primary  
Derived  
DS1 Source  
Failed  
Major  
Not Service  
Affecting  
The reference source for  
the primary clock has  
failed.  
Check source (external, optical  
in, or other AIC card) for  
alarms and correct as  
necessary.  
Protection  
Switch Bytes  
Failure  
Minor  
Installation  
Error  
Inconsistent APS byte or  
invalid code.  
Automatic Protection Switch  
(APS) byte is inconsistent with  
the expected code. Check  
facility interconnections and  
verify switching modes match  
at each end (i.e., 1:1, 1+1,  
1:N).  
ProtectionSwi  
tchBytesFailu  
re  
Protection  
Switch  
Failure  
Minor –  
currently an Error  
information  
Installation  
User initiated or automatic  
protection switch failed.  
Check protection group for  
previously failed/switched  
working card, lockout of  
protect, or failed protect card.  
PEIM must be installed at the  
rear of the shelf at the  
al alert.  
ProtSwitchF  
ailed  
protection slot for 1:N  
protection groups.  
Protection  
Switch  
Successful  
Information Not Service  
Protection switch  
completed successfully.  
User initiated or automatic  
protection switch was  
completed. No action  
necessary.  
al  
Affecting  
ProtSwitchS  
uccessful  
Protocol  
Error  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Protocol error threshold has Caused by the following: 1)  
al Alert  
Major  
Degradation  
been crossed.  
Out of range VPI/VCI, (2)  
Invalid PTI values (6 and 7),  
and 3) Unassigned VPI/VCI  
values. Check the connection  
VPI/VCI to make sure the  
provisioning is correct for the  
expected traffic stream..  
ProtocolErro  
rTca  
Remote  
Failure  
Service  
Far end has detected AIS at RFI is a near end notification  
affecting  
the DSX level.  
of a remote failure. For  
Indication  
example, a LOS occurs at the  
near end, a RFI line and path is  
sent in the reverse direction to  
the remote node. An RFI line  
is sent if the network element  
is a line terminating element  
while a RFI path is sent if the  
netork element is a path  
RFI  
terminating element.  
(continued)  
Page 2-434  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 16 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Remote  
Failure  
Indication  
Line  
Major  
Service  
affecting.  
SONET far end has  
detected an AIS-L  
condition.  
See above.  
RFI-L  
Remote  
Failure  
Indication  
Path  
Major –  
currently an affecting  
information  
Service  
Far end has detected an  
AIS-P condition.  
See above..  
al alert.  
RFI-P  
Secondary Major  
Derived  
DS1  
Not service  
affecting  
The reference source for  
the secondary clock has  
failed.  
Check source (external, optical  
in, or other AIC card) for  
alarms and correct as  
necessary.  
Source  
Failed  
Severely  
Errored  
Frame  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
DSX Severely errored  
frame seconds threshold  
crossing alert.  
The incoming signal frame has  
an error rate of 1.6E-5 or worse  
for a period of time less than ten  
seconds. An SES can also be  
caused by a physical failure  
such as LOS for less than ten  
seconds. Examine the physical  
circuit to determine if there are  
any impairments.  
al Alert  
Degradation  
SEFS-tca  
Severely  
Errored  
Frame  
Seconds  
Section  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Severely errored frame  
seconds threshold crossing  
alert for section layer.  
The incoming signal frame has  
an error rate of 1.6E-5 or worse  
for a period of time less than ten  
seconds. An SES can also be  
caused by a physical failure  
such as LOS for less than ten  
seconds. Examine the physical  
circuit to determine if there are  
any impairments.  
al Alert  
Degradation  
SEFS-Stca  
Severely  
Errored  
Seconds  
Line Far  
End  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Severely errored seconds  
threshold crossing alert for rate of 1.6E-5 or worse for a  
line layer at far end.  
The far end line has an error  
al Alert  
Degradation  
period of time less than ten  
seconds. An SES can also be  
caused by a physical failure  
such as LOS for less than ten  
seconds. Examine the physical  
circuit to determine if there are  
any impairments.  
SES-  
LFETca  
(continued)  
Page 2-435  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 17 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
Severely  
Errored  
Seconds  
Line  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Severely errored seconds  
threshold crossing alert for an error rate of 1.6E-5 or  
line layer.  
The incoming signal line has  
al Alert  
Degradation  
worse for a period of time less  
than ten seconds. An SES can  
also be caused by a physical  
failure such as LOS for less  
than ten seconds. Examine the  
physical circuit to determine if  
there are any impairments.  
SES-Ltca  
Severely  
Errored  
Seconds  
Path Far  
End  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Severely errored seconds  
threshold crossing alert for error rate of 1.6E-5 or worse  
path layer at far end.  
The far end NE has a path  
al Alert  
Degradation  
for a period of time less than  
ten seconds. An SES can also  
be caused by a physical failure  
such as LOS for less than ten  
seconds. Examine the physical  
circuit to determine if there are  
any impairments.  
SES-  
PFETca  
Severely  
Errored  
Seconds  
Path  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Severely errored seconds  
threshold crossing alert for an error rate of 1.6E-5 or  
path layer.  
The incoming signal path has  
al Alert  
Degradation  
worse for a period of time less  
than ten seconds. An SES can  
also be caused by a physical  
failure such as LOS for less  
than ten seconds. Examine the  
physical circuit to determine if  
there are any impairments.  
SES-Ptca  
Severely  
Errored  
Seconds  
Section  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Information Service  
Severely errored seconds  
threshold crossing alert for has an error rate of 1.6E-5 or  
section layer. Excessive  
one second intervals in the  
transmission from the far  
The incoming signal section  
al Alert  
Degradation  
worse for a period of time less  
than ten seconds. An SES can  
also be caused by a physical  
end NE have had ES In the failure such as LOS for less  
section layer over and  
above the ES threshold  
level causing a Severely  
Errored Seconds threshold  
alert.  
than ten seconds. Examine the  
physical circuit to determine if  
there are any impairments.  
SES-Stca  
Shelf  
Information Installation  
Memory problem on the  
SC card.  
Reset the SC card to initiate a  
new load from the NMIC by  
either hitting the reset and  
Controller al Alert  
Card’s  
Error  
Database  
Corrupted  
enable buttons simultaneously,  
or reset via software command.  
DBCorrupt  
ed  
(continued)  
Page 2-436  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 18 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
Shelf  
Controller Alert  
EIM 1  
Informational Installation  
SC EIM in slot one which Buses are probably not  
provides hardwired alarm functioning properly because  
inputs and outputs, remote the Bus Terminating EIM (B-  
Information  
Removed  
ACO activation, and  
timing reference inputs  
(BITS), cannot be found . been physically removed from  
the backplane.  
TEIM) in slot 18 at the rear of  
the shelf or the SC in slot 1 has  
EIMSlot1R  
emoved  
Shelf  
Controller Alert  
EIM 18  
Informational Installation  
SC EIM in slot 18 which  
provides backplane bus  
termination, Telnet  
connection to the node,  
and shelf addressing, has  
been physically pulled  
from the backplane.  
Buses are probably not  
Information  
functioning properly because  
the Bus Terminating EIM (B-  
TEIM) in slot 18 at the rear of  
the shelf or the SC in slot 18  
has been physically removed  
from the backplane.  
Removed  
EIMSlot18  
Removed  
Signal  
Degraded  
Minor  
Could be  
Service  
Input signal strength is  
degraded. Possibly a fiber bends and check attenuation  
Check fiber path for damage or  
Affecting.  
problem or transmitter.  
and transmitter output.  
Software  
Downloadi Alert  
ng Failed  
Informational Installation  
NMIC unable to  
download software  
successfully to the NE.  
Check FTP connection and NE  
status.  
Information  
SWDownlo  
adFailed  
Sync  
Message  
Changed  
Major –  
Installation  
Error  
SONET sync message (S1 No suggestions.  
byte) changed.  
currently an  
informational  
alert.  
SyncMessa  
geChanged  
Sync  
Reference  
Failure  
Major –  
Service  
Affecting  
Timing reference that the  
network element clocks  
off of has failed.  
Retrieve timing source  
currently an  
informational  
alert.  
information and check reference  
input (BITS, 622-RIC, 155-  
CRS).  
SyncRefere  
nceFailed  
T1  
Informational Service  
T1 Loopback Pseudo  
Check for troubleshooting  
Loopback  
Alert  
Affecting  
Random Pattern. Indicates activity by other users and  
a loopback condition has  
been initiated by a user.  
release loopback if necessary.  
DS1Loopba  
ck  
T1 Yellow  
Alarm  
Minor  
Not service  
affecting  
DSX1 Alarm: Remote  
Alarm Indication.  
Check card and output level of  
CPE equipment. Replace as  
Indicates a problem at the needed per local practices.  
CPE transmitter.  
DS1Rai  
(continued)  
Page 2-437  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 19 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
IMPACT DESCRIPTION  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF  
ACTION  
T3 Loopback  
Informational Service  
T3 Loopback Indication.  
Indicates a loopback  
condition has been initiated release loopback if  
Check for troubleshooting  
activity by other users and  
Alert  
Affecting  
DS3Loopback  
by a user which causes a  
T3 RAI.  
necessary.  
T3 Remote  
Alarm  
Minor  
Not service  
affecting  
T3 Remote Alarm  
Indication or yellow alarm. signal level and pulse  
Check EIM connections,  
Indication  
CPE equipment is  
receiving a yellow alarm at  
T3 port.  
mask.  
DS3Rai  
Twenty Four  
Hour Interval, Alert  
Errored  
Informational Service  
Exceeded errored seconds  
Retrieve PM data to  
determine problem  
cards/ports. Check inputs  
Degradation have crossed a user  
definable major or minor  
Seconds  
Threshold  
threshold crossing alert for and signal levels. Replace  
a 24 hour period causing an problem cards if  
Crossing Alert  
alarm report.  
necessary. See Section 6  
of this manual for  
warranty and return  
EESCMajor24  
hTca  
authorization information.  
Unavailable  
Seconds Line  
Far  
Informational Service  
Unavailable seconds  
Check input and  
Alert  
Degradation threshold crossing alert for transmitter at local node.  
line layer at far end. Line  
EndThreshold  
Crossing Alert  
layer was unavailable at the  
far end network element  
for more seconds than the  
threshold was set for. UAS  
overrides all other error  
UAS-LFETca  
counts.  
Unavailable  
Seconds Line  
Threshold  
Informational Service  
Unavailable seconds  
Check input and  
Alert  
Degradation threshold crossing alert for transmitter at far end  
line layer. Line layer was  
unavailable for more  
node.  
Crossing Alert  
seconds than the threshold  
was set for. UAS overrides  
all other error counts.  
UAS-LTca  
Unavailable  
Seconds Path  
Far End  
Informational Service  
Unavailable seconds  
Check input source and  
Alert  
Degradation threshold crossing alert for transmitter at local node.  
path layer at far end. Path  
Threshold  
Crossing Alert  
layer was unavailable at the  
far end network element  
for more seconds than the  
threshold was set for. UAS  
overrides all other error  
UAS-PFETca  
counts.  
(continued)  
Page 2-438  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 20 of 23  
Table 4-1. Alarm Identifications, continued  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
IMPACT  
DESCRIPTION  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF  
ACTION  
Unavailable Informational Service  
Unavailable seconds  
Check input source and  
Seconds  
Path  
Alert  
Degradation threshold crossing alert for transmitter at far end node.  
path layer. Path layer was  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
unavailable for more  
seconds than the threshold  
was set for. UAS overrides  
all other error counts.  
UAS-PTca  
Unavailable Informational Service  
T3 unavailable seconds  
Check input source.  
Seconds  
Threshold  
Crossing  
Alert  
Alert  
Degradation threshold crossing alert. T3  
signal was unavailable for  
more seconds than the  
threshold was set for. UAS  
overrides all other error  
counts.  
UASTca  
1. After determining the alarm type, locate the associated interface in Figure-1 below to  
determine each alarm type origination point in an NE.  
Page 2-439  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 21 of 23  
1
1
COUNTER-  
CLOCKWISE  
RING  
INTERFACE  
CARD  
CLOCKWISE  
RING  
INTERFACE  
CARD  
2
BACKPLANE CELLBUS  
3
ACCESS INTERFACE CARD  
ACCESS INTERFACE CARD  
INPUTS  
INPUTS  
4
CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT  
CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT  
1. INCOMING OPTICAL SIGNAL CARRYING ALARM INDICATION, BAD DATA FROM REMOTE END, OR IS  
MISSING  
.
2.. PROBLEM WITH RIC SWITCH FABRIC OR BACKPLANE CONNECTION.  
3. PROBLEM WITH AIC CARD SWITCH FABRIC, BACKPLANE CONNECTION, VP/VC CONFIGURATION,  
OR EIM BACKPLANE CONNECTIONS.  
4. CPE TRANSMITTING ERROR OR ALARM MESSAGE, BAD CONNECTION, BAD INPUT SIGNAL, OR  
PORT CONFIGURATION.  
11757-B  
Figure-1. NE Flowchart Troubleshooting Guide  
Page 2-440  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 22 of 23  
A. NMIC GENERATED ALARMS  
Table 101-2. Alphabetical NMIC Generated Alarm Reports  
SEVERITY IMPACT DESCRIPTION SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
An NE has been added to the Informational message, no  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
NE Added  
Informatio Not  
nal Alert Service  
Affecting  
Ring via user command in  
GUI.  
action is necessary.  
NE Booted  
Informatio Not  
An NE has completed the  
Informational message, no  
nal Alert  
Service  
Affecting  
boot process either from user action is necessary.  
initiated reset, or an NE being  
established.  
NE Isolated  
Critical  
Service  
Outage  
NMIC can not communicate  
with the NE indicated. May  
be fiber related failure (cut),  
SC communications failure.  
In the event of an SC failure,  
the cell traffic may still  
Use OAM loopbacks if  
necessary to check cell traffic  
to/from the node. No loopbacks  
may be performed at the  
isolated mode until it recovers.  
At the location of the isolated  
node, check optical cards for  
indications of LOS. If LOS is  
not present, management cells  
are not being processed at the  
node. Reset SC card, replace if  
necessary.  
continue to/from the NE.  
NE  
Removed  
Informatio Not  
nal Alert Service  
Affecting  
An NE has been removed  
from the Ring via user  
command in GUI.  
Informational message, no  
action is necessary.  
NMIC  
Informatio Not  
This informational message  
appears when a database  
restoration is attempted. It  
locks out user activity until  
restoration is completed.  
No action necessary.  
No action necessary.  
Administrati nal Alert  
vely Locked  
for  
Service  
Affecting  
Maintenance  
NMIC  
Administrati nal Alert  
vely  
Unlocked  
Informatio Not  
This informational message  
appears when a database  
restoration has completed  
successfully. Indicates NMIC  
is ready for processing user  
requests.  
Service  
Affecting  
NMIC Disk  
Usage  
Threshold  
Exceeded  
Informatio Not  
Informational alarm appears  
when disk usage reaches 50% alarm messages that are  
and again at 80%. affecting disk space.  
Check disk files for spurious  
nal Alert  
Service  
Affecting  
NMIC File  
Replication  
Failure  
Minor  
Not  
Service  
Affecting.  
NMIC failed to copy selected Check statuses of NMICs and  
files to the stand-by NMIC. retry replication.  
(continued)  
Page 2-441  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700• Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 2 Operations and Maintenance  
TAP-100  
Page 23 of 23  
Table 101-2. Alphabetical NMIC Generated Alarm Reports, continued  
ALARM  
MESSAGE  
SEVERITY  
IMPACT  
DESCRIPTION  
SUGGESTED COURSE OF ACTION  
NMIC Full  
Database  
Restoration  
Failed  
Minor  
Not  
Service  
Affecting. has failed.  
Informs user that the NMIC  
database restoration attempt  
Check statuses of NMICs and  
reattempt database restoration.  
NMIC Full  
Database  
Restoration  
Needed  
Informatio Not  
nal Alert Service  
Affecting  
Informs user that the NMIC  
cards (working and protect)  
are out of sync.  
Perform a database restoration  
to synchronize the information  
on the NMIC cards. Refer to  
DLP-719.  
NMIC lost  
connection  
with NMIC  
application  
Informatio Not  
nal Alert Service  
Affecting  
Informs user that the NMIC  
had a failure resulting in a  
loss of connection with its  
application.  
This event will result in a  
protection switch if the second  
NMIC is in sync and protection  
switching is enabled.  
NMIC lost  
connection  
with NMIC  
resources  
agent  
Informatio Not  
nal Alert Service  
Affecting  
Informs user that the NMIC  
had a failure resulting in a  
loss of connection with its  
resource agent.  
This event will result in a  
protection switch if the second  
NMIC is in sync and protection  
switching is enabled.  
NMIC lost  
connection  
with peer  
NMIC  
Informatio Not  
nal Alert Service  
Affecting  
Working NMIC cannot  
communicate with the  
protection NMIC.  
Protection switching will not be  
enabled at this point. Try  
reseating standby NMIC. May  
need to perform a database  
restoration upon reestablishing  
communication paths.  
NMIC  
Protection  
Change  
Informatio Not  
nal Alert Service  
Affecting  
An informational alert  
informing the user that the  
protection mode has been  
changed. This may be due to  
a Lockout or an Automatic  
Protection Switch (APS)  
being initiated.  
No action necessary. Verify the  
protection operation change is  
required and revert back if it is  
not.  
Notification  
NMIC  
Protection  
Switch  
Informatio Not  
An informational alert  
indicating the NMIC has  
started the process of  
No action necessary. Verify  
card switches properly upon  
completion.  
nal Alert  
Service  
Affecting  
Notification  
switching to the protect card.  
Physical  
Fiber Failure  
Major  
Not  
service  
affecting  
Network has experienced a  
failure on one of the fiber  
interconnections between the Section AIS on the hop may  
Check NE alarm reports at each  
end of the fiber. Any LOS or  
nodes, indicated on the GUI  
screen as an orange  
connection.  
cause this alarm.  
Second  
NMIC  
Plugged into  
Invalid Slot  
Informatio Not  
nal Alert Service  
Affecting  
Informs the user that the  
protection NMIC is not  
seated into the proper slot in  
the backplane.  
Remove the protection NMIC  
and reinstall into slots 4 and 5.  
Page 2-442  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 3: General Information  
SECTION 3: GENERAL INFORMATION  
Content  
Page  
1
2
3
4
5
6
WARRANTY/SOFTWARE  
3-1  
3-1  
3-2  
3-2  
3-2  
3-3  
REPAIR/ADVANCE REPLACEMENT POLICY  
REPAIR CHARGES  
REPLACEMENT/SPARE PRODUCTS  
RETURNED MATERIAL  
CUSTOMER INFORMATION AND ASSISTANCE  
.1.  
WARRANTY/SOFTWARE  
The Product and Software warranty policy and warranty period for all Products of  
ADC Telecommunications, Inc. (hereinafter referred to as ADC) is published in  
ADC’s Warranty/Software Handbook. Contact the Business Broadband Group (BBG)  
Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891, extension 54878 (in U.S.A. or  
Canada) 1-972-680-4878 (outside U.S.A. and Canada) for warranty or software  
information or for a copy of the Warranty/Software Handbook.  
.2.  
REPAIR/ADVANCE REPLACEMENT POLICY  
All repairs of ADC Products must be done by ADC or an authorized representative.  
Any attempt to repair or modify ADC Products without prior written authorization  
from ADC shall void ADC’s warranty.  
If a malfunction cannot be resolved by the normal troubleshooting procedures, call the  
BBG Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891, extension 54878 (in U.S.A. or  
Canada) or 1-972-680-4878 (outside U.S.A. and Canada). A telephone consultation  
can sometimes resolve a problem without the need to repair or replace the ADC  
Product.  
If, during a telephone consultation, ADC determines the ADC Product requires repair,  
ADC will authorize the return of the affected Product by the issue of a Return Material  
Authorization number and complete return shipping instructions. If service is affected,  
ADC can arrange to ship a replacement Product when available from designated  
inventory. In all cases, the defective Product must be carefully packaged to eliminate  
damage, and returned to ADC in accordance with issued ADC instructions.  
Page 3-1  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11152700 Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 3: General Information  
.3.  
REPAIR CHARGES  
If the defect and the necessary repairs are covered by warranty, Buyer’s only  
obligation is the payment of all transportation and associated costs in returning the  
defective Product to the location designated by ADC. ADC, at its option, will either  
repair or replace the Product at no charge and return the Product to Buyer with  
transportation costs paid by ADC, only when ADC contracted carriers are used.  
Requested return of Product by any other means will be at Buyer’s cost. Buyer is  
responsible for all other associated costs in return of Products from ADC. If Product is  
Out of Warranty or NTF (no trouble found), ADC will charge a percentage of the  
current Product list price. To obtain the percentage factor for Out of Warranty or NTF  
Product, contact the ADC Product Return Department at 1-800-366-3891, extension  
63748 (in U.S.A. or Canada) or 612-946-3748 (outside U.S.A. and Canada).  
If a service affecting advance replacement Product is requested, the current list price of a  
new Product will be charged initially. A customer purchase order is required to ship an  
advance replacement Product. Upon receipt of the defective Product, there will be no  
credit issued by ADC to the buyer for any returned Product found to be Out of Warranty.  
ADC will credit buyer eighty percent (80%) of Product price charged for any In  
Warranty Product under the Program terms. Products must be returned within thirty (30)  
days to be eligible for any advance replacement credit. If repairs necessitate a field visit  
by an ADC representative, customer authorization (purchase order) must be obtained  
prior to dispatching a representative, ADC will charge the current price of a field visit  
plus round trip transportation charges from Minneapolis to the customer’s site.  
.4.  
REPLACEMENT/SPARE PRODUCTS  
Replacement parts, including but not limited to button caps and lenses, lamps, fuses,  
and patch cords, are available from ADC on a special order basis. Contact the NSD  
Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891, extension 54878 (in U.S.A. or  
Canada) or 972-680-4878 (outside U.S.A. and Canada) for additional information.  
Spare Products and accessories can be purchased from ADC. Contact Sales  
Administration at 1-800-366-3891, extension 63748 (in U.S.A. or Canada) or 612-946-  
3748 (outside U.S.A. and Canada) for a price quote and to place your order.  
.5.  
RETURNED MATERIAL  
Contact the ADC Product Return Department at 1-800-366-3891, extension 63748 (in  
U.S.A. or Canada) or 1-952-946-3748 (outside U.S.A. and Canada) to obtain a Return  
Material Authorization number prior to returning an ADC Product.  
All returned Products must have a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number  
clearly marked on the outside of the package. The Return Material Authorization  
number is valid for thirty (30) days from authorization.  
Page 3-2  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1152700 Issue 1 • February 2001 • Section 3: General Information  
.6.  
CUSTOMER INFORMATION AND ASSISTANCE  
For customers wanting information on ADC products or help in using them, ADC  
offers the services listed below. To obtain any of these services by telephone, first  
dial the central ADC telephone number, then dial the extension provided below.  
The central number for calls originating in the U.S.A. or Canada is 1-800-366-3891.  
For calls originating outside the U.S.A. or Canada, dial country code “1” then dial  
952-946-3000.  
Sales Assistance  
Extension 3000  
• Quotation Proposals  
• Ordering and Delivery  
• General Product Information  
Systems Integration  
Extension 63000  
• Complete Solutions (from Concept to Installation)  
• Network Design and Integration Testing  
• System Turn-Up and Testing  
• Network Monitoring (Upstream or Downstream)  
• Power Monitoring and Remote Surveillance  
• Service/Maintenance Agreements  
• Systems Operation  
BATG Technical Assistance  
Center  
Extension 54878  
• Technical Information  
• System/Network Configuration  
• Product Specification and Application  
• Training (Product-Specific)  
E-Mail: batgtac@adc.com  
• Installation and Operation Assistance  
• Troubleshooting and Repair/Field Assistance  
972-680-4878  
Product Return Department  
Extension 63748  
• ADC Return Authorization number and instructions must  
be obtained before returning products.  
E-Mail: repair&return@adc.com  
Product information may also be obtained using the ADC web site at www.adc.com or  
by writing ADC Telecommunications, Inc., P.O. Box 1101, Minneapolis, MN 55440-  
1101, U.S.A.  
Contents herein are current as of the date of publication. ADC reserves the right to change the contents without prior  
notice. In no event shall ADC be liable for any damages resulting from loss of data, loss of use, or loss of profits  
and ADC further disclaims any and all liability for indirect, incidental, special, consequential or other similar  
damages. This disclaimer of liability applies to all products, publications and services during and after the  
warranty period.  
This publication may be verified at any time by contacting ADC’s Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891,  
extension 54878 (in U.S.A. or Canada) or 972-680-3223 (outside U.S.A. and Canada), or by writing to ADC Telecommunications,  
Inc., Attn: Technical Assistance Center, Mail Station #77, P.O. Box 1101, Minneapolis, MN 55440-1101, U.S.A.  
© 2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
All Rights Reserved  
Printed in U.S.A.  
Page 3-3  
2000, ADC Telecommunications, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Acesonic Karaoke Machine KOD 800 User Manual
Aiwa CD Player XR M35 User Manual
Aiwa Speaker System UZ US501 User Manual
Akai Camcorder RMD V3104U User Manual
Alpine Car Stereo System 68 14470Z98 A User Manual
Amana Range Arc 515 User Manual
American Standard Outdoor Shower T00050X User Manual
Axion Lawn Mower CZT2142 User Manual
Bakers Pride Oven Oven Y 600 DSP User Manual
Beko Refrigerator GNE V422 X User Manual